Home

Agilent Technologies Water Dispenser 856290216 User's Manual

Contents

1. 6 5 1 52 sampler os etes uro ES EUER LIE EE USC S d 6 5 6 6 W33 second EO drive coax 81 6 5 6 8 6 2 Major Assembly and Cable Locations CADIS gustu LEE ue ue PE Nc E e Rei a Figure W34 first LO Samp coax 0 6 5 6 6 6 8 W35 int Second IF coax 92 6 5 6 8 W36 ext Second IF coax 86 Deleted in Option 2 6 5 W37 10 MHz ref 1 coax 85 __ 6 5 6 6 W38 semirigid coax AIIJ2 to _ 6 8 W39 semirigid coax A7J2 A8J3 _ 6 8 W40 cal out Coax 89 _ 6 5 WA semirigid coax front panel J1 to A9J1 6 7 W42 semirigid coax 7 5 to front panel 74 eee 6 8 W43 semirigid coax A9J2 to A10J3 6 8 W44 semirigid coax A10J2 to FL1J1 eee 6 8 W45 semirigid coax FL1J2 to 8 1___ 6 8 W46 semirigid coax A7J3 to 10 4 _ 6 8 W48 first IF high band 6 8 W49 OCXO 10 MHz out coax 82 __ 6 5 W50 OCXO power part of A21 OCXO assembly
2. 6 5 0 tottoni 2 poaceveerszsunseeceasnam evaveorsanasvevevodproponsaacseeececcescece ectrreceosssosovosfoiopessossprosoraasetosv 7 Fi X b a e sfa 95 5 gt e je e a m bot c o H 7 a 2 a H a 2 3 4 peposaveroeoooeeeo 9 dpteececesocsattegoonorrneceeecoeveeecossin actovacacsocccsesevrrouvoonnansasaseses ups pacocoveepsunacagbuscanseceteveccacecaonodoe oeveececoozosceossdbezoceospscopooaseetenen 4 H 4 H H p 2 d H gs H geecolfeooneessoo suunaanossonosoovoveeoecodsruuuihasessasobp pP Eoneeosvqvevenessaeom moves wasssott ooorppopuuasasaahas0090acopomosaadi bteopsnunuaaaassaeaAnesopopaaeaosvevveenveenduaaaoneaqosco oszaqeqoqosepoeoosopspon 4 H 2 2 4 4 3 2 mae esto eu rsnaao soit Tora eaa hm 4999 unuuuuaacaesas 9P9PRASGO42APRAOUUN NTENPOPEARATAOR ODOVPESRSATATAA TOCPEEBRERRARERAGRAAOQUVUEEEARARAZAAAQOT UV UNNNAREESGAPARAAA00 1 4 HI H 9 H H H H
3. sew 300 MHz 2 MHz 2 On the HP 85623 press and measure the signal power at the output of A7 see item 1 of Figure 12 3 3 If the output power is low the output voltage of A14U429B at A14J18 pin 14 item 2 of Figure 12 3 should be above O V If the output power is high the voltage should be more negative than 10 V If the voltages do not measure as indicated check that the voltages at A14J18 pins 5 and 13 item 4 are consistent with the operational amplifier output Note If a TAM is available use Manual Probe Troubleshooting to make measurements on 14 18 pins 5 13 and 14 These voltages are referred to as AMP CNTL LO SENSE and PIN ATTEN respectively 4 If the voltages measure as indicated in step 3 measure the All YTO output See item 3 of Figure 12 3 5 If all measurements are within limits refer to 7 LO Distribution Amplifier in this chapter RF Section 12 1 1 A7 1STLO DISTRIBUTION All AMPL IF IER SAMPLER OUT 9 TO 2 dBm YTO 42 TO 13 dBm yo ao d BAND 13 TO 16 dBm i v TD LO BAND 13 TO 16 dBm J5 1ST LO OUT 14 5 TO 18 5 dBm A7J3 FOR HP 8561E L o a m SCHEMAT C um oue ORO ES X Om Xe mA de AS V INCREASES P O Al4 FREQUENCY A7 OUTPUT INCREASES CONTROL VOLTAGE 1 TO
4. Note Before performing any adjustments allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for at least 5 minutes Adjustment Procedures 2 1 Safety Considerations Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety standards this manual contains information cautions and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operation and to prevent damage to the instrument Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualified service personnel Warning Adjustments in this section are performed with power supplied to the instrument and protective covers removed There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can if contacted cause personal injury Be extremely careful Adjustments should be performed only by trained service personnel m Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in the off position Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board remove the line power cord m Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of supply Use a nonmetallic adjustment tool whenever possible Which Adjustments Should Be Performed Table 2 1 lists the manual adjustments that should be performed when an assembly is repaired or changed It is important to perform the adjustments in the order indicated to ensure that the instrument meets its specifications Test E
5. 2 2 Which Adjustments Should Be Performed 152 8 5 Xe our cu dE EP Ae inu 2 2 Test Equipment bosco d 2 2 Adjustable and Factory Selected 2 2 Adjustment 0 8 2 3 Instrument Service Position 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 Ume the TAM e ee ve oe 2 9 Eest Equipment e u 2 So 2 9 Adjustment s 2 9 Front End Cal adjustment TP 2 12 1 High Voltage Power iid Adjustment 2 13 2 Display Adjustment up 2 15 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 21 4 IF Amplitude Adjustments 0 a 2 26 5 DC Log Amplifier Adjustments 20 0 2 30 6 Sampling Oscillator Adjustment css 2 34 7 YTO Adjustment JT 2 91 8 LO Distribution Amplifier 2 40 9 Frequency Response Adjustment 2 49 10 Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment T 2 47 11 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO Non Option 103 hob Joss ses 2 48 12 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO Option 103 2 51 13 Demodulator Adjustment v 2 09 14 External Mixer Bias Adjustment Non Option 327 p ues ute e 2 56 15 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Non Option 327 2 57 Contents l 16 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM 17 16 MHz PLL Adjustmen
6. FROM BLOCK F BLOCK H BLOCK H 10 MHz 300 MHz DIST AMP FRAC_N_REF DISTRIBUTION 503 J502 MS6 7V PIN SWITCH A TP502 410dBm AMP 5 7 J502 MS7 3V approx DRIVERS FLATNESS Y 4dBm A e gt lt ppro COMPENSAT ION 2 300 MHz 15dBm CONTROL AGC AMP C 1602 92 157 TP505 24 0 2 DIFFERENCE 5dBM w AMPL DOUBLER DISTRIB 600 MHz R TRIPLER 300 MHz SON DISTRIBUTION TP700 A 3dBm 600 MHz 100 MHz VCXO 100 MHz 300 MHz DISTRIBUTION 100 MHz 300 MHz FROM BLOCK AE A J200 MS 1 A J200 MS2 J200 MS3 14V C J400 MS4 OFFSET LOCK 6 13 14 14V J OFFSET LOCK OFFSET LOCK SAMPLER OFFSET LOCK LOOP LOOP SWITCHED ES AO DEAE ERES LOOP B W AA LPF LOCK LOOP DRIVE BUFFER 285 S DRIVE BUFFER Popp RECITA FILTER DETECTOR CONTROL INTEGRATOR 297 BUFFER a gt gt m ae MHz e 8dBm rem TP405 I mu aw TP202 FROM BLOCK H OFFSET LOCK REF DIVIDE CHAIN FROM BLOCK AE i lI 56 J 4 4602 MS2 10 3V MS5 8 5V y J400 MS1 4 J400 MS3 SAMPLER A15U100 FLATNESS COMPENSAT ON AMPLIFIERS TO BLOCK H U905 PIN 12 REDIRB BLOCK BLOCK H F ROM SAMF
7. 42cm P Yes mA tesoros AUTO MadeobandSAdtDy sawed dt o dE as oes AUTO Log wa UE PSU SI SIUE SR eed 10 dB DIV 2 If the spectrum analyzer does not meet the conditions in steps a through e below the positive and negative peak detectors are probably faulty Continue with step 3 to check the detectors a The peak to peak deviation of the noise in NORMAL detector mode should be two divisions Press TRACE CLE ITE B TRACE A MORE 1 of 3 and DETECTOR MODES ETECTOR POS PEAK mode c Confirm that the noise is about one third division peak to peak The noise should also be no higher than the top of the noise level in NORMAL detector mode d Select DETECTOR NEG PEAK mode The noise should be about one third of a division peak to peak The noise should also be no lower than the bottom of the noise in NORMAL mode e Select SAMPLE mode Check that the noise appears between the top and bottom of the noise in NORMAL mode 3 On the spectrum analyzer connect the front panel CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 502 and set the controls to the following settings Center Hequelicy 22 sade eRe eee VO Sa oe 300 MHz SAN free ears 0 Hz UMC Use Ed het d e E p eua qu des 55 Detector mode E E EI dde POS PEAK 4 Monitor
8. a ed stb 0 Hz Reference devel etat iria des ed bed Debs S iret 40 dBm Resolution bandwidth 322299 3222324 1 adve e ERU ER SEDES kHz Videobafdwidtl BRO EE 300 Hz 50ms o rare tbe dite eee Pe ira d M eee Adjustment Procedures 2 19 2 Display Adjustment 23 26 27 29 30 3L 32 33 34 30 36 37 38 Press 0 E R REF LYL If the marker is not at the top graticule press MARKER REF 274 4 again Press SAVE SAVE STATE and STATE 0 Set the sweep time to 10 ms Adjust A2R209 SWEEP OFFSET to place the beginning of the trace at the leftmost vertical graticule line Adjust A2R271 SWEEP GAIN to place the end of the trace at the tenth vertical graticule line one division from the right edge of the graticule Press AMPLITUDE and press the 1 key seven times Press SAVE SAVE STATE and STATE 2 Set the sweep time to 50 ms Press SAVE SAVE STATE and STATE 3 Switch between STATE 1 and STATE 2 Adjust A2R268 and A2R218 so that the trace in state 1 is lined up with the top line of the graticule and the state 2 trace is lined up with the eighth graticule down from the top counting the top line Repeat until the traces align to within f0 2 divisions Adjust A2R209 and A2R271 until the start of sweep is aligned to the leftmost vertical graticule line and the
9. DAC All YTO r A7 SWITCHED LO 015 AMPLIFIER A15 RF ASSEMBLY J101 OFFSET PLL 4303 c xz DRIVERS 17 dBm J3 123 8 TEST d W10 POSITION Cc ap b e 4501 FRAC PLL 1 J301 J304 FRAC N TEST APPROX 10 dBm 60 TO 96 MHz W32 GRAY VIOLET SAMPLER IF 10 TO 5 dBm 60 TO 96 MHz WHEN LOCKED SAME AS FRACTIONAL N FREQ 10 MHz APPROX OdBm w37 GRAY GREEN 1121 1 45 14 5 TO 18 5 dBm 1ST LO OUT TO FRONT PANEL J2 13 TO 16 dBm LOW BAND MIXER OUT TO 8 J3 13 TO 16 dBm HIGH BAND MIXER OUT TO A10 14 9 TO 2 dBm 3 TO 6 8 GHz SAMPLER OUT TO A15 600 MHz APPROX 0 dBm w34 BLACK TO AI3 SECOND CONVERTER 7701 ai EMEND ee lt gt U100 MHz REF e PLL eee s QUEE 10 MHz TCXO r 103 4305 w49 00501 DELETED IN OPT 103 Figure 1 1 10 Simplified Synthesizer Section Synthesizer Section 11 47 J501 SAMPLER IF FROM AI5 10 TO 5 dBm ENS P T P P O 14 FREQUENCY CONTROL pem LOOP YTO LOOP ERROR TO FM COIL DRIVER 1 56 MHz V 60 TO 96 MHz EP eee ees mm P 10 MHz A14J301 REF1 FROM
10. cate eat ees Reference level 10 dBm ai FORAS MEN fe ote ee Artie ct eae a eae ons 1 dB DIV Resolution bandwidth WTCC 300 kHz Set up an HP 3335 as follows 15 MHz AMPIE ayy 18dBm CL j iD IF STATE waitfor analyzer to complete adjustments then press Adjust A4R445 for maximum on screen amplitude Refer to Figure 2 10 for the location of A4R445 A4 Linear Fidelity Adjustment Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 2 9 See Figure 2 10 for adjustment location Connect the HP 3335A 50 9 output to the spectrum analyzer 50 Q input Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Press PRESET AMPLITUDE LINEAR MORE 1 of 3 AMPTD UNITS dBm CAL IF ADJ ON OFF OFF Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center TIeqUeHcV auda eo dep XM PP ee M TE EPIS IE 15 MHz Ww ge TM ECHTE 5 MHz Resolution bandwidth Dele gendo S denied 300 kHz Reference Ievelo 10 dBm Set up an HP 33354 as follows Frequency Amplitude Press PEAK SEARCH MARKER Reduce the HP 3335A input power to
11. 4qeeobops peeectaon tiir didi Lii dide itr d 0000 94 44 iota r soe ik a a aG 1 i i 0000000 vevpppppuuune n gt teter 44 lt M Mm 4 250 000 ns 0 00000 65 250 000 ns 50 0 ns div 4 f 40 00 Figure 12 6 10 MHz Reference at A15J302 RF Section 12 21 p stopped prasnevteseepesacesoo y e epvenasaeqoosesenss NND 0004 ME 1 1 0 0 V d i y 10 MHz TTL Reference at 03504 Pin 13 offset 2 000 wv a H gt PPPRAUUROBS PPPPPARAROPG PPPPPEPEREAZAGAMONE 4 t H t H a a H H FH a LI a 2 a H 1 H ree Ae
12. clamp integrator integrator VCO clamp clamp 7 clamp troubleshooting 2131 0132 and the associated components should limit the tune voltage at R240 to about fll V If the integrator its output voltage is on TP13 tries to produce a voltage outside this range excess current is shunted through and Q131 for positive excursions or CRI32 and QI32 for negative excursions The bases of these transistors should be at about f9 6 V for proper operation 8 VCO troubleshooting Check the dc biases in the VCO function block The bias voltages for some points in the VCO are indicated in Figure 11 8 9 Divider and integrator troubleshooting Measure the frequency of the pulses at TP6 in block AO Look up the expected problem area in Table 11 12 and go to the appropriate troubleshooting steps Synthesizer Section 11 33 240001 1789 4624 AS L 99 9624 AOL 789 6604 AS 1789 52 a p OSNL jA uo yurod si 0 2 12558uuo53 07 1 2924 SSOHOV dOYG n dpec 9 052 98v 0 vYSh 406 lt on B lO 9714 1913 9 61 6 cH 6 19 0924 S INL 6 19 M4OLORnONI dS ci VA 662 6728 4 1 654 GC61 5 3N ucg G S AZ 0 y vA 191274 1805190 0713855 YANNI ACISNI YOLVITIOSO GATIOYLNOO ADVLIOA 9 LY doast 7713 VA
13. 4 DELETED IN PANEL VIDEO OUTPUT INTERFACE re _ Lf OPTION 327 J601 BLANKING OUTPUT J6 2 lt 2 CONTROL CABLE J8 50 TO FROM A4 AS A14 15 TO A14J7 Lo swe 0 5V GHz OUTPUT om 2 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY x 5 f EARPHONE 2 6 2 DII 19 mel sl Ee kya le iu SHEET 6 iw J2 2 ASSEMBLY pc 40 CONTROL ru W53 FREGENGN COUNTER J7 EU FREQ COUNTER 0 5 VIDEO r 11 Douce MODULE 4 DISPLAY DISPLAY E ASM 10 MHz FREQENCY COUNTER 48 MEMORY J3 W7 DISPLAY GENERATORS D Tq Mee s CABLE TO 1741 i INTENSITY SHEET 6 w59 FOCUS CONTROL 19 J10 EDE COCK 2ND IF OUTPUT Y EN TO A15J803 oy ERA m i Gees A16 FADC ps J9 a4 ON 007 Io Mhz REF C Ce 10 MHz REF IN OUT IN OUT TO L E gt A15J301 41 42 FADC CONTROL SHEETS 1 THRU 4 FIGURE 7 7 HP 8562E OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET 2 OF 3 HP 8562E HP 8562E OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET 3 OF 3 LINE NEUTRAL DISPLAY CABLE FROM A2J3 SHEET 5 51124 FLA LINE MODULE LINE CORD J4 6 J5 4 J5 3 A6 POWER SUPPLY J2 2 WARN I NG DISPLAY CABLE LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLIES 18 V CRT SUP
14. VNPT 1 V div 2 If a 4 Vp p signal is not observed the A2 controller assembly is faulty 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 with the oscilloscope probe on A2J202 pin 14 4 Set the oscilloscope to the following settings Seep UMS E 1 2 V div 5 Connect the positive probe lead to A2J202 15 This is the blanking output Display Power Supply Section 13 7 6 TTL level pulses should be observed If the signal is either always high or always low the display will be blanked suspect the A2 controller assembly 7 If the signals 2202 pins 3 14 and 15 are correct troubleshoot the AI7 CRT driver Display Distortion The HP 85623 spectrum analyzer uses a vector display The graticule lines traces and characters are composed of a series of straight lines vectors placed end to end If the vectors do not begin and end at the proper points the display appears distorted but in focus Symptoms range from characters appearing elongated and graticule lines not meeting squarely to an entirely unreadable display l 10 11 If the spectrum analyzer is in external frequency reference mode an X is displayed along the left side of the display ensure that an external 10 MHz reference is supplied Otherwise the 16 MHz CPU clock will be off frequency causing distortion Use the CRT ADJ PATTERN to check for distortion Press CAL MORE 1 OF 2 an
15. 5V J401 20 HBKT_PULSE J401 33 HDPKD_PULSE al START STOP lt DM LADC_IRQ HBADC _J ADC ASM J401 31 CLOCK 1 J400 J400 Wise 9 MS1 H TRIGGER V1DEO GAT ING HBADC_CLK 0 PROGRAMABLE EXT TRIG SCANLTCH_RES ARRAY LOGIC 4500 V EXT TRIG VIDEO TRIG SHEET 5 gt BD 0 5 LWRCLK 4 5 0 7 HBADC CLK 0 TIMER HsTART sRc 800 7 HBUCKET STATE 8 DECISION MACH I NE CONTROL CONTROL BITS L BITS OUT cules a m HSCAN SWP SELECI ADDRESS DECOD NG DEMULT IPLEX ING 1 0 10 11 J104 gt VIDEO ENABLE TO SHEET 5 FIGURE 8 2 le ADC REGISTERS BLANKING OUTPUT CONTROL i 8 status l 30 133 5 9 gt gt 42 50 gt gt J401 35 gt gt J601 7 I m m CHIP ENABLE 16 LINES STROBE T CHIP CONTROL 7 ENABLE LINES INTERFACE ASSEMBLY BLOCK DIAGRAM HP 8560 E SERIES FAST ADC OPTION 007 BLOCK DIAGRAM sl137e P O A3 INTERFACE ASSEMBLY 4105 J105 MS 1 MS2 ee BUFFERL J102 j DEO 0 UT Hs TP9 E 1101 vno MUX TF i 2 2 ANALOG BUS VIDEO NPUT 2 072202 FILTER lt FROM A2J15 I posi tive IN DETECTOR TP16
16. 18 CRT Procedure 3 1 1 Keyboard Front Panel Keys Procedure 4 A1A2 RPG Procedure 5 A2 A3 A4 and A5 Assemblies Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly Procedure 7 A6A1 High Voltage Assembly Procedure 8 A7 through AI3 Assemblies A7 First LO Distribution Amplifier 8 Low Band Mixer A9 Input Attenuator 10 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM All YTO Al3 Second Converter Procedure 9 Al4 and Al5 Assemblies Procedure 10 Al6 Fast ADC and 7 CRT Driver Procedure 11 B1 Fan Procedure 12 BT1 Battery Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable Procedure 15 EEROM A2U501 Procedure 16 A21 OCXO Non Option 103 Tools required to perform the procedures are listed in Table 4 The words right and left are used throughout the replacement procedures to indicate the side of the spectrum analyzer as viewed from the front panel Numbers in parentheses are used throughout the replacement procedures to indicate numerical callouts on the figures Caution The spectrum analyzer contains static sensitive components Read the section entitled Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 General Information Assembly Replacement 4 1 Access to Internal Assemblies Servicing the HP 85623 requires the removal of the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and folding down six board assemblies Four of these assemblies lay flat along the top of the spectrum analyzer and two lay flat along the bottom of the spectr
17. je ei A10 PULSE e I R LW STEP PLL1 6 e AB BID1 60 e BIDO BID3 e BID2 BID5 je e BID4 BID7 e BID6 lA7 e IAS e A5 lA4 ie 2 JAO e A1 REAR PANEL J2 D105 e 1 D106 e 2 D107 e 3 D108 e 4 REN 5 D GND e 6 GND e 7 D GND e 8 D GND e 3 D GND e 10 D GND e 11 D GND e 12 Figure 7 2 Ribbon Cable Connections 2 of 2 General Troubleshooting 7 5 Service Cal Data Softkey Menus The jumper on A2J12 is shipped from the factory in the WR PROT write protect position jumper on pins 2 and 3 When the jumper is set to the WR ENA write enable position jumper on pins 1 and 2 an additional service cal data menu is displayed under CAL Figure 7 3 illustrates those areas of the service cal data menu that are available 7 6 General Troubleshooting CRT ADJ PATTERN FREQ DIAGNOSE REAL I GN LO amp IF IF ADJ ON OFF ADJ CURR IF STATE FULL IF ADJ REF LVL SERVICE ADJ CAL DATA MORE MORE 1 OF 2 2 OF 2 CAL SRO IF AMP LO LEVELS PRESEL ADJ FLATNESS STORE DATA COPY EEROM YES PRESEL ADJ key and the associated menu apply to the HP8561E HP8S63E only T BAND 1 MXR BIAS key applies to HP8561 E only Figure 7 3 Service Cal Data Menu CAL AMP GAIN EXT MXR REF CAL FLATNESS DATA NEXT BAND CAL LO FREQ SAMPLER FREO SAMPLER HARMONIC FRAC N FREQ
18. 0 4 AUS CRI pt 6 4 Major Assembly and Cable Locations 6 1 Xr irl EE Figure 6 4 A20 Battery x racer ssm eme LPEREPRSIDERUNSEIGEREPPHIS N PP 6 9 VINO D C dacs de beech cred te Snel oe 6 4 BEIO ee 6 9 lo 6 9 FLI edere rb cit tama 6 8 IgM MEE 6 8 FL3 NOT ASSIGNED E MUMS e 6 9 XI SA 6 4 6 7 Canes Figure ATATWI Kkeyboakd Cablec ks eat Det tet Ld 6 2 6 4 ASWI err bp fu pui I LU D E nar 6 2 A19W1 HP IB cable 6 2 6 4 NI power Cable 3251350452 bdo dad 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 W2 control cable 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Wo Tine Swich cable 6 4 6 8 W4 option module cable 6 4 WS TTC 6 7 W6 battery cable part of A20 batt
19. i i pu CONTROL PLL 60 96 MHz CO SCAN GEN lt e 13 2ND CONV 310 7 MHz A15 RF ASSEMBLY Z OFESET PEL 285 297 MHz 2ND IF OUTPUT l a A1A1 2771 AS F 44 LOG AMPL IF LER 10 MHz REF UN OUT REF PLL 600 MHz 10 MHz 10 MHz 4 300 MHz 418 OPTION 00 L E VIDEO t CONTROL CABLE TO A4 A5 A14 A1 BT 1 REAR PANEL p el EARPHONE DELETED 103 OPT 103 ONLY L Z 7 INTERFACE 5 pcd HPIB ee ad ee CONTROLLER CRT FIGURE 7 6 DRIVER W1 POWER CABLE TO A2 A3 A4 A5 A14 A15 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOT NG B1 FAN HP 8562E SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM HP 8562E 8562E OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET 1 OF 3 A10 YIG TUNED FILTER 1 IMIXER RYTHM 000 NA J1 J2 43 J3 INPUT 500 gt gt lt C gt RF IN 42 50 Hz 13 2 GHz i 30 Hz E en am mm ab 2 i W16 CONTROL FROM A14J6 3 0 20 6 81 GHz BIAS AND CONTROL FROM A14J9 1ST LO J4 OUTPUT Q TERMINATION ds LO IN i 3 J3 W36 TO pe gt lt 122 we gt aus Qi P 52 A1W1 FROM A1A1J3 5 SHEET 5 BIAS AND CONTROL FROM A14J10 10
20. tq Dnooaoag og D SK113 Figure 2 18 Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Setup Equipment Measurin Teceiver Sg ext ta sup ard HP 8902A POW CE HP 8482A Adapters Type d a RR B RC 1250 1477 Procedure Note The spectrum analyzer should be allowed to warm up for at least 30 minutes before performing this adjustment 1 Place the spectrum analyzer in the service position shown in Figure 2 18 Prop the Al4 frequency control board assembly in the service position 2 Zero and calibrate the HP 8902A HP 8482A combination in log display mode Enter the power sensor 300 MHz cal factor into the HP 8902A 3 Connect the HP 8482A through an adapter directly to the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT connector 4 Adjust A15R561 CAL AMPTD for a 10 00 dBm reading on the HP 8902A display Adjustment Procedures 2 47 11 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO Non Option 103 Assembly Adjusted A2 OCXO assembly Note Replacement oscillators are factory adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specified aging rate has been achieved Thus readjustment should typically not be necessary after oscillator replacement and is generally not recommended Related Performance Test 10 MHz Reference Accuracy Description The frequency of the internal 10 MHz frequency reference is compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error T
21. 18 2 18 1 A18WI A19 A19WI1 A20 21 Standard Bl BT 1 F1 F1 FLI FL2 FL3 FLA LS1 3 Assembly HP Part Number 08563 60030 08563 60101 5062 7095 5041 3987 2090 0225 08562 60042 5061 9031 3062 1755 5063 0245 5061 9036 1420 0341 2110 0709 2110 0756 0955 0703 0955 0519 5061 9032 9160 0282 5021 6723 5021 6724 0515 2080 0515 1486 0905 0375 2190 0503 5 10 Replaceable Parts Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued Description FAST ADC ASSEMBLY CRT DRIVER ASSEMBLY CRT ASSEMBLY Order by Individual Parts CRT WIRING ASSEM Includes Shield A18L1 and A18W1 SPACER CRT TUBE CRT 60 7 IN CABLE ASSEMBLY TWO WIRE TRACE ALIGN P O 18 A17J5 1811 HP IB ASSEMBLY CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON HP IB A2J5 to Rear Panel J2 BATTERY ASSY Includes W6 OCXO 10 0 MHz FAN ASSEMBLY Includes Wire BATTERY 3 0 V 1 2 A HR LITHIUM POLYCARBON MONOFLORIDE THIONYL FUSE 5A 250V NTD FE IEC 230 VAC Operation FUSE 5A 125V NTD UL 115 VAC Operation LOW PASS FILTER LOW PASS FILTER 4 4 GHz NOT ASSIGNED LINE FILTER ASSEMBLY LOUDSPEAKER 2 5 IN SQ Part of W5 CHASSIS MECHANICAL PARTS See Figure 5 through Figure 5 6 for a complete listing of mechanical chassis parts ASSEMBLY SHIELDS PEAK DETECTOR TOP DETECTOR BOTTOM SCREW M2 5 141 10 SCREW 2 5 9 5L 12 D RING 0701D 12 WSHR LK M2 5ID 28480
22. 6 5 W51 10 MHz in coax 84 occ ee 6 3 6 5 W52 cal oscillator out coax 9 iussisse n 6 4 W53 frequency counter coax 1 _ 6 2 6 3 Woe VIDEO COR Loses ha wre 6 2 6 3 NY 6 3 6 4 W56 semirigid coax A8J2 to FL2J1 6 8 W57 semirigid coax FL2J2 to A13J1 _ 6 8 Wos ropert nace aided ee er M 6 6 Major Assembly and Cable Locations 6 3 Al4 Oeorooga HHH oma 15 2 SK155 W20 BLUE TO A2 IN NON OPTION 007 TO Al6 IN OPTION 007 W24 GREEN w54 RED 1 W25 YELLOW W23 W2 WHITE ORANGE W7 A3W1 W20 BLUE ENT NON OPTION 007 w22 SIDE BLACK 19 1 W6 w53 GRAY ORANGE WHITE 007 sjllle Figure 6 2 Top View A2 Unfolded 6 4 Major Assembly and Cable Locations W2 W52 55 W1 WA 4 A4 w55 SK157 Figure 6 3 Top View A2 and A3 Unfolded Major Assembly and Cable Locations 6 5 W27 ORANGE W 1 5 52 WHITE A19W 1 W2 w29 VIOLET ATA1W1 A19 6 Ww W8 w4 AGA 1 W9 A21 17 W55 LS1 18 16 OPTION 007 SPTTOE Figure 6 4 Top View A2 A3 A4 and A5 Unfolded 6 6 Major Assembly and Cable Locations ui 2 D e 8 Hu Pb s WAO e ie w34
23. 8 low band mixer A9 input attenuator 10 YIG tuned filter mixer RYTHM All YTO YIG tuned oscillator A 3 second converter Al4 frequency control assembly also in synthesizer section 15 RF assembly also in synthesizer section FL1 FL2 low pass filters The RF section converts all input signals to a fixed IF of 10 7 MHz The RF section microcircuits are controlled by signals from the Al4 frequency control and 15 RF assemblies A Emm imm Emm 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz Bands L throueh a CRINE Ende Mos 2 75 to 13 2 GHz Band uses triple conversion to produce the 10 7 MHz IF and a fourth conversion used only in the digital resolution bandwidths X100 Hz 8 low band mixer up converts the RF input to a first IF of 3 9107 GHz AI3 second converter down converts the 3 9107 GHz IF to an IF of 310 7 MHz A third conversion on the AIS RF assembly down converts the second IF to the 10 7 MHz third IF A fourth conversion on the A4 log amplifier assembly down converts the third IF to the 4 8 kHz fourth IF used only in the digital resolution bandwidths X100 Hz Bands 1 and 2 use double conversion A third conversion is used for the digital resolution bandwidths lt 100 Hz A10 YIG tuned filter mixer RYTHM down converts the RF input to first IF of 310 7 MHz Although this IF passes through AI3 second converter it bypasses the second mixer The second conversion on the 15 RF asse
24. c UK t tO ta C 4 oo A A A KN HH KS N BW r2 HK A PV x 5 18 Replaceable Parts Parts List Main Chassis Number D Code Number P O A18MPI 0515 2145 SCREW MACH M3 X 8MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2145 3 0515 1715 9 SCREW MACH M3 X 35MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 1715 4 0380 2052 2 SPACER 937LG 166ID 0380 2052 5 5002 1010 5 COVER A6 POWER SUPPLY Includes label 5002 1010 6 0515 2309 8 SCREW MACH M3 X 0 5 45MM LG TORX 0515 2309 7 5041 7246 3 BOARD MOUNT 5041 7246 8 0515 0372 2 SCREW MACH M3 X 8MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 0372 9 5041 8961 COVER AI7 5041 8961 5021 5486 7 CRT MOUNT 5021 5486 5001 5870 1 CRT MOUNT STRAP 5001 5870 0515 0372 2 SCREW MACH M3 X 8MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 0372 5002 1008 1 MAIN DECK 5002 1008 5002 1002 5 FRONT END DECK 5002 1002 0515 1101 7 SCREW MACH M4 X 8MM LG FLH HD 0515 1101 0515 1227 8 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD 0515 1227 5021 7464 5 SIDE FRAME 5021 7464 0515 1101 7 SCREW MACH M4 X 8MM LG FLH HD 0515 1101 0515 1227 8 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD 0515 1227 0515 1227 8 SCREW MACH M3 X GMNM LG FLH HD 0515 1227 0515 1227 8 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD 0515 1227 5021 5484 5 MOUNTING POST 5021 5484 5062 0750 4 HINGE 2 BOARD 5062 0750 5062 0751 5 HINGE 4 BOARD 5062 0751 5041 7250 9 CABLE CLAMP 5041 7250 0515 2164 4 SCREW MACH M3 X 35MM LG TORX 0515 2164 0515 1227 8 S
25. 11 12 13 14 Disconnect W26 from A3J101 and W20 from A2J4 Connect W26 to A2J4 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings SPA 0 Hz cM UNC CT 20ms Resolution bandwidth 1 MHz uiris inepte 10 dB DIV If a trace is displayed troubleshoot A3 assembly If a trace is absent connect an oscilloscope to the rear panel BLKG GATE OUTPUT The presence of a TTL signal TTL low during 20 ms sweep indicates a good A3 Interface Assembly Troubleshoot the IF section If the BLKG GATE OUTPUT is always at a TTL high or low troubleshoot the A3 trigger Video gating circuits Reconnect W26 to A3J101 and W20 to A2J4 Remove the A3 assembly shield If the video filters appear to be faulty refer to Video Filter in this chapter 10 If there appears to be a peak detector problem refer to Positive Negative Peak Detectors in this chapter Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 5022 and set the controls as follows eon GE CU METER ETT 300 MHz Spal at duse Qiu veros on deo te a seite ducet qd 0 Hz Reference level See ay ake coe oe ne Core ey Pe ee eee 10dBm If the spectrum analyzer works correctly in 5 dB div and 10 dB div but not in 1 dB div or 2 dB div
26. Connect the clip lead of the probe ground to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable to obtain a reading on the voltmeter See Figure 4 2 Keep the high voltage probe on the post accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV less than 5 V at the connector This normally takes about 30 seconds Disconnect the line power cord from the spectrum analyzer Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly slip the tip of the screwdriver under the rubber shroud of the AGA1WS post accelerator cable and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly See Figure 4 2 Remove the three screws securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield Remove the three screws securing the 1 high voltage assembly to the power supply assembly Disconnect ribbon cable A6A1W1 from A6J5 and lift the AGAT assembly out of the way See Figure 4 11 Assembly Replacement 4 21 Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly 15 Disconnect all cables from the A6 power supply assembly See Figure 4 11 16 Use a TORX screwdriver to remove the hardware from the shield wall the heatsink and the A6 power supply assembly 17 Remove the A6 power supply assembly by lifting from the regulator heatsink toward front of spectrum analyzer Replac
27. amp Al4 ANALYZER p BOARD FREQUENCY PROP DIGITAL VOLTMETER ADAPTER oadqcoo SK116 Figure 2 23 External Mixer Bias Adjustment Setup Equipment DVM 3456 Adapters Type BNC XP 10S MX Il eade 1250 1200 Type BNC f to dual banana plug 1251 2816 Cables BNG 122 48 1 suae d es eet ped b ES HP 10503A Procedure Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the ac power cord Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and connect the equipment as illustrated in Figure 2 23 Fold down the 15 RF assembly Reconnect the power cord and set the switch to on Set the HP 3456A controls as follows Pi culos ise or ee A DC VOLTS dc e Oo O IV Re Olu 3223909 5 35d 3 215 605 IESUS devi iid E m Adjust A15R926 EXT BIAS ZERO for DVM reading of 0 000 f12 5 mV 2 56 Adjustment Procedures 15 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Non Option 327 15 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Non Option 327 Assembly Adjusted 15 RF assembly Related Performance Test IF Input Amplitude Accuracy Description The slope of the flatness compensation amplifiers is determined The user loaded conversion losses for K band are recorded and reset to 30 dB A 310 7 MHz signal is applied to the power sensor and the power level of the source is adjusted for a 30 dBm reading The
28. 0955 0491 HP 11689A HP 11667B 08562 60021 8710 1010 85680 60093 HP 11500A 8120 1578 HP 10503A 8120 4921 P performance tests A adjustments M test amp adjustment module T troubleshooting V operation verification 1 14 General Information Use P V Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment continued Instrument Critical Specifications Recommendec Use for Equipment Substitution Model Cable HP IB Required w operation verification software HP 10833B P A M eight required Required w HP 85629B test amp adjustment module Length 2 m 6 6 ft Adapters Adapter N f to BNC m 1250 1477 Adapter N m to BNC f 1250 1476 P A V three required Adapter N f to BNC f 1250 1474 P V Adapter N m to N m 1250 1475 P Adapter N f to APC 3 5 m 1250 1750 A Adapter N m to APC 3 5 m 1250 1743 P M V two required Adapter Type N m to APC 3 5 f 1250 1744 Adapter Type N m to BNC m 1250 1473 P Adapter Type N m to N f 1250 1472 P 4dapter Type N f to APC 3 5 f 1250 1745 P V two required 4dapter Type N m to SMA f 1250 1250 two required 4dapter Type N f to SMA f 1250 1772 P 4dapter BNC f to BNC f 1250 0059 A 4dapter tee f m f 12560781 Adapter BNC f to SMA m 1250 1200 P A V 4dapter BNC f to dual banana plug 1251 2816 A T 4dapter 3 5 f to APC 3 5 f 5061 5311 P M V two required
29. 10 7 MHz 9 9 to 11 5 MHz in 100 kHz steps Frequency sweeps from 20 kHz to 2 kHz centered at 10 7 MHz lasting 5 to 60 ms respectively The signals perform the following functions m Adjust gains log amps and video slopes and offsets Adjust 3 dB bandwidth and center frequencies of LC resolution bandwidth filters 30 kHz through 1 MHz Adjust 3 dB bandwidth symmetry and gain of the crystal resolution bandwidth filters 300 Hz through 10 kHz The cal oscillator uses a phase locked loop PLL The oscillator function block X is locked to the instrument 10 MHz reference The reference divider function block U divides the reference and delivers a 100 kHz TTL signal to the phase detector function block V The divide by N circuitry function block Y divides the oscillator output of 9 9 MHz to 11 5 MHz by 99 to 115 resulting in a 100 kHz output to the phase detector When the cal oscillator PLL is locked narrow positive and negative of equal width pulses occur at the phase detector output Since the phase detector drives a low input impedance at the loop integrator observe the positive pulses at A4CR808 anode and negative pulses at A4CR809 cathode The loop integrator acts as a low pass filter that filters the pulses and inverts the result If the anode of A4CR808 is more positive with respect to ground than the cathode of A4CR809 is negative the loop integrator output should saturate to approximately 13 V Conversely
30. 13 4 Display Power Supply Section Connector A2J201 A2J202 A17 CRT DRIVER J4 REVISION CONNECTOR SK1121 Figure 13 2 AI7 Test Connector Revision Constant current Source Intensity input Intensity offset Blanking control 10 V reference test Switch drive test Buffered X amp Y DAC outputs X line generator test Y line generator test Intensity offset output Revision X Y amp Z output offset X output amplifier Y output amplifier Blanking test Focus DAC test Blank Display Using the TAM Use the following procedure if your spectrum analyzer has a blank display This procedure substitutes an HP IB printer for the display Table 13 3 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Measured Signal Line MS4 MS3 MS2 MS7 MS6 MSI MS 8 MSI MS3 MS4 MS7 MS7 MS3 MS4 MS2 1 Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer and set the printer address to the value required by the TAM itis usually one Do not connect any other controller to the spectrum analyzer Display Power Supply Section 13 5 e W 10 11 12 18 14 15 Move the probe cable A2J202 Press SOFT KEY All of the power supply indicator LEDs along the edge of the A2 controller assembly should be lit The rear panel CRT 110 VDC ON indicator should also be lit Connect the TAM probe cable to A2J11 The yellow LED next to A2J11 should blink approxima
31. 28480 2848C 2848C 2848C 2848C 2848C 2848C 28480 28480 38709 16428 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Mfr Part Code Number 08563 60030 08563 60101 5062 7095 5041 3987 2090 0225 08562 60042 5061 9031 5062 7755 5063 0245 5083 9036 BR 213 A 55P GDA 5 2110 0756 0955 0703 0955 0519 5061 9032 9160 0282 5021 6723 5021 6724 0515 2080 0515 1486 0905 0375 2190 0583 Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued Reference HP Part C Qty Description Mfr Designation Number D Code Number ASSEMBLY SHIELDS continued 4 Assembly 5063 0220 5 AMP 1 BOTTOM 28480 5063 0220 5063 0221 6 AMP 1 TOP 28480 5063 0221 5063 0219 2 AMP 2 TOP 28480 5063 0219 5063 0222 1 AMP 2 BOTTOM 28480 5063 0222 0515 1486 I SCREW SMM 2 5 10 PNTROX 28480 0515 1486 0515 2080 8 SCREW M2 5 14L 28480 0515 2080 2190 0583 9 WSHR LK M2 5ID 28480 2190 0583 0905 0375 2 O RING 070ID 28480 0905 0375 A5 Assembly 5021 6729 3 IF 1 TOP 28480 5021 6729 5021 6730 6 IF 1 BOTTOM 28480 5021 6730 5021 6731 7 IF 2 TOP 28480 5021 6731 5021 6732 8 IF 2 BOTTOM 28480 5021 6732 0515 2081 3 SCREW 5MM 2 5 16 PNPDS 28480 9515 2081 0905 0375 O RING 0701D 20480 0905 0375 2190 0583 9 WSHR LK M2 5ID 28480 2190 0583 A14 Assembly 5063 0209 0 FC TOP 28480 5063 0209 5063 0210 3 FC BOTTOM 28480 5063 0210
32. 4504 FRAC N TEST 10 dBm POSTSCALER OISE GENERATOR 1406 6 TO 500 MHz VCO 800 TO 1020 MHz Fractional N Divide 135 Figure 1 1 1 1 Simplified Assembly Block Diagram 11 48 Synthesizer Section W34 1ST LO SAMP 4 FROM A7 SLODA OSCILLATOR OFFSET PLL 5 1 TO 15 MHz TP407 J501 CAL OUTPUT TO FRONT PANEL m 19 dBg gt 9 dBm P O RF 15 2 CAL I BRATOR SAMPLER AGC AMP du e A15J101 A15A2J SAMPLER IF TO a 201 280 5 17 dam 298 MHz TP505 46 dBm 300 MHz MIXER TP40 1 2 TO 6 dBm 20 MHz TTL J303 10 MHz REF1TO 14 0 dBm 4304 10 MHz REF2 TO A4 0 dBm TO SIG ID OSCILLATOR 15 dBm m SRD LO DRIVER OE RN DES 5 LEVELS 600 MHz PLL 9 c c dI 600 MHz OSC 1701 600 MHz 2ND LO DRIVE 10 MHz TCXO 0 dBm OPT 103 10 MHz FROM A21 4301 10 MHz REF IN OUT O dBm OUT 2 TO 10 dBm IN 4302 10 MHz FREO COUNT A2 dBm 5 1 122 Figure 11 12 Simplified A15 Assembly Block Diagram Synthesizer Section 11 49 A21 OCXO The spectrum analyzer uses an oven controlled crystal oscillator OCXO It is deleted in Option 103 and replaced by a temperature compensated crystal oscillator TCXO located on the
33. 7 If the voltages do not meet the limits listed in steps 5 and 6 troubleshoot the Al4 frequency control assembly 8 Connect the positive DVM lead to A14J10 pin 1 12 6 RF Section 10 11 12 13 14 The measured voltage should be approximately 5 Vdc If the voltage is not 5 Vdc troubleshoot the Al4 frequency control assembly Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J18 pin 15 The voltage should measure within 10 mV of the Gate Bias voltage listed on the A7 label If this voltage is not within the correct range refer to the LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If the voltage varies between 0 Vdc and 2 Vdc adjust the Gate Bias for a DVM reading within 10 mV of the Gate Bias voltage listed on the A7 label If the voltage does not vary between 0 Vdc and 2 Vdc troubleshoot the Al4 Frequency Control Assembly Disconnect the jumper from A14J19 to A14J10 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off Reconnect W12 to 14J10 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on If the DVM reading changes significantly the A7 is probably defective A8 Low Band Mixer l 2 Connect the HP 85623 CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 509 connector Set the HP 85623 as follows Center eee eS PS d du S oe 300 MHz SPAM gears tees eh ceo oe oa 0 Hz coo icon tee Era ancien dde eo RA EAGT tte 10 dB Ch
34. AFI cannot check the display power supply section because this section powers the TAM and provides the display of AFI results Controller Check The TAM performs a check sum of all ROMs RAMs and the EEROM The CPU is also checked since parts of the CPU could be nonfunctional while the TAM still operates These checks are very similar to those done by the spectrum analyzer at power on ADC Interface Check The keyboard interface and strobe select circuitry must be functioning correctly since these are required to operate the TAM The TAM checks the ADC by attempting to measure three signals from three different locations This ensures that an open or short in one cable will not hide the fact that the ADC is operating satisfactorily The analog bus W2 control cable is checked by sending data out on the data lines and reading the data back If this check fails disconnect one board at a time and rerun AFI to determine if an assembly causes the problem If the fault remains with all assemblies disconnected from W2 troubleshoot W2 or the A3 interface assembly IF LOG Check The TAM uses the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly as the stimulus for checking the IF section If the signal is undetected the TAM repeats the test with a signal originating from the RF section Presence of this signal through the IF indicates a faulty cal oscillator 7 14 General Troubleshooting LO Control Check The LO control check verifies that all phase lock
35. Check sampler IF steps 22 28 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center Mequency quesos Ve Panda Remis 300 MHz SIE docu Sette Aes S cto E m 0 Hz Place jumper A14J23 in the TEST position Disconnect W32 from A15J101 Monitor the sampler IF output A15J101 SAMPLER IF with a synthesized spectrum analyzer such as an HP 8568A B or HP 8566A B The sampler IF should measure between 46 MHz and 86 MHz at 15 dBm to 2 dBm If the signal frequency or amplitude is incorrect refer to Unlocked Offset PLL in this chapter Set jumper A14J23 in the NORMAL position Reconnect W32 to A15J101 Check FM loop sense steps 27 34 Set jumper A14J23 in the TEST position Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Synthesizer Section 1 1 27 29 30 3 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Center Sedes dd e o Ed ED edo ed tasa d ELLE 300 MHz E e als 0 Hz Connect an RF signal generator output to A14J501 Set the signal generator to the following settings hrequeney 56 MHz ita pe dr tie dies o fedes ant 0 dBm Monitor A14J17 pin 1 with a DVM or oscilloscope Connect ground to A14J17 pin 6 As the signal generator frequency is increased to 76 MHz the voltage at 1417 pin 1 should change from approximately 12 V to 12 V Set the signal generator to t
36. Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J19 pin 15 and the negative lead to A14J19 pin 6 If the DVM does not measure between 14 0 Vdc and i 15 0 Vdc perform the following a Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect W13 from A14J12 b Press to turn spectrum analyzer on and set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings 300 MHz sc Mme 10 MHz c The voltage should measure 15 Vdc f0 2 V If the voltage measures outside this limit the Al4 frequency control assembly is probably defective d Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off Reconnect W13 to 14 12 and press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center Trediie ley 5 is dn sth dr hr 4 579 94 0 Bin ey qe 300 MBz p ber raid 0 Hz Move the positive lead of a DVM to A14J19 pin 1 The voltage should measure between 150 mVdc and 800 mVdc If the voltage measures outside this limit the AI3 Second Converter is probably defective 12 10 RF Section Al4 Frequency Control Assembly Note The block diagrams for the Al4 and 15 assemblies are located in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section LODA Drive Refer to function block Z on the Al4 Frequency Control Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 5 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 1 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center Tregunc
37. Contents 15 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 11 15 11 16 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 13 1 13 2 13 3 A l TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Center Frequency Tuning Values Sampling Oscillator Test Frequencies Sampling Oscillator PLL Divide Numbers Amplifier Polarities Voltages in FM Coil and Main Drivers Main Coil Coarse and Fine DACs Voltages Postscaler Divide Numbers Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting E Divider and Integrator Troubleshooting Sweep Signal Destination versus Span Harmonic Mixing Number versus Center Settings of Sweep Switches Settings for Switches and Comparer Automatic Fault Isolation References TAM Tests versus Test Connectors E HP 85623 Attenuator Control Truth Table Sweep Tune Multiplier Values RF Section Mnemonic Table W1 Power Cable Connections Automatic Fault Isolation References TAM Tests versus Test Connectors HP 8562 Spectrum Analyzer Documented Assemblies Contents 6 11 6 11 9 11 13 11 21 11 24 11 29 11 29 11 32 11 33 11 35 11 36 11 36 11 38 11 41 12 3 12 4 12 9 12 15 12 23 13 3 13 4 13 5 A 2 General Information This HP 562E Spectrum Analyzer Service Guide contains information required to adjust and service the HP 85623 to the assembly level Serial Numbers and Repair Information Hewlett Packard makes frequent improvements to its products to enhanc
38. Fractional SAMPLER 1 PLL t HM au om of bee a J304 10 TO 5 dBm FRAC TEST 60 TO 96 MHz APPROX 10 dBm WHEN LOCKED SAME 60 TO 96 MHz AS FRACTIONAL N FREQ sm6 14e Figure 1 1 7 Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL Synthesizer Section 1 1 25 5 Calculate the YTO frequency error by subtracting the frequency recorded in step 3 from 6 On the spectrum analyzer press MORE the frequency recorded in step 4 Record the result below YTO Frequency Error M H Z YTO Frequency Error YTO Frequency MEASURED YTO Frequency CALCULATED 1 OF 2 FREQ DIAGNOSE and FRAC IV F Record the fractional N frequency below Fractional N frequency MHz Caution Replacement of the phase frequency detector chip A14U204 is not 10 11 12 recommended The part is very delicate and requires special tooling to install successfully If the YTO frequency error recorded in step 5 is greater than 20 MHz do the following a Check the YTO Adjustments using the TAM or the procedure in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures b Check the YTO DACSs using the procedure in steps 41 through 49 below or using manual probe troubleshooting with the TAM on A14J17 and A14J18 c Refer to steps 9 through 34 below If the YTO Frequency error recorded in step 5 is less than 20 MHz do the following
39. J4 TEST JACK TP3 EXTENDED COMPONENT LEAD TP2 PADS SK163 Figure 7 1 Assembly Test Points General Troubleshooting 7 3 ev 15 LINE TRIG 45V 5V D GND D GND A GND D GND 5V 5V 15V 15v PWR UP T28V A GND 15v 15 GND SWEEP INPUT WI POWER CABLE CONNECTIONS NOTE Sweep NC NC NC A GND NC NC A GND RF GAIN NC NC NC D GND NC NC NC W2 CONTROL CABLE CONNECT TONS Res A4 A 2 D GND D7 DS D4 D2 D GND Input for the Controller o 45V 15V POWER FOR 15V 28 CONTROLLER INE TRIG 5V AND INTERFACE 5V H5V ONLY 5V 45V 5V D GND D GND D GND D GND A GND A GND DGND DGND 5V T5V 5V 5V 15V 15V 15V 15V 28V PWR UP 15V 28 1 32 15V A GND 34e A GND 15V 655 36 12 6V PROBE POWER 15V e 37 38e NC A GND 39 40 A GND SWEEP INPUT 41 42 e NC NC 645 44 42 48 X x e49 50 e 15v 15V 28V 5V 5V 5V D GND D GND A GND D GND 5VY 5V T15V 15v 28V 15V 15V A GND 12 6V PROBE POWER NC A GND NC NC A GND NC r Interface boards only Figure 7 2 Ribbon Cable Connections 1 of 2 7 4 General Troubleshooting sp149e W4 OPTION CABLE CONNECT IONS CABLE CONNECTIONS OPTION BADC
40. Manual probe troubleshooting tests several dc bias points and signal path voltages A dc bias is measured in the limiter and a fault here indicates a broken limiter stage Signal path voltages are measured at the input after the video amplifier in the linear path after the offset and gain compensation circuits in the log path and after the video offset The cal oscillator on A4 is used as an input to the log amp for the purpose of measuring gains Faults in the signal path voltages indicate broken circuitry in prior stages This technique locates dead stages but might not report slightly degraded ones Both 15 V and 15 V are measured The revision code is on J11 Troubleshooting A5 with the TAM Manual Probe Troubleshooting calculates stage bias currents which test the operation of the IF chain This technique locates dead stages but might not report slightly degraded ones DACSs that are monitored are listed below 50812 ane Gare LEM A5U813 pause Dates s SUE herd e 50809 eee fees tc ied A5U807 IBD ACS mr A5U810 yor daba A5U806 9 4 IF Section Table 9 2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Connectc Manual Probe Troubleshooting Te Measured Signal Lines A3J105 Video Input to Interface MS1 Video to Rear Panel MS2 Video MUX MS3 Log Offset Log Expand MS1 MS3 Video Filter Buffer
41. Phe dra quU d dn acea Bed durs 50ms 2 Disconnect any signal from the spectrum analyzer input A full scale display of sampled noise should be present 3 Trigger an oscilloscope on the positive going edge of HHOLD A3U506 pin 16 4 The waveform at A3TP10 should be random noise with an average level of approximately 4 V The noise should have a flat spot in its response while HHOLD 15 high indicating proper operation of 0114 ADC Interface Section 8 23 A3 Assembly ADC Circuits The ADC consists of a 12 bit DAC 12 bit successive approximation register SAR data multiplexers and data latches The ADC ASM algorithmic state machine controls the ADC Eight inputs are controlled by the ADC MUX These include a positive peak detector negative peak detector sampled video scan ramp YTO error voltage FC MUX voltages Cal Oscillator tune voltage and offset lock error voltage A MUX on the frequency control assembly selects which voltage is sent to the ADC MUX on the FC MUX signal line During NORMAL detector mode sweeps when noise is detected by the rosenfell detector the ADC ASM automatically switches between POS PEAK and NEG PEAK ADC Control Signals Refer to function blocks B and F of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The ADC requires two signals from the A2 controller assembly HBADC CLKO and HBBKT PULSE HBBKT PULSE is used only in zero span
42. a Measure the frequency at Al4J304 The frequency should be equal to the frequency recorded in step 6 If not refer to Unlocked Fractional N PLL in this chapter b Measure the input and output levels of the A15U100 sampler If the sampler appears defective check the LO drive to the sampler as described in Sampler and Sampler IF c Refer to steps 34 through 51 below Check First LO pretune frequency and amplitude steps 9 12 The pretuned frequency of the first LO must be sufficiently accurate for the YTO loop to acquire lock The amplitude of the first LO must be sufficient to drive the A15U100 sampler Perform the YTO Adjustment procedure particularly the YTO main coil adjustments If available use a synthesized microwave spectrum analyzer instead of the microwave frequency counter specified in the adjustment procedure If the YTO main coil cannot be adjusted proceed to step 33 to troubleshoot the main coil coarse and fine DACs and main coil tune DAC The front panel first LO OUTPUT should measure between 14 5 and 18 5 dBm in amplitude If the first LO OUTPUT amplitude is out of the specified range perform the first LO distribution amplifier adjustment procedure Refer to Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures 1 1 26 Synthesizer Section 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 22 23 24 29 26 27 28 Check the fractional N oscillator steps 13 17 Set the spectrum anal
43. ALE Z Trey 301 i 9001 0419 ZHAN 0001 Ol Pigs HOJ AOI OL AC 3001 9152 L eZ AC 1 2 NJAS iL sz139e Figure 11 8 VCO Bias Voltages 94 Synthesizer S Table 11 12 Divider and Integrator Troubleshooting Measured VCO TP6 Frequency Frequency Relative to Expected Value Zero 2 5 MHz 2 5 MHz Measured expected Dividers Dividers Dividers Det or integrator Measured lt expected Both Det or integrator Dividers Dividers 10 Divider troubleshooting a Check the frequency at 14 2 It should be equal to the frequency at Al4TP1 divided by two b The signal at 14 should be above 14 dBm C Use an analog oscilloscope to view the signal at Al4TP5 Adjust the scope triggering to view the divide by 16 signal The frequency at this point will be varying as the prescaler changes its divide number to either 16 17 20 or 21 The prescaler uses 16 as the divide number most frequently The frequency displayed on the oscilloscope should equal the frequency from TP2 divided by 16 d Use an oscilloscope to view the signal at pin 8 of UII2 Its average frequency should be given by f f AIATP5 x 80 MHz RAW OSC FREQ where f A14TP5 is the frequency measured at TP5 and RAW OSC FREQ comes from step 4 If the frequency is in error the fractional divider block AS is not functioning Check that FRAC RUN on UI13 pin 39 is high
44. Bit 1 ARM Arms the FADC assembly for a trigger FADC assembly armed to accept trigger from HSWP line or video trigger FADC assembly cannot be triggered 8 34 ADC Interface Section Table 8 13 Control Word at Primary Address U3 and U4 continued State Turns on X2 log expand amplifier Bit Mnemonic Bit 2 GAINX2 A16U43 turned on 5 dB div or 1 dB div scale A16U48 turned off 10 dB div 2 dB div or linear scale Bit 3 VTRIG POL Controls digital video trigger polarity Negative edge video trigger Positive edge video trigger Bit 4 LSAMPLE Enables sample detection mode Sample detection mode disabled Sample detection mode enabled Enables FADC memory for writes Bit 5 LADCEN Toggled in conjunction with bit 0 Disables FADC memory for writes Enables FADC memory for writes Bit 6 LLOADADDR Enables load address counter Writes to the address counter disabled Writes to the address counter enabled LLOADPOST Enables load post trigger counter Bit 7 Writes to the post trigger counter disabled Writes to the post trigger counter enabled LVTRIG EN Enables digital video trigger on 16 Bit 8 Digital video trigger disabled Digital video trigger enabled LREADCLK Clocks counters during 4 mode Used to load post trigger counter or address counter Also used to post increment address counter following memory read
45. D Latched IF Control Lines Negative 15 V Supply 5 v Supply 10 V Reference 9 6 IF Section 10 7 IF ASSEMBLY INPUT FROM J3 A15J601 10 7 MHz Z OdBm IF ADJ OFF IF GAIN RESOLUTION BANDW RESOLUTION BANDW OTH CAL OSC L Me rl ci MM IF ADJ OFF w54 i DISCONNECTED J4 S x 96 j e RED REN WITH COUNTER ON LINEAR BURSTS OF 5 35 MHz APPROX 10 mSEC 5 ee 4 LOG AMP CAL OSC ASSEMBLY oc UD ess ee ee ee xd W27 ORANGE SK171 Figure 9 2 IF Section Troubleshooting with the TAM Both the digital control and DACs are multiplexed onto test point channels through resistive networks One DAC from each of the quad DAC packages feeds into a network The TAM varies each DAC individually to isolate which ones failed Similarly 10 digitally controlled lines feed into a network and are monitored by the TAM The channels used to monitor the DACs are listed below Channel A heh Maa Ee ee A5J9 pin 1 MS1 ABC TIT See CO Oe A5J9 pin 3 MS3 eee eae ot ae eee A5J9 pin 4 MS4 Channel D EE A5J9 pin 2 MS2 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press MODULE and Dia
46. EE B CONTROL OUTPUT CAL_OSC_SWP_RST AD ATTENUATOR SWP_GEN_MA 1 SWP_GEN_MA 0 452 10 7MHz 5 4 CAL SIG AM 1139 5 FIGURE 9 21 4 LOG AMPLIFIER CAL OSCILLATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 2 of 2 HP 8560 E Series AS IF ASSEMBLY BLOCK DIAGRAM IF ASSEMBLY fy 16 54 eire 74261 CY 27 5 w29 A INPUT SWITCH B 1ST STEP C 1ST XTAL POLE 2ND XTAL POLE E 1ST LC POLE F 2ND LC POLE 15 dB REF 2ND STEP 10 7MHz IF IN ist STAGE ATTENUATOR GAIN STAGE E FROM A15J601 m Xy 7X S 2 SS 15 ATTEN 10 7 MHz CTR SS XTAL CTR MAy NEC CTR LC gt N 44 see C O 12 UU XL oO e i 5 P K g A g 5 T 9 s wu N ue N N 5 2 I 4 2 9 lt 5 3 16 Sb 12 E T m M C M a M en _ Ga 8 MS3 77 47 56 Ay 7 58 E 18 55 1 3RD STEP J FINE ATTEN K 3RD XTAL POLE L 4TH XTAL POLE POST 3RD LC POLE 4TH LC POLE SE GAIN STAGE a t N X yh SQ XTAL CIR NS O N See CTR
47. FL4 LINE MODULE 22241 1101 1 51142 J2 2 J2 4 42 5 6 POWER SUPPLY BOARD ASSEMBLY ETE wer rem LINE TRIGGER KICK CIRCUIT COMMON NOT EARTH GROUND NODES MAY BE AT A LETHAL POTENTIAL WITH RESPECT TO EARTH GROUND CIRCUIT x EARTH LINE TO OUTPUT SAFETY ISOLATION PROVIDED BY __ TP103 TP304 302 TP306 505 TP303 301 LY TP106 e 40 4 5 VOLTAGE 5 DC_DC REGULATORS OO T C NV RTER P O A642 gar a ETE 44 53 5 W8 TO A17 CRT DRIVER LINE TRIGGER FEEDBACK POWER UP RP CIRCUIT P O A6A2 CURRENT P O A6A2 SENSE M vTF SUPPLY 28V MODULATED 34 START BIAS SENSE TP403 TP401 2 A6A1 HIGH K CRT SUPPLY HV SHUTDOWN 1 ASSEMBLY 15 4 E TP405 110V J4 1 110V AC J5 2 10 HAZARDOUS DRIVE J5 5 BENE z DISPLAY POWER SUPPLY SECTION 9kV POST ACCELERATOR TO A18V1 2 45kV TO A17J6 3 2 45kV TO A17J6 5 2 55 TO A17J6 1 15 4 A6 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM HP 8560 E Series DISPLAY POWER SUPPLY SECTION
48. Figure 9 19 illustrates normal operation Severe failures slope error gt 30 percent and 3 kHz resolution bandwidth errors less than 30 percent indicate a problem with A4U802 U803 U804 or U106 Reconnect W52 white to A4J8 Output Waveform 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth REF 40 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB H N ED NL EJ ON LN LAETI gi CENTER i0 800 000 MHz SPAN 0 HZ RES BW 100 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 50 0 msec Figure 9 16 Output Waveform 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth IF Section 9 35 Ap 1 dB Output Waveform 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth REF 40 0 dam ATTEN 10 dB s L by E ORO E CENTER 10 800 000 MHz SPAN 0 H2 RES BW 100 kHz VBW 49 kHz SWP 50 0 mssc Figure 9 17 Output Waveform 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Output Waveform 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth 1 dB F 37 0 ATTEN 12 dB OE LI LLL EL LL OE tt pL dl lll HL bL da Ld a Ne URN ree CoS AW IN _ LU LY LL LU Lr i LH LI CENTER 18 718 000 MHZ SPAN O Hz 9 36 IF Section RES BW 10 kHz VBW 1 kHZ SWP 200 msec Figure 9 18 Output Waveform 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Output Wavaform 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth REF 37 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB CENTER 49 749 000 MHz SPAN O RES BW 10 kHz VBW 1 kHz SWP 200 msec Figure 9 19 Output Waveform 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth REF 43 0 dBm ATTEN O dB 1 dB CENTER 10 710 000 MH
49. HP 34118A Procedure 1 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the line power cord Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold down the 15 RF and Al4 frequency control assemblies Prop up the Al4 frequency control assembly Reconnect the line power cord and press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Connect the equipment as illustrated in Figure 2 11 2 34 Adjustment Procedures 6 Sampling Oscillator Adjustment 2 Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Center e due le Ro Bae eee pact Gee 2126 MHz uod rr 0 Hz 3 Set the HP 3456A controls as follows UMC TIO aae d cese Be M tt DC VOLTS EH Or eaten easiest e sc eg al andas IOV MANUAL Sampling Oscillator Adjustment 4 Connect the negative DVM test lead to A15J200 pin 6 Connect the positive DVM lead to A15J200 pin 13 5 Adjust A15C210 VCO RANGE for a DVM reading of 5 05 V f0 05 V 072 B D D D e e D PN 1 BM SP114E Figure 2 12 TAM Connector Pin Locations Sampler Match Adjustment 6 Connect the negative DVM test lead to A15J400 pin 6 and the positive DVM test lead to A15J400 pin 1 7 Press and set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 2302 3 MHz This sets the sampling oscillator to 291 667 MHz 8 Adjust AISCIOO SMPL MATCH to peak the voltage displayed on the DVM 9 Record the displayed voltage in Table
50. HP Part No 08562 90216 Supersedes 08562 90209 Printed in USA December 1997 N otice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material O Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1996 Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 USA Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Regulatory Information The HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide contains regulatory information Warranty This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a
51. Short A2U207 pin 2 to pin 3 If the display does not brighten troubleshoot DEF1 switch U207A This switch is used in analog zero span Change the intensity under DisPLAv If the intensity does not change troubleshoot the intensity DAC A2U212A A2U212A is controlled from the front panel The amplitude of the waveform at U211A pin 1 should increase or decrease with intensity changes Clamp U211B limits the voltage to about 4 2 V Short A2J201 1 to ground and set the intensity DAC to a number greater than 80 A major portion of the waveform should be limited to 4 2 V If a major portion of the waveform is not limited to 4 2 V troubleshoot the maximum brightness clamp A2U211C Bad Characters or Graticule If the displayed characters are bad but the graticule is correct or if the symptoms are reversed troubleshoot the X and Y generator switches A2U207D and A2U207C Check that the switch driver signal LCHAR is working properly Refer to Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen in this chapter 10 10 Controller Section Long Lines Dimmer Than Short Lines Refer to function block M of A2 controller schematic diagram sheet 1 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The Z output function block contains the absolute value circuits which determine the intensity of vectors drawn on the display The vector length is approximated by the sum of the X length and Y length The voltage cor
52. to 0608 pin 14 5 Vdc Jumper 0401 pin 2 RPG COUNTI to 0511 pin 11 HDPKD CLK This provides 7 8 kHz square wave to the RPG COUNT input of the RPG Interface 6 Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on 7 Check A3U608 pin 9 for narrow low going pulses approximately every 90 ms 8 Check A3U608 pin 13 LRPG RESET for narrow low going pulses approximately every 90 ms 9 Check A3U612 pin 5 for narrow low going pulses approximately every 90 ms 10 Check U608 pin 5 HRPG IRQ for narrow high going pulses approximately every 90 ms 11 If HRPG IRQ is correct but LRPG RESET is incorrect check U505 pin 13 LKBD RPG IRQ for narrow low going pulses approximately every 90 ms 12 If HRPG IRQ and LKBD RPG_IRQ are correct but LRPG RESET is incorrect suspect a failure on the A2 controller assembly 13 Check U610 pin 3 for a 7 8 kHz square wave Check U606 pin 2 HRPG_RESET for narrow high going pulses approximately every 90 ms Refer to Table 8 5 and check the frequencies at divide by 16 counter A3U606 14 If all the checks above are correct but the spectrum analyzer does not respond to the RPG suspect a problem in either the A1A2 RPG or the A1A1 Keyboard 8 8 ADC Interface Section 15 Press to turn spectrum analyzer off 16 Reconnect ALA1W1 to A3J602 and remove all jumpers Table 8 5 Counter Frequencies A3U606 pin Nominal Frequency Hz 3 3900 4 1950 5 975 6 488 11 244 10 122 9 61 Triggering or Video G
53. to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Main roller pretune DAC set to 255 The main roller pretune DAC is set to 5 causing MAINSENSE to go to the positive rail The DAC is incremented until MAINSENSE changes polarity ERR 310 is set if the DAC is set to 255 before MAINSENSE changes to a negative polarity This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Main roller pretune DAC set to 255 The main roller pretune DAC is set to 5 causing MAINSENSE to go to the positive rail The DAC is incremented until MAINSENSE changes polarity ERR 311 is set if the DAC is set to 255 before MAINSENSE changes to a negative polarity This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Unable to adjust MAINSENSE to 0 volts using the fine adjust DAC The coarse adjust and fine adjust DAC are used together to set MAINSENSE to 0 volts with the loop opened ERR 312 is set if the fine adjust DAC cannot bring MAINSENSE to O volts This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If
54. 2 1 20 O a __ Connect the 8481D to the HP 11708A attenuator already connected to the HP 8902A RF power connector Zero and calibrate the HP 8902A HP 8481D combination in log mode Enter the power sensor 50 MHz cal factor into the HP 8902A Connect the power sensor through an adapter to the SMA cable Adjust the HP 8340A B power until the power displayed on the HP 8902A reads 30 dBm f0 05 dB 10 spectrumanalyzer press CAL MORE1 2 SERVICE CAL DATA 8RD IF AMP then CAL 3RD AMP GAIN 11 Wait until the message ADJUSTMENT DONE appears in the active function block and press EXT MXR REF CAL 12 Disconnect the SMA cable from the power sensor adapter and connect the cable to the spectrum analyzer IF INPUT 13 Use the spectrum analyzer front panel knob step keys or keypad to change the amplitude of the displayed signal until the marker reads O dBm f0 17 dB 14 Press PREV MENU STORE DATA and YES on the spectrum analyzer 15 Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR PROT position Note The following steps should only be performed if you need to replace the 30 dB conversion loss values to those recorded in Table 2 12 16 Press AUX CTRL EXTERNAL MIXER AMPTD CORREC spectrum analyzer 17 Press 1 or to select frequencies where the conversion loss value was recorded in Table 2 12 18 Use
55. 3 10 3 10 3 11 3 11 3 11 3 12 3 12 3 12 3 13 3 14 3 16 3 16 3 16 Cal Factor outside of 0 to 150 range entered CONDITIONS file from system file location is not WARNING Conditions Menu DUT ID disagrees with responding DUT ID Data not accepted check entry format eo DUT doesn t respond at address listed File filename not found 4 Insufficient equip to do test test niba test name gt No HP IB address listed for DUT Non numeric entry other than S entered or detiene lt 0 No sensor file found for lt sensor model gt S N lt sensor serial gt Power meter reads lt value gt dBm Select code lt value gt does not currently sipor HP IB son Sensor serial number must be from 1 to 99999 System mass storage file location catalog cannot be read This program does not support the current DUT M Unable to load CONDITIONS file from listed system file jon Unable to load data from sensor filename Unable to obtain catalog from system mass storage file Unable to reach power level of value dBm WARNING CONDITIONS file from system file nes is not Error Messages Beginning with Numeric Characters be re d 8481A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not lt 50 MHz 8481A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not gt 300 MHz 8485A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not 10 MHz 8485A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not gt 26 5 GHz Error Messages Beginning with Variables filename file no
56. 3 12 external mixer amplitude adjustment 2 57 bias adjustment 2 56 F FADC removal and replacement 4 40 FADC Circuits Option 007 8 bit flash ADC 8 31 control word 8 31 GAINX2 8 31 peak pit detection 8 31 RAM static 8 31 video input section 8 31 FADC Control Circuits Option 007 circular address 8 31 clock amp sample 8 31 Index 3 comparator 8 31 control registers 8 31 control word 8 31 counter 8 31 CPU 8 31 post trigger counter 8 31 reference check 8 31 reference generator 8 31 trigger 8 31 video trigger 8 31 fan removal and replacement 4 42 fault isolation 7 14 fault isolation RF path 7 16 filter adjustment 2 21 firmware 7 50 firmware dependent part numbers 5 2 first LO See LO first LO distribution amplifier removal and replacement 4 30 First LO problems multiband sweeps 11 41 First LO span problems 11 40 flatness adjustment manual 2 43 flatness compensation amplifiers 7 45 flatness control troubleshooting 8 13 FM coil 11 29 focus problems 13 9 fractional N divider 11 35 oscillator 11 23 phase noise 11 44 span problems 1 1 39 troubleshooting 1 1 1 1 fractional N PLL 7 47 11 32 unlocked 11 31 frequency control A14 assembly removal 4 37 frequency control A14 assembly replacement 4 38 frequency control assembly troubleshooting 12 11 frequency control block diagram 1 1 48 frequency counter 10 14 frequency counter prescaler conditioner troubl
57. 472 473 474 415 476 471 478 483 484 485 486 487 488 RBW IF 5 5 IF 5 5 IF SYSTM AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL LIN LOG LOG LOG LOG RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW 10K 300 100 100 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in fourth crystal pole IF hardware failure Check other error messages IF hardware failure Check other error messages IF hardware failure Check other error messages Unable to Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable Unable adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust step gain amplifiers Check other errors fine attenuator of the step gain amplifiers fine attenuator of the step gain amplifiers fine attenuator of the step gain amplifiers first step gain stage first step gain stage first step gain stage second step gain stage second step gain stage third step gain stage third step gain stage third step gain stage linear amplifier scale step gain amplifiers third step gain stage
58. 58 MSS MS6 MS4 MS7 Synthesizer Section 11 7 Troubleshooting Test Setup Some synthesizer section problems require placing the YTO PLL in an unlocked condition This is done by moving jumper 414 23 to the TEST position This grounds the YTO ERROR signal disabling the ability of the CPU to detect an unlocked YTO The FM coil driver output is set to its mid range level causing the YTO to be controlled only by the main coil tune DAC Synthesizer section troubleshooting is best done with the spectrum analyzer SPAN set to 0 Hz even though it is still possible to sweep the Main and FM coils of the YTO With the YTO in its unlocked conditions and the SPAN set to O Hz the nominal YTO frequency is not necessarily the value listed as LO FREQ in the Frequency Diagnose menu The YTO has an initial pretune accuracy of 20 MHz To display the nominal YTO frequency press CAL MORE 1 OF 2 FREQ DIAGNOSE LO FREQ The fractional N oscillator frequency is the same as the desired IF To fractional N oscillator frequency press CAL MORE 1 0 RE AG _ If the sampler IF is negative YTO frequency is lower than the sampling oscillator harmonic the fractional N frequency will be displayed as a negative number Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section The All YTO the spectrum analyzer first LO is a YIG tuned oscillator which tunes from 2 95 to 6 8107 GHz The A7 switched LO distribution amplifier SLODA levels
59. 8481A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not gt 300 MHz Program requires the HP 8481A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or above 300 MHz Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or above 300 MHz 8485A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not 10 MHz Program requires the HP 8485A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at 10 MHz Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at 10 MHz 8485A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not gt 26 5 GHz Program requires the HP 8485A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or above 26 5 GHz Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or above 26 5 GHz 3 18 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Error Messages Beginning with Variables lt filename gt file not found The file indicated could not be found at the listed system mass storage file location Check the filename and the system mass storage file location keyboard entry is a non numeric entry The program expected a numeric entry but did not receive one Enter a numeric entry number of instruments instruments have HP IB addresses of lt HP IB address gt The indicated number of instruments have all been set to the same HP IB address Review the addresses and eliminate the duplication power meter model number doesn t read signal to be in 1 5 dBm range The power meter or measuring receiver does not read a power level within the range indicated Check for loose connections source model number signal not in 5 5 dBm r
60. A coaxial probe with very little unshielded tip area should be used to avoid picking up radiated 60 Hz Check that your measurement is valid by probing ground on the circuit and verifying that the measured value is well under the 1 mV threshold that indicates a defective regulator There can also be phase noise problems if the loop gain is incorrect See function block AP for loop gain troubleshooting information 11 44 Synthesizer Section Sampler and Sampler IF The 150100 sampler creates and mixes harmonics of the sampling oscillator with the first LO The resulting sampler IF 60 MHz to 96 MHz is used to phase lock the YTO The sampler IF filters unwanted products from the output of A15U100 and amplifies the IF to a level sufficient to drive the YTO loop When the IF is between 78 and 87 MHz PIN diodes switch a 120 MHz notch filter in the sampler IF section 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center frequency 520 300 MHz vri MT 0 Hz 2 Disconnect W32 from A15J101 3 Connect the input of a power splitter to A15J101 Connect W32 to one of the splitter outputs Connect the other splitter output to the input of another spectrum analyzer 4 If a 66 7 MHz signal greater than 15 dBm is not displayed on the other spectrum analyzer set a microwave source to the following settings aaa eee aoa 4 2107 GHz Ses Ae aed cats auch tad d dated die
61. A155803 to Rear Panel J10 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 6 0 SPAN VIDEO A3J103 to A2J4 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 0 10 MHz FREQ COUNT A153302 to A2J8 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 93 EXT TRIG IN Rear Panel J5 to A3J600 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 5 VIDEO OUT A3J102 to Rear Panel J4 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 4 BLANKING OUT A3J601 to Rear Panel J6 CABLE ASSEMBLY FILTER 10 7 MHz A5J5 to A4J3 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 7 10 7 IF A15J601 to A5J3 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 8 REF IN OUT A15J301 to Rear Panel J9 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 87 SAMPLER IF A15J101 to A14J501 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 81 2ND LO DRIVE A15J701 to A13J4 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 0 1ST LO SAMP to A15A2J1 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 92 INT 2ND IF A13J2 to A15J801 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 86 EXT 2ND IF Front Panel J3 to A15J802 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 85 10 MHz REF 1 28480 A15J303 to A14J301 28480 8120 5676 5062 0721 5062 0723 5062 0717 5062 0709 5062 0719 5062 0720 5062 0718 5062 0714 5062 0711 5062 0722 5062 0705 5062 0706 8120 5446 5062 0710 5062 0725 5062 0707 Not present in Option 327 Replaceable Parts 5 13 Reference Designatio W38 w39 W40 w4l W42 w43 w44 w45 W46 w47 WAS wagt W50 w51 W52 w53 w54 w55 W56 w57 Not present in Option 103 5 14 Replaceable Parts 5022 0183 5022 1081 5062 0724 5022 0169 5022 0189 5022 0186 5022 1124 5022 1080 5022 2819 8120
62. Adjustment Procedures 2 43 9 Frequency Response Adjustment BNC CABLE FREQUNCY SPECTRUM STANDRD EXT ANALYZER 10 MHz REF SYNTHES 2 0 SWEEPER 02 0 2 C cac c paa moo gg Sco o APC 3 5 CABLE SPLITTER ADAPTER POWER POWER SENSOR SENSOR MEASURING RECE VER 029000 pnaaaa n O Figure 2 17 Frequency Response Adjustment Setup Equipment Synthesized ee nn ahaa eee inde ed RETIRER MURS HP 8340A B Measuring receiver HP 8902A Power Sensor 22220 Pad cee E RM REUS TITOLO HP 8482A Power Sensor uoto odiosum oie att ade ala dd 8485 11667 Adapters m to Type m 1250 1475 m to APC 3 5 m 1250 1743 Type Ne te APO 9 5 mai iSi des 1250 1750 Type APC 35 4D to APC GO ose ra RE Er ER 5061 5311 Cables BNC 122 OI 9I 4k ecco qoia te eb dos cde des ep ed a E HP 10503A APC o OP JOH SENS Mac tUa NEUE d Md 8120 4921 2 44 Adjustment Procedures 10 11 12 15 Set ref level cal DAC to zero Press CAL REF On the HP 85623 press MKR CAL MORE 1 OF 2 SERV 9 Frequency Response Adjustment Proced
63. Al4 Frequency Control Assembly in Chapter 12 RF Section Sampling Oscillator 335 335 SMP UNLK This error indicates an unlocked sampling oscillator also known as the offset Lock Loop Sampling oscillator PLL is unlocked ERR 335 is set if OFL ERR is outside its prescribed limits 10 MHz Reference 336 336 10 MHz Ref Fractional N PLL 337 337 FN UNLK This message occurs during the internal IF calibration routines The routine locks the cal oscillator to the internal 10 MHz reference regardless of the setting of INT EXT REF Calibration oscillator failed to lock within 5 seconds after going to internal 10 MHz reference ERR 336 will not be cleared until a successful full cal LO Re Align is executed This error indicates an unlocked fractional N phase locked loop This error only applies to the hardware in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer Fractional N circuitry is unable to lock 7 26 General Troubleshooting YTO Loop Settling Errors 351 to 354 351 SEIL 352 TWID FLD 999 BOH FED 354 LK ITERS These errors are generated when the YTO loop error voltage will not stabilize at an acceptable value during the YTO loop locking routines These errors only apply to the hardware in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer YTO error voltage is not settling Unable to bring YTO error voltage DAC s to quiescent point No acceptable YTO DAC value found Cannot lock Lock iteration routine terminate
64. CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON DISPLAY CAL 28480 8120 6172 Option 007 OSC FADC A2J3 to A17J1 A16J1 and A16J2 WS 5061 9030 9 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISPLAY POWER 28480 5061 9030 A6J4 to A17J2 W9 5062 6482 1 ASSEMBLY CRT YOKE 28480 5062 648 A17J3 J7 to A18V1 W10 5062 0742 CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON All YTO DRIVE 28480 5062 0742 A14J3 to A11J1 08562 60064 3 CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON A9 ATTEN 28480 108562 60064 DRIVE 1436 to A9 08562 60187 CABLE ASSEMBLY A7 A8 DRIVE 28480 08562 60187 A14J10 to A7 and A8 Part of Cable Assembly Microcircuit 08562 60045 5062 0143 CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON AI3 2ND CONV 28480 15062 0143 DRIVE A14J12 to A13 Part of Cable Assembly Microcircuit 08562 60045 NOT ASSIGNED NOT ASSIGNED 5 12 Replaceable Parts Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued Reference HP Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Designation Number D Code Number WIS W19 Option 001 W20 w22 W23 W24 W25 W27 w29 w31 Option 005 W32 w33 w34 8120 5676 5062 0721 5062 0723 5062 0717 5062 0709 5062 0719 5062 0720 5062 0718 5062 0714 5062 0711 5062 0722 5062 0705 5062 0706 8120 5446 5062 0710 5062 0725 5062 0707 CABLE ASSEMBLIES CONTINUED CABLE ASSEMBLY 10 RYTHM DRIVE A14J9 to A10 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 97 LO SWEEP 0 5 V GHz A14J7 to Rear Panel J8 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 83 2ND IF OUT
65. H H SAAC 99 GCCEPPPEPRASADSE00044446444 00UO0PPPPPPRAMAA949 EGO EU U2440622 O00 UNTOOPPPPRRAGNAAQOvI144OPPDPDDPAROAOUPUEPDEPEEREREEERAAO000 psvnanaaaaaaopeseetososi 250 000 ns 0 00000 s 7250 000 ns 50 0 ns div 1 f 2 640 Y Figure 12 7 10 MHz TTL Reference at U304 Pin 13 12 22 RF Section Table 12 5 lists the RF Section mnemonics shown in Figure 12 8 and provides a brief description of each Table 12 5 RF Section Mnemonic Table Mnemonic Description TUNE YTF Tune Signal SYTF or RYTHM HTR HTR YTF Heater Power MAIN COIL MAIN COIL YTO Main Coil Tune Signal FM FM YTO FM Coil Tune Signal LO SENSE LO Amplitude Sense Voltage LEVEL ADJUST LO Amplitude Adjustment Voltage PIN ATTEN GATE BIAS LODA Gate Bias Voltage HEXTMIXB External Mixer 12V EXT MIX 12V INT MIX HSIGIDOFFA SIG ID Oscillator ON 12V SIG ID OFF 8V SIG ID ON PIN SW PIN Diode Switch Control SYTF or RYTHM LO Band HI Band PIN DIODE SWITCH PIN Diode Switch Control For 2ND Conv IF Output MIXER BIAS Detected Voltage on 2ND Converter Mixer Diode REGAIN Voltage to Control Gain of Flatness Comp Amps RFGAINI and RFGAIN2 Currents to Drive PIN Diodes in Flatness Comp Amps L10dB A L40dB B L20dBC LDC D Control Lines to Set Attenuator Sections A B C and D to Attenuate Position Active Low 10dB A 40dB B 20dB C LAC D Control Lines to Set Attenuator Sections A B C a
66. If the signal level is correct at both settings troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly If the signal level iS incorrect continue with step 7 7 Troubleshoot the ALC loop on this assembly using the following steps a Connect a positive DVM probe to A4J9 pin 4 b On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press CAL IF Section 9 33 C Press FULL WD J Observe the DVM reading between the displayed messages IF ADJUSTSTATUS 300 kHz RBW andIF ADJUST STATUS 3 kHz RBW Duringthistime period the voltage should be within a 2 to 10 Vdc range d Observe the DVM reading while IF ADJUST STATUS AMPLITUDE is displayed The reading should be within the 2 to 10 Vdc range e If the DVM reading is outside the range in step c but inside the range in step d suspect a reactive component of the filter 8 If the ALC loop is working correctly A4J9 pin 4 within the test tolerances given then either the output attenuator is defective or A4U810 pin 6 in ALC loop integrator is outside of its 3 to 6 Vdc range 9 Reconnect W52 coax 9 to AdJ4 300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of Specification l QN tA A 9 N 9 If the 3 dB bandwidth of one of these filters is incorrect suspect a failure of one of the five available sweeps from the cal oscillator sweep generator function block Z These sweeps are generated by changing the switch settings of A4U803 which routes signals through A4U802 and A4U804 Disconnect W52 co
67. Intensity Bad Characters or Graticule Long Lines Dimmer Than Short Lines Analog Zero Span Problems Non Option 007 Frequency Count Marker Problems Frequency Counter State and Trace Storage Problems Keyboard Problems Controller Section 10 1 Note When measuring voltages or waveforms make ground connections to A2TP3 The metal board standoffs are not grounded and should not be used when taking measurements Troubleshooting Using the TAM Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for information on enabling the TAM for use with the HP 85623 Spectrum Analyzer Table 10 1 lists assembly test connectors associated with each Manual Probe Troubleshooting test Figure 10 illustrates the location of the A2 test connectors Table 10 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Connector Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Measured Sienal Lines DAC test 52 57 OSI A2J201 10 volt reference test MS4 Switch drive test MS8 Buffered X amp Y DAC outputs MS2 MS7 X line gen test Y line gen test Intensity offset output A2J202 Revision X Y amp Z Output Offset MS3 MS4 MS7 X output amplifier MS7 Y output amplifier MS3 Blanking test MS8 Focus DAC test MS2 Blank Display Use the following procedure if the instrument display is blank This procedure substitutes an HP IB printer for the display 1 Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer and set the printer address to the value required by the TAM
68. It also provides the front panel focus adjusting voltage Press DISPLAY MORE 1 OF 2 and FOCUS While turning the front panel knob verify the dc level of the signal at TP9 adjusts about 30 Vp p Display Power Supply Section 13 9 13 Verify that the front panel intensity adjustment when used with the A17R21 Z FOCUS changes the peak to peak voltage at 9 by 25 V Access the intensity adjustment by pressing DisPLAv INTENSITY and turning the front panel knob 14 Set the front panel intensity to minimum Set A17R21 Z FOCUS and A17R26 X FOCUS fully counterclockwise Verify that the peak to peak voltage at TP9 is about 40 Vp p due to X dynamic focus circuit 15 If circuit operation seems correct A18V1 CRT is probably at fault Intensity Problems Intensity problems or absence of display can be due to the assembly intensity amplifier function block A intensity grid level shifter function block B CRT A18V1 interconnections or lack of proper supplies or inputs to 17 1 On the spectrum analyzer press DISPLAY INTENSITY 2 Rotate the front panel knob RPG and check that the intensity changes from dim but readable to bright 3 If the intensity function does not function properly troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly 4 Perform the preliminary and Z axis portions of the Display Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures Verify that 17 11 CUTOFF functions properly If A17
69. POSTSCLR RAW OSC FREQ INT LO LEVEL EXT LO LEVEL LO GATE LEVEL BAND 1 BIAS PREV MENU MXR PRESET ALL DACS PRESEL OFFSET PRESEL SLOPE 5 143 General Troubleshooting 7 7 Troubleshooting to a Functional Section l 2 Refer to Table 7 for the location of troubleshooting information If the HP 85629B test and adjustment module TAM is available refer to The TAM Test and Adjustment Module in this chapter If error messages are displayed refer to Error Messages in this chapter You will find both error descriptions and troubleshooting information If a signal cannot be seen and no errors messages are displayed the fault is probably in the RF Section Refer to Chapter 12 RF Section Blank displays result from problems caused by either the controller or display power supply sections Because error messages 700 to 759 caused by the controller section cannot be seen on a blank display use the following BASIC program to read these errors over HP IB If the program returns an error code of there are no errors 10 DIM Err 128 20 OUTPUT 718 ERR 30 ENTER 718 Err 40 PRINT Err 50 END a If there 15 no response over HP IB set an oscilloscope to the following settings SIC CDD s e qo IHE a ao ood BS 2 ms div AINE Scale 99 Se dede ate re bare diu eaten eda dau eed eres 1 V div b The signals at A
70. Remove jumper 14 23 and connect a dc power supply to A14J23 2 Connect ground to A14J23 pin 3 Set the dc power supply to 7 5 Vdc Verify the nominal test point voltages listed in Table 11 8 Change the input voltage to 7 5 volts and re verify that the voltages listed in Table 11 8 are the same except for a change in polarity Change the CENTER FREQ to 678 8 MHz with the SPAN remaining 0 Hz This will change the switch setting of U326A and invert the voltages listed in Table 11 8 11 28 Synthesizer Section 4 42 43 44 45 46 4T 48 49 Table 11 8 Voltages in FM Coil and Main Loop Drivers Measurement Points Voltages A14U405 pin 6 2 8 Vdc A14U322 pin 2 0 Vdc A14J17 pin 4 24 10 Vdc Check main coil coarse and fine DACs steps 41 44 The main coil coarse and fine DACs correct any initial pretune errors in the YTO main coil The DACs adjust the FM coil current to zero before any sweep begins Refer to function block J of Al4 frequency control schematic Set the spectrum analyzer to the settings listed below This sets both DACs to 128 the DAC setting range is 0 to 255 rcu rcr EIE 300 MHz eeu vas etx ee d Eu Dux 0 Hz Soh de ede bah Sad ee re Single EXT with no external trigger connected Press SAVE PWR 0 STATE and turn off the spectrum analyzer Place jumper A14J23 in the TEST position and turn on the spectrum
71. STOP BLANK START BLANK VIDEO GAIN SWEEP GAIN FM DEMOD LIMITER PHASE LOG AMP TOS LIN FIDELITY BOW CAL OSC AMPTD LC 1 LC CTR 2 LC CTR 3 LC CTR 4 15 DB ATT XTAL CIR 1 XTAL CTR 2 2 6 Adjustment Procedures Adjusts the free running frequency of the 16 MHz CPU clock Adjusts the horizontal gain in the X line generator Adjusts the beginning of the trace to the leftmost vertical graticule line in fast analog zero span mode Adjusts the vertical gain in the Y line generator Adjusts the vertical position in fast analog zero span to match the digital zero span input Adjusts the blanking at the end of a vector on the display Adjusts the blanking at the start of a vector on the display Adjusts the vertical gain in fast analog zero span to match with the digital zero span input Adjusts the end of the trace to the rightmost vertical graticule line in fast analog zero span mode Adjusts the FM demodulation for a peak response Adjusts Limiter Phase for peak response Minimizes error to Top of Screen Minimizes Linearity Fidelity error Sets calibration oscillator output power nominally 35 dBm This power is injected into the IF during the AUTO IF ADJUST routines Adjusts center frequency of first stage of LC bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHz Adjusts center frequency of second stage of LC bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHz Adjusts center frequency of third stage of LC bandwidth filter to 10 7
72. The user is prompted by the TAM to set the source to 5 GHz at 10 dBm The TAM expects 10 dBm at the input of the spectrum analyzer the amplitude at the source output may have to be higher to account for cable loss The source also provides a signal for high band The TAM checks the operation of the A9 input attenuator The TAM checks the A10 YIG tuned filter mixer at 5 GHz If no signal is present the TAM will use the 298 MHz SIG ID oscillator if present as is done in AFI Calibration Oscillator Troubleshooting Mode The cal osc troubleshooting mode enables front panel control of the cal oscillator on the 4 assembly The cal oscillator can be fixed tuned to three different frequencies The cal oscillator may also be set to one of four sweep widths centered at 10 7 MHz Fixed tuned settings 11 5 MHz 10 7 MHz 9 9 MHz Sweep width settings 20 kHz 10 kHz 4 kHz 2 kHz The cal osc troubleshooting mode sends the cal oscillator output 35 dBm to the A5 IF assembly On the A5 IF assembly all crystal filter poles are shorted all LC poles are enabled and the 15 dB attenuator is disabled Signals from the RF section are attenuated as much as possible 7 16 General Troubleshooting Error Messages The spectrum analyzer displays error messages in the lower right hand corner of the display A number or error code is associated with each error message These error messages alert the user to errors in spectrum analyzer function o
73. Use the following steps to verify the signals 1 Disconnect W22 from A2J8 2 If a 10 MHz TTL signal is absent on W22 refer to the 10 MHz Reference on the 15 RF assembly troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 12 RF Section Set the spectrum analyzer to zero Reconnect W22 With an oscilloscope probe monitor A3J401 pin 20 QN A W If TTL pulses are absent the A2 controller assembly is faulty Refer to Chapter 10 Controller Section The presence of TTL pulses indicates a faulty A3 assembly 7 Monitor A3J401 pin 23 HBADC CLKO If a 1 MHz TTL clock signal is present HBADC CLKO is working properly 8 If HBKT PULSE or HBADC CLKO is missing disconnect A3W1 from A2J2 9 Monitor A2U5 pin 3 for HBKT PULSE and A2U5 pin 7 for HBADC CLKO 10 If HBADC CLKO 15 absent troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly 11 HBKT PULSE is absent refer to the information on troubleshooting the frequency counter in Chapter 10 Controller Section 12 Reconnect A3W1 A2J2 8 24 ADC Interface Section ADC Start Stop Control Refer to function block B of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The ADC Start Stop Control determines the start time of all ADC conversions Multiplexer A3U509 chooses the source of the start signal Both HSTART SRC and HBUCKET tell the ASM to start a conversion l A W N 10 11 Press PRESET on th
74. a Wideband and Narrowband modes b 0 to 60 dB range in 10 dB steps c IO dB division and 2 dB division log expand modes Step Gains A5 IF Assembly 1 First Step Gain for 16 different DAC settings 2 Second Step Gain for 16 different DAC settings 3 Third Step Gain for 0 15 and 30 dB attenuation relative to maximum gain 4 Fine Attenuator for 32 evenly spaced DAC settings Log Amplifier Slopes and Fidelity 1 Wideband RES BW 300 kHz through 2 MHz and Narrowband modes RES BW 300 Hz through 100 kHz 2 10 dB division and 2 dB division log expand modes Linear Scale Gains On the log amplifier assembly P O A4 Peak Detector Offsets both positive and negative peak detectors with respect to normal sample path used by Auto IF Adjust 2 LC Bandwidths A B D E F 300 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency bandwidth and gain 1 MHz resolution bandwidth center frequency bandwidth and gain 2 MHz resolution bandwidth gain 100 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency bandwidth and gain 30 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency bandwidth and gain Gain of all resolution bandwidth relative to the 300 kHz RES BW 9 10 IF Section 3 Crystal Bandwidths A D E F The cal oscillator sweep rate is measured against the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth filter skirt This result is used compensating the sweeps used for adjusting the crystal bandwidths 10 kHz resolution bandwidth 1 Ce
75. alligator clips probe tips HP 34118A A T ligh frequency probe No substitute HP 85024A T Part of microwave workstation performance tests A adjustments M test amp adjustment module T troubleshooting 7 operation verification 1 12 General Information Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment continued Instrument Critical Specifications iecommended Use for Equipment Substitution Model Accessories Directional bridge Frequency range 1 to 80 MHz HP 8721A Coupling 6 dB nominal Maximum coupling deviation 1 dB nominal Directivity 40 dB minimum Impedance 50 Q nominal Directional coupler Frequency range 2 0 to 8 1 GHz 0955 0098 two required Coupling 16 0 dB nominal Maximum coupling deviation 1 dB nominal Directivity 14 dB minimum Flatness 0 75 dB maximum VSWR 1 45 nsertion loss 1 3 dB 10 dB step attenuator Attenuation range 30 dB HP 355D Frequency range dc to 80 MHz Connectors BNC f 1 dB step attenuator Attenuation range 12 dB HP 355C Frequency range dc to 80 MHz Connectors BNC f 20 dB fixed attenuator Frequency range dc to 13 2 GHz HP 8491B Attenuation accuracy i1 dB Option 020 Maximum SWR 1 2 to 2 9 GHz 10 dB fixed attenuator Frequency range dc to 13 2 GHz HP 8491B Attenuation accuracy lt 0 6 dB Option 010 Maximum SWR 1 2 de to 2 9 GHz Reference attenuator Supplied with HP 8481D HP 11708A Part of microwave workstation P performance t
76. b Check U305 pin 3 for approximately 12 Vdc Option 103 only c Check for a 10 MHz sine wave greater than or equal to 1 V p p at J305 standard HP 8562E or at U302 pin 3 with an oscilloscope Option 103 If the signal at U304 pin 13 is correct see Figure 12 7 but there is a problem with the signals at A15J301 A15J302 A15J303 or A15J304 suspect U303 or U304 in the 10 MHz Distribution circuitry p running Senne aM ME anne ea Ie CE ae 3 d 200 mv div 10 inHz Reference at A 15532 offset 0 000 v Sane SMS 6 70 rnnmecccsenenescovecororersnmecsoonnnnaas 9 9PPPPPPPPAR NAAMAM FE LI i 1 000 1 de 446 2425 p 2069636604024 gt 4 pprueaaonozseosescttodpeeenaceccorssocseeseandpuevevervornuuunasooc anasaacoosaevoootetenpdbosaeosoco soe eov toro d e99909aceccoc 4 3 i i 4 ER ut i ode
77. generate spurious responses on the fractional oscillator on the frequency control assembly 3 If the OCXO has no output check A15J306 1 for 15 Vdc Check A15J306 pin 4 for a TTL high level 4 If A15J306 pin 4 is at a TTL low level press and RE iL Press 10 MHz EXT ENT until INT is underlined A15J306 pin 4 should read a TTL high level Press 10 MHz EXT INT until EXT is underlined A15J306 pin 4 should read a TTL low level 1 1 50 Synthesizer Section HP 8562 10 MHz REF FROM A154303 81118 R CONTROL e CABLE lt W2 W37 A0 7 4 FREQUENCY CONTROL Power SUPPLY ADDRESS DECOD I NG 8 4 J1 SWEEP GENERATOR SUPPLY TP21 5VFN 15VFN 15VFN GND 4302 5 J 800 to 1020 MHz 1 FIRST DIVIDER SPLITTER YTO MAIN COIL TUNE DRIVER YTO MAIN 6 01 GHz AN COIL FILTER MAIN COIL TUNE DAC c 10V REF 10VR ANE 10 DATA BUS 00 7 COARSE AND FINE DACS Ur 3 DATA BUS 00 7 FM YTF CORRECT ON TO Q SCAN RAMP ATTENUATOR PRE INTERFACE CLOCK AM FRAC N INTERFACE DATA BUS 00 07 5 F 0302 15 LOOP INTEGRATOR FRACT ONAL DIVIDER MODULUS CONTROL LOOP GAIN CONTROL YTO FM COIL DRIVER 2 MAIN LOOP AME an TO J2 elated O RAMP BLOCK AH
78. if the anode of A4CR808 is less positive than the cathode of A4CR809 is negative the integrator should saturate to a positive voltage Note If error messages ERR 581 AMPL or ERR 582 AMPL appears refer to error message ERR 582 AMPL in Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting and perform the procedure provided 1 The oscillator output frequency should exceed 11 5 MHz if the CAL OSC TUNE line A4U804 pin 14 exceeds 9 V The oscillator frequency should be less than 9 9 MHz if CAL OSC TUNE is below 9 V The oscillator only operates when CALOSC_OFF is low 0 V 9 32 IF Section 2 If the cal oscillator remains locked no error code ERR 499 displayed but does not have the correct output level troubleshoot the output leveling circuitry function blocks AA AB and AC or output attenuator function block AD Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Adjust 1 Press to turn the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer off and then on The words IF ADJUST STATUS appear on the display 10 seconds after the instrument is turned on assuming the rest of the instrument is working correctly Immediately observe the lower right corner of the display for error messages If the message ERR 499 CAL UNLK appears before errors ERR 561 ERR 562 and ERR 565 the cal oscillator is unable to phase lock Expect to see the ERR 499 message for only about 1 second 2 If the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer registers an unlocked cal oscillator continue with step 3 to verify th
79. interface EEROM The 19 HP IB is a mechanical interface between the standard HP IB connector and the ribbon cable connector on the A2 controller assembly All six RAM ICs four RAM ICs on 16 MHz controller assemblies are battery backed The battery backed RAM stores trace information two display memory RAMs and spectrum analyzer state information two program RAMS A total of eight traces and ten states may be stored Typical battery life 1s five years with the lithium battery Trace and state information may be retained for up to 30 minutes with a dead battery and power turned off This is due to the very low data retention current of the RAM EEROM The EEROM stores important amplitude related correction data This includes data for LO distribution amplifier DACs preselector slope and offset DACs RF gain DACs flatness correction and preselector peak DAC The spectrum analyzer serial number model number and installed options are also stored in EEROM Firmware The spectrum analyzer firmware reads the model number and installed options from the EEROM to determine how to respond to certain keystrokes 7 50 General Troubleshooting Display ASM Much of the miscellaneous digital control is performed by A2U100 U100 functions as the display ASM algorithmic state machine and character ROM It also converts the 16 bit CPU data bus to an 8 bit data bus for the rest of the spectrum analyzer Display Power Supply Section
80. it 15 advisable to recalibrate the sensor more often than the program requires Press Cal Sensor and follow the instructions on the computer screen to recalibrate the power Sensor List Equipment To obtain a list of required test equipment for running a test move the pointer to the test press List Equip HP IB controlled equipment and passive devices other than required cables and adapters are listed If a test is flagged MISSING ETE but all test equipment appears present press List Equip to see what is needed then return to the Conditions Menu and verify that the equipment is present Press Cond Menu to return to the Conditions Menu from the Test Menu Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 11 Frequency Response Adjustment Menu Softkeys This section provides a brief description of each menu of softkeys More detailed information is provided in Program Operation in this chapter The softkey order shown below may vary with what appears on the computer display the order differs depending on whether an HP 9000 Series 200 or Series 300 computer is used Conditions Menu ust Menu Change Entry Verify Bus Store Conds Exit Program displays the Adjust Menu which allows you to perform an adjustment Refer to Adjust Menu loads the CONDITIONS file from the disk specified by the system mass storage file location displays the Sensor Utilities Menu which allows viewing editing and adding power sens
81. spectrum analyzer See Figure 4 18 pe AD 51112 Figure 4 18 Ald and A15 Assembly Removal Caution Washers are not captive Loose washers in instrument may cause internal damage Assembly Replacement 4 37 Procedure 9 Al4 and Al5 Assemblies Caution DO NOT fold the board assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer one at a time Always fold the and 15 assemblies as a unit Folding out one assembly at a time binds the hinges attaching the assemblies and may damage an assembly and hinge The board assemblies are attached to the right side frame of the spectrum analyzer with two hinges Fold both the and AI5 assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer as unit Remove all cables from the assembly being removed Remove the two screws that attach the assembly being removed to its two mounting hinges Caution DO NOT torque shield screws to more than 5 inch pounds Applying excessive torque will cause the screws to stretch Replacement l 2 Attach the removed assembly to the two chassis hinges with two panhead screws Attach all cables to the assembly as illustrated in Figure 4 19 Torque the W34 A15 SMA connection to 113 Nem 10 Lay the and 15 assemblies flat against each other in the folded out position Make sure that no cables become pinched between the two assemblies Ensure that all coaxial cables are clear of hinges and standoffs before c
82. step gain amplifiers third step gain stage 30 kHz resolution bandwidth in first LC pole 100 kHz resolution bandwidth in first LC pole 300 kHz resolution bandwidth in first LC pole 1 MHz resolution bandwidth in first LC pole 30 kHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole 100 kHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole 300 kHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole 1 MHz resolution bandwidth in second LC pole 10 kHz resolution bandwidth 3 kHz resolution bandwidth 1 kHz resolution bandwidth 300 Hz resolution bandwidth 100 Hz resolution bandwidth 100 Hz resolution bandwidth General Troubleshooting 7 3 1 489 490 49 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW CAL 100 100 300 300 1K 10K 100 100 100 UNLK 500 AMPL 30K 501 AMPL 1 Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust the resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Crystal sweep gain problem Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep gain problem Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep gain problem Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep gain problem Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep gain problem Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth Inadequate Q Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth Alignment
83. to free W9 and the post accelerator cables 14 Disconnect W3 from A6J2 15 Pull W3 up from between the power supply and the CRT assembly to release it from the cable clamp 16 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame Warning Due to possible contact with high voltages disconnect the spectrum analyzer line power cord before performing this procedure Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 1l Spectrum Analyzer Cover 4 48 Assembly Replacement Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable 17 Fold out the Al4 and 15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9 14 and 15 Assemblies Removal steps 3 and 4 18 Loosen the screw 1 securing W3 the line switch assembly to the front frame The screw is captive See Figure 4 25 A6A1 W9 WS ji Hf i MA f sl111e Figure 4 24 W3 Dress and Connection to A6 Power Supply 19 Remove A1W1 and A1W1DS1 from the line switch assembly Let each hang freely Note If contact removal tool HP part number 8710 1791 is available complete assembly removal by performing Removal steps 20 and 21 If not skip to Removal step 22 Assembly Replacement 4 49 Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable 20 With wire cutters clip the tie wrap holding the cable to the contact housing From the top side of the spectrum analyzer use contact removal tool HP Part Number 8710 179 to remove the four wires from the W3 connecto
84. used Dead Power Supply Use an isolation transformer and connect a jumper between A6TP101 and A6TP301 Check the Supply Voltages Connect the negative lead of a DVM to A6TP301 Check TP308 for 5 V Check TP307 for 5 V Check TP302 for 15 V Check TP303 for 15 V Check TP304 for 28 V Check TP305 for 12 6 V lt O Oo CQ 13 12 Display Power Supply Section Kick start Bias l Measure the voltage at TPIOS to verify the output of the input rectifier The voltage should be between 215 Vdc and 350 Vdc If it 15 not within this range check the rear panel fuse input rectifier input filter and the rear panel line voltage selector switch Measure the voltage at TP206 to verify the output of the kick start circuitry The voltage should be approximately 14 Vdc If there is no voltage at TP206 check TP210 for pulses 200 ms wide with an amplitude of 14 7 V If there are no pulses present the kick start circuitry is probably defective If the pulses are low in amplitude about 1 V Q201 is probably shorted If there are pulses at TP206 or there are pulses at TP210 but not at TP206 the buck regulator control circuitry is probably faulty Buck Regulator il 2 10 11 12 18 14 Disconnect the power cord from the spectrum analyzer Connect the positive output of a current limited dc power supply to the cathode of A6CR201 J7 pin 2 and the ground to J
85. vid OW red ist LO CAL QUT POMER LINTFCE STB HDPKI CLX ra Ure Dame Tu WARNING g 2 ci E a BRN 1 HEATER 2 1 wHT GRN mn 79 sv ET s E B REF 2 R T DAD OFL ERR 5 214 HEATER 1 oe Sicha 2 9 e TANT OMM D OND GAL OG TUNE RESERVED 32 D GND TT 3 CONTROL ee 220 R T PULSE zme TR 915 5 a ACCELERATOR GR HIT PULSE HINTFOE RD i CABLE lt LLOG_VIDSTB 25 CAL OSC TUNE Nur ORED Ser ir STEP mui lag CONNECTORS qui dde cor eis Y BID3 BID2 Ste D OND ona 18 37 106 aw 416 A3 1 C 147 16 a E 7 Hs jus 17 D E 148 DS D GND De D3 D2 D1 D GND De i NOTE 1 SCAN RAMP FOR CONTROLLER AND INTERFACE ONLY MH 26 18 96 elaaw21 T HP PROPRIETARY BLOCK DIAGRAM Jettename UJ en M XL if THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL BRIAN TORR 26 18 96 8562 0 Quer PROPRIETARY INFORMATION THAT IS ENGINEER CHECKER ALE W41 Rr IMP HEWLETT PACKARD HP PROPERTY INTERCONNECT 98562 98212 DO NOT DISCLOSE TO OR DUPLICATE FOR OTHERS EXCEPT AS AUTHORIZED BY HP RELEASE TO PROD W OPT 2007 PART NUMBER SUPERSEDES DWG TITLE D 8562 9 2 1 7 Index 1 100 MHz oscillator 11 16 10 6052 MHz VCXO troubleshooting 9 18 10 7 MHz and 4 8 kHz IF filter troubleshooting 9 18 10 7 MHz IF filter troubleshooting 9 17 10 kH
86. w22 Ms W29 w37 ME w 51 E NOT IJSED ibis W32 sp166e Figure 6 5 Bottom View Al5 Unfolded Major Assembly and Cable Locations 6 7 Al WI ii N 1 y l HM o Am W58 OPTION 05 W18 w32 1 15 Figure 6 6 Bottom View 5 and Al4 Unfolded 6 8 Major Assembly and Cable Locations W20 w59 COAX 6 w7 COAX a39 W5 sj1358e Figure 6 7 Al6 Fast ADC Option 007 Major Assembly and Cable Locations 6 9 SK102 Figure 6 9 Rear View Major Assembly and Cable Locations 6 11 General Troubleshooting Introduction This chapter provides information needed to troubleshoot your spectrum analyzer to one of the six major functional sections Chapters 8 through 13 cover troubleshooting for each of these sections Before troubleshooting read the rest of this introduction To begin troubleshooting refer to Troubleshooting to a Functional Section in this chapter Troubleshooting to a Functional Section TAM Test and Adjustment Module Error Messages System Analyzer Programming Errors 100 to 150 Block Diagram Description Note When a part or assembly is replaced adjustment of the affected circuitry is usually required Refer to Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures Warning Troubleshooting and repair of this instrument without the cover exposes high voltage points that may if contacted cause personal injury Maintenance and repair of this ins
87. with Y generator references in parentheses l 2 The voltage at A2U202B pin 7 should measure 10 0 V Perform steps 1 through 5 of Line Generators in this chapter If the X POS and Y POS waveforms look different from those illustrated in Figure 10 2 check the waveforms at the low pass filter input function block E in the component level information binder The waveform at the low pass filter should look like X POS in Figure 10 2 but have an amplitude from 0 V to 4 5 V If the waveform in step 3 is incorrect set an oscilloscope to the following settings Amplitude DE Eq EDS deep 10 V div SWeep Me dud uncis ud arid cd pto dated dowd gaan 20 us div oy ior neni aiU isn i eae D a RD External Trigger the oscilloscope on the signal at U207 pin 8 LBRIGHT Compare the line generator input signals at the following test points with those illustrated in Figure 10 5 INTEGRATE and SAMPLE waveforms are replicas of VECTOR except for polarity and amplitude LCHAR is low when characters are drawn INTEGRATE 0202 collector SAMPLE Q201 collector LCHAR U207 pin 9 VECTOR U213 Pin 9 Controller Section 10 7 T 10 11 10 0 V div 0 00 v 20 0 us div 0 000 s roo CTE INTEGRATE SAMPLE ul il a 5 194 Figure 10 5 Switch Driver Waveform LCHAR All of the DAC inputs s
88. 0515 0951 3 SCREW 5MM 2 5 16 PNPDS 28480 2615 0951 0905 0375 2 O RING 0701D 28480 9905 0375 2190 0583 9 WSHR LK M2 5ID 20480 2190 0583 415 Assembly 5021 6735 1 REF TOP 20480 5021 6735 5021 6736 2 REF BOTTOM 28480 5021 6736 5022 0047 8 SYNTHZR TOP 28480 5022 0047 5022 0046 SYNTHZR BOTTOM 28480 5022 0046 5021 6739 5 SIGPATH TOP 28480 5021 6739 5021 6740 8 SIGPATH BOTTOM 28480 3021 6740 5002 0631 4 BRACE RF BD 28480 5002 0631 0515 2081 SCREW 28480 J515 2081 0515 2081 SCREW 5MM 2 5 16 PNPDS 28480 1515 2081 0905 0375 O RING 070ID 20480 905 0375 2190 0583 WSHR LK M2 5 ID 28480 3190 0583 0515 0367 5 SCREW 2 5M X 8MM LG TORX 28480 2515 0367 Replaceable Parts 5 1 Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued Reference HP Part C Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Designation Number D Code Number CABLE ASSEMBLIES W1 8120 5682 9 POWER CABLE RIBBON 20480 8120 5682 w 2 5061 9025 CONTROL CABLE RIBBON 20480 5061 9025 w 3 5062 0728 0 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH 28480 15062 0729 w 4 5061 9033 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON OPTION 28480 5061 9033 MODULE A2J6 to Rear Panel J3 w5 5002 4838 1 ASSEMBLY SPEAKER 20480 15062 4839 W6 5062 0767 3 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY BATTERY A2J9 to Rear 28480 5062 0767 Panel Battery Holder 7 8120 5697 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON DISPLAY CAL 28480 8120 5697 OSC A2J3 to A17J1 w7 8120 6172 1
89. 15VFA 15VF 15VF DEMOD IF J1 COUNTER_ON m 6 DETECTOR MIXER VIDEO LOG AMP O J11 MS2 AM L IN AM LOG N 4 8 KHz NARROW BW PATH MF OFFSET GAIN COMP dixi COMP px LIN FIDELITY on FID LINEAR AM DEMOD PATH IF SECTION D J11 MS4 LOG P VIDEO OFFSET BUFFER i DEMOD SIG VIDEO OUT NARROW BW VIDEO VIDEO E OFFSET BUFFER 7 VIDEO OFFSET i i DEMOD VIDEO 8 js AUDIO J6 3 EARPHONE AUDIO J6 4 gt SPKR POS 46 5 757 3 SPEAKER SPKR RTN 46 6 a LS1 d b 46 1 J6 2 VOLUME CW i J9 ER OU i FIGURE 9 21 A4 LOG AMPLIFIER CAL OSCILLATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 of 2 8560 E Series IF SECTION 4 LOG AMPLIFIER CAL OSCILLATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM CAL OSCILLATOR CAL OSC SWP RST SWP GEN RANGE SWP GEN MA 0 92 2 AL OSC TUNE 4 J9 MS1 2 FROM A4 BLK B LOOP J 3 OSCILLATOR TRO INTEGRATOR A MEM NM Calosc tune Calosc off CAL_OSC I TUDE
90. 1666 0515 2145 5062 4806 0905 1018 5021 5483 0515 0366 5022 0199 8160 0520 0535 0082 2190 0016 Replaceable Parts 5 19 Parts List Front Frame continued Code Number 21 2950 0043 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 3 8 32 THD 094 IN THK 00000 DESCRIBE 22 5086 7895 2 1 INPUT ASSEMBLY Standard 5086 7895 22 08673 60040 9 1 RF INPUT ASSEMBLY Option 026 28480 08673 60040 23 0515 2145 2 SCREW MACH X 0 5 8MM LG PAN HD TX 0515 2145 24 5041 8985 9 RUBBER KEYPAD INCLUDES KEYCAPS 5041 8985 25 1990 1131 0 LED LAMP LUM INT 560UCD IF 20MA MAX LD 101MG 26 5041 1682 9 KEYCAP LINE 5041 1682 27 0900 0010 2 O RING 101 IN ID 07 IN XSECT DIA NTRL AS568 005 28 0515 0664 5 SCREW MACHINE ASSEMBLY X 0 5 12M M LG 0515 0664 29 5021 5482 3 1 SUPPORT CENTER 5021 5482 30 0515 1143 7 2 SCREW MACH M4 X 0 7 16MM LG PAN HD TX 0515 1143 31 0515 1934 4 9 SREW MACH M2 5 X 0 45 6MM LG PAN HD TX 0515 1934 P O AIWI 32 2100 4232 R VC 20K 20 LOG 2100 4232 33 3050 0014 WASHER FL 2501012 3050 0014 34 2190 0067 WASHER LK INTL 256 IN ID 2190 0067 35 2950 0072 NUT HEX 1 4 32 THD 2950 0072 36 0370 3079 KNOB RND 125 JG 0370 3079 5021 9320 FLANGE MOUNT Opt 026 not shown 5021 9320 5 20 Replaceable Parts HP Part C Qty Number D CO OQ tn A o 0515 1946 5062 7755 0515 2216 3160 0309 0380 0012 6960 0002 6960 0023 1250 1753 0515 1946 0515 0684 2
91. 2 5 dB a failure probably exists 4 A trace similar to Figure 9 13 indicates a crystal short failure 5 Press SPAN to set the spectrum analyzer to 3 MHz A trace that slopes across the screen see Figure 9 14 indicates a failed LC pole To isoiate the broken pole refer to the shape factor information in 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems ATTEN 10dB CENTER 300 0000MHz SPAN 500 RBW 1 0MHz VBW 1 0MHz SWP 50ms SK182 Figure 9 13 Faulty Crystal Short IF Section 9 29 ATTEN10dB RL 10dB CENTER 500 0000 2 SPAN 3 000MHz RBW 1 0MHz VBW 1 OMHz SWP 50ms SK183 Figure 9 14 Faulty LC Pole 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems Shape factor too high Shape factor is the ratio of the 60 dB bandwidth to the 3 dB bandwidth Shape factor should be less than 15 1 If one of the LC poles malfunctions the shape factor may be the only indication of the failure Isolate the non functioning pole with the IF signature Region E of Figure 9 8 illustrates the four LC pole adjustments Take several signatures to examine the LC pole adjustments If one of the four sections of Region E is consistently longer than the others the corresponding LC pole is faulty IF gain compression FET transistors Q301 Q303 Q700 and Q701 can deteriorate with age Measuring less than volts on the FET source indicates a bad FET Bandwidth too wide Check for contamination on the printed circuit board Clean the board as
92. 26 ADC Interface Section comparator U512 does not toggle back and forth during a conversion suspect either U512 or one of the clipping diodes CR500 CR501 Note Because currents are being summed at U512 pins 2 and 3 voltage levels at these points are difficult to interpret Ramp Counter Refer to function block D of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The ramp counter is used for sweeps with widths greater than 2 0 MHz times N The analog sweep ramp is compared to the digital ramp counter When the analog sweep ramp exceeds the DAC output generated for that ramp counter setting HRAMP COMP toggles high indicating the end of a bucket The ramp counter counts horizontal buckets There are 601 buckets per sweep so the ramp bucket counter counts from 0 to 600 The ramp counter is incremented by HRST PK ENA 1 Press on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Span MHz Detector mode SAMPLE 2 For spans greater than 2 0 MHz times NO HODD A3U525 pin 3 is a square wave with a period defined by 2 x sweep time 600 For example for a 6 s sweep time HODD has a period of 20 ms The ramp bucket counter will be odd every other bucket ADC Interface Section 6 27 A3 Assembly Control Circuits A I 2 digital control problem will cause the following three steps to fail On the spectrum anal
93. 4 16 A10 Mounting Screws Replacement l 2 Connect W43 44 and 46 to A10J3 J2 and J4 respectively 3 Connect W48 gray cable to 10 4 5 Install W56 FL2 W57 and ensure that all cable connections are tight Torque them to 113 Orient the AIO assembly for the proper cable connections Connect W16 ribbon cable to the AIO assembly 10 1n Ib Secure AIO to the spectrum analyzer center deck using four screws 4 34 Assembly Replacement All YTO All YTO Removal l 2 3 Disconnect W16 ribbon cable from the 10 assembly and move it out of the way Remove W56 FL2 W57 as a unit and disconnect W38 at the All assembly Remove four screws 1 securing All to the right side frame See Figure 4 17 Remove the screws while holding onto All Disconnect W10 ribbon cable from the All YTO assembly Replacement l Orient the All assembly in the spectrum analyzer so its four mounting holes line up with NI tU A Connect W10 ribbon cable to the All YTO assembly the holes in the right side frame and the output connector is lined up with W38 Secure the All assembly to the right side frame using four screws Connect W38 to All Install W56 FL2 W57 between A8J2 and A13J1 Reconnect W16 ribbon cable to the AIO assembly Torque all SMA connections to 113 19 SUM k VA A Ws 1 51114 Figure 4 17 HP 8562E All Mounting Screws at
94. 4dapter APC 3 5 m to APC 3 5 m 1250 1748 two required 4dapter 2 4 mm f to 2 4 mm f HP 11900B Adapter APC 3 5 f to 2 4 mm f HP 11901B P Adapter 3 5 m to 2 4 mm f HP 11901D P 4dapter Type N f to 2 4 mm f HP 11903B A T V 4dapter Type N f to 2 4 mmm HP 11903C P Part of microwave workstation gt performance tests A adjustments M test amp adjustment module T troubleshooting V operation verification General Information 1 15 Sales and Service Offices Hewlett Packard has sales and service offices around the world providing complete support for Hewlett Packard products To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts contact the nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office listed in Table 1 5 In any correspondence be sure to include the pertinent information about model numbers serial numbers and assembly part numbers Note Within the USA a toll free phone number is available for ordering replacement parts Refer to the section entitled Ordering Information in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts for the phone number and more information 1 16 General Information Table 1 5 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices US FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters California Northern California Southern Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 19320 Pruneridge Avenue 301 E Evelyn 1421 South Manhattan Ave Cupertino CA 95014 Mountain Vie
95. 5660 5062 4892 5063 0245 5062 6478 5062 6477 5062 6476 5062 6475 5062 6471 5022 1082 5022 0184 Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued HP Part C Qty Number D Description CABLE ASSEMBLIES CONTINUED CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID 1ST LO AllJ2 to A7J1 CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID 1ST MIXER LO A7J2 to A8J3 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 89 CAL OUT A15J501 to Front Panel J5 CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID RF INPUT Front panel J1 to A9J1 CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID 1ST LO OUT A7J5 to Front Panel J4 CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID A7J3 to A10J4 NOT ASSIGNED CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 8 1ST IF HI BAND A10J1 to A13J3 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX8A21 OCXO A21 to A15J305 CABLE ASSEMBLY OCXO 21 to A15 Includes A21 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 84 10 MHz REF2 A15J304 to A4J7 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 9 10 7 MHz CAL SIG A5J4 to A4J8 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 1 FREQ COUNTER A2J7 to A4J5 CABLE ASSEMBLY COAX 2 VIDEO A3J101 to A4J4 CABLE ASSEMBLY AUDIO A4J6 to LSI J1 and Rear Panel J1 CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID A8J2 to FL2 CABLE ASSEMBLY SEMI RIGID FL2 to A13J1 Mfr fr Part Code Number 9022 018 5022 108 5062 0724 5022 0161 5022 0185 5022 018 5022 1124 5022 1081 5022 281 8120 566 9062 4892 5063 0245 5062 6478 5062 6477 5062 6476 5062 6475 5062 6471 50
96. 58 dBm If the delta marker amplitude reads 40 dB 2 dB no adjustment is necessary If the signal is lower on the screen than expected delta marker amplitude reads less than 42dB then adjust A4R544 see Figure 2 10 for an even lower level and press CAL ADJ CURR IF STATE Allow sufficient time for the analyzer to complete the adjustment If the signal is higher on the screen than expected delta marker amplitude reads greater than 38 dB then adjust A4R544 for an even higher level signal and press CAL ADJ CURR IF STATE Allow sufficient time for the analyzer to complete the adjustment 2 32 Adjustment Procedures 11 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments Repeat steps 5 through 10 4 LOG Fidelity Adjustment l Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 2 9 See Figure 2 10 for adjustment location Connect the HP 3335 50 Q output to the spectrum analyzer 50 Q input Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on Press PRESET CAL IF ADJ ON OFF OFF AD3 CURR IF STATE Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center 15 MHz SPAN ae Resolution bandwidth EOM EP NUN edited ates 300 kHz Re feretice evel Re ee MM IS 10 dBm Set up an HP 3335A as follows BiequeHoy e e qued 15
97. 7 16 inch nut driver to remove the nut holding the RPG shaft to the front panel Remove the RPG Replacement 1 A W N Place the RPG into the front frame with the cable facing the bottom of the spectrum analyzer Place a lock washer and nut on the RPG shaft to hold it in the frame Use a 7 16 inch nut driver to secure the RPG assembly to the front frame Connect the RPG cable to 1 2 Attach the RPG knob using a number 6 hex Allen wrench Replace the A9 input attenuator as described in Procedure 8 A7 through AI3 Assemblies 4 14 Assembly Replacement Procedure 5 A2 A3 A4 and A5 Assemblies Procedure 5 A2 A3 A4 and A5 Assemblies Removal 1 Remove the spectrum analyzer cover 2 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame 3 Remove the eight screws holding the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies to the top of the spectrum analyzer These screws are labeled 2 3 and 4 in Figure 4 7 They are also labeled on the back of the A2 board assembly 4 Remove ribbon cable W4 from A2J6 See Figure 4 7 Caution Do not fold the board assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer one at a time Always fold the A2 and A3 assemblies as a unit and the A4 and A5 assemblies as a unit Folding out one assembly at a time binds the hinges attaching the assemblies and may damage an assembly and hinge 5 The board assemblies are attached to the right side frame of the spectrum analyzer with two hinges Fold
98. 8 ADC Interface Section 10 Controller Section 8 ADC Interface Section 9 IF Section 9 IF Section 9 IF Section 13 Display Power Supply Section 13 Display Power Supply Section 12 RF Section RF Section RF Section RF Section Synthesizer Section RF Section Synthesizer Section RF Section Synthesizer Section RF Section Display Power Supply Section Display Power Supply Section Controller Section Synthesizer Section RF Section General Troubleshooting 7 9 TAM Test and Adjustment Module When attached to the spectrum analyzer rear panel the HP 85629B test and adjustment module TAM in conjunction with the HP 8562E TAM Interface Software provides diagnostic functions for supporting the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer Because the TAM is connected directly to the spectrum analyzer internal data and address bus it controls the spectrum analyzer hardware directly through firmware control It would be impossible to control the hardware to the same extent either from the spectrum analyzer front panel or over the HP IB The TAM by itself will not support the HP 85623 it will not recognize model number HP8562E which is stored in the analyzer EEROM Fortunately 95 of the hardware in the HP 85623 is common to other HP 8560 E Series analyzers which are recognized by the TAM The HP 8562E TAM Interface Software enables use of the TAM with the HP 85623 by modifying the spectrum analyzer ID String th
99. 8 To check the log offset gain compensation circuits inject a 10dBm signal into J3 with the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer set to log mode Measure A4U503 pin 3 Vin 1 and A4U508 pin 3 Vout 1 and record the results Decrease the input level to 40 dBm and make the same measurements recording Vin 2 and Vout 2 9 20 IF Section The gain is then Vout 1 Vout 2 Vin 1 Vin 2 This gives an offset independent gain measurement Video MUX The video MUX switches the video output between linear log and 4 8 kHz IF for digital RBWs The demod video is an unused feature The easiest way to troubleshoot this circuit is to look for blown FETs Bad FETs are characterized by having significant gate current Only one of the signal lines LIN VIDEO IF VIDEO or LOG VIDEO should be high 15 V at any given time The others should be low 15 V Also look for a voltage drop of several volts across the gate resistors R601 R605 R609 or R613 when in either the off or on state This indicates gate current and thus a bad FET 5 IF Assembly The input switch connects the IF to either the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly or the 10 7 MHz IF output from the Al5 RF assembly The automatic IF adjustment uses the cal oscillator on A4 at instrument turn on and between sweeps to align the IF filters and step gain amplifiers During sweeps the input switch selects the 10 7 MHz IF output from Al5 The LC filters are variable bandwidth filters th
100. A3TP17 and 16 simultaneously with an oscilloscope 5 Change the reference level 10 dBm to 30 dBm and verify a voltage change at both A3TP17 and A3TP16 of 0 9 V to 0 5 V in 100 mV steps 6 Check the entire range of the detector by substituting a dc source at J101 and varying its output from V to 1 V ADC Interface Section 8 19 7 If the peak detector appears latched up check LPOS RST U422 pin 4 for a negative TTL level reset pulses The reset pulses should occur every 130 ps and should be approximately 250 ns wide 8 If the reset pulses are absent troubleshoot the Peak Detector Reset circuitry 9 If the reset pulses are present check the gate of Q207 The pulses should be positive going from 12 7 V to 1 35 V 10 The peak detector can be made into a unity gain amplifier by shorting the cathode of CR203 to the anode of CR204 If the peak detector functions normally as a unity gain amplifier suspect Q208 or CR203 or CR204 Peak Detector Reset Refer to function block of Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 1 Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Center Trequency d piscine ded tanto teat ast hen eee 300 MHz wr PP 0 Hz SWeep Mie a ede a eee d 55 Detector
101. A6 Power Supply The A6 power supply is a switching supply operating at 40 kHz for the low voltages and 30 kHz for the CRT supplies cathode filament 110 Vdc and post accelerator A6A1 high voltage module contains the high voltage transformer and post accelerator multiplier Power is distributed through W8 to AI7 and through W1 to the rest of the assemblies AGA1W2 supplies CRT cathode and filament voltages to the AI7 assembly The speed of the spectrum analyzer fan is variable A thermistor on senses the temperature and adjusts the fan speed accordingly This allows the spectrum analyzer to run quietly in most room temperature environments and faster louder only when necessary Al7 CRT Display Driver The line generators on the A2 assembly drive the Al7 CRT driver The AI7 assembly contains X and Y deflection amplifiers focus and intensity grid amplifiers and miscellaneous CRT bias circuitry The high voltage is supplied by 1 high voltage module In fast analog zero span mode sweep times lt 30 ms without Option 007 the O SPAN VIDEO signal from A3 and the sweep ramp from Al4 connects to the AI7 CRT driver The graticule and annotation are still digitally drawn General Troubleshooting 7 51 HP 8562E HP 8562E SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM 51 144 INPUT 5020 30 2 15 2 GH Deleted Option 327 Hu L 1ST LO OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT ATTEN 300 MHz 48 LOW XC gt SA Fri BAND a
102. Amplifier MS3 MS5 OSI Video Peak Detectors MS5 MS6 ADC MUX MS6 Variable Gain Amplifier MS6 MS7 Track and Hold MS7 MS8 A3J400 Video Trigger DAC Revision Real Time DAC 1 RF Gain DACs ADC Start Stop Control Trigger A4J9 val Osc Sweep Gen Hardware Jal Osc Tune Line Test Jal Osc ALC Test val Osc Sweep Gen Output A4J10 Log Amp Input Switch MSI Amp Limiter Bias MS2 ositive 15 V Supply MS5 4 11 ogamp Linear Output MS2 ogamp Linear MUX Path MS2 MS3 MS8 sogamp Log Output MS3 ogamp Compensation MS3 MS4 ogamp Log MUX Path MS4 MS8 sogamp Video Offset MS8 15 v Supply MS7 tevision MS5 st Step Gain Stage 1 MS1 MS2 MS8 st Step Gain Stage 2 51 MS2 MS3 st XTAL Pole Stage MS2 MS3 MS4 nd XTAL Pole Stage MS3 MS4 MS5 st LC Pole Stage 1 MS4 MS5 MS6 st LC Pole Stage 2 MS5 MS6 MS7 5 6 IF Section 9 5 Table 9 2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors continued Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Measured Signal Liner Ref 15 dB Attenuator Stage MS1 MS2 MS3 2nd Step Gain Stage MS2 MS3 MS4 2nd 3rd Step Gain Stage MS3 MS4 MS5 3rd Step Gain Stage MS4 MS5 MS6 Fine Atten 3rd XTL Pole MS5 MS6 MS7 3rd XTAL Pole Stage MS6 MS7 MS8 Revision MS8 4th XTAL Pole Stage MS1 MS2 MS3 Post Amplifier Stage 1 MS2 MS3 MS4 Post Amplifier Stage 3 MS3 MS4 MS5 3rd LC Pole Stage MS5 MS6 MS7 ith LC Pole Stage MS6 MS7 FDAC Channels A FDAC Channels B FDAC Channels IFDAC Channels
103. BOARD A4 LOG AMP a CAL OSCILLATOR jonne 000 5 10 MHz REFA GD Du EZ A3 IN OUT E 000 10 SK16 Figure 2 9 DC Log Adjustment Setup 2 30 Adjustment Procedures 5 DC Log Amplifier Adjustments Equipment Erequenc y Syntlie SIZeE ue e tee ee Vee ee eee HP 3335A Adapters Type IN ATI 10 BING D 1250 1476 Cables BNC 127 cm ISIA evened HP 10503A Mest Cable boa So Via nis onusta ena Mara anteire ta te Salar ette oes 85680 60093 A5 IF A4 LOG AMP CAL OSC 227427 49 J9 J7 R826 R445 d JO J8 J8 J10 J5 REVISION REVISION CONNECTOR CONNECTOR J7 J11 jd R544 J4 J3 J3 52227 sjlle Figure 2 10 DC Log Adjustment Locations Note Adjustments should be made with all of the shields on and only after allowing at least a 20 minute warmup A4 Limiter Phase Adjustment 1 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 2 9 See Figure 2 10 for adjustment location 2 Connect the HP 3335A 50 Q output to the spectrum analyzer 50 Q input Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Adjustment Procedures 2 31 5 DC Log Amplifier Adjustments Press CAL Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center ITeGquCICY 2544 02 2 b Oed Pod EDERAL EOS OREO 15 MHz
104. Cc J105 MS5 es mur t w vipEo FILTER 19 BUFFER NEGATIVE 5 5 DETECTOR I TP18 Cy gt gt L I9 LNEG RESET W20 6 VIDEO INPUT VA 1 w7 FROM 20 10 A2J3 10 2l 10g 107 PLUS 2 DIGITAL GROUNDS FAST ADC OPTION 007 ate 8 MHz TTL REF CLOCK MHz CPU INTERFACE CLOCK AND D TRIGGER 16 BIT 15 BIT 32K AND CONTROL SAMPLE RATE 0 POSI IRIGGER S i cua 72 STERS COUNTER ADDRESS 2 lt COUNTER 1 AND LATCH 2 22 222222222222 2222222222227222222 HSWP AND CONTROL BUS 2222222 l FL t t g SST ae eer VIDEO INPUT 8 1080 ING Desir ADC 1087 AMPL IF IER EN 7 AND LIMITER t 2 1 2 2 j z 7 7 2 7 5 2 2 A A SSNS SST 7 u POWER 1 MEMORY ADDRESS BUS 3222274 7 7 2 2 2 7 2 2 H 7 2 2 7 2 2 198010813 Y 1087 IOB DATA BUS 2 gt FIGURE 8 3 FAST ADC OPTION 007 BLOCK DIAGRAM IF Section The IF Section contains the A4 log amplifier Cal oscillator and A5 IF assemblies Troubleshooting Using the TAM T
105. Cover W3 Dress and Connection to Power Supply Line Switch Mounting Screw and Cable Dress W3 Cable Connector Side Frame Mounting Screws A2 OCXO Mounting Screws E Parts Identification Assembly Mounta Parts Identification Cover Assembly Parts Identification Main Chassis Parts Identification RF Section Parts Identification Front Frame Parts Identification Rear Frame Hinged Assemblies Top View A2 Unfolded Top View A2 and A3 Unfolded View 2 A3 4 and A5 Bottom View 15 Unfolded Bottom View Al5 and Al4 Unfolded Al Fast ADC Option 007 HP 85623 Front End Rear View Assembly Test Points Ribbon Cable Connections 1 of 2 Service Cal Data Menu Functional Sections Phase Lock Loops simplified Block Diagram Overall Block Diagram 1 of 3 A3 Test Connectors A3 Interface Assembly Block poss Fast ADC Option 007 Block Diagram 4 and 5 Test Connectors IF Section Troubleshooting with the TAM IF Adjust Signature 5 2d Detailed IF Adjust SM 1 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 2 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 3 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 4 Detailed IF Adjust Noisy Signature Noise with Correct Share Contents 12 4 26 4 29 4 33 4 34 4 35 4 37 4 39 4 40 4 41 4 45 4 47 4 49 4 51 4 52 4 54 4 56 5 15 0 29 0 20 5 27 5 29 9 81 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 1 9 1 4 1 1 1 42 1 47 1 58 1 59 8 4 8 41
106. D ieee raf AS LOG AMP CAL OSC ASSEMBLY SPERE ASSEMBLY VOLUME J COLOR COLOR A6A1 POWER ifg voL viot 7 1 HIGH SUPPLY con ORANGE D RTN Y JS J8 T FREQUENCY sk ao xx 06 let SLODA BIAS Jig CONTROL JICA J2CA J7 J ASSEMBLY XL 1 weas 2 sa 2 r i MIXER BIAS A9 ATTENUATOR e 420 WARNING i ARPTION EREUUENC Y COUNTTER C9 A21 2p 52 w50 OCXO W1 POWER CABLE n REM 15 1 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE CABLE CONNECTORS LINE TRIG 20v AND INTERFACE ONLY 44 5 ON A3Jug1 5 sy 5 D OND D OND D OND m T im E do XU z MWE T EOM i POWER x 0 3 1 care 5 A6A1W2 1 LINTFCE IRO 28 5 61 D GND LKEY RPG IRQ CABLE 15v 226 15 uri A 1 8 DND ET TE CONNECTORS pwr 22 228 D OND 20 28 15v 15V 149 1 1 erue 28 CRT ASSEMBLY uum ia E PROBE POWER CPROBE POWER CRT ae 5 MOT 1 SCAM A OND NOTE 1 A OND A17 pz A1A1 ny GND NC NC A1A2 A au CRT DISPLAY DRIVER RPG KEY BOARD P l ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY m R T ur ae 2 M vIDEO TRIG SCAN RAMP
107. Disconnect the power cord and remove the spectrum analyzer cover Fold down the A2 controller A3 interface A4 log amplifier Cal oscillator and A5 IF assemblies Remove the A6 power supply cover 2 Position the spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 2 l Connect the positive DVM lead to A6TP405 and the negative DVM lead to A6TP401 3 Set the HP 3456A controls as follows hee Bos eee ic Ree ae DCVOLTS e 1000 VOLTS 4 Reconnect the power cord to the spectrum analyzer and press to the on position 5 Record the voltage marked on the A6A1 HV module Voltage marked on 1 HV Module 2 Vdc 6 Adjust A6R410 HV ADJ for a voltage equal to the voltage recorded in step 5 7 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the power cord Wait at least 30 seconds for the high voltage power supply capacitors to discharge 8 Disconnect the DVM test leads from A6TP401 and A6TP405 Reinstall the power supply cover 2 14 Adjustment Procedures 2 Display Adjustment 2 Display Adjustment Assembly Adjusted A2 controller Al7 CRT driver Related Performance Test Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times 30 ms Description Coarse adjustment of the deflection amplifiers Z axis amplifiers and line generators is done using the CRT adjust pattern Fine adjustments use the graticule The fast zero span amplitude adjustments correct for d
108. ERON AIRIS E 6 xi J4 SAMPLER OUT 3 0 6 81GHz Ms ae you 15VF BE i J6 J7 BIAS HP ONES FM EN i A14 11 10 W12 d em Nel Neel Neel E _ ro B 54 TO A15U100 GATE BIAS SAMPLER SW Ku 9 to 2 dBm NT SENSE QUOS SW B SLODA DRIVE 6 FROM A14J10 45V 45V LEVEL ADJ SP Lo Ls uuo LL 2 04 0 C mu 2 2 i i eee 51148 dBm NOTE 1 SIGNAL LEVEL RANGE Band dBm NOTE 1 0 LOW 27 0 to 34 0 1 29 0 to 36 0 34 0 to 41 5 27 5 to 33 5 32 0 to 39 0 ee DC V Xv BIAS SUPPLIES z lt m NC NC NC z gt a E ND NND 2ND CONVERTER DRIVE FROM A14J12 SIGNAL LEVEL RANGE W13 3 SECOND CONVERTER 1 SIGNAL LEVEL RANGE Band dBm NOTE 2 0 LOW 7 0 to 14 0 to 16 2 14 0 to 21 5 THIRD CONVERTER P O A15 A15A1 2ND IF J801 Mec 310 7 MHz INPUT FRONT PANEL NOT PRESENT ON ANALYZERS WITH S dics OPTION 327 298 MH SIG ID SB OSC FLATNESS COMPENSATION CONTROL RF GAIN 1 J2 36 FROM 3 2 gt P O W2 RF GAIN R NOTES Levels indicated are as measured with the HP 8562E input attenuation set to 10dB and a 10dBm
109. FM coil For LO spans lt 2 0 MHz the YTO PLL remains locked and the fractional N PLL sweeps while remaining phase locked The frequency span relationships are as follows All YTO Spanwidth Sweep Applied to 20 1 MHz to 3 8107 GHz All YTO main coil 2 01 MHz to 20 0 MHz All YTO FM coil 100 Hz to 2 MHz Fractional N phase locked loop When the sweep ramp is applied to the YTO the spectrum analyzer must prevent this loop from trying to compensate for changes in the output frequency To accomplish this the spectrum analyzer opens the PLL by disconnecting the phase detector output of the YTO PLL Reference PLL part of A15 The 600 MHz reference PLL provides 600 MHz for the second LO 300 MHz for the third LO and the sampling oscillator reference and 10 MHz to the fractional N PLL The reference PLL is locked to a 10 MHz OCXO oven compensated crystal oscillator or a TCXO Option 103 The PLL can also be locked to an external frequency reference The 10 MHz reference also supplies the reference for the frequency counter on the A2 controller assembly and the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly YTO PLL A7 All part of A14 part of A15 The YTO PLL produces the instrument first LO 3 0 to 6 81 GHz The YTO output is mixed with a harmonic of the sampling oscillator in the sampler A15A2 and the resulting frequency is phase locked to the output of the fractional N PLL The A15U100 sampler mixes the LO signal from the A7 SLODA with a har
110. Figure 10 7 illustrates the waveforms in step 11 expanded to show relative timing the second and fourth traces are delayed by 5 ms from the first and third The oscilloscope settings are changed as follows S GOD dies eee td 20 us div Figure 10 8 illustrates the waveforms of properly working line generators Whenever there is a pulse on TP2 or TP1 the appropriate integrator U201B or U203B generates a ramp the output vector which feeds back to U201A U203A and shows on its output 5 0 V div 0 00 v 1 00 ms div 0 000 s SK195 Figure 10 6 Distorted X Y Line Generator Waveforms 5 0 V div 0 00 v 20 0 us div 0 000 s Le d E cup oap NN ME dq oq e _ jf i T TT 11 mem NE NE TP1 LO Pill SS en m c SK196 Figure 10 7 Expanded X Y Line Generator Waveforms Controller Section 1 0 9 800 V div 0 00 v 10 0 us div 0 000 s U20 IA I 2 H TP1 SK197 Figure 10 8 Normal X Y Line Generator Waveforms Intensity l The length of the vector being drawn can effect intensity U210A U210C and U210D sum the lengths of the X and Y vectors Refer to Long Lines Dimmer Than Short Lines in this chapter Short A2U207 pin 6 to pin 7 If the display does not brighten troubleshoot LBRIGHT switch U207B This switch intensifies trace A and active softkeys
111. HV module The CRT supply operates at approximately 30 kHz The exact frequency is determined by the inductance of the primary winding of AGA1T1 and 6 407 The supply will only operate if the LHVSHUT DOWN line is high If the power supply keeps dropping out there is probably a short on the Al7 CRT driver assembly 1 Disconnect W8 from A6J4 2 Connect an IC clip to U401 and connect a jumper between U401 pin 10 and TP308 i 5 Vdc 3 Connect a voltmeter to TP405 and set the Switch on 4 Check TP405 for a voltage of approximately 110 Vdc It will probably measure higher since there is no load on the supply 5 If the voltage at TP405 is correct suspect a short on 17 If the voltage at TP405 is not correct check pin U401 pin 8 for a sawtooth signal The sawtooth should be flat topped and about 5 Vp p at a frequency of about 30 kHz 6 If the sawtooth is not flat topped suspect U402A and its associated circuitry 13 16 Display Power Supply Section 7 If the sawtooth is correct check the base of Q401 for 30 kHz pulses 8 If the duty cycle is high but there is no 110 Vdc suspect the bridge rectifier CR401 through CR404 Buck Regulator Control See function block H of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component level information binder The buck regulator control pulse width modulates the buck regulator and provides a synchronized signal to the DC DC converter control circuitry The buck regulator control h
112. Hz modulation frequency eight divisions peak to peak On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press AUX_CTRL AM FM DEMOD i set the sweep time to 5 seconds DEMOD ON and Vary the volume and listen for the variation in speaker output level Clipping is normal at the highest volume levels If the audio is not working correctly monitor the signal at A4U704 pin 3 with an oscilloscope The signal should be 20 mV peak to peak 25 percent with 2 5 V of dc bias If the signal measures outside these limits the fault is prior to the audio amplifier block T If the signal is correct troubleshoot the audio amplifier and speaker IF Section 9 39 HP 8560 E Series 4 LOG AMPLIFIER CAL OSCILLATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 10 7MHz IF IN gt FROM 5 5 138 LOG AMPLIFIER H I SOLAT ION AMP NARROW B eS LO OFFSET COURSE LIMITER WIDE NARROW FILTER uM CONA CX SCALED_IF D INPUT SWITCH 20 dB J10 MS1 C LINER AMPS LINEAR bp i B CONTROL LIMITED IF 10 V LOG NOT L IN LoG VIDEO Tus DEMOD_VIEDO DEMOD SIG 10 6952 MHz NARROW TUNE LOG OFFSET COARSE LOG OFFSET FINE S 42 NARROW __ a MINE in A POWER SUPPLY Q COUNTER PRESCALER 5VF
113. ICGUChCy tates benda d de E 300 MHz 0 Hz Reference level Lesson duode Lad rem bua heed 10 dBm Resolutiom bandwidth 35 Reg ARP side RSEN de pd et E NN E 300 kHz Connect a BNC cable between the HP 85633 CAL OUTPUT and INPUT 502 On the spectrum analyzer press and REF LVL ADJ Use the knob or step keys to adjust the REF LEVEL CAL setting until the MKR reads 10 00 dBm 0 1 dB On the spectrum analyzer press STORE REF LVL Adjustment Procedures 2 29 5 DC Log Amplifier Adjustments There are three DC log adjustments limiter phase linear fidelity and log fidelity Assembly Adjusted A4 log amp cal oscillator Related Performance Tests IF Gain Uncertainty Scale Fidelity Description These three adjustment need only be done under the following conditions Limiter phase Only if a repair is made to blocks F G H I or J Linear fidelity Only if a repair is made to blocks C D F G H I J K 0 IF gain accuracy RBW switching or log fidelity Log fidelity Only if a repair is made to blocks D F H K IF gain accuracy RBW switching or log fidelity If multiple adjustments are required they should be done in the following order 1 Limiter phase 2 Linear fidelity 3 Log fidelity TEST CABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREQUENCY 40 N MHz SYNTHES I ZER REF INPUT BNC CABLE A5 IF
114. MATH setect enter 10 CHS EEX 6 SELECT ENTER SELECT ENTER The frequency counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10 0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 0 010 Hz 10 MHz 5 Locate the FREQ ADJ control on the spectrum analyzer This control is accessible through the center deck of the spectrum analyzer See Figure 2 19 6 Remove the dust cap screw 7 Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the FREQ ADJ control on the A21 OCXO for a frequency counter reading of 0 00 Hz 8 On the HP 5334A B frequency counter select a lo second gate time by pressing GATE TIME 10 GATE The frequency counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10 0 MHz with a resolution of 0 001 Hz 1 mHz 9 Wait at least two gate periods for the frequency counter to stabilize then adjust the FREQ ADJ control on A21 OCXO for a stable frequency counter reading of 0 000 Hz 0 010 Hz 10 Replace the dust cap screw to A21 OCXO 2 50 Adjustment Procedures 12 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO Option 103 12 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO Option 103 Assembly Adjusted Al5 RF assembly Related Performance Test 10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy Option 103 Description The frequency counter is connected to the analyzer CAL OUTPUT The CAL OUTPUT is locked to the 10 MHz frequency reference which yields better effective resolut
115. Med dao dicor peris d tub usd rad deti 0 Hz ao aio 389 5 MHz anie dotes single 3 Use the data entry keys to tune the CENTER FREQ to the values listed in Table 11 4 4 As the sampling oscillator frequency is increased the DVM reading should also increase If the tune voltage is correct but the ADC measures the voltage and determines it to be out of specification troubleshoot the assembly ADC MUX Table 11 4 Center Frequency Tuning Values HP 85623 sampling Center Frequency MHz Oscillator Frequency MHz 2156 3 285 000 2176 3 286 364 21995 287 500 2230 3 288 462 799 3 288 889 2263 3 290 000 2282 3 290 909 2302 3 291 667 2155 3 292 500 2158 3 293 478 2336 3 294 444 2196 3 295 000 1 3 296 000 2378 3 296 471 2410 3 297 000 2422 3 221 222 Check A14J301 10 MHz reference input steps 5 8 6 7 8 Disconnect W37 from A14J301 Connect a test cable from W37 to the input of another spectrum analyzer Tune the other spectrum analyzer to the following settings curii os be eee 10 MHz 2 MHz The amplitude of the 10 MHz reference signal should measure gt 1 dBm If the signal does not measure gt 1 dBm troubleshoot the 10 MHz distribution on 15 and A21 OCXO If not Option 103 Reconnect W37 to A14J301 Synthesizer Section 1 1 9 Check First LO steps 9 11 9 Connect the CAL
116. Mode TRIG SOURCEO TRIG SOURCE1 MUX Input U613 pin 14 U613 pin 2 Pin Number U613 FREE RUN L L 6 VIDEO H L 5 LINE H H 3 EXTERNAL L H 4 ADC Interface Section 8 9 3 Check that the appropriate trigger MUX input signal is present at the trigger MUX output A3U613 pin 7 4 To check the video trigger level DAC connect the positive lead of a DVM to A3J400 pin 1 and the negative DVM lead to A3TP4 5 Press TRIG and VIDEO 6 Press the STEP v key several times while noting the DVM reading and position of the video trigger level on the screen 7 Check that the voltage displayed on the DVM changes by 1 V for each step of the VIDEO TRIG LEVEL 8 If the voltage changes incorrectly proceed as follows a Check the 10 Vdc reference A3U409 pin 4 b While using the front panel knob to adjust the video trigger level check for the presence of pulses on A3U409 pin 15 LDAC2 c While using the front panel knob to adjust the video trigger level check for the presence of pulses A3U409 16 LWRCLK d Check that pulses are present on U409 pin 6 IAO 9 If the LWRCLK and LDAC2 signals are not correct refer to Interface Strobe Select in this chapter 10 If correct trigger pulses are present at the trigger MUX output A3U613 pin 7 but the instrument does not appear to be sweeping proceed as follows Y SWP OH OFF until ON is underlined then a Press PRESET SWEEP and DL SWP 1i 30
117. N Channel Positive Transistor SMB Subminiature NH Nanohenry POLYC Polycarbonate B Type Slip on NM Nanometer POLYE Polyester Connector Nonmetallic POT Potentiometer SMC Subminiature NO Normally Open POZI Pozidriv Recess C Type Threadec Number PREC Precision Connector NOM Nominal PRP Purple Purpose SPCG Spacing NPN Negative Positive PSTN Piston SPDT Single Pole Negative Transistor PT Part Point Double Throw NS Nanosecond Pulse Time SPST Single Pole Non Shorting Nose PW Pulse Width Single Throw NUM Numeric SQ Square NYL Nylon Polyamide SST Stainless Steel Q STL Steel 0 SUBMIN Subminiature Figure of Merit SZ Size DA Over All OD Outside Diameter R OP AMP Operational Amplifier Range Red T IPT Optical Option Resistance Resistor Optional Right Ring T Teeth Reference Temperature P Resistance Resistor Thickness Time Radio Frequency Timed Tooth PA Picoampere Power Rigid Typical Amplifier Round TA Ambient PAN HD Pan Head Rear Temperature PAR Parallel Parity Rivet Riveted Tantalum PB Lead Metal TC Temperature Pushbutton Coefficient IC Printed Circuit THD Thread Threaded Printed Circuit SAWR Surface Acoustic THK Thick Board Wave Resonator TO Package Type 2 P Channel SEG Segment Designation 2 Pad Power Single TPG Tapping Dissipation Silicon TR HD Truss Head E Picofarad Power Square Inch TRMR Trimmer Factor Slide Slow TRN Turn Turns KG Package Slot Slotted TRSN Torsion Replace
118. NL 10 7MHz O ee X m z n E zii P 5 a 4 s o B amp B og U lt 5 21469 d 89 409 v 5 18 16 12 5 H c GD HA 34 CONTROL 18 ic 18 CABLE lt W2 P CONTROL DACS A0 A7 LM Fe 26 TUNE gt 00 07 3 JUNCTION CABLE 74 ss ner 10V_REF 51140 9 22 5 SHEET 4 OF 4 IF SECTION IP OUT e 3 TO A4J3 l IF ASSEMBLY BLOCK DIAGRAM 10 Controller Section The controller section includes the A2 controller assembly 19 HP IB assembly BT1 battery The presence of a display graticule and annotation verifies that most of A2 controller assembly is operating properly Troubleshooting Using the TAM Blank Display Digital Signature Analysis DSA Display Problems Line Generators Blanking Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen
119. No change 6 5 to 7 5 No change No change No change No change change No change change 7 5 to 8 5 18 8 5 to 9 5 18 9 5 to 10 15 ndicates a condition that should not exist suspect broken hardware XTAL Bandpass Adjustments 13 On the spectrum analyzer press SPAN 1 MHz and CAL 14 Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP7 15 On the spectrum analyzer press ADJ CURR IF STATE Wait for the IF ADJUST STATUS message to disappear before continuing to the next step 16 Read the voltage displayed on the DVM If the voltage is less than 6 06 Vdc turn A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 clockwise If the voltage is greater than 1 6 26 Vdc turn XTAL CTR 1 counterclockwise 17 Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the voltage reads 6 16 Vdc 100 mV Adjustment Procedures 2 23 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment Note Caution If the range for the XTAL CTR adjustment is insufficient replace the appropriate factory selected capacitor as listed in Table 2 8 To determine the correct replacement value center the XTAL CTR adjustment and press ADJ CURR IF STATE After the IF ADJUST STATUS message disappears read the DVM display Choose a capacitor value from Table 2 9 based on the DVM reading and the presently loaded capacitor value Table 2 10 lists a few capacitor part numbers Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing to the off position before removing or replacing any shield 18 Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP8 19 A
120. OUTPUT to INPUT 50R 10 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings 11 Center dert ica aite d 300 MHz Spall I E E ELIO treater Le 100 MHz If the first LO is present a signal should be displayed at about 10 dBm approximately 20 MHz from the center frequency If no signal is displayed and ERR 334 LO AMPL is not present suspect the A7 SLODA If no signal is displayed and ERR 334 LO AMPL is present check the All YTO as follows a Set jumper 14J23 to the TEST position b Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Commer Trequefic Y sceau qe o9 du dete dud died E HEATERS 50 Hz CE c PD CP TD 300 MHz SD tod 0 Hz c Connect a power meter directly to the output of the All YTO d Press the spectrum analyzer step up key and measure the YTO output power at each step e Check that the All YTO output power is between 9 and 13 dBm f Set jumper A14J23 to the NORM position and reconnect the YTO Check Al4 frequency control assembly steps 12 18 13 14 15 16 FREQ DTACNOSE and FRAC the minus sign if present Fractional N Oscillator Frequency __ MHz Check A14J304 FRAC N TEST port with a spectrum analyzer for this exact frequency The amplitude should be approximately 10 dBm Disconnect W32 from 14 501 and
121. Organization in Roseville California No maximum or minimum on any mail order There is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local HP office when the orders require billing and invoicing m Prepaid transportation There is a small handling charge for each order B No invoices To provide these advantages a check or money order must accompany each order Mail order forms and specific ordering information is available through your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service office See Table 1 5 Replaceable Parts 5 1 Direct Phone Order System Within the USA a phone order system is available for regular and hotline replacement parts service A toll free phone number is available and Mastercard and Visa are accepted Regular Orders The toll free phone number 800 227 8164 is available 6 am to 5 pm Pacific standard time Monday through Friday Regular orders have a four day delivery time Hotline Orders Hotline service for ordering emergency parts is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year There is an additional hotline charge to cover the cost of freight and special handling The toll free phone number is 800 227 8164 is available 6 am to 5 pm Pacific standard time Monday through Friday and 916 785 8HOT for after hours weekends and holidays Hotline orders are normally delivered the following business day Parts List Format The following information is listed for each part 1 The Hewlett Packa
122. Right Side Frame 0000090 e ILICE yt e Assembly Replacement 4 35 Second Converter Caution Turn off the spectrum analyzer power when replacing the AI3 second converter assembly Failure to turn off the power may result in damage to the assembly Removal 1 Place the spectrum analyzer upside down on the work bench 2 Disconnect W33 coax 81 and W35 coax 92 from the AI3 assembly 3 Disconnect W48 coax 8 from A13J3 4 Disconnect W57 from A13J1 5 Remove the four screws securing AI3 to the main deck and remove the assembly 6 Disconnect ribbon cable W13 from the AI3 assembly Replacement 1 Connect ribbon cable W13 to the AI3 assembly QN A W N Secure to the spectrum analyzer main deck using four panhead screws Connect W33 coax 81 to A13J4 600 MHz IN jack Connect W35 coax 92 to A13J2 310 7 MHz OUT jack Connect W48 coax 8 A13J3 Route W48 under 35 coax 92 Connect W57 to A13J1 Ensure that all of the connections on W56 FL2 W57 and on W48 are torqued to 113 Ncm 10 in Ib 4 36 Assembly Replacement Procedure 9 Al4 and A15 Assemblies Procedure 9 Al4 and Al5 Assemblies Removal 1 Remove the spectrum analyzer cover as described in Procedure Spectrum Analyzer Cover 2 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame 3 Remove the eight screws 1 holding the and 15 assemblies to the bottom of the
123. Scan pass simplified Synthesizer Section EP simplified Al4 Assembly Block pian Simplified 15 Assembly Block Diagram Frequency Control Block Diagram RF Assembly Block Diagram 14 and 15 Test Connectors A14J10 Solder Side of Al4 Ignore Pin Numbers on Mating Connection 7 First LO Distribution Amplifier Drive HP 85623 Rear Panel LO SWP Output HP 85623 Signal at A14J15 Pin 1 10 MHz Reference at A15J302 10 MHz TTL Reference at U304 Pin 13 Figure 12 8 RF Section Troubleshooting Block Dorri Simplified Section Block Diagram Al7 Test Connector Probe Power Socket A6 Power Supply Block Dian Al7 CRT Driver Block Diagram 9 28 9 28 9 29 9 30 9 3 9 35 9 36 9 36 9 37 9 37 9 4 9 45 10 3 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 17 11 3 11 3 11 11 11 12 11 14 11 15 11 25 11 34 1 1 42 1 1 47 1 1 48 1 1 49 11 51 11 53 12 2 12 6 12 12 12 14 12 14 12 21 12 22 12 25 13 2 13 5 13 7 13 19 13 21 Contents 13 1 HP 85623 Interconnect Block Diagram Contents 14 A 5 Tables 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 0 2 10 2 11 2 12 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 2 5 3 7 1 8 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 5 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 9 9 2 9 3 10 1 10 2 11 1 11 2 Instrument Variations Service Kit Contents Static Safe Accessories R
124. Sea ow eee as POS PEAK 2 Check that HHOLD A3U526 11 has 18 wide pulses every 128 ys 3 Check that HODD U408 pin 5 is a square wave with a period of 16 7 ms 2 x sweep time 600 4 Check LPOS RST U422 pin 4 for 200 ns low going pulses every 128 ps 5 Check LNEG RST A3U422 pin 12 for 200 ns low going pulses every 128 ps 6 Set the detector mode to NORMAL and check that LNEG RST A3U422 pin 12 has two pulses spaced 40 ys apart and then a single pulse approximately 88 ps from the second pulse 7 Check HMUX SELO A3U408 3 and HMUX_SEL1 A3U408 pin 9 according to Table 8 8 Table 8 8 HMUX_SELO 1 versus Detector Mode NORMAL SAMPLE POS PEAK NEG PEAK 8 20 ADC Interface Section Rosenfell Detector Refer to function block S of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information If both HPOS HLDNG and HNEG_HLDNG are high during the same bucket HROSENFELL will also be set high This indicates that the video signal probably consists of noise since it rose and fell during the same period The HROSENFELL signal is valid only when the NORMAL rosenfell detector mode is selected 1 Remove anything connected to the HP 85613 or HP 85633 front panel INPUT 502 connector Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows qe me a eed coolers 300 MHz Sx oo sao peer tees biens es Ne sa ob
125. Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The flash ADC U35 converts the analog video signal into 8 bit digital values at a fixed rate of 12 megasamples per second Note When measuring voltages or waveforms on the Al fast ADC assembly connect the ground or common lead to the ground plane trace on the 16 assembly This digital ground plane is totally isolated from the chassis 1 Press on the Option 007 spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Center Ji6quelcy Hound heed ehe dee 300 MHz Spal teas Sets 0 Hz Reference devel cca poe Caio dina 20 dBm oh eode TOUR ee toate hoes 5 dB DIV SVEP ING 2258 4644 ae eS Se Ex REA Beek ae quem a ates 20ms 2 Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 5022 connector 3 Pins 4 through 10 ADC7 ADC1 and 21 ADCO of 035 should all be high logic 1 corresponding to an ADC digital count of 255 for the analog input of 2 volts or greater 4 Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal from the INPUT 50 connector 5 Pins 4 through 10 ADC7 ADC1 and pin 21 ADCO of U35 should all be low logic 0 corresponding to an ADC digital count of zero for the analog input of volts or less 8 32 ADC Interface Section Peak Pit Detection Refer to function block J of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Anal
126. Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center frequency 300 MHz OPA OTT TR 1 MHz ua Tad Ep e e ard a ded tet o t aine gti tei 50ms 1 1 40 Synthesizer Section 16 Use a DVM to monitor the voltage at A14J18 pin 4 The voltage should measure approximately 8 45 Vdc 17 Set the spectrum analyzer sweep time to 100 ms The voltage at 18 pin 4 should measure approximately 4 21 Vdc 18 Set the spectrum analyzer sweep time to 200 ms The voltage at 18 pin 4 should measure approximately 2 1 Vdc 19 The analog switches and comparators should be set as listed in Table 11 16 20 Check that U312D opens when the sweep time is set to 2 seconds 21 Check that U312B and U312C close when the sweep time is set to 20 seconds Table 11 16 Settings for Switches and Comparators Sweep Time Switch Switch Switch Comparator Comparator U312B U312C U312D U319A Pin 1 U319B Pin 7 Open Open Closed Open Open Open Closed Closed Open First LO Span Problems Multiband Sweeps During multiband sweeps the sweep ramp at A14J15 pin 15 should go from 0 V to 10 V for each band or portions of a band covered See function block of frequency control schematic in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzers Component Level Information binder However the scan ramp at A14U3254A pin 1 is scaled according to the percentage of the total span that the band is covering See function bloc
127. Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and HP 85623 spectrum analyzer reference level in 10 dB steps down to 110 dBm At each step the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer should be close to the reference level Reconnect W27 coax 3 to A4J3 and cycle the spectrum analyzer power Press STOP REALIGN when it appears On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press SWEEP SINGLE CAL and IF ADJ 8 The offset DAC A4U102 pin 2 should now be at its default value of approximately 2 45 V The voltage at U601 pin 3 should be approximately 0 V for a DAC output of 2 45 V If this default offset voltage is incorrect DAC U102 is the most probable cause IF Section 9 15 Video Output 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press PRESET FREQUENC 100 Hz amp ELITUE 10 dBm GECSWE CAL and IF ADJ 2 Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector 3 Disconnect W54 coax 2 from A4J4 Connect a short SMB to SMB cable from A4J4 to an SMB tee and connect W54 to the tee Connect a test cable from the tee to the input of an oscilloscope 300 Miz SPAN 4 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows AMPUtude Seals VASE ERES MARIS TELE 200 mV div succ c r 400 mV dat ars dc bacca ee eee ctf 50 us division The oscilloscope should display a 4 8 kHz sine wave Disconnect
128. Start orice dete a a ar qox Due Ae et abe esee e ad dea ipe End 10 MHz gt 2 9 GHz 3 Verify that a 1 2 V to 4 8 V ramp approximately is present at A14U331 2 4 If this ramp is not present troubleshoot the main FM sweep switch See function block H of Al4 frequency control schematic 5 Measure the output of the main coil tune DAC at A14J18 pin 3 At the frequency settings of step 2 this should be 2 48 V If the voltage is not 2 48 V troubleshoot the main coil tune DAC See function block E of Al4 frequency control schematic YTO FM Coil Span Problems LO Spans 2 01 MHz to 20 MHz In YTO FM coil spans the YTO loop is locked and then opened while the sweep ramp is summed into the FM coil The FM coil sensitivity is corrected by changing the sensitivity of the FM coil driver 1 Perform the YTO Adjustment procedure in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If the YTO adjustments cannot be performed continue with this procedure 2 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center ATEQUCNCY ots 300 MHz Sell xxm une dos 20 MHz SWEEP TING AM Pr c r 50ms 3 Check for the presence of a 0 V to 10 V sweep ramp at A14J15 pin 14 input to the main FM sweep switch Refer to function block of frequency control schematic 4 Check for the presence of a 0 V to 5 V sweep ramp at A14U405 pin 6 YTO FM coil dr
129. Switches in SIG ID Oscillator Opt 008 SIG ID Oscillator Opt 008 Only Check Second Converter Control Al3 Second Converter Check SIG ID Oscillator Opt 008 Signal ID Oscillator Adjustment in Chapter 2 Check SIG ID Oscillator Operation Opt 008 SIG ID Oscillator Opt 008 Only Check Third Converter Low and High Band Problems step 10 RF Section 12 3 Table 12 2 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Connector Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Measured Signal Lines 14 16 Offset DAC MS6 YTF Gain and Offset Input MS2 YTF Gain DAC MSI YTF Drive MS3 Band Switch Driver M S8 A14J17 Main Coil Coarse DAC 14 18 TODA Drive MS5 MS6 MS7 MS8 14 19 Second Conv PIN Switch Second Conv Mixer Bias Second Conv Drain Bias Second Conv Doubler Bias Second Conv Driver Bias First Mixer Drive Switch First Mixer Drive DAC 147302 57 A153400 MS6 3rd LO Driver Amp MS1 MS8 SN ID Collector Bias RF Gain Control Test MS1 MS3 15 901 Revision MS3 External Mixer Switch MS1 MS8 Signal ID Switch MS5 MS6 External Mixer Bias MS7 Low Band Problems 1 Disconnect all inputs from the front panel INPUT 50 connector 2 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center eov Repo ty Ut 0 Hz DAE oe Ce a aps 1 MHz Miput atenat cede kie eee ee LEEREN REX i da d ees 0 dB 3 The LO feedthrough amplitude observed on the display sh
130. The outputs should be high when the noninverting input is greater than the threshold voltage of 1 3 Vdc 6 If A3U104 and A3U109 are working properly set the and REF LYL to 0 dBm 7 Monitor the voltage at A3TP14 while switching the spectrum analyzer between 10 dB div and 2 dB div The voltage should switch between 0 8 and 0 4 Vdc 8 If the voltage at A3TP14 is incorrect suspect either A3Q220 or A3Q221 9 The Video MUX will appear faulty if A3CR109 is shorted or leaky Diode A3CR109 clamps the voltage at A3TP14 to 0 4 V when in log expand with less than 0 8 V at J101 To confirm this failure lift the cathode of diode A3CR109 and perform steps 1 through 7 again CONT SCL or 10 To return the spectrum analyzer to automatic sweep press swEEP SWEE press PRESET Video Filter Refer to function block V of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The spectrum analyzer uses digital filtering for 1 Hz to 100 Hz video bandwidths An RC low pass filter is used for 300 Hz to 3 MHz video bandwidths Various series resistances and shunt capacitances switch into the video filter to change its cutoff frequency When sample detection is selected the effective video bandwidth is limited to approximately 450 kHz by the track and hold circuitry When Gated Video is selected the video signal is gated turned on periodically for a set duration of time This func
131. The program prompts the operator to make appropriate equipment connections if the correct equipment setup is not detected 3 4 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Using Frequency Response Adjustment Software Loading the Program Load HP BASIC into the computer HP BASIC choices are m BASIC 2 0 and extensions 2 1 BASIC 3 0 or 4 0 which must include the following binaries MAT IO GRAPH GRAPHX PDEV HPIB MS CLOCK C580 DISC KBD For configuration instructions refer to the BASIC Operating Manual Next insert the frequency response adjustment software disk into the disk drive then type LOAD FR_END8562 1 Note A double sided disk drive must be used The frequency response adjustment software will not fit on a single sided formatted disk Press on HP 9000 Series 200 computers or on HP 9000 Series 300 computers to load the software and start the program running Program Operation The frequency response adjustment consists of three menus They are the Conditions Menu the Adjust Menu and the Sensor Utilities Menu which are accessed from the Conditions Menu Program operation is controlled through a combination of softkeys and user prompts Some prompts primarily in the Conditions and Sensor Utilities Menus require computer keyboard entries Terminate keyboard entries with the RETURN or key Most prompts however tell the user what to do next or provide informational messages If the message any key follo
132. This is usually 1 2 All of the power supply indicator LEDs along the edge of the A2 controller assembly should be lit 3 The rear panel CRT 110 VDC ON indicator might not be lit even if the 110 V is present 4 Connect the TAM probe cable to A2J11 5 Press MODULE SOFT SOFT KE 6 The yellow LED next to A2J11 should blink approximately ten times If the LED fails to blink correctly troubleshoot the digital section of the A2 controller assembly Y 1 The top softkey is 1 10 2 Controller Section 7 Move the probe cable to A2J202 Press SOFT KEY 1 and wait 5 seconds 8 Press SOFT KEY 4 The results should be sent to the printer 9 If a failure is indicated in any of these tests the fault lies on the A2 controller assembly 10 IL 12 13 14 15 To obtain more information a Press the step down key 1 one less time than the test number For example press it twice for the third test on the list b Press SOFT KEY 3 then SOFT SOFT KEY 6 A2 CONTROLLER J201 J202 REVISION CONNECTOR 411 TEST SP17 CONNECTOR Figure 10 A2 Test Connectors Press SOFT KEY 4 The results will be sent to the printer Follow the procedure in step 9 to obtain more information on any of the tests If no failures were indicated in testing the A2 controller move the probe cable to A17J4 Press SOFT KEY 1 and wait 5 seconds Press SQFT KEY 4 The results will be sen
133. Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Adjustment Procedure l Press PRESE Set the HP 85623 switch to off and disconnect the line cord Remove the spectrum analyzer cover fold down the and 15 board assemblies and connect the line cord Connect the equipment as illustrated in Figure 2 25 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on Move the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position The jumper is on the edge of the A2 board assembly and can be moved without folding the board down Press on the HP 85623 and set the controls as follows ente de due toe as ened twee cies ab heel ere 4 0 GHz cerca moth 0 Hz SERVICE CAL DATA PRESEL ADJ then PRESET ALL DACS Press INSTR PRESET on the HP 8340A and set the controls as follows pL PM CFT RET CUR UP 4 0 GHz Power Vel ustedes uA pari ICE 04 10 dBm Frequency standard switch rear TUTTI EXT Press PRESEL OFFSET on the HP 85623 Use the front panel knob to peak the displayed trace Record the offset DAC value below Offset at 4 0 GHz Set the HP 85623 center frequency and the HP 8340A to 12 16 GHz On the HP 85623 press CAL MORE 1 OF 2 SERVICE GAL DATA PRESEL ADJ then PRESEL OFFSET Key in the offset value noted in step 6 Press PRESEL SLOPE on the HP 8562E Use the front panel knob to peak the disp
134. VDC ON LED is lit the high voltage supplies should also be operating The high voltage supplies will be turned off if the HV SHUT DOWN line is low The A6 power supply feeds 5 V to the A2 controller through W1 The A2 assembly distributes this 5 V to the AI7 CRT driver through W7 17 sends 5 V back to 6 as the HV SHUT DOWN signal on W8 As a result A2 17 1 W7 W8 must all be in place for the high voltage supplies to operate 13 6 Display Power Supply Section 5 If all of the power supply indicators along the outside edge of the A2 controller assembly are lit the power supply is probably working properly e md SK1122 Figure 13 3 Probe Power Socket 6 Press FREQUENCY 1 GHz 7 Allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for at least 1 minute 8 While observing the display set the LINE switch off If a green flash appears on the display the CRT is probably working properly troubleshoot either the A2 controller or the Al7 CRT driver 9 If a flash does not occur on the display the A2 controller AGA1 HV module AI7 CRT driver or 18 1 CRT might be at fault Blanking Signal 1 Connect an oscilloscope probe to A2J202 pin 3 Connect the oscilloscope ground lead to TP3 Set the oscilloscope to the following settings SWeep ite DAL sas aba aen ees 2 ms div 1
135. a signal source to A15J801 Set the source to the following settings lg sno METRICS 310 7 MHz Amplitude 2 jac o eant Male 30 dBm Caution For troubleshooting it is recommended that you use an active probe such as an HP 85024A and another spectrum analyzer If an HP 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer having dc coupled inputs such as the HP 8566A B HP 8569A B and the HP 8562A B either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input Failure to do this can result in damage to the spectrum analyzer or the probe 4 Use an active probe with another spectrum analyzer to measure the signal at A15TP601 function block C The signal should measure 17 dBm 4 dB confirming the operation of the 2nd IF Amplifier 5 Use an active probe with another spectrum analyzer to measure the 300 MHz signal into the LO port of the third mixer The signal should measure at least 20 dBm 6 Measure the power of the mixer 10 7 MHz IF output The signal level should be approximately 22 dBm 7 Move the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position 8 While measuring the 10 7 MHz IF output signal at the mixer adjust the signal source until the level of the 10 7 MHz IF is 40 dBm RF Section 12 17 9 On the HP 85623 press SGL_swP CAL IF ADJ 10 LATNESS Increase the gain of the
136. analyzer Check main coil tune DAC steps 45 49 Verify the voltages listed in Table 11 9 Table 11 9 Main Coil Coarse and Fine DACs Voltages Measurement Points Voltages A14J17 pin 2 A14J17 pin 3 A14J17 pin 5 Place jumper A14J23 in the NORMAL position Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center edis Bente Ute ates 300 MHz 0 Hz Place jumper A14J23 in the TEST position Measure the output of the main coil tune DAC A14J18 pin 3 with a DVM Refer to function block E of 14 frequency control schematic Synthesizer Section 11 29 50 If the spectrum analyzer center frequency is 300 MHz the voltage at A14J18 pin 3 should measure 3 35 V 10 25 V The voltage may also be determined from the following equation V first LO Frequency 2 95 GHz x 2 654 V GHz 51 The voltage at A14U330 pin 2 should measure 3 4 V f0 2 Vdc This represents a current setting the YTO to approximately 2 95 GHz 52 Return jumper A14J23 to the NORMAL position 1 1 30 Synthesizer Section Unlocked Fractional N PLL Operation The fractional N oscillator is used in the HP 85633 as a reference for the first LO phase locked loop It provides the 1 Hz start frequency resolution for the first LO and is the means by which the first LO is swept in LO spans of 2 MHz or less fractional N spans The prescaler fractional N d
137. assembly If the error disappears look for a short on W2 or another assembly connecting to it To isolate a short on W2 reconnect W2 to A3J2 and disconnect W2 from all other assemblies Repeat the Automatic Fault Isolation routine If the analog data bus error is still present W2 is shorted If the error disappears reconnect the other assemblies one at a time and repeat the procedure Once the faulty assembly is reconnected to W2 the error should reappear 6 4 ADC Interface Section Table 8 2 Automatic Fault Isolation References Check ADC ASM Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check ADC MUX ADC Start Stop Control Analog Bus Drivers Analog Bus Timing Interface Strobe Select Keyboard Interface Negative Peak Detector Peak Detector Reset Positive Peak Detector Real Time DAC Ramp Counter RF Gain DACs Rosenfell Detector RPG Interface Track and Hold Trigger Variable Gain Amplifier VGA Video Filter Video Filter Buffer Amplifier Video MUX Suspected Circuit Indicated Manual Procedure to Perform by Automatic Fault Isolation ADC ASM ADC MUX ADC Start Stop Control Automatic Fault Isolation tn this chapter Analog Bus Drivers Automatic Fault Isolation in this chapter Analog Bus Timing Interface Strobe Select Keyboard RPG Problems Positive Negative Peak Detectors steps 3 t
138. bed EU Oren 5 dBm 5 Connect the microwave source to A15U100J1 A 66 7 MHz signal at approximately 0 dBm should be displayed on the other spectrum analyzer 6 Use an active probe spectrum analyzer combination to measure the signal at the following test points 15 101 66 7 MHz 8 dBm A15 TP201 296 MHz 4 9 dBm 7 If a correct signal is seen at 15 201 but the signal at A15TP101 is wrong proceed as follows Use an oscilloscope to measure the signals at the following test points A15J400 pin 1 0 8 Vdc to 1 6 Vdc lt 0 5 Vp p variation A15J400 pin 3 0 8 Vdc to 1 6 Vde lt 0 5 Vp p variation If these levels are wrong perform the Power and Sampler Match Adjustments in the sampler oscillator adjustment procedure Refer to Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If adjusting the sampler match does not bring the signal at A15TP101 within specification when the signal at A15TP201 is correct the A15U100 sampler is defective 8 The sampler IF signal at A15J101 is 60 MHz to 96 MHz at 10 dBm to 5 dBm If the signal at 15 101 is correct but the signal at A15J101 is wrong the fault lies in the sampler IF circuitry Continue with the following steps 9 Set the HP 85633 to the following settings Center drequefioy 300 MHz ea Sd 0 Hz Synthesizer Section 11 45 10 Set a microwave source to the foll
139. both the A2 and A3 assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer as a unit 6 Fold both the A4 and A5 assemblies out of the spectrum analyzer as a unit 7 Remove the cables from the assembly being removed as illustrated in Figure 4 8 8 Remove the two screws that attach the assembly being removed to its two mounting hinges Caution Do not torque shield TORX screws to more than 8 inch pounds Applying excessive torque will cause the screws to stretch Assembly Replacement 4 15 Procedure 5 A2 4 and A5 Assemblies W4 5 129 Figure 4 7 A2 A3 A4 and A5 Assembly Removal Replacement 1 2 3 A 5 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side on the work bench Attach the assembly being installed to the two chassis hinges with two panhead screws Leave the assembly in the folded out position and attach ribbon cables W1 and W2 Attach all coaxial cables to the assembly as illustrated in Figure 4 8 Locate the cable clip on the inside of the right side frame Make sure that the coaxial cables are routed properly on the clip as illustrated in Figure 4 9 Lay the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies flat against each other in the folded out position Make sure that no cables become pinched between the two assemblies 4 18 Assembly Replacement Procedure 5 2 4 and A5 Assemblies Figure 4 8 Assembly Cables 1 of 2 Assembly Replacement 4 17 Procedure 5 2 4 and A5 Assembli
140. connecting a frequency counter to A15J301 and verify that the reference frequency is 10 MHz 40 Hz after a 5 minute warmup period If a 10 MHz signal gt 1 V peak to peak is not present at A15J301 refer to the 10 MHz Reference in Chapter 12 RF Section Measure the signal at TP301 with an oscilloscope Refer to function block M of 15 RF schematic Measure the signal at U502 pin 11 with an oscilloscope Refer to function block X of 15 RF schematic This signal should be TTL levels at 10 MHz with a 60 percent duty cycle If TTL level signals approximately 10 MHz are not present check signals backwards through the loop to find a fault in the signal path Measure the signals at the following test points with an active probe spectrum analyzer combination Junction of 100 MHz 2 5 dBm 2 dB C570 and C571 Junction of R715 100 MHz 3 dBm 2 dB R716 R567 and R568 U700 pin 3 100 MHz 16 5 dBm 2 dB U700 pin 1 100 MHz 8 5 dBm 2 dB If an approximately 10 MHz TTL signal is present at U502 pin 11 with 60 percent duty cycle and the RF portion of the phase lock loop is functioning the fault probably lies in the phase frequency detector or the 100 MHz lock loop integrator Check phase frequency detector steps 17 22 17 18 19 20 2l Monitor U504 pin 5 and U503 pin 9 with an oscilloscope These are the two outputs of the phase frequency detector Refer to function block 0 of 15 RF schematic A locke
141. data problem finding bucket 2 of the span accuracy calibration sweep This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator span attenuator or main FM coil sweep switches on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Cannot find x intersection for bucket 2 of the span accuracy calibration sweep This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator span attenuator or main FM coil sweep switches on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section General Troubleshooting 7 27 360 SPAC CAL 361 SPAC CAL Automatic IF Errors 400 AMPL lt 300 401 AMPL 300 402 AMPL 1K 403 AMPL 3K The start bucket correction is out of range This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Sweep Generator Circuit in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section The percent of span correction is out of range This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Sweep Generator Circuit in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section 400 to 599 These error codes are generated when the automatic IF adjustment routine detects a fault This routine first adjusts amplitude parameters then resolution bandwidths in this sequence 300 kHz 1 MHz 100 kHz 30 kHz 10 kHz 3 kHz 1 kHz 300 Hz 100 Hz 30 Hz 10 Hz 3 Hz 1 Hz a
142. diode CR503 c If the signal level at the CAL OUTPUT is still less than 10 dBm with CR503 shorted out troubleshoot the RF forward path through amplifier Q505 The signal amplitude decreases d If the CAL OUTPUT signal level is greater than 10 dBm troubleshoot the PIN diode attenuator the detector or the feedback path 29 Measure the detector voltage at A15J502 pin 14 The voltage should measure approximately 0 3 Vdc when the CAL OUTPUT signal is at 10 dBm This voltage should change with adjustment of A15R561 CAL AMPTD 30 Check that the voltage at U507A Pin 3 is 1 7 Vdc If this voltage is not correct there may be a problem with the 10 V reference 11 18 Synthesizer Section 31 Measure voltage at U507B pin 5 while adjusting R561 This is the temperature compensated adjustable voltage reference to which the detected voltage is compared It should vary between 0 15 V and 1 6 V 32 Adjust R561 to its limits and verify that the output U507B pin 7 measures approximately 1 Vdc at one limit and 12 Vdc at the other limit Third LO Driver Amplifier The third LO driver amplifier Q503 amplifies the 300 MHz from the 300 MHz distribution amplifier to a sufficient level to drive the LO port of the double balanced mixer During the SIG ID operation diodes CR501 and CR502 turn off the 3rd LO driver amplifier in order to minimize the amount of 300 MHz going to the double balanced mixer Check level at amplifier input st
143. flatness compensation amplifiers to maximum by 0 using the data keys This sets the gains in the flatness compensation amplifiers to their maximum values 10 Connect the other spectrum analyzer to 15 601 and measure the 10 7 MHz IF signal level The signal should measure greater than 10 dBm If the signal level is incorrect continue with step 13 11 Enter 4095 into the HP 85623 Flatness Data The signal level at 15 601 should measure less than 36 dBm This sets the gain of flatness compensation amplifiers to a minimum If the signal level 1s incorrect continue with step 13 12 Check that the gain stages are properly biased and functioning 13 Check the attenuator stages and flatness compensation control circuitry a For minimum gain flatness data equals 4095 RF GAIN A15U909 pin 10 should be at 1 6 Vdc and the current through each section as measured across R667 or R668 should be about 7 mA b For maximum gain flatness data equals 0 RF GAIN A15U909 pin 10 should be at approximately 0 Vdc and the current through each attenuator section should be close to 0 mA Caution As long as the flatness data just entered is not stored the previously stored flatness data will be present after the power is cycled 14 Move the A2 controller assembly WR PROT WR ENA jumper to the WR PROT position 15 Reconnect the cable to A15J801 Flatness Compensation Control Refer to function block on 15 RF Section Schema
144. front frame center support and the right side frame Use caution to avoid damaging any cables 4 Attach the attenuator to the center support with one panhead screw 1 See Figure 4 14 5 Attach the attenuator to the right side frame with one flathead screw 1 See Figure 4 15 6 Reconnect W34 to AT 7 Connect semirigid cables 41 and W43 to A9 A10 and the RF input connector Torque all SMA connections to 113 Ncm 10 4 32 Assembly Replacement A9 Input Attenuator TMM NA oo SSE gt x C_J 2 50 2 amp 0 e AD oes OLJOCI LJ 205 e mq Figure 4 15 9 Mounting Screw at Right Side Frame T Assembly Replacement 4 33 A10 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Removal Caution Do NOT remove the brackets from the AIO assembly If these brackets are removed and reinstalled the performance of AIO will be altered A new or rebuilt 10 assembly includes new mounting brackets already attached to it Disconnect 16 ribbon cable from the AIO assembly Use a 5 16 inch wrench to remove W43 W44 and W46 from A10J3 J2 and J4 respectively Remove W56 FL2 W57 as a unit and disconnect W48 from A10J1 Remove four screws 1 securing AIO to the center deck These screws are located on the top side of the center deck as illustrated in Figure 4 16 4 Places 3 Places ANA m L 129e Figure
145. gain during crystal bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep problem Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep problem Unable to adjust 1 kHz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep problem Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep problem Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth Crystal sweep problem Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole Unable to adjust symmetry of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole General Troubleshooting 7 33 526 927 920 929 990 531 99 2 252 534 EDS 2 537 220 32 540 550 551 222 322 224 222 220 Dod 558 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 300 ID CALOSC ID LOGBD LOG AMPL ADC timeout during IF ADJUS
146. gated in U511B by HBKT PULSE The gated signal clocks divide by 16 counters U703A and U703B These counters are cascaded to form a divide by 256 counter The MSB of this counter CD7 clocks the CLKO input of U700 The frequency of CD7 is a function of COUNTER RES as shown in Table 10 2 If timer U700 overflows OUTO will be set and U701B clocked generating CNTOVFLIRQ which will interrupt the CPU If IRQAK2 is high HBKT PULSE will clock U701A generating FREQCNTLIRQ Upon receiving the FREQCNTLIRQ interrupt the CPU latches the CDO to CD7 onto the BID bus by setting LCDRD low counter data read low and reading the counter data from the BID bus The CPU will also read the data from the timer U700 by setting L8254CS and LCNTLRD low placing the timer data on the BID bus The CPU resets U701A by setting IRQAK2 low via the BID bus and latch U506 Table 10 2 Gate Times Counter Res Gate Time A2TP16 A2TP15 U511 pin 3 high state 10 Hz 2 MHz 4 18 kHz 100 Hz 1 kHz 2 MHz 141 8 Hz 10 kHz 2 MHz 41 8 Hz 100 kHz 2 MHz 41 8 Hz MHz 2 MHz 141 8 Hz 15 FREQ COUNT input x Gate Time 256 10 14 Controller Section Disconnect W22 from A2J8 If a 10 MHz TTL level signal is not present at the end of W22 continue with step 3 If a I0 MHz signal is present at W22 proceed as follows a Reconnect 22 to A2J8 b Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings SIDON Ree cen ea
147. illustrated in Figure 2 24 Do not connect the SMA cable to the spectrum analyzer 3 Move the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position The jumper is on the edge of the A2 board assembly and can be moved without folding the board down 4 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on On the spectrum analyzer press CONFIG EXT MXR PRE UNPR UNPR AUX CTRL EXTERNAL MIXER AMPTD CORRECT then 5 Press 1 or J to display the conversion loss value for each frequency listed in Table 2 12 Record any conversion loss reading not equal to 30 dB in Table 2 12 at the appropriate frequency 6 If all conversion loss values equal 30 dB skip to step 7 otherwise continue to step a a Refer to Table 2 12 and press or J to select a frequency at which the conversion loss value does not equal 30 dB b Use the spectrum analyzer front panel keys to set the conversion loss value to 30 dB c Repeat steps a and b for all frequencies having a conversion loss value other than 30 dB 7 Press INSTR PREsET the HP 8340A B and set the controls as follows V ITBHU SIG UC sie eds kot hina rue 310 7 MHz Power level OUS ane aie od Bis ac 30 dBm 2 58 Adjustment Procedures 15 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Non Option 327 Table 2 12 Conversion Loss Data Frequency GHz Conversion Loss dB Z30 dB 18 ___
148. into the 24 MHz bandpass filter The 24 MHz bandpass filter consists of R5 C8 L1 C9 C10 L2 C11 L3 C12 C14 and R6 Inverters U6A and U6B provide amplification of the 24 MHz clock to produce CMOS levels and also buffer the 24 MHz clock output 8 38 ADC Interface Section Clock and Sample Rate Generator Refer to function block C of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The clock and sample rate generator takes the 24 MHz reference clock signal and generates all of the various clock signals used on the Al fast ADC assembly The sample rate generator consists of CMOS latch U15 CMOS counters U14 and U16 and CMOS flip flops U7B and U9A The sample rate generator only controls the rate at which the static RAM address counter l amp bit circular address counter and the 16 bit post trigger counter are clocked ACLK and PCLK respectively The sample rate generator also controls the number of flash ADC samples taken per bucket The range of the sample rate is 1 sample per bucket 12 MHz rate to 256 samples per bucket less than 12 MHz rate SCLK 1 is an input to PAL U1 block A and affects the LP Q signal to ensure that the first sample of a bucket is always clocked into latch U30 block J and written into static RAM U32 block K when the detection mode is peak or pit and the sample rate is less than 12 MHz Refer to Table 8 12 LP Q Truth Table in
149. least significant byte strobe The Al fast ADC assembly can be accessed by firmware on the A2 controller assembly at two logical addresses When the address line ADDR3 is low the primary address is selected When the ADDR3 is high the secondary address is selected The data transfers between the Al6 fast ADC assembly and the A2 controller assembly are clocked by the two strobe lines MSB STRB and LSB STRB 16 bit word transfers occur as two sequential byte transfers the most significant byte first followed by the least significant byte The primary address ADDR3 low contains the 16 bit control word written by the firmware on the A2 controller assembly The secondary address ADDR3 high supports both 8 bit byte and 16 bit word reads and writes There is no read write line on the Al6 fast ADC assembly to control the direction of data transfer The fast ADC is preconfigured to read or write by setting the appropriate bits in the 16 bit control word Refer to Table 8 13 If the control word is not correct it may result in a bus conflict Table 8 13 Control Word at Primary Address U3 and U4 Bit Mnemonic State Description Bit 0 WRITE Allows samples to be written to FADC memory All on board clocks running and samples being written to FADC memory FADC memory cannot be read by A2 controller in this mode All on board clocks turned off and no samples being written to FADC memory FADC memory can be read by A2 controller
150. linear To obtain the 5 dB div scale the CPU manipulates the trace data from the 10 dB div scale To obtain the 2 dB div scale the video signal is amplified and offset so that top screen in 10 dB div corresponds to top screen in 2 dB div To obtain the 1 dB div scale the CPU manipulates trace data from the 2 dB div scale In 2 dB div Log Offset Log Expand amplifies the top 20 dB of the display This is done by offsetting the video signal by 0 8 V and providing a gain of 5 to the top 0 2 V of the video signal The 0 8 V offset is accomplished by sinking 2 mA through R114 by current source U105 Q101 I On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN ZERO SPAN CAL and IF 4 DJ OFF ADC Interface Section 8 15 Disconnect 26 coax 2 from A3J101 and connect the output of a function generator to A3J101 Set the function generator to the following settings Gir A om Sinewave V pk to pk PEOI oue den ty oes mite adipi denim Karton pd A 500 mV Iu M Tr rU 90 Hz Set the spectrum analyzer sweep time to 50 ms 5 Adjust the function generator amplitude and offset until the sine wave fills the entire 10 11 graticule area Measure and note the function generator peak to peak voltage using an oscilloscope Vao aB div V set the spectrum analyzer to 2 dB div Readjust the function generator amplitude and offset until the sine wave again fills the entire grati
151. logic probe This is the strobe for the A5 IF assembly 12 Press and check that pulses occur when toggling between 10 dBm and 20 dBm 13 Monitor A3U401B pin 9 LLOG_STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the A4 log amplifier Cal oscillator assembly 14 Press and check that pulses occur when toggling between LINEAR LOG DB DIV REF LVL settings of and Interface Strobe Select Refer to function block K of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Interface strobe select generates the various strobes used by circuits on the A3 Interface Assembly Table 8 10 and Table 8 11 are the truth tables for demultiplexers A3U410 and A3U500 Table 8 10 Demultiple A3U410 Truth Table IA2 pl Eos EE ES EM SES T LE ee pet JESUM E gt O Selected Output Line Pin 15 LSCAN KBD Pin 14 LDACU1 Pin 13 LDACI Pin 12 LDAC2 Pin 11 LDAC3 Pin 10 Pin 9 LTIMER Pin 7 LADC REGI Table 8 1 1 Demultiple er A3U500 Truth Table gt IO Selected Output Line TAO Pin 15 LSENSE KBD Pin 14 LINT PRIOR Pin 13 LADC DATAI Pin 12 LDAC DATAO Pin 11 HCNTR LDO Pin 10 HONTR_LD1 Pin 9 LRPG_RD Pin 7 LADC REGO E m pm Ec ESI QI UEB ES 8 30 ADC Interface Section Al6 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits Option 007 The fast ADC consists of video signal scaling and limiting amplifiers an 8 bit f
152. loop IF signal at the mixer output The frequency of the IF is the same as the reference frequency and can be found in Table 11 6 A15R447 end nearest L414 6 dBm Synthesizer Section 11 21 13 If the IF signal is not near the indicated power troubleshoot the loop mixer function block AL Check path to phase frequency detector steps 14 19 14 Measure the loop IF signal at the input to the IF amplifier limiter function block AK 151 428 end nearest U411 4 MHz approximately 6 dBm 15 Confirm the presence of a 4 MHz square wave reference frequency signal at U406 pin 3 The square wave is TTL and should go below 0 6 V and above 42 2 V 16 Disconnect the jumper from X201 pins 1 and 5 Disconnect the dc power supply which is connected to A15J200 pin 16 17 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Conter MWequeney Ee pU EEUU A EE 300 MHz Sj MN eC 0 Hz 18 Use an oscilloscope to confirm the presence of a 4 TTL level reference frequency signal at U406 pin 11 19 Connect a short across A15R425 Connect A15U406 pins 3 and 11 together This puts the same signal on both the phase frequency detector inputs 20 Observe the phase frequency detector outputs U406 pins 6 and 9 with an oscilloscope Narrow TTL pulses should be present Pin 9 is normally low pulsing high and pin 6 is normally high pulsing low 21 Check the end of L417 nearest C445 with an oscilloscope With th
153. making several measurements at more than 120 different frequencies over the spectrum analyzer frequency range Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 1 Getting Started First make sure you have a compatible controller computer and the proper test equipment The following paragraphs describe requirements for controllers and test equipment Once the proper equipment is identified proceed to Equipment Connections Spectrum Analyzers The HP 85623 Frequency Response Adjustment software is only for the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer Errors will occur if this software is used to adjust spectrum analyzers other than the HP 85623 The HP 85629B Test and Adjustment Module TAM is recommended for automated frequency reponse adjustments of the HP 85603 HP 85613 and HP 85633 The HP 8564E 8565E Adjustment Diagnostic Software is required to adjust the frequency response of the HP 85643 and 85653 spectrum analyzers Controller Computer Frequency Response Adjustment software requires using any combination of one of the following HP controllers and the HP BASIC operating system Controller HP 9000 model 216 HP 9000 model 236 HP 9000 model 310 Operating System HP BASIC 2 0 with extensions 2 1 HP BASIC 3 0 and required BIN files HP BASIC 4 0 and required BIN files Other HP 9000 Series 300 controllers are compatible with the Frequency Response Adjustment software however graph printouts might not be full width This is especially tr
154. on the instrument 3 Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage caused by electrostatic discharge 4 Use the original materials or a strong shipping container that is double walled corrugated cardboard carton with 159 kg 350 Ib bursting strength The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the spectrum analyzer and allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the spectrum analyzer for packing material 5 Surround the equipment with at least 3 to 4 inches of packing material or enough to prevent the equipment from moving in the carton If packing foam is unavailable the best alternative is SD 240 Air Cap from Sealed Air Corporation Commerce CA 90001 Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet covered with 1 1 4 inch air filled bubbles Use the pink colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity Wrap the equipment several times in this material to both protect the equipment and prevent it from moving in the carton 6 Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape 7 Mark the shipping container FRAGILE HANDLE WITH CARE to assure careful handling 8 Retain copies of all shipping papers General Information 1 7 formt 112 Description HP Part Number 9211 6969 Outer Carton 9220 5073 Pads 2 9220 5072 Top Tray Figure 1 2 Spectrum Analyzer Shipping Container and Cushioning Materials 1 6 General Information Recommended Test Equipm
155. panel of the spectrum analyzer the HP 85629B test and adjustment module TAM provides diagnostic functions for the HP 85623 The TAM is accessed by a computer running interface software this software is supplied with Option 915 add Service Documentation The TAM measures voltages at key points in the circuitry and flags a failure whenever the voltage falls outside the limits The TAM locates the failure to a small functional area which can then be examined manually See chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for a complete description of how to use the TAM and its interface software General Information 1 3 Service Kit The spectrum analyzer service kit HP part number 08562 60021 contains service tools required to repair the instrument Refer to Table 1 2 for a list of items in the service kit Table 1 2 Service Kit Contents Description Quantity HP Part Number Cable Puller 5021 6773 PC Board Prop 5021 7459 Line Filter Assembly 5061 9032 Line Switch Cable 5062 0728 Extender Cable 5062 0737 BNC to SMB snap on Cable 85680 60093 Connector Extractor Tool Kit 8710 1791 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage or destroy electronic components Therefore all work performed on assemblies consisting of electronic components should be done at a static free workstation Figure 1 1 is an example of a static safe workstation using two kinds of ESD protection w Conductive table mat and wrist strap comb
156. period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett Packard and Hewlett Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Hewlett Packard from another country Hewlett Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by Hewlett Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIE
157. pressing PREV MENU STORE DATA and YES Move the jumper on A2J12 from WR ENA back to the WR PROT position 2 42 Adjustment Procedures 9 Frequency Response Adjustment 9 Frequency Response Adjustment Assembly Adjusted 15 RF assembly Related Performance Tests Displayed Average Noise Level Frequency Response Description A signal of the same known amplitude is applied to the spectrum analyzer at several different frequencies At each frequency the DAC controlling the flatness compensation amplifiers is adjusted to place the peak of the displayed signal at the same place on the screen The preselector is centered at each frequency before setting the DAC value There are also correction points at 2 MHz and 6 MHz which are outside the synthesized sweeper frequency range The DAC values for these two points are set to a fixed offset from the DAC value at 10 MHz The DAC values are stored in EEROM Automated Procedure Available The frequency response adjustment requires making several measurements at more than 120 different frequencies over the spectrum analyzer frequency range This manual procedure takes over two hours to complete However an automated procedure with software is provided by HP The software can allow the adjustment to be performed in less than 20 minutes The Automated HP 85623 Front End Cal adjustment performs this task and is described in Chapter 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software
158. problem Unable to adjust 100 Hz resolution bandwidth Gain problem Cal oscillator is unlocked Verify the unlocked conditions as follows 1 Place A4 in its service position and disconnect W51 gray yellow from 4JT 2 Connect W51 to the input of another spectrum analyzer This is the 10 MHz reference for the cal oscillator 3 If a 10 MHz signal approximately 0 dBm is not present suspect the 15 RF assembly the A21 OCXO or the Al5 assembly TCXO Option 103 If the 10 MHz reference is present continue with step 4 4 Reconnect W17 to A4J7 and monitor the tune voltage at A4J9 pin 3 with an oscilloscope 5 Press on the spectrum analyzer under test 6 If the voltage is either 15 Vdc or 15 Vdc the Cal Oscillator is probably at fault Normally the voltage should be near 15 V during a sweep and between 9 V and 9 V during retrace An intermittent error 499 indicates the cal osc phase locked loop probably can lock at 10 7 MHz but cannot lock at the 9 9 and 11 5 MHz extremes This may prevent the cal oscillator from adjusting the 1 MHz or 30 kHz through 300 kHz bandwidths This symptom implies a failure in the oscillator function block X See the A4 log amp cal oscillator schematic sheet 4 of 4 The oscillator is unable to tune the required frequency range with the 9 V to 9 V control voltage Troubleshoot A4CR802 most probable cause L801 C808 C809 and U807 Unable to adjust amplitude of 30 kHz resolution b
159. pulse is not present at each of the LKSCN outputs of U602 when a key is pressed check for LWRCLK and LSCAN KBD RPG Interface Refer to function block J of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information U608B latches the RPG direction from the two RPG outputs RPG COUNT and RPG COUNTI Counterclockwise RPG rotation produces low going pulses which result in a high output on U608B Clockwise RPG rotation results in a low output from U608B U612A provides the edge to trigger one shot U423B which generates a 90 ms pulse This pulse gates U610A for counting of RPG pulses by U606 Gates U610D and U614D prevent retriggering of U423B until its 90 ms pulse has timed out Note Elsewhere RPG COUNTI is referred to as RPG 01 and RPG COUNT is referred to as RPG 02 1 Monitor A3U401 pin 2 with a logic probe or oscilloscope Pulses should be present as the RPG is rotated 2 Monitor A3U608 pin 12 as the RPG is rotated Pulses should be present 3 If pulses are missing at both points check for power and ground signals to AIAIWI and A1A2WI If both power and ground are there the 1 2 RPG is probably defective 4 If pulses are missing at only one point check for an open or short on AIAIWI and A1A2W1 If these cables are working properly A1A2 RPG is probably defective 5 Press to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect AIAIWI from A3J602 Jumper A3U608 12 RPG COUNT
160. required 3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems Asymmetric Filter Response Check the crystal symmetry control with the following steps 1 Press PRESET 2 Set the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer controls as follows Resolution bandwidth 2 240 teas EREMO e teh e dei e Lee aes 3 kHz Spall eee ee ee ee oe t Ed 100 kHz Center auth bd eae A Po eee set diei E een aks 300 MHz 3 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer connect the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 502 4 A trace similar to Figure 9 15 indicates a failed crystal symmetry circuit 9 30 IF Section Narrow 10 kHz resolution bandwidth Check for printed circuit board contamination Clean the board as required IF Gain Compression in 10 kHz resolution bandwidth FET transistors Q202 Q203 Q501 and Q503 can deteriorate with age Measuring less than 0 volts on the FET source indicates a bad FET ATTEN 10dB RL T L Lll MENOR Sa ee TN CENTER 300 0000 SPAN 1 kHz RBW 3 VBW 35 0kHz SWP 70ms SK184 Figure 9 15 Faulty Crystal Symmetry Step Gains Refer to function blocks B H and I of A5 IF filter schematic diagram sheets 1 of 3 and 2 of 3 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 1 On
161. signal is then applied to the IF INPUT The flatness compensation amplifiers are then adjusted via DACs to place the displayed signal at the reference level FREQUENCY BNC CABLE SYNTHES ZED SWEEPER SPECTRUM ANALYZER MEASUR NG RECEIVER A 1 I NPUT Bee ctv ode AB HL ar RF 3 ad 000000 Cg ADAPTER INPUT coopoo o 608 ADAPTER 10MH POWER E REF I N OUT ATTENUATOR SK117 Figure 2 24 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Setup Adjustment Procedures 2 57 15 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Non Option 327 Equipment zed atu bg V CES AER A Edd rds HP 8340A B Measuring ud aao RS d aM edu hdd dua bol idt ate HP 8902A lo MEM TIT P HP 8481D 30 MHz reference Atte go LEICA TRE DE qs E HP 11708A supplied with HP 84810 Adapters dede sr ERE LACE edat 1250 1772 Type JN m to BNC sequ au x uA ML oo he os eta edd doe i dd 1250 1476 Type cist sue zu oue eee aS EOM IS EM Ed 5061 5311 Cables BING 122 CHAIN x eto vade eR te d vean HP 10503A SMA 1B e a 8120 1578 Procedure 1 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the power cord Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and reconnect the power cord 2 Set up the equipment as
162. than the normal detector mode is being used After filtering the video is sent to the positive and negative peak detectors These detectors are designed for optimum pulse response The positive peak detector resets at the end of each horizontal bucket there are 601 such buckets across the screen The negative peak detector resets at the end of every other bucket When reset the output of the peak detector equals its input Triggering The spectrum analyzer has five trigger modes free run single external video and line The free run and single trigger signal comes from the 1 MHz ADC clock The line trigger signal comes from the A6 power supply Video triggering originates from the A3 video filter buffer circuit External triggering requires either a high or low TTL logic level as determined by the setting of the trigger polarity function The external trigger signal is received from a rear panel BNC connector A DAC in the trigger circuit sets the video trigger level The trigger circuit is responsible for setting HSCAN high Controller Section The controller section includes the A2 controller assembly and 19 HP IB assembly The A2 assembly controls the Al7 CRT driver through W7 The battery on the rear panel provides battery backup for state and trace storage The A2 contains the CPU RAM ROM the display ASM and line generators CRT blanking focus intensity control HP IB interface frequency counter display RAM option module
163. the FM coil driver Adjusts the main coil fixed driver current at a YTO frequency of 3 2 GHz near the lower YTO frequency limit Transforms the sampler input impedance to 50 ohms over the 285 to 297 2 MHz range Adjusts the VCO tank capacitance so that 21V on the VCO tune line equals 298 MHz VCO frequency Adjusts for maximum 600 MHz reference output Adjusts for maximum 600 MHz reference output Adjusts frequency of the temperature compensated crystal oscillator TCXO to 10 MHz Adjusts amplitude of the 300 MHz calibrator signal to 10 0 dBm Adjusts zero bias point of external mixer bias Adjusts maximum intensity Adjusts intensity to turn off blanked lines Adjusts focus for lines of different brightness Adjusts focus at the left and right corners of the display Adjusts focus at the center of the display Adjusts the horizontal deflection amplifier gain Adjusts the CRT horizontal position Adjusts the vertical deflection amplifier gain Adjusts the CRT vertical position Adjusts the display axis rotation Adjusts focus of the center of the display Adjusts for the spot roundness on the CRT display Adjustment Procedures 2 7 Table 2 3 Factory Selected Components Reference Adjustment Basis of Selection Designator Number A5C204 A5C216 A5C326 5 327 5 505 5 516 5 17 5 718 Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected 2 6 Adjustment Procedures o
164. the HP 85623 press Set the HP 85623 controls as follows Center 1 45 GHz SD teretes rau auras er bern ed ee 0 Hz LO LEVELS and INT LO LEVEL Use the knob or keypad to enter the value 32 This sets the LO power to a low level To set the gate bias connect the positive lead of DVM to A14J18 pin 15 and the negative lead to A14J18 pin 6 See Figure 2 16 for a pin location drawing PIN 2 uv 2 lt uw od 46 PINi SP114E Figure 2 18 TAM Connector Pin Locations Note the Gate Bias voltage printed on the A7 LO distribution amp label Use the knob or keypad to change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading is equal to the label voltage 10 mV To set the low band sense voltage connect the positive lead of the DVM to A14J18 pin 13 and the negative lead to A14J18 pin 6 On the HP 85623 press INT LO LEVEL The message DRIVE FOR BAND will be displayed Note the BO EXT Sense voltage printed on the A7 LO distribution amp label Use the knob or keypad and press enter to change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading is 6 mV more negative than the label voltage For example if the BO EXT Sense voltage is 170 mV change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading is 176 mV Record the DAC value DACvalue for 1 45 GHz To set the band 1 sense voltage s
165. the HP 8902A HP 8485A combination Connect the HP 8485A to the HP 11667B power splitter Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factor into the HP 8902A Set the HP 8340A B output to the frequency indicated in the active function area of the HP 85623 display Adjust the HP 8340A B POWER LEVEL to place the signal midscreen on the HP 85623 display On the HP 85623 press PRESEL AUTO CTR Adjust the HP 8340A B POWER LEVEL for a 10 dBm reading on the HP 8902A On the HP 85623 adjust the RF gain DAC value using the knob or keypad until the marker reads 10 dBm fO 10 dB On the HP 85623 press D to proceed to the next frequency Repeat steps 20 through 26 for the remaining frequencies in band 1 On the HP 85623 press NEXT BAND to proceed to band 2 Repeat steps 20 through 26 for the remaining frequencies in band 2 Press PREV MENU STORE DATA then YES on the HP 85623 Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR PROT position 2 46 Adjustment Procedures 10 Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment 10 Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Assembly Adjusted 15 RF assembly Related Performance Test Calibrator Amplitude and Frequency Accuracy Description The CAL OUTPUT amplitude is adjusted for 10 00 dBm measured directly at the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector MEASUR I NG A14 RECE I VER FREQUENCY SPECTRUM ANALYZER CONTROL POWER los SENSOR ADAPTER BOARD PROP
166. the battery The battery used in this instrument is designed to last several years An output voltage of 3 0 V is maintained for most of its useful life Once this voltage drops to 2 6 V its life and use are limited and the output voltage will deteriorate quickly When the instrument is turned off stored states and traces will only be retained for a short time and may be lost Refer to State and Trace Storage Problems in chapter 10 Controller Section in this manual The battery should be replaced if its voltage is 2 6 V or less Removal Replacement l 2 Remove any option module attached to the rear panel Locate the battery assembly cover on the spectrum analyzer rear panel Use a screwdriver to remove the two flathead screws securing the cover to the spectrum analyzer Remove the old battery and replace it with the new one ensuring proper polarity Measure the voltage across the new battery Nominal new battery voltage is approximately 3 0 V If this is not the case check the battery cable and A2 controller assembly secure the battery assembly into the spectrum analyzer Assembly Replacement 4 43 Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel Removal Warning The A6 power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedur
167. the cable from the CAL OUTPUT and the INPUT 50 connectors Set the resolution bandwidth to 2 MHz QN tA Broadband noise should be displayed on the oscilloscope from approximately i 200 mV to 4 400 mV 9 As the REF LVL is decreased 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to 70 dBm the noise displayed on the oscilloscope should increase in 100 mV increments If this response is not Observed refer to Step Gains and Video Offset in this chapter 10 Reconnect cable W54 to A4J4 Frequency Counter Prescaler Conditioner Refer to function block Q of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The frequency counter prescaler conditioner divides the frequency by two and then attenuates it The circuit consists of frequency divider U703A and an output attenuator The frequency divider turns on only when the instrument is counting AM FM Demodulator Refer to function block R of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The demodulator circuitry on the log amplifier on A4 produces a low level audio signal This audio signal is then amplified by the audio amplifier on 4 The FM demodulator demodulates narrowband FM 5 kHz deviation signals The detector block J demodulates AM signals 1 If demodulation problems occur when the spectrum analyzer is in the frequency domai
168. the leftmost line of the test pattern is parallel with the CRT bezel See Figure 2 3 Adjust the rear panel X POSN and A17R55 X GAIN until the leftmost characters and the softkey labels appear just inside the left and right edges of the CRT bezel Adjust the rear panel POSN and A17R75 Y GAIN until the softkey labels align with their appropriate softkeys Press PRESET If necessary readjust STOP BLANK and START BLANK for the best looking intersection of the graticule lines This will be most noticeable along the center vertical and horizontal graticule lines DEFLECTION ADJUSTMENTS Adjust START BLANK Adjust DGTL Y GAIN and STOP BLANK for until only one sharp corners line appears Gxaxaxaxaxo RECALL Adjust d SOFTKEY 1 L DGTL X GAIN SOFTKEY 2 until only one line appears SOFTKEY SE Ig 856 SOFTKEY 4 ms SOFTKEY 5 Adjust TRACE ALIGN Adjust MIN INTEN to place this line until dots in these parallel to left areas just disappear edge of CRI bezel SK13 Figure 2 3 CRT Adjust Pattern Adjustment Procedures 2 17 2 Display Adjustment Intensity Adjustments 16 17 18 19 20 2L Press then set the REF LVL to 70 dB and the LOG dB DIV to 1 This should almost completely fill the screen with the noise floor Press SGL swP Adjust A17R4 Z GAIN until the intensity at the center of th
169. the output of and distributes the signal to the A8 low band mixer AIO YIG tuned mixer filter RYTHM A15U100 sampler and the front panel 15 LO OUTPUT The synthesizer section includes the following PLLs Phase Locked Loops YTO PLL 7 and 15 assemblies Offset PLL sampling oscillator PLL 15 RF assembly Fractional N PLL Al4 frequency control assembly Reference PLL 15 RF assembly The fractional N PLL is sometimes swept backwards higher frequency to lower frequency This 1s necessary because of the way in which the sampler IF signal is produced Note The frequency control board is digitally controlled If multiple failures appear in unrelated areas of the circuitry the control may be at fault Refer to the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter for further help on isolating those failures m The TAM tests the signal path circuitry by digitally controlling the hardware and monitoring the control lines to make sure they are responding properly Use the TAM automatic fault isolation routine or verify the RF levels manually to ensure proper operation 1 8 Synthesizer Section Check A3 ADC MUX Function Block steps 1 4 l Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A15J200 13 and the negative lead to A15J200 pin 6 This measures the sampling oscillator tune voltage which is an input to the A3 interface assembly ADC MUX Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings dta Mb IN
170. the ramp counter into the ADC for comparison to the analog sweep ramp Fast ADC When Option 007 is installed and sweep times lt 30 ms are selected the spectrum analyzer digitizes video signals with the Al6 fast ADC The fast ADC uses an 8 bit flash ADC sampled at a 12 MHz rate Only POS PEAK NEG PEAK and SAMPLE detector modes are available with fast ADC NORMAL detector mode is not available Pretriggering 1 possible with fast ADC Log Expand Video Functions The A3 interface assembly performs log expand and offset functions The log expand log offset amplifier provides a 2 dB Div log scale When the main ADC is used the 5 dB Div scale is derived by multiplying the digitized 10 dB Div trace data by two in the CPU When the fast ADC is used the 5 dB Div scale is derived by amplifying the video signal by two The 1 dB Div scale is similarly derived by either multiplying the 2 dB Div trace data by two main ADC or amplifying the video signal by two fast ADC The spectrum analyzer uses two types of video filters An RC low pass circuit provides 300 Hz to 3 MHz video bandwidths Video bandwidths lt 100 Hz are generated using digital filtering General Troubleshooting 7 49 Digitally filtered video bandwidths use a sample detector When sample detection is selected the effective video bandwidth is limited to approximately 450 kHz When a digital filter is selected a D appears along the left edge of the CRT indicating that something other
171. the synthesizer troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Table 8 9 Logic Levels at A3U108 SAMPLE POS PEAK NEG PEAK 5 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings ODDS e ee edi Goa en M e meta 5 MHz Sweep GME Odd b et aed don oe 50ms 6 Check for the presence of the SCAN RAMP signal by connecting an oscilloscope probe to A3J2 pin 45 component side of A3J2 Connect the negative probe lead to A3TP4 7 A 0 to 10 V ramp should be present in both LINE and FREE RUN trigger modes If the waveform is present only LINE trigger ADC control signal HBADC_CLKO may be faulty Refer to ADC Control Signals in this chapter 8 If the scan ramp is present but is not being switched to the output of U108 replace U108 If the scan ramp is absent in either mode do the following a Connect the oscilloscope probe to A3J400 pin 15 HSCAN b A TTL signal high during 50 ms sweep time and low during retrace should be present indicating 15 working properly Refer to the synthesizer troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section A faulty TTL signal indicates a bad A3 Interface assembly 9 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings een Deni ert 100 ms geet os capa eee eee T E care ele Gs anes eae 100 MHz 8 22 ADC Interface Section 10 Press CAL and IF A
172. to 13 2 GHz 11 36 Synthesizer Section 3 Use the following equation to determine the first LO span used Display Span Setting Span m Pe Current Band Harmonic Mixing Number 4 Refer to Table 11 13 to determine the circuit associated with the span Confirming Span Problems 1 If all first LO spans or only first LO spans of 2 01 MHz or above are affected perform the YTO Adjustment procedure in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures a On the spectrum analyzer press CAL REALIGN LO amp IF and retest all spans b If the YTO adjustment has sufficient range and only LO spans of 2 01 MHz or above are faulty test YTO linearity by performing step c c Test the span in question at different center frequencies in the same band If the span accuracy changes significantly 2 or more suspect the All YTO 2 If only first LO spans of 2 MHz or less are faulty suspect the Al4 fractional N PLL 3 If there are several spans in the main coil and FM coil ranges affected suspect the Al4 span attenuator Synthesizer Section 1 1 37 YTO Main Coil Span Problems LO Spans gt 20 MHz For YTO main coil spans the YTO is locked at the beginning of the sweep and the sweep ramp is summed into the main coil tune driver 1 Perform the YTO adjustment procedure in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If the YTO adjustments cannot be performed continue with step 2 2 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings
173. underlined Set the HP 3335A controls as follows lure PC 10 7 MHz cae eh Pa eg actae atu Ue 55dBm Note the marker value Ideally it should read 60 dBm fO 1 dB If the marker reads below 60 1 dBm rotate A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD one third turn clockwise for every 0 1 dB below 60 dBm If the marker reads above 59 9 dBm rotate A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD one third turn counter clockwise for every 0 1 dB above 60 dBm See Figure 2 8 for the location of A4R826 A change in the displayed amplitude will not be seen until ADJ CURR IF STATE is pressed Note If A4R826 has inadequate range refer to Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Press ADJ Range in Chapter 9 IF Section 3 CURR IF STATE After allowing the analyzer time to complete the adjustments the displayed amplitude and marker reading should change Repeat steps 7 and 8 until the marker reads 60 dBm dB 10 Disconnect the test cable from A5J3 and reconnect W29 to A5J3 A5 Reference Attenuator Adjustment 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 60 dBm If markers are displayed press and MARKERS OFF Set the HP 3335A to 60 dBm Connect BNC cable between the 50 Q output of the HP 3335A and the spectrum analyzer INPUT 502 On the spectrum analyzer press CAL and REF LVL ADJ Use the front panel knob or step keys to place the peak of the displayed cane 3 dB to 5 dB
174. 0 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Check this switch as follows a Monitor voltages on A4U302 pins 1 and 7 while changing the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth from 100 kHz to 300 kHz b If the voltages do not come within a few volts of the 15 V and 15 V supplies U103 and U302 are suspect c Disconnect the digital multimeter and reconnect W27 to A4J3 Linear Amplifiers Refer to function block C of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The linear amplifiers consist of two variable gain stages U201C and U201E as well as the buffer amplifier A4U201B A4U201D and A4Q201 The linear amplifiers provide O to 40 dB of IF gain in 10 dB steps The gain of A4U201C can be increased by 20 dB by turning on A4CR201 and A4CR210 with the control line LIN 20B The gain of A4U201E can be increased by either 10 dB 20 dB with the control lines LIN 10 or LIN 20A respectively The gain can be selected by setting the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer reference level IF Gain Application Guidelines ATTEN 10 dB Power into A4J3 Reference Level Gain of A4U201C Gain of A4U201E Total Gain Pin 8 in Pin 3 out Pin 3 in Pin 10 out 9 14 IF Section Total gain can be measured by injecting the specified power into A4J3 and measuring the total gain provided by A4U201C and A4U201E The following procedure provides a means of troubl
175. 000 MHz SPAN O Hz RES BW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 2 00 sec GAIN SWEEP WITH LIMITER OFF Figure 9 6 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 3 Detailed If Adjust ra ups 4 MKR 1 284 sec REF 5 0 dBm ATTEN1 O 26 40 dBm rar E I OFFSETS pid n Pe ap Ang CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 300 kHz VBW 1 kHz SWP 1 40 sec 10 dB SAMPLE Figure 9 7 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 4 sp 46e 5 147 IF Section 9 25 Detailed If Adiust Sianature C5 M K R 1_ R34 ec REF 5 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 84 40 dBm 2ND 3RD 4TH LC POLE LC POLE LC POLE LC POLE SETTINGS PAST HERE ARE FOR AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE 30kHz RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 300 kHz VBW 1 kHz SWP 2 00 sec sp148e Figure 9 8 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 5 Common IF Signature Problems Region A of Figure 9 4 is noisy Suspect the first LC pole Region B of Figure 9 4 is flat Suspect the third step gain stage the fine attenuator or the fourth LC pole output amplifier Region C of Figure 9 4 has no 15 dB step Suspect the reference 15 dB attenuator Region D of Figure 9 4 is flat Suspect the second step gain stage Entire signature noisy If the signature resembles Figure 9 9 suspect a broken first step gain stage or a break in the signal path in the input switch first crystal pole or second crystal po
176. 076 LOG AMPLIFIER CAL OSC ASSY 08563 60076 A5 08563 60023 IF FILTER ASSEMBLY 08563 60023 A6 08564 60008 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 08564 60008 Includes A6A2 does not include AGAT 1 5062 7089 HIGH VOLTAGE ASSEMBLY 5062 7089 A6A2 08564 60009 REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY 08564 60009 7 5086 7885 SWITCHED LO DISTRIBUTION 5086 7885 5086 6885 REBUILT A7 EXCHANGE REQUIRED 5086 6885 8 5086 7982 LOW BAND 5086 7982 A9 5086 7822 PORT ATTENUATOR 5086 7822 A10 5086 7981 YIG TUNED FILTER MIXER RYTHM 5086 7981 5086 6981 REBUILT 10 EXCHANGE REQUIRED 5086 6981 All 5086 7906 PORTABLE LVLD YTO 5086 7906 5086 6906 REBUILT All EXCHANGE REQUIRED 5086 6906 A13 5086 7959 SECOND CONVERTER 5086 7959 Al4 08563 60090 FREQUENCY CONTROL ASSEMBLY 08563 60090 Al5 08563 60091 RF ASSEMBLY STANDARD 08563 60091 Standard 15 08563 60092 RF ASSEMBLY 08563 60092 Option 103 15 08563 60093 RF ASSEMBLY SIG ID 08563 60093 Option 008 15 08563 60092 RF ASSEMBLY TCXO SIG ID 08563 60092 Option 103 Option 008 A15U100 5086 7806 5086 7806 These board assemblies are part of the rebuilt board exchange program To order a rebuilt board use the same number as that of the new board with the exception of the 7th digit which should be a 9 Example New board number is 08562 60094 Therefore the rebuilt board number will be 08562 69094 Replaceable Parts 5 9 Reference Designation 16 Option 007 17 A18 18
177. 10 4 troubleshooting 7 14 display section 7 51 E EEROM 7 50 removal and replacement 4 55 electrostatic discharge 1 4 equipment frequency response adjustment software 3 3 listing from software 3 1 equipment required 1 9 error codes 200 to 299 7 19 error messages 7 17 7 18 41 accessory module error messages 800 to 899 7 40 amplitude error message 582 7 36 automatic IF error messages 400 to 599 7 28 battery error message 718 7 39 cal unlock error message 499 7 32 digital and checksum errors 7 37 EEROM checksum error messages 700 to 704 7 31 elimination 7 18 fractional N PLL error message 337 7 26 frequency response adjustment software 3 16 microprocessor error message 717 7 39 model number error message 719 7 39 option modules 7 40 programmed ROM error messages 705 to 710 7 38 programming errors 7 18 RAM check error messages 711 to 716 7 39 sampling oscillator error message 335 7 26 sampling oscillator error message 355 7 27 span accuracy calibration error messages 356 to 361 7 27 system error messages 750 to 759 7 40 user generated error messages 900 to 999 7 41 viewing error messages 7 17 YTO leveling loop error message 334 7 26 YTO loop error message 331 7 25 YTO loop error messages 300 to 301 7 20 YTO loop error messages 317 to 318 7 23 YTO loop settling error messages 351 to 354 7421 ESD requirements 1 4 exiting frequency response adjustment software 3 8 Exit Program softkey
178. 14 Contents 9 Low Voltage Supplies Buck Regulator Control Loop High Voltage Supplies CRT Supply Dropping Out Buck Regulator Control DC DC Converter Control Power Up A Component Level Information Packets Index Contents 10 13 15 13 15 13 15 13 16 13 17 13 17 13 18 Figures 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 Example of a Static Safe Workstation Spectrum Analyzer Shipping Container and Materials High Voltage Power Supply Md d Display Adjustment Setup CRT Adjust Pattern A2 Display Adjustment esas IF Bandpass Adjustment Setup TAM Connector Pin Locations IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations DC Log Adjustment Setup DC Log Adjustment Locations 2 11 Sampler Adjustment Setup 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 3 4 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 1 1 4 12 TAM Connector Pin Locations YTO Adjustment Setup YTO Adjustment Locations First LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment TAM Connector Pin Locations He Frequency Response Adjustment Setup Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Setup 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup and Ad eon on 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup TCXO Demodulator Adjustment Setup 2 2 Demodulator Adjustment Locations External Mixer Bias Adjustment Setup Extern
179. 15 RF assembly Connectors J305 and J306 on the 15 RF assembly are located where the TCXO would be installed in an Option 103 The oven in the OCXO is powered only when the spectrum analyzer is powered on there is no standby mode of operation The OCXO oscillator operates only when the internal frequency reference is selected Control line HEXT High EXTernal frequency reference is inverted by A15U303B to generate LEXT Refer to the 15 RF assembly schematic diagram block M sheet 2 of 4 LEXT is sent to the OCXO via A15J306 pin 4 When LEXT is low the oscillator in the OCXO will be turned off Replacement OCXQs are factory adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specified aging rate has been achieved Thus readjustment should typically not be necessary after OCXO replacement and is generally not recommended If adjustment is necessary the spectrum analyzer must be on continuously for a minimum of 24 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize Failure to allow sufficient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment Check operation of the A21 OCXO as follows 1 Disconnect W49 Coax 82 from A15J305 Connect the output of 49 to the input of another spectrum analyzer 2 Check that the fundamental frequency is 10 MHz and that the power level is 0 dBm X3 dB Also check that the harmonics are at least 25 dBc Excessive harmonics can
180. 1A1 Keyboard Front Panel Keys Procedure 3 Al Al Keyboard Front Panel Keys Removal 1 Remove the front frame from the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 2 AI Front Frame Al8 CRT 2 Place the front frame face down on the bench and remove the front frame center support 3 Disconnect A1W1 from A1A1J3 and the RPG cable from A1A1J2 4 Remove the nine screws holding the 1 1 keyboard assembly to the front frame and remove the assembly 5 Remove the rubber keypad Note The front panel softkey actuators are part of the CRT bezel assembly and are not replaceable Should the softkeys become damaged replace the bezel assembly Replacement 1 Install the rubber keypad ensuring that the screw holes are visible through the pad 2 Place the 1 1 keyboard assembly over the rubber keypad Secure with nine panhead SCreWS 3 Connect the RPG cable to A1A1J2 and AIWI to A1A1J3 4 Secure the center support to the front frame using two panhead screws The arrow stamped on the center support should point to the top of the frame 5 Install the front frame assembly as described in Procedure 2 Al Front Frame AIS CRT Assembly Replacement 4 13 Procedure 4 A1A2 RPG Removal l 4 Remove the A9 input attenuator as described in Procedure 8 A7 through AI3 Assemblies Disconnect the RPG cable from the 1 1 keyboard assembly Remove the front panel RPG knob using a number 6 hex Allen wrench Use a
181. 2 11 as the displayed voltage for the sampling oscillator frequency of 291 667 MHz 10 Press on the spectrum analyzer Use the keypad to set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the frequencies listed in Table 2 11 At each listed frequency record the displayed voltage in the table 11 If the difference between the maximum and minimum voltages is less than 0 50 V and all voltage readings are between 5 and 2 5 Vdc proceed to step 15 12 Locate the center frequency at which the voltage is lowest Use the keypad to set the spectrum analyzer to this frequency 13 Readjust SMPL MATCH to set the displayed voltage to 0 8 Vdc 14 Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 2302 3 MHz and repeat steps 9 through 13 15 Move the positive DVM test lead to A15J400 pin 3 Check that the measured voltage is the negative of the voltage at pin 1 within Vdc 16 Disconnect the DVM probes from A15J400 Adjustment Procedures 2 35 6 Sampling Oscillator Adjustment Table 2 1 1 Sampling Adjustments Displayed Voltage Vdc 2 36 Adjustment Procedures 7 YTO Adjustment 7 YTO Adjustment Assembly Adjusted Al4 frequency control assembly Related Performance Tests Frequency Span Accuracy Frequency Readout Accuracy and Frequency Count Marker Accuracy Description The YTO main coil adjustments are made with the phase lock loops disabled The YTO endpoints a
182. 2 dB DIV scale The 1 dB DIV scale is generated from the 2 dB DIV scale through trace data manipulation The first 50 dB of IF gain log and linear mode is achieved using the A5 assembly linear step gain amplifiers The A4 assembly video offset circuit provides the remaining 60 dB of log mode IF gain The A4 assembly linear amplifiers provide 40 dB of linear mode gain IF gain steps of less than 10 dB regardless of the reference level are accomplished on the A5 assembly A4 Log Amplifier Cal Oscillator Assembly The A4 log amplifier has separate log and linear amplifier paths After amplification the signal path consists of a linear detector video log amp buffer amplifier video offset and video buffer amplifier Other auxiliary functions include the frequency counter prescaler conditioner the AM FM demodulator and down conversion to 4 8 kHz for digital resolution bandwidths of 1 Hz through 100 Hz The cal oscillator which is part of A4 supplies the stimulus signal for automatic IF adjustments Normally the oscillator operates only during retrace for a few milliseconds to adjust part of the IF All IF parameters will be re adjusted approximately every five minutes With continuous IF adjust on a group of IF parameters are adjusted during each retrace period non disruptive If continuous IF adjust is off the most recent IF calibration data will be used The IF parameters adjusted include step gains log amplifier gain and offset b
183. 2 through 5 folded out to the right Warning The voltage potential at AGA1W3 is 9 kV Disconnect at the CRT with caution Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument 5 Connect the spectrum analyzer line power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line power switch is in the off position 6 Connect a high voltage probe 1000 1 such as the HP 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input 7 Connect the clip lead of the probe ground to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer 8 Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the rubber shroud of the AGA1W3 post accelerator cable to obtain a reading on the voltmeter See Figure 4 2 9 Keep the high voltage probe on the post accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV less than 5 V at the connector This normally takes about 30 seconds 10 Disconnect the line power cord from the spectrum analyzer 11 Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly slip the tip of the screwdriver under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly See Figure 4 2 12 Remove the three screws securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield 13 Pull the cable tie 1 Figure 4 24
184. 22 423 424 425 426 427 420 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 441 448 7 30 General Troubleshooting RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW 10K 10K aK 3K 3K 10K 10K 10K 10K 3K 3K 3K 3K lt 300 300 1K aK 10K 300 300 300 300 1K 1K 1K 1K 3K 3K 3K 3K 10K 10K 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole Un
185. 22 1082 5022 0184 0515 0664 5 TOP VIEW sp126e SCREW MACH M3 X 30MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 1349 SCREW MACH M3 X 60MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2310 SCREW MACH M3 X 100MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2308 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2332 SCREW MACH M3 X 12MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 0664 Replaceable Parts 5 15 Parts List Cover Assembly Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Code Number BAIL HANDLE 28480 5041 8911 TRIM CAP 28480 5041 8912 SCREW MACH M4 X 10MM LG PAN HD 28480 0515 1114 SPRING CPRSN 845 IN OD 1 25 1N OA LG 28480 1460 2164 28480 5021 6343 SOCKET GEAR 28480 5021 6344 HANDLE PLATE 28480 5021 8667 BACKUP PLATE 28480 5001 8728 SCREW MACH M4 X 8MM LG 90DEG FLH HD 28480 0515 1367 SCREW MACH M5 X 16MM LG 28480 0515 1133 COVER 28480 5001 8800 MOISTURE DEFLECTOR LF 28480 5041 7238 MOISTURE DEFLECTOR RT 28480 5041 3989 SIDE TRIM 28480 5041 8913 SCREW MACH M4 X 10MM LG PAN HD 28480 0515 1114 REAR FOOT 28480 5041 8907 O RING 145 1N XSECTI DIA SIL 51633 5568 007 WASHER LK HLCL 50 MM 5 I MM ID 28480 2190 0587 SCREW SKT HD CAP M5 X 40MM LG 28480 0515 1218 INSULATOR 292 X 355 MM 51 THK 28480 08562 80028 HP Part Number 5041 8911 5041 8912 0515 1114 1460 2164 5021 6343 5021 6344 5021 8667 5001 8728 0515 1367 0515 1133 5001 8800 5041 7238 5041 3989 5041 8913 0515 1114 5041 8907 0900 0024 2190 0587 0515 1218 08562 80028 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
186. 25 VOLT 5 gt U429B ONLY ONE 1ST MIXER OUT 5 A7J2 FOR HP 8561 I am qum a Gee a d 4 X X sm66e Figure 12 3 A7 First LO Distribution Amplifier Drive Control Latch for Band Switch Driver Refer to function block P on Al4 Frequency Control Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 5 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 1 Connect the positive lead of a DVM to 4140417 pin 14 and the negative lead to A14J18 pin 6 2 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center frequency I Mte iig ic eui qs 300 MHz Sr MP rper 0 Hz 3 The voltage should measure approximately 0 Vdc TTL low 4 Set the HP 85623 center frequency to 3 GHz 5 The voltage should measure approximately 5 Vdc TTL high 12 12 RF Section YTF Driver Circuit The YTF driver circuitry consists of the Sweep Tune Multiplier FAV Frequency Analog Voltage Generator YTF Gain and Offset and YTF Drive Refer to function blocks Q R S and T on Al4 Frequency Control Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 5 The FAV Generator generates the 0 5 V GHz signal The YTF driver circuitry can be half split by checking the rear panel 0 5 V GHz output Note The rear panel output changes according to the external mixer mode selected The preselected external mixer mode must not be selected while execut
187. 2J202 pin 3 and pin 14 should measure about 4 V p p If the levels are incorrect refer to Chapter 10 Controller Section and troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly c Set the oscilloscope to the following settings soa ane irae a aei nus Sade eda t 1 ms div Amplitude Sexe asd Casas S eR Vd dinde 2 V div d The signal at A2J202 pin 15 should consist of TTL pulses If the signal is at a constant level high or low troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly Display problems such as intensity or distortion are caused by either the controller or display power supply sections Refer to Chapter 10 Contoller Section or Chapter 13 Display Power Supply Section 7 8 General Troubleshooting Table 7 1 Location of Assembly Troubleshooting Text Instrument Location of Troubleshooting Text Assembly AlA keyboard 1 2 RPG A2 controller A3 interface 4 log amplifier Cal oscillator 5 IF A6 power supply 1 HV module A7 SLODA 8 low band mixer A9 input attenuator 10 RYTHM All YTO A 3 2nd converter Al4 frequency control 15 RF assembly Al7 CRT driver AI8 CRT 19 HP IB A2 OCXO FL1 FL2 Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter 8 ADC Interface Section
188. 307 FREQ ACC 308 FREQ ACC 309 FREQ ACC 310 FREQ ACC 311 FREQ ACC 312 FREQ ACC Transfer oscillator pretuned DAC out of range The transfer oscillator pretune procedure attempts to find pretuned DAC values by programming the PLL to 25 different frequencies and incrementing the transfer oscillator pretune DAC until XFRSENSE changes polarity ERR 307 is set if the DAC is set to 255 maximum before XFRSENSE changes polarity This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Offset oscillator pretune DAC not within prescribed limits at low frequency The offset oscillator pretune DAC is set to provide a frequency less than 189 MHz while the PLL is programmed for 189 MHz ERR 308 16 set XFRSENSE 1 greater than 5 V it should be at the negative rail This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Offset oscillator pretune DAC not within prescribed limits at high frequency The offset oscillator pretune DAC is set to provide a frequency less than 204 MHz while the PLL is programmed for 204 MHz ERR 309 is set if XFRSENSE is greater than 5 V it should be at the negative rail This error is not applicable
189. 4 542 9 8 15 MUX 25 54 5524 du quse y au 3 be Voie todo dieu ve My s 8 16 Video Filter rr 8 17 Video Filter Buffer ah gt x 8 18 Positive Negative Peak Detectors ll lll ss 8 19 Peak Detector 8 20 hosenfell Detector 2 Cero MO he Hod 8 21 ADC MUX X 8 21 Variable Gain VGA 8 23 Track and Hold uum We p ed We sb Ge 8 23 Assembly ADC Circuits s osos 8 24 ADC Control Signals 5053 5225 8 24 ADC Start Stop Control s r z w 8 25 ADCASM p son e deus pe a A Y der o 8 26 ADC a g MP 8 26 Ramp Counter 8 27 A3 Assembly Control Dcus 8 28 Analog Bus Drivers 23255225 45 45 5 epee EES 8 28 Analog Bus TIMME 8 29 Interface Strobe Select 8 30 Al6 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits Option 007 I 8 31 Video Input Scaling Amplifiers and Limiter 4 4 2 8 31 Contents 6 TRIADO os on ue ge de P 8 32 Peak Pit Detection xu lt lt deo Xe po E 4446444 464 SP rS 3 8 33 32 K Byte Static RAM TT 8 33 Al6 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits Option 007 Pg xin Ze edt ape BS 8 34 CPU Interface and Control Registers 5 2 5 8 34 Re
190. 4 line generator 10 4 10 8 lines dim 10 11 line switch cable removal 4 48 replacement 4 52 List Equip softkey 3 13 List Files softkey 3 12 Load Conds softkey 3 12 loading frequency response adjustment software 3 5 local oscillator See LO LO control check 7 15 LODA removal and replacement 4 30 troubleshooting 12 6 LO distribution amplifier 7 43 11 23 removal and replacement 4 30 LO distribution amplifier troubleshooting 12 6 log amplifier adjustments 2 30 detector mixer troubleshooting 9 20 failures 9 13 input switch troubleshooting 9 19 isolation amplifier troubleshooting 9 20 limiter troubleshooting 9 20 troubleshooting 9 13 Log amplifier 7 48 log check 7 14 log expand functions 7 49 log expand troubleshooting 8 15 log fidelity adjustment 2 33 log gain compensation troubleshooting 9 20 log offset compensation troubleshooting 9 20 log offset troubleshooting 8 15 LO span problems 11 40 11 41 LO switch troubleshooting 9 19 low and high band problems 12 5 low band mixer 7 43 12 7 removal and replacement 4 31 low band problems 12 4 low pass filter troubleshooting 9 38 low voltage supplies 13 15 main chassis parts 5 17 5 25 main coil 11 29 manual frequency response adjustment 2 43 manual probe troubleshooting 7 15 manufacturers code list 5 6 marker problems 10 13 mass storage frequency response adjustment software 3 10 mass storage file 3 7 mass
191. 4301 6 PSP eee 51143 FIGURE 13 5 A17 CRT DRIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM A Component Level Information Packets Component Level information is available for selected instrument assemblies The information for each repairable assembly is provided in the form of Component Level Information Packets CLIPS Each CLIP contains a parts list component location diagram and schematic diagram Each CLIP has an HP part number which is changed whenever the HP part number for its related instrument assembly is changed Updated or replacement CLIPS may be ordered through your local Hewlett Packard Sales or Service Office using the CLIP part number provided in Table A l A complete set of the latest version of CLIPS can be ordered using HP part number 5960 6550 Note CLIPS may not be available for recently introduced assemblies Component Level Information Packets Table A l HP 8562 Spectrum Analyzer Documented Assemblies Board Assembly Assembly CLIP Part Number serial Prefix Part Number 1 1 Keyboard 3611A and above 08562 60140 08562 90188 A2 Controller Assembly 3611A and above 08564 60010 08564 90003 A3 Interface Assembly 3611A and above 08563 60098 08563 90017 A4 Log Amplifier Cal Osc 3611A through 3724A 08563 60076 0856390119 3728A and above 08563 60103 08563 90166 5 IF Filter 3611A through 3720A 08563 60023 08563 90058 3724A and above 08563 60123 08563 90186 A6 Power Supply 3611A and a
192. 49 ADC troubleshooting 8 21 Add File softkey 3 12 addresses frequency response adjustment software 3 7 addresses of sales and service offices 1 16 adjustment adjustable components table 2 5 factory selected components 2 8 front end cal 2 12 related adjustments table 2 3 safety considerations 2 2 TAM and corresponding manual adjustments 2 10 TAM test equipment information 2 9 TAM test equipment list 2 11 tools 2 3 using TAM 2 9 adjustment descriptions 3 14 frequency response 3 14 front end cal 3 14 adjustment procedures 2 1 11 10 MHz reference adjustment OCXO 2 48 10 MHz reference adjustment TCXO 2 51 calibrator amplitude adjustment 2 47 cal oscillator amplitude 2 26 DC log amplifiers 2 30 Index l demodulator adjustment 2 53 display 2 15 external mixer amplitude adjustment 2 57 external mixer bias adjustment 2 56 First LO distribution amplifier 2 40 frequency response adjustment 2 43 high voltage power supply adjustment 2 13 IF amplitude 2 26 IF bandpass adjustment 2 21 intensity 2 18 LO distribution amplifier 2 40 sampling oscillator adjustment 2 34 YIG tuned filter mixer adjustment 2 60 YTO adjustment 2 37 adjust menu 3 10 Adjust Menu softkey 3 12 adjust menu softkeys 3 13 calibrate sensor 3 13 list equipment 3 13 single test 3 13 AFI power supply 13 4 synthesizer 11 4 TAM troubleshooting 7 14 All Tests softkey menu list equipment 3 1 single test 3 11 AM FM demo
193. 5 36 36 15 36 36 D GND 14 3 31 14 21 3 D GND 38 38 13 38 38 k Indicates signal source Display Power Supply Section 13 3 Table 13 1 W1 Power Cable Connections continued EUNT in i A6J1 lA14J1 lA15J1 ins pis pins pins Indicates signal source sss Indicates Indicates signal source sss source Troubleshooting Using the TAM Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for information on enabling the TAM for use with the HP 85623 Spectrum Analyzer When using automatic fault isolation the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked Use Table 13 2 to locate the manual procedure Table 13 3 lists assembly test connectors associated with each manual probe troubleshooting test Figure 13 2 illustrates the location of AI7 test connectors Table 13 2 Automatic Fault Isolation References Suspected Circuit Indicated Manual Procedure to Perform by Automatic Fault Isolation Check A2 controller Blanking signal Check all power supply outputs Dead power supply steps 1 5 Check buck regulator Dead power supply steps 22 23 Check buck regulator control circuitry Dead power supply steps 11 21 Check high voltage supplies High voltage supplies Check input rectifier Dead power supply steps 6 7 Check intensity adjustments Intensity problems steps 4 Check kick start bias circuitry Dead power supply steps 8 10 Check low voltage supplies Low voltage supplies
194. 5623 spectrum analyzer press SGL_SWP _ and CAL 11 12 13 Simultaneously press SINGLE on the HP 8566A B and ADJ CURR IF STATE the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer The IF signature is displayed on the HP 8566A B display It may be necessary to experiment with different time intervals between initiating the sweep on the HP 8566A B and initiating the current IF state adjustment on the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer Compare the IF signature to the signature of a properly operating spectrum analyzer illustrated in Figure 9 3 If the signatures do not closely resemble each other a more detailed view of the signature may show the failed hardware a Set the HP 8566A B controls as follows SI Ici PPP 550ms ut haba ead doe ERU eo dtt tt 5dB Reference 1 1 5 dBm b Pies on the HP 8566A B and a very short time later press ADJ CURR IF STATE on HP 85623 spectrum analyzer Figure 9 4 through Figure 9 8 TEN detailed IF signatures of a properly operating HP 85623 spectrum analyzer It may be necessary to experiment with different time intervals between initiating the sweep on the HP 8566A B and initiating the current IF state adjustment on the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer to obtain the waveforms shown Note the changes in the HP 8566A B video bandwidth and sweep time Reconnect W27 coax 3 5 5 IF Adjust signature MKR 5 044 sec REF 100 dBm
195. 6 08709 2 3A SSP 28480 5061 9034 B560E Series 4 PLACES amp St 2 PLACES 14 9 CC TARRY WE 2 PLACES 9 2 PLACES Cover Assembly Parts ldentification Figure 5 2 81134 xm AN AC P d 11 2 PLACES 10 2 PLACES P 560 5 SEE FIGURE 4 5 FIGURE 5 3 PARTS IDENTIFICATION MAIN CHASSIS sli3le 8562E A10 SEE 1 4 amp ES P S Q NOTES 1 Do NOT remove the brackets from the AIO assembly If 12 these brackets are removed 4 PLACES and reinstalled the performance of A10 will be altered A new or rebuilt A10 assembly includes new mounting brackets already attached to it 81176 Figure 5 4 Parts Identification RF Section 8562E 1 4 PLACES 5 2 PLACES NN V SR 3 A NS Dad NNNM Front Frame Parts Identification Figure 5 5 51128 3 4 PLACES A N f WS X V7 7 f ETE 19 27 2 PLACES w58 OPT 005 8562E Rear Frame Parts Identification Figure 5 6 3 135 Major Assembly and Cable Locations Introduction This chapter identifies the instrument assemblies and cables and contains the following figures Figure 6 1 Hinged Assemblies Figure 6 2 Top View A2 Unfolded
196. 7 pin 1 Set the current limit of the power supply to about 500 mA and the voltage to 12 Vdc Make sure a jumper is connected from A6TP101 to A6TP301 This independently powers the buck regulator control circuitry Connect a jumper from the dc power supply 12 Vdc output to the positive end of C207 nearest C209 Connect a jumper from 12 Vdc output to the end of A6R202 physically nearest A6U211 If the current draw exceeds approximately 50 mA suspect a short in the buck regulator control circuitry or a shorted CR201 or a shorted U207 Shorted components may be hot Check TP204 for an 80 kHz sawtooth 4 Vp p Suspect U203 if it is not present Check TP203 and TP207 for 40 kHz square 12 Vp p The waveform edges should be sharp Compare the waveform to the inputs of U207 pins 6 and 7 If the waveforms at either TP203 or TP207 are bad one of the FETs in the DC DC converter is probably defective Check TP105 and TP106 for 12 Vp p sawtooth waveform that is flattened at the bottom If the waveform is a squarewave the FET to which the test point is connected has failed or shorted Check TP202 for 80 kHz pulses 12 Vp p Short the leads of CR108 Check TP103 for 80 kHz pulses of about 11 V peak to peak Remove the short from CRIOS The voltage of the lower side of the pulses should float up to about 4 5 V If not suspect that CR108 is shorted If the waveform at TP202 15 correct but the waveform at TP103 i
197. 76 Al7 CRT Driver 3611A through 3623A 08563 60077 08563 90113 3626A through 3643A 08563 60101 08563 90153 3650A through 3738A 08563 60104 08563 90167 3741A and above 08563 601221 08563 90182 19 HP IB 3611A and above 08562 60042 08562 90115 Denotes the current version of board assembly Denotes refurbished board assemblies available Refurbished board assembly part numbers have 9 as the second digit of the suffix For example 0856369076 is the refurbished part number for board assembly 08563 60076 Same as for 15 Option 103 with SIG ID Component Level Information Packets A 3 o3 u X04 Jw REVISIONS APPROVED DATE PER PCO 53 99618 09 17 96 34 SAMPLER j X OW HID CABLE REAR PANEL AT A19J1 TORR DISI 1106 INSIDE VIEW 15 Dt 16 ja m ASSEMBLY D ire D OND ATN oND ES NC D GND w24 DEQ Cs C A15A2J1 a 29 do q w36 Cf A2 e adi EJ 414 CONTROLLER Jis 0187 ASSEMBL Y x 5 me 3 D OND ie cn 242 J2 D OND vig PIN w19 D gt 2 1 LLL DESIRES B W29 18 7 MHz IF A3 E INTERFACE ASSEMBLY A8 LOW BAND MIXER 2 J3 J2 J3 J4 A13 2nd CONVERTER CONTROLLER E J CABLE 22 Mite FREO COUNT 51 Mx REF2 iB
198. 8 43 9 3 9 7 9 23 9 24 9 24 9 25 9 25 9 26 9 27 9 27 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 9 16 9 17 9 18 9 19 9 20 9 21 9 22 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 S 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 1 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 13 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 Region B Amplitude Variation Region B Amplitude Offset Faulty Crystal Short Faulty LC Pole Faulty Crystal Symmetry Output Waveform 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Output Waveform 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Output Waveform 1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Output Waveform 300 Hz Resolution Bandwidth Failed Crystal Set Symptoms A4 Log Amplifier Cal Oscillator Block uam A5 IF Assembly Block Diagram A2 Test Connectors Line Generator Output Wosefonns Blanking Waveforms Expanded Blanking Wareromis Switch Driver Waveform LCHAR Distorted X Y Line Generator Waveforms Expanded X Y Line Generator Waveforms Normal X Y Line Generator Waveforms Delta X Waveform Delta Y Waveform DEF1 Synchronization m A2 Controller Block Diagram Al4 and AI5 Test Connectors TAM Connector Pin Locations YTO Loop Test Setup Sampler and Sampling Test Setup PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency Unlocked PLL Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL VCO Bias Voltages HP 85623 Sweep and
199. 950 0035 1252 0995 5002 1012 0515 2145 8160 0520 5021 5479 5021 6391 2200 0225 0535 0082 0515 0433 0535 0023 5061 9036 1420 0341 FL4 5061 9034 WO WO OO Qa Parts List Rear Frame Description SCREW MACH M3 GMM LG FLH HD TORX BATTERY HOLDER INCLUDES WIRES SCREW MACH M4 40MM LG PAN HD TORX FAN GRILL SPACER RND 875 IN ID NOT ASSIGNED PLUG HOLE TR HD FOR 0 5 D HOLE STL PLUG HOLE DOME HD FOR 0 312 D HOLE STL ADAPTOR COAX STR F SMA OPT 001 INCLUDES WASHER AND NUT SCREW MACH M3 GMM LG FLH HD TORX SCREW MACH M3 GMM LG PAN HD TORX NUT HEX 15 32THD CONNECTOR TEL 2 CKT 141 SHK DIA INCLUDES NUT AND JACK REAR PANEL DRESS SCREW MACH M3 6MMLG PAN HD TORX RFI ROUND STRIP STL SPIRA 150 REAR FRAME SCREW CONNECTOR HP IB SCREW MACH 4 40 25 IN LG TORX NUT M4 0 W LOCKWR SCREW MACH M3 GMM LG PAN HD TORX NUT HEX DBL CHAM 4 X 0 7 3 2MM THK FAN ASSEMBLY INCLUDES WIRE BATTERY 3 0V 1 2A HR LITHIUM POLYCARBON MONOFLUORIDE LINE FILTER MODULE Replaceable Parts 5 21 Mfr Mfr Part Code Number 28480 0515 1946 28480 5062 7755 28480 0515 2216 28480 3160 0309 28480 0380 0012 05093 SS 48152 04213 D 2730 LC2 28480 1250 1753 28480 0515 1946 28480 0515 0684 28480 2950 0035 28480 1252 0995 28480 5002 1012 28480 0515 2145 28480 8160 0520 28480 5021 5479 28480 5021 6391 28480 2200 0225 28480 0535 0082 28480 0515 0433 28480 0535 0023 28480 5061 903
200. A description of the function checked with measured and expected voltages or currents is displayed with a list of additional areas to check These areas can sometimes be checked by looking at another TAM connector but usually require manual troubleshooting techniques to isolate the problem further If an HP IB printer is connected press Print Page to provide a hard copy of the currently displayed screen the softkey labels will not be printed Each test connector has fifteen pins one pin is missing to act as a key The pins contain eight measured signal lines measured signal lines denoted as MS1 through M 8 one input signal line OS1 one ground and five pins encoding a five bit connector address The TAM needs to probe each assembly revision connector once subsequent readings are not necessary It is possible for example to probe the A5 IF assembly then the A4 log amplifier assembly and then return to 5 without having to re probe A5 revision connector However the revision connector must be re probed if the spectrum analyzer is returned to normal operation and then back to TAM control This is also true if the spectrum analyzer is turned off General Troubleshooting 7 15 RF Path Fault Isolation RF path fault isolation checks high band RF paths Automatic fault isolation checks the low band RF path An external microwave source with a frequency range of 5 GHz to 13 2 GHz is required The source is not controlled over HP IB
201. A17 CRT DISPLAY DRIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM 17 CRT T DISPLAY DRI DRIVER uid diss uii 5 INTENSITY AMPLIFIER WARN NG TP1 TP 10 J7 Z GAIN A A R Noe ONE eve X INTENSITY IN C SHIFTER WARNING TP2 E i WARNING hated ING S CUTOFF HEATER 1 2 1 2 2 FROM A2J3 2 55kV J6 1 FROM ABA 2 45kV 46 3 FROM S 2 46 J6 5 2 FROM A6A1 2 45kV VAC FILAMENT mma 2 45 CATHODE FOCUS AMPLIFIER Z FOCUS FOCUS GRID LEVEL SHIFTER J1 7 Beer GD Te eee FOCUS IN 2 FROM A2J3 X FOCUS GS FOCUS o FOCUS 96 E 3 i 95 16 Cli REAR VIEW CRT DISPLAY BE eT BIAS 11 X DYNAMIC ACCELERATOR 5 d FOCUS E JS ASTIGMATISM ASTIGMATISM 6 _ 4 WARN NG TP11 14 i 5 lt ja m TRACE ALIGN TRACE ALIGN 45 1 2 2 TRACE 9 d ALIGN C OM A2J3 m J CONSTANT j AGA1W3 CURRENT S C 0 49kv SOURCE j POST FROM js ACCELERATOR l B Y DEF LECT ION al AMPL IF IER Y Mu 12 13 a v J1 2 Y POS TION FROM A233 J4 MS5 t WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE DISCHARGE FIRST BY GROUNDING AT 4 eee 110VF CRT CONNECTION FILTERING on J2 4 15V TP7 i J2 5 j 15 41 10 V 45V HIGH VOLTAGE SHUT DOWN J2 5 TO A6
202. ATTEN2 0 dB 42 30 dBm 10 dB SAMPLE ak HS HH E LE H X o 2 8 8 CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 5 50 sec 5 143 Figure 9 3 IF Adjust Signature IF Section 9 23 Detailed IF gdiust Sjanature 1 MKR 504 4 msec REF 5 0 dBm ATTEN 1 dB 43 30 dBm Ap 2ND STEP 5 dB GAIN STAGE 3RD 3RD STEP 3RD STEP BAIN UAE GAIN STAGE 2ND STEP 2ND STEP i GAIN STAGE ms STAGE 1ST STEP SWE FINE ATTENUATOR ur oe aaa T Vm fit E Lo tS CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 550 msec spi44e Figure 9 4 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 1 Detailed If Adjust Signature 2 Mkr 504 4 msec REF 5 0 dBm ATTEN O dB 30 80 dBm hp 2ND STEP 5 dB GAIN STAGE SAMPLE 3RD STEP 1 GA IN STAGE jet 2ND STEP GAIN STAGE 15 d b REFERENC CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 2 00 sec 5 145 Figure 9 5 Detailed IF Adjust Signature 2 9 24 IF Section Detailed If Adjust Signature 3 MKR 1 834 sec REF 5 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 14 60 dBm hp 5 dB SAMPLE SETTINGS PAST HERE ARE FOR AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE LOG VIDEO BOARD L qo LLL d ES _ CEU EL LEUR HT I uml GAINS CENTER 10 700
203. Any frequency errors at reference 1 will be multiplied by N M on the PLL output m A sampler reference frequency error 2 will be multiplied by its harmonic on the PLL output B A mixer reference frequency error 3 produces the identical error on the PLL output If divider input or output frequencies 4 are wrong check for incorrect divide numbers and data controlling the dividers Synthesizer Section 1 1 13 PRETUNE e OUTPUT ALTERNATE XO LE DAC PATHS A 7 UP DOWN 09 REF ot E gt sp129e Figure 11 5 PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency 11 14 Synthesizer Section Unlocked PLL An unlocked PLL can be caused by problems inside or outside the PLL Troubleshoot this problem by working backward from the oscillator as described in the steps below Numbers in the following text identify items in Figure 11 6 1 The loop integrator output voltage 1 should be attempting to tune the oscillator to the correct frequency The voltage at 1 should increase as the frequency increases on all of the PLLs PLL Measurement Point YTO PLL 414723 pin 1 YTO ERROR Reference PLL A155502 pin 3 LO3 ERR sampler PLL A15J200 pin 13 OFL ERR Fractional N PLL AI4TP13 INTEGRATOR PRETUNE e p OUTPUT sp130e Figure 11 6 Unlocked PLL 2 If the integrator output voltage changes in the manner described in step 1 the problem is external to the PLL For examp
204. Assembly Replacement 4 1 1 Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 29 24 Use a 5 16 inch wrench to connect W41 from the A9 input attenuator to the front panel INPUT 5022 connector Make sure that W40 W36 1 1 are routed between 41 and the attenuator bracket Secure the A9 input attenuator bracket to the center support on the front frame using one panhead screw See Figure 4 3 2 Place led AIWIDSI into the line power switch assembly Attach the line switch assembly into the front frame using one panhead screw Be sure to connect the line power switch ground lug with the screw The screw is captive Fold up and AI5 assemblies as described in Procedure 9 and 15 Assemblies Replacement steps 3 through 5 Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench and connect AlA1W1 to A3J602 Snap post accelerator cable AGA1WS3 to the A18 CRT assembly Snap the black grommet protecting the A6A1W38 into the CRT shield Fold up assemblies A2 4 and 5 as described in Procedure 5 A2 A3 4 and 5 Assemblies Replacement steps 6 through 12 Replace the spectrum analyzer cover assembly Connect the line power cord and switch the spectrum analyzer power on If the display does not operate properly turn off spectrum analyzer power disconnect the line cord and recheck the spectrum analyzer 4 12 Assembly Replacement Procedure 3 A
205. B 3 Disconnect W35 coax 92 from A13J2 4 Connect a test cable from A13J2 to the input of another spectrum analyzer 5 Tune the other spectrum analyzer to 310 7 MHz The signal displayed on the other spectrum analyzer should be approximately 38 dBm 6 Connect the positive lead of a DVM to 1419 pin 15 8 The DVM should measure between 2 0 Vdc and 3 5 V dc If the voltage measures outside this limit perform the following steps RF Section 12 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 a Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch OFF disconnect W13 from 1412 and set the switch ON b Wait for the power on sequence to finish and then set the spectrum analyzer settings to the following Cemer COMIC V occ Reno ito mb da dd a ts qus 3 GHz So MACC Guts endo ae 0 Hz c If the DVM measures 15 Vdc 0 2 V the AI3 second converter is probably defective If the DVM measures outside this limit the Ald frequency control assembly is probably defective Set the switch OFF and reconnect W13 to A14J12 10 11 Remove the test cable from A13J2 and reconnect W35 to A13J2 Disconnect W33 coax 81 from A13J4 and connect W33 through a test cable to the input of another spectrum analyzer Tune the other spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 600 MHz If a 600 MHz signal is not present or its amplitude is less than 5 dBm the fault is probably on the AIS RF assembly Reconnect W33 to A13J4
206. CLK 1 5 R LW LHALT IRQ D GND 15 14 15 NC LRESET INTFCE STB LINTFCE STB L ASWI NTERFACE D GND D GND D GND D GND IAQ BKT PULSE STEP PLE BIDI BIDS BIDS BID 1A7 1 1 4 0101 0102 0103 0104 EOI DAV NRFD NDAC IFC SRQ ATN NC ej D GND e 28V e 5VF e 15VF 10 e 15VF 12 e LOPT 1 0 14 e LOPT PROG 16 e LOPTION 10 18 e OA13 20 OA12 22 e 5VF 24 9 26 e OA8 28 ei D GND 50 e 5 32 e OA4 34 e D GND 36 1 38 40 D GND 42 005 44 004 46 D GND 48 OD 1 50 ODO NC NC HSCAN DPKD CLK ADC IRQ LKEY RPG IRG 10 REF CAL OSC TUNE HB ADC CLK O A10 IR LW BIDO BID2 BID4 BID6 I 1 5 1A2 A1 D105 0101 0106 DIO2 D107 DIOJ 0108 D104 REN EOI DGND DAV DGND NRFD DGND NDAC DGND IFC D GND SRO D GNO ATN D GND NC REAR PANEL J3 LDPT STROBE D GND BADC CLK1 28V 5VF 5VF R LW 15VF LHALT 15VF OPTION IRQI I O D GND LOPT PROG OA15 LOPTION ID OA14 OA13 15VF OA12 11 5VF OA10 WR PROT OAS OA7 D GND OA6 OA5 DGND 4 D GND OA2 OA 1 D GND OAO OD7 D GND OD6 OD5 D GND OD4 OD3 D GND OD2 OD 1 D GND ODO NC e NC NC e e NC LRESET e HSCAN LINTFCE STB e DPKD CLK LINTFCE STB e ADC IRQ D GND e e LKEY RPG IRG D GND e e 10V REF D GND CAL OSC TUNE D GND HB ADC CLK 0
207. CNT frequency display reads all asterisks the frequency counter is probably at fault 6 If a valid frequency is displayed troubleshoot the prescaler on the A4 log amplifier Cal oscillator assembly 7 Reconnect W53 to A2J7 Controller Section 10 13 Frequency Counter See function block Z of A2 schematic diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The frequency counter counts the frequency of the last IF and provides accurate timing signals for digital zero spans The circuit also provides timing signals to the A3 interface assembly ADC analog to digital converter The nominal input frequency is 5 35 MHz 10 7 MHz divided by 2 The circuit frequency reference in the frequency count mode is the 10 MHz reference from the 15 RF assembly The frequency reference in digitized zero spans sweep times 230 ms is the 4 MHz HPIB CLK selected by MUX U704 In the frequency count mode U702 prescales the 10 MHz reference by 5 to generate a 2 MHz timebase This timebase feeds through MUX U704 to programmable timer U700 CLK2 input Programmable timer U700 output OUT2 is the gating signal HBKT PULSE for performing the frequency count The gating time interval is a function of the counter resolution which may be set between 10 Hz and 1 MHz Table 10 2 lists the gate time for each setting of COUNTER RES The gate time is the period during which U511 pin 3 is high The FREQ COUNT input A2J7 is
208. CREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD 0515 1227 5181 5040 7 LABEL ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS 5181 5040 5063 0269 2 SHIELD WALL TOP 5063 0269 5063 0268 1 SHIELD WALL BOTTOM 5063 0268 18 1 5062 7095 4 CRT WIRING ASSY INCLUDES A18L1 A18W1 5062 7095 18 5041 3987 SPACER CRT 5041 3987 18 1 2090 0225 4 TUBE CRT 2090 0225 Replaceable Parts 5 17 Parts List RF Section Item HP Part C Description Mfr Mfr Part Number D Code Number 0515 1032 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 1032 0515 2332 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2332 0515 2332 SCREW MACH X GMM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2332 5021 7467 FILTER CLAMP 5021 7467 0515 2332 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 2332 5002 1008 MAIN DECK 5002 1008 0515 1227 SCREW MACH M3 X 6MM LG FLH HD TORX 0515 1227 5002 1002 FRONTENDDECK 5002 1002 0515 1227 SCREW MACHM3 X GMM LG FLH HD TORX 0515 1227 2360 0461 SCREW MACH 6 32 375 IN LG TORX 2360 0461 0515 0372 SCREW MACH M3 X 8MM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 0372 0515 1250 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 1250 5001 8731 ATTENUATOR BRACKET 5001 8731 08560 00002 ATTENUATOR BRACKET 08560 00002 0515 1250 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG PAN HD TORX 0515 1250 0515 1227 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD TORX 0515 1227 0515 1227 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD TORX 0515 1227 0515 1410 SCREW MACH M3 X GMM LG FLH HD TORX 0515 1410 Oo WB A WO N W N 8 8 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 2 7 9 1 7 8 8 1 5 18 Rep
209. CW CAL OSC signal during VCXO pretune at power up with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz CAL Oscillator ID Indicates incompatible hardware Cal Osc not expected LOG Board ID Indicates incompatible hardware Log board not expected Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL AMPL Unable to Unable to Unable to Unable to Unable to Unable to 7 34 General Troubleshooting adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust adjust amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude of log of log of log of log of log of log scale scale scale scale scale scale 559 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale 560 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale 561 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Possible problem in second step gain 562 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Possible problem in second step gain 563 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Possible problem in third step gain range 564 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale 565 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale 566 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale 567 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Possible problem in Log offset Log Expand stage 568 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Possible problem in Log offset Log Expand stage 569 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust
210. DJ UN and check for the presence of the CAL OSC TUNE signal by monitoring A3J401 pin 25 with an oscilloscope If ERR 499 CAL UNLK is displayed and a signal within the range of 10 V to 10 V is present during part of the retrace period the fault is on the A3 assembly 11 If a constant dc voltage is present during the sweep and all of the retrace period refer to the IF Section troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 9 IF Section Variable Gain Amplifier VGA Refer to function block AB of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The VGA provides adjustable gain in the video path Its nominal gain of 7 can be adjusted 10 0112 removes dc offset to keep U113 its monotonic range Both U112 and 0113 are set to the same value The DAC settings cannot be changed from the front panel Track and Hold Refer to function block AC of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Press on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Center fregen assu tee b od qs 300 MHz SPA edo oon Egal dp foam ebd 0 Hz Detector MOUS ered ema weder qb eau dde bn e Ru ta to qp Sample Reference level GUB V ae EP 70 dBm Los DB AU VISIOD be 2dB DIV SWeep ING due auam ache e 1589
211. ET 5 10 A21 OCXO DELETED IN Cp we 4 l OPT 103 E 21 4 W1 POWER lt 2 W2 CONTROL 50 300 MHz CAL OUT FIGURE 7 7 SHEET 4 OF 5 HP MODEL 8562E OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM HP 8562E HP 8562E OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET 2 14 3 AS IF ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY 2 XTAL 2 LC 2 XTAL 2 LC POLES POLES POLES POLES DETECTOR MIXER 29 ERE M uud ac deeem SHEETS 1 THRU 4 Nod S 2 A p m gt 4 GAINS 41 8 STEP s ro gt A GAIN am oo UE J1 A 2 p LIMITER J2 8 Mo s CONTROL 2 50 an SHEET 6 50 TO FROM A9 2 CONTROL 2 7 2 w52 10 7 MHz CAL SIGNAL N 10 6952 MH D W51 J7 10 MHz REF 2 10 MHz FROM A15J304 SHEETS 1 THRU 4 SWEEP m m ees GENERATOR Jere KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY i PROBE PWR LED PROBE PWR LED 1 1 J3 TO FRONT PANEL J2 lt gt SHEETS 1 THRU 4 5 24 i 10 MHz FREQ COUNT 2 10 FROM A15J302 a SHEETS 1 THRU 4 A4 LOG AMP CAL OSCILLATOR VIDEO OFFSET 4 i l J5 J6 4 lus i GENERAL TROUBLESHOOT NG A3 INTERFACE ASSEMBLY VIDEO FILTER POS PEAK DET PE ADC PN W58 ALT SWP OUT p A14J20 CD eee VIDEO TT OPTION 005 ONLY 1502 FRONT BUFFER J102 VIDEO OUTPUT J4
212. ETECTOR TP16 _ TP1 1105 1105 56 MS7 I m EEE cae TP10 J105 ADC MUX VARIABLE m 9 o GAIN E ENDS POS PEAK Z m m MOD VIDEO AC TRACK AND m PEAK TP6 TP7 HOLD 4 YTO ERR x7 SAMPLED VIDEO rc MUX E CAL OSC i ori ens L ee scan RAMP L e NM a 711 5 Ror Nees ca J2 42 i HMUX_SELO TES VOLT R HMUX_SEL 1 27 SHT 7 ccr 10V REF LPOS RESET B mom E ANALOG BUS CONTROL BOARD STROBES iem BITO0 7 2 rm e KEYBOARD m INTERFACE _ KEYBOARD BD 0 7 LKSCNO 5 R PEAK DETECTOR S LATCH 1602 RESET mI KEYBOARD LKSNS 0 7 BD 0 7 SHOT LPOS RESET 4602 S SUFFER 9 9 INTERRUPT KBD RPG RQ m 1 SHOT KBD IRQ RPG_IRQ CIRCUIT J401 29 L ooo gt INTERRUPT S ROSENFELL IS DETECTOR RPG_COUNT ROSENFELL HROSENFELL BD 0 7 DETECT RPG_COUNT 1 8 CIRCUITRY 2 L __ e 41 POWER CABLE W1 lt lt i HRAMP_COMP CONVERTED DATA OUT C PowER SUPPLY 1 ANALOG 45y L 45 DIGITAL 15V eb n 15 15V RAMP COUNTE CONTROL HSCAN
213. Errata Title amp Document Type 8562E Spectrum Analyzer Service Manual Manual Part Number 08562 90216 Revision Date 1997 12 01 HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XX XX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual provides the best information we could find It may be incomplete or contain dated information and the scan quality may not be ideal If we find a better copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com Search for the model number of this product and the resulting product page will guide you to any available information Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available Agilent Technologies Service Guide HP 8562E Spectrum Analyzer DU HEWLETT PACKARD
214. Figure 6 3 Top View A2 and A3 Unfolded Figure 6 4 Top View A2 4 and A5 Unfolded Figure 6 5 Bottom View AI5 Unfolded Figure 6 6 Bottom View AI5 and Al4 Unfolded Figure 6 7 Al6 Fast ADC Option 007 Figure 6 8 HP 8562E Front End Figure 6 9 Rear View Use the list below to determine the figure s illustrating the desired assembly or cable Assemblies basin pre Figure facta shee TEE TIS 0 6 6 6 6 1 6 2 AS anere TEE 6 1 6 2 loe amplitier Cal oscillator 25 tote too teo sees 6 1 6 3 AO TEIHUSE pes a t aho as 6 1 6 4 AG POWE better pb be dup LIV DPI LEN EE IA LE Ent eds 6 4 AGA I hich voltase module nu dp josie dnd dte dod 6 4 A7 first LO distribution amplifier SLODA 6 8 AS Aow Dand MIRE 6 8 ea Ded 26 gt 8 AIO Yie tuned filter mixer RY THM E EE RAE E SENE 6 8 Udo r 6 8 Al2 NOT ASSIGNED 1 second converter 6 8 ATA dreduency CONTIG cocer Se ee 6 1 6 6 uum 6 1 6 5 6 6 AlG fast ADC Opiom 007 n e Riad Ra RARE T aut 6 7 AD OR ed ter eei
215. Film Resistor Fixed Flange Frequency FC Carbon Film Composition Edge of Cutoff Frequency Face FDTHRU Feedthrough FEM Female FIL HD Fillister Head FL Flash Flat Fluid FLAT PT Flat Point FR Front FREQ Frequency 5 4 Replaceable Parts ABBREVIATIONS FT Current Gain Bandwidth Product Transition Frequency Feet Foot FXD Fixed G GEN General Generator GND Ground GP General Purpose Group II H Henry High HDW Hardware HEX Hexadecimal Hexagon Hexagonal HLCL Helical HP Hewlett Packard Company High Pass C Collector Current Integrated Circuit ID Identification Inside Diameter IF Forward Current Intermediate Frequency N Inch INCL Including INT Integral Intensity Internal J FET Junction Field Effect Transistor Junction Field Effect Transistor K Kelvin Key Kilo Potassium Knurled Kilovolts Direct Current Light Emitting Diode Length Long Linear Linearity Link Lock Leakage Locking Luminous M Male Maximum Mega Mil Milli Mode Milliampere Machined Maximum Molded Carbon Composition Metal Metallized Megahertz Miniature Miter Mold Molded Magnetized Material Millimeter Momentary Mounting Metallic Milliwatt Table 5 1 Reference Designations Abbreviations and Multipliers 3 of 4 ABBREVIATIONS N PLSTC Plastic SMA Subminiature PNL Panel A Type Threader N Nano None PNP Positive Negative Connector N CHAN
216. Filters oco ose Eos due ee ge 9 17 4 8 kHz and 10 7 MHz IF Filters DIM 9 18 10 6052 MHz VCXO gt v 6 Sk a wo X ode oux Be Ew xk X 3 9 18 ew ELE eA ue 9 19 Xt So 9 19 Synchronous 9 19 xay eec Bok e gt Seu we dB ee SS A Sus 9 20 Isolation Ample ee ee 9 20 Detector Mixer T 9 20 Log Offset Gain E secius x ie e iue e Re 9 20 Log Offset Compensation 2 9 20 Los Gam Compensation 54 9 36 9 2 90 amp 9 20 Video MUX 6 ey IET EE RE RR eS 9 21 AA Assembly 55 5 5 nde nude Se 9 21 IF Signature TIT 9 22 Common IF Sonatas Problems 9 26 1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems 9 29 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems ee a ee ae 9 30 3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth eee UTE 9 30 Contents 7 Step Gains Cal Oscillator P O AA Areny E Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Aust Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range 300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out B Low Pass Filter Sweep Generator AM FM Demodulation Audo AE and ia 10 Controller Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Blank Display Digital Signature Anales DSA Display Problems Line Generators Blanking Display fusc
217. Fold the A2 and A3 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5 A2 A3 AA and A5 Assemblies Secure the spectrum analyzer cover assembly Assembly Replacement 4 55 Procedure 16 A21 OCXO Removal 1 Remove the rear frame assembly as described in Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel Removal steps 1 through 20 2 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame 3 Fold out the and 15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9 and Assemblies Removal steps 3 and 4 4 Remove the three screws 1 securing the OCXO to the main deck See Figure 4 28 5 Disconnect W49 coax 82 from the OCXO and disconnect W50 orange cable from the 15 RF assembly Clip the tie wraps that hold W49 and 50 together and remove the OCXO from the spectrum analyzer with the orange cable connected BENEATH FRAME sl16e Figure 4 28 A21 OCXO Mounting Screws 4 56 Assembly Replacement Procedure 16 21 OCXO Replacement l Connect W49 coax 82 to the OCXO and position the OCXO in the spectrum analyzer Dress W50 orange cable next to W49 through the opening in the deck Secure the OCXO to the spectrum analyzer main deck using three screws 1 See Figure 4 28 Connect W50 to A15J306 Install tie wraps to hold 49 and W50 together Fold the Al4 and 15 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 9 Al4 and 15 Assemblies Removal Perform t
218. HP 8566A B should show a 3 dB bandwidth of 600 Hz 100 Hz 8 Reconnect W29 coax 7 to A5J3 10 6952 MHz VCXO Refer to function block E of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The purpose of the 10 6952 MHz voltage controlled crystal oscillator VCXO is to provide an LO for down converting the peak of the 10 7 MHz IF filter passband to 4 8 kHz Since the peak of the passband of the 10 7 MHz IF filters is 10 7 MHz f300 Hz the frequency of the VCXO is between 10 6949 MHz and 10 6955 MHz This frequency can best be measured at the collector of A4Q202 9 18 IF Section The center frequency of the 300 Hz resolution bandwidth filters and the 1 Hz to 100 Hz filters should differ no more than 10 Hz If the center frequency is different by more than this or if no signal is present in the 1 Hz to 100 Hz resolution bandwidth settings troubleshoot the 10 6952 MHz VCXO Error message ERR 539 may occur if the VCXO is not oscillating If problems exist with the VCXO control voltage error messages ERR 536 or ERR 530 may occur Between sweeps the VCXO at times is turned off To prevent the oscillator from turning off press PRESET FREQUENCY 0 3 GHz SPAN 1 kHz SGL_SWP CAL and IF AD Input Switch Refer to function block D of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Informa
219. HP part number 0811 1086 Press to turn spectrum analyzer on i On the spectrum analyzer press RECALL STATE STATE 0 j If the voltage at 0332 pin 2 is correct with 143 pins 9 and 10 shorted but was incorrect with W10 connected the YTO FM coil is probably open replace the All YTO k Replace jumper A14J23 Fractional N Span Problems LO Spans lt 2 MHz If the fractional N spans are inaccurate or non existent but the fractional N PLL is locked to the correct frequency and other spans are correct there may be a problem with the HSCAN signal Check that HSCAN is present at the fractional divider U113 pin 41 in function block AS HSCAN comes from the A3 interface assembly and goes to the sweep generator circuitry in function block A and to fractional N Synthesizer Section 1 1 39 First LO Span Problems All Spans l 10 11 12 13 14 15 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center Hequelicy LEE 300 MHz ME one ste DISCI eI eux 2 MHz Resolution DW RS RR ee vere us 1 MHz 1 MHz siete detest Sousse Ed 501 Check that there is O V to 10 V ramp of 50 ms duration at 14 15 pin 15 If a scan ramp is not present refer to Sweep Generator in this chapter If there is a 0 to 10 V ramp at A14J15 pin 14 the fault is probably in the Main FM sweep swit
220. Hz HP 8340A B or HP 83640A or HP 83650A Measuring receiver HP 8902A Power meter HP 436A or HP 438A alternate Power sensor 10 MHz to 18 GHz HP 8481A or HP 8485A Power splitter dc to 18 GHz HP 11667A or HP 11667B Miscellaneous cables and adapters As per test setup 1 Megabyte of free memory is required for the test program Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 3 Equipment Connections Computer Controller Setup For HP 9000 model 216 or model 236 computers setup instructions are provided in Chapter 1 Computer Installation of the BASIC Operating Manual For HP 9000 model 310 computers setup information is provided in Configuration Reference Manual for Series 300 computers HP IB Cables All test equipment controlled by HP IB should be connected to the internal HP IB of the controller select code 7 If the controller has only one HP IB connector connect the spectrum analyzer to it as well If the controller has dual HP IB connectors connect the spectrum analyzer under test to the second HP IB typically select code 8 10 MHz Reference The 10 MHz REF IN OUT on the spectrum analyzer under test should be connected to the synthesized sweeper 10 MHz Reference Output That is it should be connected to the 10 MHz REF OUTPUT of the HP 8340A B HP 83640A or HP 83650A Adjustment Setups Adjustment setups are included with each adjustment These are in the Adjustment Descriptions section of this chapter
221. Hz signal into A15J801 c If a flat line is displayed within 2 dB of the reference level but the External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment fails troubleshoot the 15 RF Assembly A7 LO Distribution Amplifier Note YTO unlock errors may occur if the power delivered to the A15U100 sampler is less than 9 5 dBm Frequency response will be degraded in both internal and external mixing modes if the output power is low or unlevelled Caution Connecting or disconnecting the A7 bias with the HP 85623 LINE switch on will destroy the A7 assembly Always press to turn the HP 85623 off before removing or reinstalling W12 to either the A7 or A14J10 Note Err 334 may be displayed if the LO OUTPUT connector on the front panel is not properly terminated into a 500 termination ll 2 1 e o o sm632e Figure 12 2 A14J10 Solder Side of Al4 Ignore Pin Numbers on Mating Connector 1 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Disconnect W12 from A14J10 2 Connect a jumper between A14J10 pin 5 and A14J19 pin 6 Connect a jumper between A14J18 pin 13 and A14J18 pin 1 See Figure 12 2 3 Connect the positive lead of DVM to A14J18 pin 14 and the negative lead to A14J18 pin 6 4 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on 5 The voltage measured on the DVM should be more negative than 9 4 Vdc 6 Move the jumper from A14J18 pin 1 to A14J18 pin 2 The voltage measured on the DVM should be more positive than 12 3 Vdc
222. I are both low 0 See Table 8 12 Table 8 12 LP Q Truth Table Mode ILP OI12M SELISCLK 1l LSAMPLE LPEAK PO u L L H L L L TE Clocking Peak Pit Sample L H 32 K Byte Static RAM Refer to function block K of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The static RAM stores the flash ADC samples that are taken when the fast ADC circuitry is in the write mode When not in the write mode the static RAM is read by the CPU on the A2 controller assembly to retrieve the fast ADC data The 8 bit Q bus connects the outputs of latch U30 to the data port of static RAM U32 ADC Interface Section 8 33 Al6 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits Option 007 The fast ADC control circuits consist of the CPU interface and control registers the reference clock a clock and sample rate generator a trigger circuit a 16 bit post trigger counter a 15 bit circular address counter a video trigger comparator and the reference and power supply circuits CPU Interface and Control Registers Refer to function block A of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Al6 assembly digital interface to the A2 controller assembly consists of 8 bit bi directional data bus one address line a most significant byte strobe and a
223. ILSW gt 4 dBm HSIGIDOFFB 298 MHz TO BLOCK V J602 10V SIG ID ON 7 w 15V SIG ID OFF SYNTHESIZER SECTION 10 MHz deno W22 10 MHz FREQ COUNT a OH 10 A2J8 TO A14J301 10 MH 0 dBm w51 2 J304 e 10 MHz REF 2 3 1 aD 84 0 dBm 10 MHz J301 ox 4 10 MHz REPLIN OUT umm ee TO REAR PANEL J9 OUT 0 4dBm 4 2 1048 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT TO FRONT PNL J5 10dBm 600 MHz 1 J701 2ND LO DRIVE lt lt TO A13J4 Se OdBm W48 600 MHz J702 600 MHz Bo L7 dBm TO A10J8 EET 2 OF 41 m cu J200 MS8 lt JH aE NEG 10V SUPPLIES T10VREFA 10VA i TO BLOCKS AB AND AP SHEET 3 OF 4 803 19 p esc ing 310 7 MHz a Es 2 0 IF OUTPUT OR 83 TO REAR PNL J10 001 CS E 60 96 MHz 7 124 W29 10 7 MHz J601 10 MHz IF TO A5J3 5 dBm FIGURE 11 14 RF ASSEMBLY BLOCK DIAGRAM 12 RF Section The RF Section converts the input signal to a 10 7 MHz IF Intermediate Frequency See the detailed block diagram Figure 12 8 Note The block diagrams for the Al4 and 15 assemblies are located in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Low Band Problems High Band Problems Low and High Band Problems 7 LO Distribution Amplifier 8 Low Band Mixer A9 Input A
224. Indicates problems in the span calibration Troubleshoot any unlocks before attempting to troubleshoot span calibration problems because the loops must all lock in order to perform the calibration If LO spans greater than 1 MHz are correct check A14U114B A14U115A A14U116 or A14Q101 This error message appears when the roller span attenuator DAC is out of range This DAC value is recalculated each time there are changes to the span or start frequency ERR 315 is set if this value is less than 10 or greater than 245 This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware 316 FREQ ACC Sensitivity of main roller pretune DAC is 0 Once the main roller is locked the MAINSENSE voltage is measured and the pretune DAC value is incremented by two ERR 316 15 set if the difference between the new MAINSENSE voltage and the previous MAINSENSE voltage is 0 This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware YTO Loop Errors 317 to 320 These messages indicate that the YTO main coil coarse DAC ERR 317 or fine DAC ERR 318 is at its limit If error codes 300 or 301 are not present a hardware problem exists in the YTO loop but the loop
225. J601 and reconnect W29 to A15J601 12 16 RF Section Third Converter Refer to function blocks A B C D and E on AI5 RF Section Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The 3rd converter consists of the 2nd IF distribution 2nd IF amplifier double balanced mixer 10 7 MHz bandpass filter and flatness compensation amplifier The 2nd IF distribution switches between two possible 2nd IF inputs the internally generated 2nd IF or the external mixing IF INPUT A variable dc bias can be applied to the IF INPUT for external mixers which require such bias The selected input is fed to the 2nd IF Amplifier This amplifier consists of four stages of gain and two stages of SAW filters for image frequency rejection The flatness compensation amplifier consists of two fixed gain stages and two stages of variable gain This provides an overall adjustable gain of 4 dB to 30 dB This gain is adjusted during an spectrum analyzer sweep to compensate for front end conversion loss versus frequency Perform the following steps to test the amplifier gain The 10 7 MHz bandpass filter provides a broadband termination to the mixer while filtering out unwanted mixer products 1 On the HP 85623 press AUX CTRL then INTERNAL 2 In the 2nd IF distribution function block A diode CR802 should be forward biased and diode 801 should be reverse biased 3 Disconnect W35 coax 92 and connect
226. JUST STATUS AMPLITUDE the caloscillator on the A4 assembly might not be providing the correct output signal Perform the following steps 1 Disconnect W30 white from A5J4 2 Connect W30 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer and set its controls as follows Center Tequency vex ova ote EVE OD Ee 10 7 MHz 30 dBm 3 Observe the spectrum analyzer display while pressing FULL ADJ on the spectrum analyzer If a 35 dBm signal does not appear troubleshoot the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly 4 If a 35 dBm signal does appear troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly 405 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole 406 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole 407 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole 408 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole 409 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole 410 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole 411 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in third crystal pole 412 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in fourth crystal pole 413 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in first crystal pole 414 RBW 10K Unable to adjust 10 kHz resolution bandwidth in second crystal pole General Troubleshooting 7 29 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 4
227. MB to BNC Manual probe cable 5001 8743 Test cable BNC HP 10503A Test cable BNC HP 10503A Test cable BNC HP 10503A 7 Sampling oscillator Manual probe cable 5001 8743 Frequency counter 3 to 6 8 GHz HP 5342A HP 5343A LO distribution amplifier Manual probe cable 5001 8743 10 Low band flatness Not applicable Not Applicable 11 High band flatness Not applicable Not Applicable 12 Calibrator amplitude Power meter HP 8902A HP 436A 85680 60093 lt gt oo HP 438A Power sensor 300 MHz HP 84824 HP 8481A 13 10 MHz reference Frequency counter HP 5342A HP 5343A Oscillator 9 to 11 MHz 14 External mixer bias Manual probe cable 5001 8743 D 15 External mixer amplitude Power meter HP 8902A HP 436A HP 438A Power sensor HP 8481D HP 8484A 310 7 MHz 25 to 35 dBm Source 310 7 MHz 30 dBm HP 8340A B Adjustment Procedures 2 1 1 Front End Cal adjustment This procedure automates two manual procedures Frequency Response Adjustment and YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Adjustment This procedure is described in Chapter 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software 2 12 Adjustment Procedures 1 High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment 1 High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Assembly Adjusted A6 power supply Related Performance Test There is no related performance test for this adjustment Description The high voltage power supply is adjusted to the voltage marked
228. MHZ Adjusts center frequency of fourth stage of LC bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHz Adjusts the attenuation of the reference 15 dB attenuator for 15 dB between minimum and maximum attenuation Adjusts center frequency of first stage of crystal bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHZ Adjusts center frequency of second stage of crystal bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHz Table 2 2 Adjustable Components continued Reference Adjustment Adjustment Description Designator Name Number A5T500 5 502 A6R410 A14R42 A14R76 A14R93 A15C100 A15C210 15 750 15 751 150302 15 561 A15R926 A17R4 A17R11 A17R21 A17R26 A17R34 17555 A17Ro7 A17R75 A17R77 A17R90 AlTR92 A17R93 XTAL CTR 3 XTAL CTR 4 HV ADJ 6 01 GHz FM SPAN 3 2 GHz SMPL MATCH VCO RANGE VCXO TRIPLER 10 MHz ADJ CAL AMPTD EXT BIAS ZERO Z GAIN CUTOFF Z FOCUS X FOCUS COARSE FOCUS X GAIN X POSN Y GAIN Y POSN TRACE ALIGN DDD ASTIG O r2 r2 r2 r2 N r2 r2 r2 AB Adjusts center frequency of third stage of crystal bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHz Adjusts center frequency of fourth stage of crystal bandwidth filter to 10 7 MHz Adjusts the voltage between A6TP405 and A6TP401 to the voltage marked on the 1 high voltage module Adjusts the main coil tune driver current at a YTO frequency of 6 01 GHz near the upper YTO frequency limit Adjusts the FM span accuracy by affecting the sensitivity of
229. MHz Frequency range 100 kHz to 2 9 GHz Maximum S WR 1 1 1 MHz to 2 0 GHz 1 30 2 0 GHz to 2 9 GHz Critical Specifications Recommended Use for Equipment Substitution Model HP 5061B HP 5343A OR HP 5350B Option 001 HP 5334A B HP 8566B HP 8902A HP 8481A HP 8481D HP 8482A performance tests A adjustments M test amp adjustment module T troubleshooting operation verification General Information l I 1 Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment continued Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Use for Equipment Substitution Model Jther Equipment ontroller Required to run operation verification software HP 9816A V No substitute HP 9836A C HP 310 320 HP 332 360 Jscilloscope Bandwidth 3 dB de to 100 MHz HP 54501A P A T Two channels Minimum vertical deflection factor 5 mV div Minimum timebase setting 100 ns Digitizing display with time cursors Delta t cursor accuracy in 500 ns Div 0 1 us unplifier Frequency range 2 0 to 8 0 GHz HP 11975A P Minimum output power leveled 2 0 to 8 0 GHz 16 dBm Output SWR leveled 1 7 ower supply Output voltage gt 24 Vdc HP 6114A A Output voltage accuracy 0 2 V ignature multimeter Clock frequency gt 10 MHz HP 5005A B T Time interval function Agital voltmeter Range 15 Vde to 120 Vde HP 3456A A T Accuracy X1 mV on 10 V range Input impedance gt 1 M Q robes JVM test leads 236 inches
230. MHz Pu DIU fec nda doo ees ppl oe eta 10 dBm Press MKR MARKER DELTA on the spectrum analyzer Decrease the HP 3335A power to 26 dBm Calculate the error Error delta marker reading 16 dB If the error is less than f0 2 dB no adjustment is necessary 10 11 Set the HP 3335A power to 10 dBm Adjust A4R531 see Figure 2 10 to read two times the error For example if the calculated error is 0 75 dB adjust A4R531 for a delta marker amplitude reading of 1 5 dB Press CAL ADJ CURR IF STATE Repeat steps 7 through 11 Adjustment Procedures 2 33 6 Sampling Oscillator Adjustment Assembly Adjusted 15 RF assembly Related Performance Test There is no related performance test for this adjustment procedure Description The sampling oscillator tank circuit is adjusted for a tuning voltage of 5 05 Vdc when the sampling oscillator is set to 297 222 MHz The voltage monitored is actually the tuning voltage divided by 4 05 The setting is then checked at other frequencies for the full tuning range of the sampling oscillator SPECTRUM ANALYZER 44 DIGITAL VOLTMETER A14 DVM TEST LEADS FREQUENCY CONTROL ca con oeoooo aaa SK17 A15 RF Figure 2 11 Sampler Adjustment Setup Equipment Digital voltmeter eevee ae ee es eee ke ee HP 3456A IDE EE leads ei ee ane sani hacer a a ene
231. MQ 6 On the spectrum analyzer press AUX CTRL REAR PANEL and 10 MHz 7 Disconnect W22 10 MHz frequency counter from A2J8 The display will probably appear distorted and error messages may appear Ignore the error messages 2 64 Adjustment Procedures 10 17 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Adjust A2R152 16 MHz PLL ADJ until the microwave frequency counter reads 14 4 MHz 200 KHz Reconnect W22 to A2J8 The microwave frequency counter should read 16 MHz If the counter reads 16 MHz and the display is still distorted perform the display adjustments in Display Adjustment in this chapter On the spectrum analyzer press CAL REALIGN Adjustment Procedures 2 65 18 600 MHz Reference Adjustment Assembly Adjusted 15 RF assembly Related Performance Test There is no related performance test for this adjustment Description The 100 MHz VCXO and the tripler are adjusted for a maximum signal level at 600 MHz A spectrum analyzer is used to monitor the amplitude of the 600 MHz signal while performing these adjustments Equipment Spectrum etur ax E b HP 8566 Procedure Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off disconnect the power cord and remove the spectrum analyzer cover Fold down the 15 RF and 14 frequency control assemblies Prop up the frequency control assembly Disconnect W33 gray brown coax cable from A15J701 Connec
232. N 500 COAX CABLE WITH BNC MALE WRENCH HEX KEY OPTION 908 RACK KIT WITH FLANGES Includes Parts Listed Below PANEL DRESS PANEL SUB SUPPORT REAR FRAME FRONT FRAME REAR CORNER STRUT RETAINER PUSH ON KB TO SHFT EXT SCREW MACH M3 x 0 5 GMM LG PAN HD SCREW MACH M3 5 x 0 6 GMM LG PAN HD SCREW MACH M3 5 x 0 6 GMM LG SCREW MACH M5 x 0 8 12 MM LG PAN HD SCREW METRIC SPECIALTY M4 x 0 7 THD 7MM MOUNT FLANGE SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 10MM LG PAN HD WRENCH HEX KEY ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS OPTION 909 RACK KIT WITH FLANGES AND HANDLES Includes Parts Listed Below PANEL DRESS PANEL SUB SUPPORT REAR FRAME FRONT FRAME REAR CORNER STRUT RETAINER PUSH ON KB TO SHFT EXT SCREW MACH M3 x 0 5 GMM LG PAN HD SCREW MACH M3 5 x 0 6 GMM LG PAN HD Mfr Mfr Part Code Number 2003 6113 02 29JP104 2 HP 10502A AWML4 5001 8739 5001 8740 5001 8742 5021 5807 5021 5808 5021 5836 669 0515 0886 0515 0887 0515 0889 0515 1241 0515 1331 5061 9679 0515 1114 AWML4 5958 6573 5001 8739 5001 8740 5001 8742 5021 5807 5021 5808 5021 5836 669 0515 0886 0515 0887 Replaceable Parts 5 7 Reference Designation Al HP Part Number 0515 088 0515 1241 0515 1331 5061 9501 5061 9685 0515 1106 8710 1755 5958 6573 1494 0060 0515 0949 0515 1013 0515 0909 2535 0080 C L 6 Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued Qty Description Mfr Mfr Pari Code Number 5 8 Replaceable Part
233. NABLE A3U400 and A3U414 provide a 2 ps delay between the time HANA BUS goes high and the enable line to demultiplexer A3U407 goes low 10 Press AUX CTRL and REA Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Center qc 300 MHz Spall kee PEN Meu St 100 MHz Check that 30407 pin 1 goes low approximately 2 after HANA_BUS A3U400 pin 3 goes high If HANA BUS is absent check for pulses on ABT A3U505 pin 2 and IA10 A3U505 pin 5 If A3UA407 pin 1 is not delayed 2 HANA BUS check for the presence of the 1 MHz HBADC CLKO If A3U407 pin 1 is not delayed 2 us from HANA BUS and HBADC CLKO is correct suspect a fault in either A3U414 A3U400 Press PRESET and set the controls as follows wr Lt ke eee aa Ae ee E ee eee ee eee ee eee tee 0 Hz Trigger SINGL Monitor A3U401 pin 3 LR STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the AI5 RF assembly PANEL and check that pulses occur when toggling between EXT ME an d 10 XI Monitor A3U401 pin 5 LF STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the Al4 frequency control assembly Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between ATTEN settings of 10 and 20 dB ADC Interface Section 8 29 11 Monitor A3U401B pin 7 LIF_STB with an oscilloscope or
234. PLIES 28 V 15 V V 45 V 12 6 V 15 V gt A2 A3 A4 gt TO A2 A3 B1 FAN J3 J1 A W1 POWER CABLE A5 14 15 3 WARNING i A6A1W2 ES g 4 HIGH VOLTAGE SHUT DOWN 7 c gt 2 45 kV 5 2 46 kV 2 55 kV A6A1W3 17 CRT DISPLAY DRIVER i INTENS TY FOCUS LEVEL SHIFTERS X DEF LECT I ON INTENSITY FOCUS AMPLIFIER i Y DEF LECT ION AMPL IF IER d i CRT BIAS t l 3 2 47 HEATER 2 45 kV 2 72 4 CATHODE 2 45 kV 6 GRID 2 55 kV 10 FOCUS GRID 1 7 5 J3 ACCELERATOR 51 V le osnov _ 8 8 1 2 X 4 000 Ize ly 2 2 TRACE ALIGN EIE eR ee gt ABA1W3 POST ACCELERATOR FIGURE 7 7 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOT ING WARNING 2 45 kV VAC F ILAMENT 12 27 CE 98 11 3 38 10 5 b as d te CRT CONNECTOR REAR VIEW WARNING WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE DISCONNECT AT CRT WITH CAUTION DISCHARGE FIRST BY GROUNDING AT CRT CONNECTION HP 8562E OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET 3 OF 3 ADC Interface Section The ADC Interface section includes the 1 1 keyboard A1A2 RPG rotary pulse generator interface and 16 fast ADC Option 007 assemblies Table 8 1 lists signal versus pin numbers for con
235. Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed Adjustment or Repaired Number 8 low band mixer Frequency response adjustment A9 input attenuator Frequency response adjustment or perform the frequency response performance test in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide The adjustment must be performed if the performance test fails 10 RYTHM YIG tuned filter mixer RYTHM adjustment Frequency response adjustment All YTO YTO adjustment A 3 2nd converter Frequency response adjustment Al4 frequency control Display adjustment fast zero span YTO adjustment LO distribution amplifier adjustment Frequency response adjustment 15 10 MHz reference adjustment TCXO Option 103 600 MHz reference adjustment Calibrator amplitude adjustment External mixer bias adjustment Sampling oscillator adjustment External mixer amplitude adjustment Frequency response adjustment A15U100 sampler Sampling oscillator adjustment Al7 CRT driver Display adjustment 18 1 CRT Display adjustment 19 HP IB No related adjustment A2 OCXO 10 MHz reference adjustment OCXO Adjustment Procedures 2 5 Table 2 2 Adjustable Components Reference Adjustment Adjustment Description Designator Name Number A2R152 A2R206 A2R209 A2R215 A2R218 A2R262 A2R263 A2R268 A2R271 A4C707 A4R445 AAR531 46544 A4R826 16 MHz PLL ADJ DGTL X GAIN SWEEP OFFSET DGTL Y GAIN VIDEO OFFSET
236. R11 CUTOFF does not function properly place the AI7 CRT driver in the service position 5 Verify that blanking pulses are present at A17TP2 using an oscilloscope The pulses should be normal TTL levels approximately 1 us wide and 4 or 7 ps apart If the blanking pulses are not correct check the BLANKING output of the A2 controller assembly and cable WT 6 If blanking pulses are present check A17TP10 with the oscilloscope The TP10 signal should vary with the front panel intensity adjustment and be approximately 40 Vp p maximum The signal will be composed of both blanking pulses and varying intensity levels for the lines being drawn a If a proper signal is not present at A17TP10 check A17Q1 Q2 and CR2 b If the TP10 signal does not vary with the front panel intensity adjustment check the signals at Al7TP4 and A17TP1 Both signals should vary with front panel intensity adjustment The TP4 signal should be up to 4 Vp p and signal should be up to approximately 12 Vp p Warning The Al7 CRT driver contains lethal voltages with lethal currents Use extreme care when servicing this assembly Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing this assembly Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury 13 10 Display Power Supply Section 10 11 Note The following measurements should be made with a high voltage probe such as the HP 34111A Wh
237. RY AND CONTROL N l PWR UP FROM J1 DRESET FUNCTION BLOCKS d V 1 BUS 4 OPTION J6 W4 OPTION INTER 50 MODULE ADDRESS BUS CONNECTS LJ 100 7 00 7 BID0 7 00 7 L PWR UP 1 p un o o as Ge P DISABLE pos EEPROM ROM __p POWER BATTERY ORAM Ly i BACKUP ae E O m m E BATTERY J9 i W6 J5 i A19W1 4 19 FIGURE 10 12 A2 CONTROLLER BLOCK DIAGRAM 11 Synthesizer Section The synthesizer section includes the A7 switched first LO distribution amplifier the All YTO and parts of the Al4 frequency control and 15 RF assemblies Simplified and detailed block diagrams for each assembly are located at the end of this chapter Troubleshooting Using the TAM Troubleshooting Test Setup Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section General PLL Troubleshooting PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency Unlocked PLL Unlocked Reference PLL 100 MHz VCXO Operation 100 MHz VCXO Troubleshooting 100 MHz VCXO Third LO Driver Amplifier 100 MHz VCXO Unlocked Reference PLL 600 MHz SAWR Operation 600 MHz SAWR Troubleshooting 600 MHz SAWR Third LO Driver Amplifier 600 MHz SAWR Unlocked Offset Lock Loop Sampling Oscillator Operation Troubleshooting Unlocked YTO PLL Operation Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL Unlocked Fractional N PLL Operation Confirming an Unlocked Conditio
238. S HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Safety Notes The following safety notes are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument Caution Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warning Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Instruction The instruction manual symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is Manual necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the manual General Safety Considerations Warning Warning Caution This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted
239. SASM consists of A3U527 and A3U528 Upon the occurrence of HSTART ADC the SASM successively toggles bits from high to low starting with the most significant bit The digital result is then converted to an analog current in DAC U518 and compared with the SAMPLED VIDEO If the DAC current is too high the output of U512 will be low telling the SASM that the guess was high and that the bit just toggled should remain low It then moves on to the next most significant bit until all 12 bits have been guessed at Each guess takes 1 ps one cycle of HBADC CLKO or 12 ps to complete a conversion When the conversion is completed the SASM sets LCMPLT low The bits are written to the data bus by buffers U514 and 0516 1 Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows 900 MHz Snc M CCP rr TELE 0 Hz SWEEP DME 60 s Detector mode SAMPLE 2 Trigger an oscilloscope on HSTART ADC U506 pin 15 and monitor the outputs of the SASM U527 pins 18 and 19 U528 pins 14 through 23 Each bit should start high and be switched low It will either stay low or return to a high state 1 ys later depending on the comparison at U512 3 If the outputs do not exhibit this bit pattern and the ADC ASM checks are working properly suspect A3U527 U528 or one of the latches U514 516 If the output of 8
240. SIG ID Oscillator ON Signal at A15X602 298 MHz 50 kHz at least 1 dBm State 2 A15J901 pin 13 LSID TTL high SIG ID Oscillator OFF 3rd LO Driver Amplifier Provides LO for Double Balanced Mixer RF Section 12 19 With the SIG ID Oscillator on measure the frequency at A15X602 with a frequency counter and an active probe On the HP 85623 press until A15J901 pin 13 is at TTL low Diodes CR603 and CR605 should be forward biased and CR604 should be reverse biased approximately 6 Vdc reverse bias Diodes CR501 and CR502 should be forward biased disabling the 3rd LO Driver Amplifier The voltage at the R622 R623 node should measure approximately 5 Vdc biasing Q604 on If oscillator bias voltages are correct place 100 Q resistor across SAWR 0602 input and output If the SAWR has failed this will provide the equivalent loss of a correctly functioning SAWR and the circuit will begin to oscillate 10 MHz Reference The spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference consists of 10 MHz OCXO Option 103 TCXO with associated TTL level generator and distribution circuitry The OCXO or TCXO and TTL level generator are turned off when an external 10 MHz reference is used Also with the analyzer set to EXTernal frequency reference U304A output low forces the output of U304D to stay high This allows U304B to control the outputs of U303B U304C and U303D In Ternal frequency reference U304D controls the outputs of th
241. SPAN VIDEO FROM 32103 C8 C23 lt NON OPTION 007 POWER 1 INTERF ACE CABLE TO A3J401 10 7 MHz J7 FROM C1 C3 A4J4 10 MHz FROM si141e c gt J1 A15J302 Q CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY A2 POWER D X LINE GENERATOR SUPPLIES J201 13 F DISPLAY OUTPUT 28V 15VF pd MULT PLEXER BLANKING CONTROL TAN rcu 5VF 9 BLANK LOW STOP 1 Rer 7 BLANK i 15VF Yoon T PASS S SWEEP GAIN Y X GAIN FILTER IOV WEEP OFFSET 27 a EX OX UA M CN BREANKING VIDEO GAIN S VIDEO OFFSET J202 2 m CONTROL bs ANALOG LL J OX 572 Focus ZERO SPAN C ae SY 7 CX CONTROL Fean BLANK a FROM DISPLAY CONTROL W L SAMPLE AND HOLD T GENERATOR VECTOR M z OUTPUT L BRIGHT DEF 1 A 10V REF VECTOR augur ANALOG E V REF OUT ZERO SPAN lax o D ee PES J202 14 4201 3 D V REF DAC 52 INTENSITY e gt n 7 2 OUT J201 4 gt 10V REF 54 Y DISPLAY E i CONTROL i i ADDRESS BUS i L i 100 7 Z FREQUENCY Y INPUT COUNTER OUTPUT amp BuP 1B 00 7 J202 14 MS7 CONTROLLER SECTION W7 TO 1741 29 10 W7 TO A16J1 J2 19 OPTION 007 LL O RESET _ R CHIP SELECT CIRCUI T
242. Set the HP 8340A B output to the frequency indicated in the active function area of the HP 85623 display Adjust the HP 8340A B POWER LEVEL for a 10 dBm reading on the HP 8902A On the HP 85623 adjust the RF gain DAC value using the front panel knob or keypad until the marker reads 10 dBm fO 10 dB Each DAC count results in an amplitude change of approximately 0 01 dB On the HP 85623 press th to proceed to the next frequency Repeat steps 7 through 10 for all low band frequencies gt 10 MHz Press tt until 10 MHz is displayed in the active function block Record the RF gain DAC value at 10 MHz 10 MHz RF gainDAC value Adjustment Procedures 2 45 9 Frequency Response Adjustment 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 Add 67 to the 10 MHz RF gain DAC value and record as the 2 MHz RF gain DAC value 2 MHz RF gain DAC value Add 62 to the 10 MHz RF gain DAC value and record as the 6 MHz RF gain DAC value 6 MHz RF gain DAC value Press 1 until 2 MHz is displayed in the active function block Use the DATA keys to enter the 2 MHz RF gain DAC value recorded in step 14 Press D until 6 MHz is displayed in the active function block Use the DATA keys to enter the 6 MHz RF gain DAC value recorded in step 15 Press NEXT BAND on the HP 85623 Disconnect the HP 8482A and its adapter from the HP 11667B Connect the HP 8485A to the HP 8902A Zero and calibrate
243. Sotto TAM UF SW 7 10 Loading the software TN 7 10 HP IB addresses 7 11 Data files and system mass t des d lor a 7 11 bxecutmg d BS Bin eh eS 7 11 TAM 5 7 12 Test COMMeCtOrs ES oe 7 13 Revision Connectors o s e soros o edu ete qe der dE 7 13 Inconsistent Results o ele x og ce oe Mex Re ge 7 13 Erroneous RESUS s s we oU eS 7 13 blank Display Xs ec 7 13 Automatic Fault Isolation 2 2 2 7 14 Displayi POwer Supply eee Em Roue cy ees 7 14 Controller Check 22 os s a mod Boe cm oe Mee Oe eod Id 7 14 ADC Interface Check 2 2 2 2 2 2 7 14 MPA OG ou ee 7 14 LO Control Check Ewe BE eee de dE RRS 7 15 Contents 4 RF Low Band Check 7 15 Manual Probe Troubleshooting a 7 15 RF Path Fault Isolation YE Re d WR 7 16 Calibration Oscillator Tocubleshogtine Mode c A dE 7 16 Error Messages ha Eo e ed ab Bs dies eei M 8 ad 7 17 Viewing Multiple Gr ee ee 54 3 2 44 ee m 7 17 Error Message Elimination TOME 7 18 S
244. T of 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Step gain correction failed for 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Check narrow bandwidth SGO attenuator Calibration of dc level at ADC failed for lt 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Invalid demodulated data for lt 300 Hz resolution bandwidth flatness and IF down converter Demod data for calibration may be bad Adjustment of VCXO down converter failed with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Narrow bandwidth VCXO calibration failed Flatness correction data for resolution bandwidths lt 300 Hz not acceptable Absolute gain data for resolution bandwidths lt 300 Hz not acceptable ADC timeout adjusting resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Timeout during data sampling narrow bandwidth chunk Unable to do frequency count of CAL OSC using IF down converter when adjusting resolution bandwidths less than 300 Haz Unable to obtain adequate FM demod range to measure 500 Hz IF filter with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Unable to auto range chirp signal while setting VCXO or doing flatness calibration with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Unable to auto range CW CAL OSC signal to count VCXO signal with resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Shape of 500 Hz IF filter appears too noisy to adjust VCXO down converter for resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Unable to auto range the CW CAL OSC signal to pretune the VCXO for resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Unable to find
245. This is a captive screw and cannot be removed from the line switch assembly See Figure 4 3 Gently remove the line switch assembly using caution to avoid damaging A1WI and power indicator LED A1WIDSI Remove A1W1 and AIWIDSI from the line power switch assembly Remove the three screws 1 securing the front frame assembly to the right side frame of the spectrum analyzer See Figure 4 4 1 3 PLACES 51116 Figure 4 4 front frame Mounting Screws Remove the three screws securing the front frame assembly to the left side frame of the spectrum analyzer Remove the four screws 1 Figure 4 3 securing the CRT mounts to the deck Pull the cable tie 1 to W9 See Figure 4 5 Gently pry W9 the CRT cable from the end of the CRT assembly Support the 18 CRT assembly while gently pulling the front frame and CRT out of the spectrum analyzer 1 or 2 inches Disconnect 18 1 the trace align wires from A17J5 Remove the front frame and CRT assemblies Gently pull the CRT assembly off of the front frame assembly Assembly Replacement 4 9 Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT 18 1 A18W W9 sm627e Figure 4 5 Installing the CRT and front frame Assemblies Replacement Note Use care when handling the glass CRT EMI shield The glass may be cleaned using thin film cleaner HP part number 8500 2163 and a lint free cloth When installing the glass shield face the side of the glass with the silver
246. Use an oscilloscope to verify that the signals at N in U112 pin 8 and N out TP6 are identical except for a sub microsecond delay 11 Detector and integrator troubleshooting a Check the phase detector output on TP11 in block AO If F ref is higher in frequency than TP6 reclocked VCO N then the average voltage at TP11 should be positive by 0 05 V to 10 V If F_ref is lower TP11 should be 0 05 V to 10 V The polarity of the output of the loop gain block AP TP12 should be the same as the polarity of the input TP11 The integrator op amp U106 output TP13 should try to go very positive about 12 V if its average input TP12 is positive If its average input is negative it should try to go very negative about 12 V If its average input is zero and it is functioning correctly it may take on any output voltage between 12 V and 12 V Synthesizer Section 11 35 Frequency Span Accuracy Problems The spectrum analyzer employs lock and roll tuning to sweep the first LO for spans greater than 2 0 MHz The first LO is locked to the start frequency immediately after the previous sweep has been completed The first LO is then unlocked and when a trigger signal is detected the first LO sweeps rolls When there is a considerable delay between the end of one sweep and the beginning of the next the actual first LO start frequency may differ from the locked start frequency This start frequency drift will be most noticeab
247. Voltage Assembly Procedure 7 A6A1 High Voltage Assembly Removal Warning The A6 power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages 4 10 11 IZ 13 14 with lethal currents in all areas Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure Failure to follow this precaution can represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury Disconnect the power cord from the spectrum analyzer Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 1 Spectrum Analyzer Cover Fold out the A2 A3 4 and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and A5 Assemblies Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench Warning The voltage potential at ABA1W3 is 9 kV Disconnect at the CRT with caution Failure to properly discharge AGA1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument Connect the spectrum analyzer line power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the AGA1WS post accelerator cable Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line power switch is in the off position Connect a high voltage probe 1000 1 such as the HP 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input Connect the clip lead of the probe ground to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer Slip the tip of the high voltage pr
248. W12 Po A14 FREQUENCY CONTROL BOARD ASSEMBLY d POWER FM COIL DRIVER EN 20 16 i MAIN COIL DRIVER d po ER Minh BIAS SWEEP 0 5V GH J7 2 TO REAR PANEL 8 5 ALTN swe our 28 J20 TO REAR PANEL J11 OPT 005 3 007 300 MHz CAL OUT 10dBm W40 CN V OUTPUT s 145e 1ST LO OUT BAND LO BAND SAMPLER OUT 4501 411 IF OUT 310 7 MHz LOW BAND W32 NEP P O W12 30 Hz 2 9 GHz 87 CA P O W12 3 P O 15 RF BOARD ASSEMBLY 777771 nl s OFFSET E NETTE 285 i 297 MHz A13 2nd CONVERTER 5 9107 GHz 5 6 7 FRACTIONAL N PLL Xv o X EXD 310 7 MHz 2 5 MHz 800 1020 MHz se N N 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOT I NG A15 RF BOARD ASSEMBLY 3rd CONVERTER ee 1099 92 XJ 10 7 MHz 4601 W29 10 7 MHz F OUT 802 p db 25 TO A5J3 5 W36 gt do TO FRONT PANEL J3 2nd OUTPUT 98 MHz TO REAR PANEL J10 SIG 1D SHEET 5 OPTION J5 008 LO TEST P MT TEE 10 MHz REF 2 TO A4J7 SHEET 5 10 MHz FREQ us COUNTER TO A2J8 10 05 SHEET 5 5 AND CONTROL FROM A14J12 10 MHz REF IN OUT TO REAR PANEL J9 SHEET 5 POWER 100 MHz FROM A6 VCXO SHEET 6 M ps 10 CONTROL TO FROM A3 SHE
249. W34 to A15U100J1 and W32 to A15J101 The First LO OUTPUT located on the front panel must be terminated in 50 ohms If the YTO unlocks only with certain center frequency and span combinations check that the termination is in place Set the spectrum analyzer CENT On the spectrum analyzer press SGL SWP Move jumper 14 23 to the TEST position Disconnect W34 from A15U100J1 and measure the power of the signal at the end of W34 If the power is less than 6 5 dBm suspect W34 A7 SLODA or All YTO Move jumper 14 23 to the NORM position 1 1 12 Synthesizer Section HP 8340A CW Frequency GHz 6 067000 6 087000 6 110200 6 141000 4 710000 6 174000 6 193000 6 213000 6 066000 6 069000 6 247000 6 107000 3 912000 6 289000 6 321000 6 333000 Table 11 5 Sampling Oscillator Test Frequencies HP 85633 Center Frequency Sampling Oscillator Freq MHz Offset PLL MHz 285 000 286 364 287 500 288 462 288 889 290 000 290 909 291 667 292 500 293 478 294 444 295 000 296 000 296 471 297 000 297 222 Counter Reading Sampler IF MHz General PLL Troubleshooting The synthesizer section relies heavily on phase locked loops PLL Typically a faulty PLL is either locked at the wrong frequency or unlocked The information below applies to troubleshooting these two classes of problems on a generalized PLL PLL Locked at Wrong Frequency Numbers in the following text identify items in Figure 11 5 B
250. YTO frequency N is the desired sampling oscillator harmonic FsAMP is the sampling oscillator frequency Notice that Fyp can be positive or negative depending upon whether the sampling oscillator harmonic used is below or above the YTO frequency The actual sampler IF is always positive but the sign is carried along as a bookkeeping function which determines which way to sweep the fractional N oscillator up or down and what polarity the YTO error voltage should have positive or negative to maintain lock To check if a negative sampler IF is selected press CAL MORE 1 0 i FREQ If the fractional N oscillator frequency is positive the sampler IF is also positive A fractional N frequency indicates that the sampler IF is negative Notice that the polarity of the YTO loop error voltage YTO ERROR out of the YTO loop phase frequency detector changes as a function of the polarity of the sampler IF That is for positive sampler IFs an increasing YTO frequency results in an increasing YTO ERROR signal For negative sampler IFs an increasing YTO frequency results in a decreasing YTO ERROR signal This implies that to maintain lock in both cases the sense of YTO ERROR must be reversed such that with a negative sampler IF an increasing YTO ERROR results in an increasing YTO frequency This is accomplished with error sign amplifier A14U328B This amplifier can be firmware controlled to operate as either an inverting or non
251. _ lt GATE BIAS 3 gt Ca SATE BIAS __ N C 4 5 LODA COMMON PIN ATTEN owe 7 LODA 57 LODA 5 82 027 FP SENSE gt _ lt L LOW BAND LO L RYTHM LO e i ASSEMBLY ISAMPLER T 4 gt omo TO A10J4 lt YIG TUNED FILTER MI XER e C e TO ABJ3 lt LOW BAND MIXER J4 lt lt 10 Y NOTE 1 HP 8561E uses only two wires ground connection is through the chassis FIGURE 11 13 FREQUENCY CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM HP 8552 81147 SHEET 1 OF 4 J901 MS4 10 REF TO POWER SUPPLIES A BLOCK W J1 428 VF POWER CABLE W lt Te UE TO BLOCKS 5 VF M J AN AJ A Z 15 VF CONTROL CABLE W2 LI amm PHASE FREQUENCY 100 MHz LOCK LOOP INTERGRATOR INTEGRATOR NEGATIVE SUPPLY 4400 57 12V 300 MHz OFFSET A j400 MS8 14V LOCK LOOP BUFFER DISTRIBUTION OFFSET LOCK LOOP BUFFERS V 5 5dBm A TP404 TP403 300 MHz ht i FIRST LO W34 42 1 FROM A7J4 7 9dBm FROM BLOCK H EXT MI X BIAS W35 J801 INT 2ND IF ai 310 7 MHz IF FROM A13J2 y W36 J802 310 7 MHz EXT IF IF INPUT 86 ES FROM 12V EXT FRONT PNL as A F ROM DELETED IN FROM OPTION 327 VEI M4 J502 MS3 0 TO 5 75V TUNE VOLTAGE
252. able Parts 5 5 Table 5 1 Reference Designations Abbreviations and Multipliers 4 of 4 ABBREVIATIONS U VAR Variable Y VDC Volts Direct Current Microcandela YIG Yttrium Iron Garnet Microfarad Microhenry W Microliter Underwriters W Watt Wattage Laboratories Inc White Wide Width Unhardened W SW With Switch ZNR Zener w w Wire Wound V X Variable Violet Volt Voltage By Used with Vacuum Volts Dimensions Alternating Current Reactance MULTIPI Abbreviation Prefix Multiple Abbreviation Prefix Multiple T tera 1012 G giga 10 M mega 10 k kilo 10 da deka 10 d deci 10 1 C centi 107 Table 5 2 Manufacturers Code List Refer to the Manufacturers Code List in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 5 6 Replaceable Parts Reference Designation HP Part Number 1810 0118 1250 0780 HP 10502A 8710 1755 5062 0800 5001 8739 5001 8740 5001 8742 5021 5807 5021 5808 5021 5836 0510 1148 0515 0886 0515 0887 0515 0889 0515 1241 0515 1331 5061 9679 0515 1114 8710 1755 5958 6573 5062 1900 5001 8739 5001 8740 5001 8742 5021 5807 5021 5808 5021 5836 0510 1148 0515 0886 0515 0887 C Qty D Ol m oO r2 NY t QN DW A o 1 C gt TAHA C Y Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts Description ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED TERMINATION COAXIAL SMA 0 5W 502 ADAPTER COAX F BNC M
253. able to adjust resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz ADC handshake Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth ADC handshake 1 kHz resolution bandwidth ADC handshake Unable to adjust 3 kHz resolution bandwidth ADC handshake 10 kHz resolution bandwidth ADC handshake Unable to adjust Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in first crystal pole 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in second crystal pole 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in third crystal pole 300 Hz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in fourth crystal pole 1 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in first crystal pole kHz 1 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz UJ 952 resolution resolution resolution resolution resolution resolution resolution bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth bandwidth amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude amplitude low low 1 low 1 low 1 low 1 low low in second crystal pole third crystal pole fourth crystal pole first crystal pole second crystal pole third crystal pole fourth crystal pole 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in first crystal pole 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in second crystal pole 10 kHz resolution bandwidth amplitude low in third crystal pole 449 450 45 452 454 455 456 45 450 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 460 469 470 471
254. ach Manual Probe Troubleshooting test Figure 12 1 illustrates the location of the AI5 test connectors 14 15 FREQUENCY RF CONTROL J502 J901 REVISION J501 4304 J501 CONNECTOR J23 J17 J15 4200 J16 J18 J19 REVISION CONNECTOR J602 J101 15 2 1 J400 sp128e Figure 12 1 and Al5 Test Connectors 12 2 RF Section Table 12 1 Automatic Fault Isolation References Suspected Circuit Indicated Manual Procedure to Perform by Automatic Fault Isolation Check 2nd IF Amplifier Third Converter Check 2nd IF Distribution Third Converter Check 10 7 MHz IF Out of Double Balanced Mixer Third Converter Check 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment in Chapter 2 Check A7 First LO Distribution Amplifier A7 SLODA Switched LO Distribution Amplifier Check A8 Low Band Mixer Low Band Mixer Check A9 Input Attenuator A9 Input Attenuator Check A13 Second Converter A 3 Second Converter Check A13J2 INT 2nd IF Al3 Second Converter steps 1 to 6 Check Al4 Latch Control Latch for Band Switch Driver Check 15 Control Latches Control Latches Check A15J601 10 7 MHz Third Converter Output Check External 10 MHz Reference Operation 10 MHz Reference steps 5 to 11 Check Gain of Flatness Compensation Amplifier Third Converter Check INT 10 MHz Reference Operation 10 MHz Reference steps 1 to 4 Check LO Feedthrough Low Band Problems steps 1 to 3 Check LO Power Low and High Band Problems steps 4 to 9 Check PIN
255. adings are incorrect press PRESET set swP CAL MORE 1 0 SERVICE CAL DATA FLATNESS andFLATNESS DATA Press NEXT BAND FLATNESS BAND 0 is displayed Press the 4 key until DATA 300 MHz i displayed Proceed as follows a Check the 10 V reference b Check for narrow low going pulses at A3U417 pin 13 LWRCLK c While rotating the front panel knob check for narrow low going pulses at A3U417 pin 1 LDACI and pin 14 LDACU1 d While rotating the front panel knob check for narrow low going pulses at U417 pin 16 L IAO and pin 15 IA4 7 If the LWRCLK LDACI or LDACUIL is incorrect refer to the Interface Strobe Select block in this chapter 8 Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR PROT position Press PRESET ADC Interface Section 8 13 A3 Assembly Video Circuits Voltages from A3J101 to the A3 Variable Gain Amplifier correspond approximately to on screen signal levels One volt corresponds to the top of the screen and zero volts corresponds to the bottom of the screen This is true for both log and linear settings except when the spectrum analyzer is in 1 dB div or 2 dB div In these cases the log expand amplifier is selected and 1 V corresponds to top screen and 0 8 or 0 9 V corresponds to bottom screen The spectrum analyzer can be set to zero span at the peak of a signal to generate a constant dc voltage in the video circuits during sweeps l 2
256. agnostics If either of the tests fail the TAM is malfunctioning and should be serviced Blank Display It is possible to use the TAM manual probe troubleshooting without a display if an HP IB printer is available Refer to Chapter 13 Display Power Supply Section for more information General Troubleshooting 7 13 Automatic Fault Isolation Automatic fault isolation AFI is designed to isolate most faults to one or two assemblies AFI can be run with the spectrum analyzer cover in place and requires only the CAL OUTPUT signal as a stimulus The entire procedure takes less than 2 minutes to complete if no failures are found AFI performs checks of five functional areas in a pre defined sequence The sequence minimizes the chance of making false assumptions The TAM checks the spectrum analyzer from the inside out For example the ADC is checked before the IF is checked This ensures that if no signal is detected through the IF the fault 15 in the IF section and not a faulty ADC The ADC measures the video signal from the IF section The sequence of checks is as follows 1 Controller check 2 ADC interface check 3 IF log check 4 LO control check 5 RF low band check Note Only the low band of the spectrum analyzer is checked by AFI This is because the only stimulus to the RF section is from the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal A signal greater than 2 9 GHz would be required to check the high band path Display Power Supply
257. ai e 4 5 2 4 37 Procedure 10 Al6 Fast ADC and AI7 CRT Dae 4 40 Procedure Ti BL Fan 2 2 4 0 mc X 4 4 42 Procedure 12 BT1 Battery 4 43 Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel 2 de de ve 5 4 44 Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable 4 48 Procedure 15 EEROM 20500 4 55 Procedure 167 21 252225 6 4 us 4 56 5 Replaceable Parts Ordering Information 2 2 2 2 48 5 Direct Mail Order System 5 Duect Phone Order System s z 5 fi hod ew 5 2 Parts List Format cx 5 2 Firmware Dependent Part Numbers DD 5 2 6 Major Assembly and Cable Locations InttoducHO gt eR ee mos HR E GE d eR Red 6 1 7 General T Introduction hs Ne He te Ser ee A es ee ee 7 1 Assembly Level Text uc TM 7 1 block DIa ramis e e uode amp God 25 Ge ee ES 7 1 Assembly Test Points OG om ER Y 7 2 Pade os oS oe he Be Sy ee eee 7 2 Vest Jack Awe ES BO hec Se 7 2 Ribbon Cables c r 7 2 Service Cal Data Softkey Menus bad ue 2 dt dn 1 6 Troubleshooting to a Functional Section 0482 7 8 TAM Test and Adjustment Module 7 10 Loading and Running the HP T TAM
258. al Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Setup RYTHM Adjustment Setup 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Setup 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Location Front End Cal Adjustment ae Hinged Assemblies Discharging High Voltage on the CRT A9 A18 and Line Switch Assembly Mounting Selen font frame Mounting Screws ets Installing the CRT and front frame Xem Placing the CRT into the Front Frame A2 4 and A5 Assembly Removal Assembly Cables 1 of 2 NE Coaxial Cable Clip HP IB and 1 1 W1 Cable Base A6 Power Supply Connections Power Supply Cover 1 5 1 8 2 13 2 15 2 17 2 19 3 21 22 2 26 2 57 2 30 2 31 2 34 2 35 2 37 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 44 2 47 2 49 2 5 2 53 2 55 2 56 2 57 2 60 2 63 2 64 3 15 4 4 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 16 4 17 4 19 4 20 4 23 4 24 Contents l 1 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 4 28 5 1 5 2 0 9 0 4 5 5 5 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 7 1 7 2 1 3 1 4 1 9 7 6 1 7 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 Al6 Fast ADC and CRT Driver Md Screws HP 85623 Assembly Locations ps A9 Mounting Screw at Right Side Fiat 10 Mounting Screws HP 85623 All Mounting Serene at Side Pr me 14 and 15 Assembly Removal 14 and 15 Assembly Cables Al and AI7 Mounting Screws 16 Cable Routing Main Deck Screws A6 Power Supply
259. al Troubleshooting 302 OFF UNLK 303 XFR UNLK 304 ROL UNLK 305 FREQ ACC 306 FREQ ACC Offset roller oscillator PLL is unlocked May indicate loss of 10 MHz reference The 10 MHz reference should measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J303 The ADC measures OFFSENSE at the beginning of each sweep and if the voltage is outside certain limits the offset oscillator pretuned DAC is adjusted to bring OFFSENSE within the proper range ERR 302 is set if this cannot be accomplished This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Transfer roller oscillator PLL is unlocked May indicate loss of 10 MHz reference The 10 MHz reference should measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J303 The ADC measures XFRSENSE at the beginning of each sweep and if the voltage is outside certain limits the transfer oscillator pretuned DAC is adjusted to bring XFRSENSE within the proper range ERR 303 is set if this cannot be accomplished This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Main roller oscillator PLL is unlocked May indicate loss of 10 MHz reference The 10 MHz reference should measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J4303 The ADC mea
260. al source So OQ tua A co r3 Un A o N gt tn A WHO N C C 6 2 ADC Interface Section Table 6 1 W2 Control Cable Connections continued 414J2 pins A15J2 pins 35 A GND RF GAIN LO3 ERR A GND LVFC ENABLE FC ERR A GND YTO ERR 10V REF A GND SCAN RAMP VIDEO TRIGGER A GND NC R T DAC2 R T DACI A3J2 pins 4432 pins A5J2 pins ndicates signal source ADC Interface Section 6 3 Troubleshooting Using the TAM Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for information on enabling the TAM for use with the HP 85623 Spectrum Analyzer When using Automatic Fault Isolation the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked Use Table 8 2 to locate the manual procedure Table 8 3 lists assembly test connectors associated with each Manual Probe Troubleshooting test Figure 8 1 illustrates the location of the test connectors INTERFACE 4400 REVISION CONNECTOR SK169 J 105 Figure 6 1 A3 Test Connectors Automatic Fault Isolation Analog data bus errors that occur during Automatic Fault Isolation result from either a shorted W2 control cable or faulty A3 assembly Perform the following steps to determine the cause of the error I 2 Disconnect W2 from A3J2 and repeat the Automatic Fault Isolation procedure If the analog data bus error is still present troubleshoot the A3 Interface
261. amplitude of log scale Possible problem in Log offset Log Expand stage 570 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Possible problem in Log offset Log Expand stage 571 AMPL Unable to adjust step gain amplifiers 572 AMPL 1M Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth 573 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Check video offset circuitry 574 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Check video offset circuitry 575 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Check video offset circuitry 576 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Check video offset circuitry 577 LOG AMPL Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Check video offset circuitry 578 LOG AMPL Limiter calibration error from DC logger calibration 579 LOG AMPL Attenuator CAL level error from DC logger calibration 580 LOG AMPL Calibration level error from DC logger fidelity calibration 581 AMPL Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth and resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 10 kHz ADC CALOSC handshake calibration problem in crystal sweep Refer to Error 582 General Troubleshooting 7 35 502 AMPL Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth and resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 10 kHz Bad CALOSC Calibration in Sweep Rate Test the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth filter 3 dB bandwidth as follows 1 Connect the CAL OUTPUT signal A4J8 to the INPUT 502 2 Press and set the controls as
262. an error message is not found in either of the first two groups it probably begins with a variable Refer to the third group that begins with variables The error message descriptions include recommended corrective action Error Messages Beginning with Alphabetic Characters Address must be from 0 to 30 inclusive HP IB addresses must be in the range from to 30 Press any key and enter new address in this range Cal Factor outside of 0 to 150 range entered Cal Factor entries must be within this range Press any key and enter the frequency again Then enter a Cal Factor in the proper range CONDITIONS file from system file location is not compatible WARNING CONDITIONS files from Operation Verification programs for the HP 8560 A B Series or HP 8560 E Series analyzers are not compatible with the frequency response adjustment software Put the frequency response adjustment software in a different directory than the Operation Verification programs if possible Default CONDITIONS data will be used Change the mass storage file location to a different location than either of the operation verification programs Then modify the conditions data as necessary and press STORE CONDS Conditions Menu DUT ID disagrees with responding DUT ID The model and or serial number of the spectrum analyzer under test DUT listed in the Conditions Menu in chapter 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software does not agree with that of the DUT which
263. ance ZeroSpan SWeep UME 9 52595 5525255505265 255 x 9292 992992525252925255 59 20ms c Monitor the signal at A2J2 pin 21 This is an output of the frequency counter HBUCKET PULSE d If HBUCKET PULSE 15 stuck high troubleshoot the frequency counter Check for a 10 MHz signal at A15J302 If the signal is not present at A15J302 the 15 RF assembly is probably defective State and Trace Storage Problems State storage is in the two of the four Program RAMs and trace storage is in the two display RAMs With low battery voltage it is normal for states and traces to be retained if the power is off for less than 1 minute If the power is left off for more than thirty minutes with low battery voltage the stored states and traces will be lost The following steps test battery backup 1 Measure the voltage on W6 at A2J10 If the voltage is less than 2 6 V check the BT1 battery 2 If the battery voltage is correct reconnect W6 to A2J10 turn the analyzer power off and wait 5 minutes 3 Measure the voltage at A2U101 pin 28 and A2U102 pin 28 4 If the voltage is less than 2 0 Vdc the RAM power battery backup circuitry on the A2 controller assembly is probably at fault Controller Section 10 15 Keyboard Problems If the analyzer does not respond to keys being pressed or the knob being rotated the fault could be either on the interface assembly or the A2 controller assembly To isolate A2 controller assembly
264. andwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 100 kHz resolution bandwidth 7 32 General Troubleshooting 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 909 510 Su 512 5153 514 3 516 517 518 917 520 321 222 222 524 AMPL 3M AMPL 1M AMPL 30K AMPL 1M AMPL 3M AMPL 1M AMPL 30K AMPL IM AMPL 3M AMPL 1M RBW 300 RBW 300 RBW 1K RBW 3K RBW 10K RBW 100 RBW 300 RBW 1K RBW 3K RBW 10K RBW 10K RBW 10K RBW 10K RBW 10K Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 30 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 100 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 30 kHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during LC bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust amplitude of 100 kHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during LC bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 kHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during LC bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth Insufficient gain during LC bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Insufficient gain during crystal bandwidth calibration Unable to adjust 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Insufficient
265. andwidth centering 3 dB bandwidth bandwidth amplitude crystal filter symmetry and oscillator frequency used in 1 Hz through 100 Hz resolution bandwidths The cal oscillator output has three forms all 35 dBm 10 7 MHz 9 9 to 11 5 MHz in 100 kHz steps Frequency sweeps from 20 kHz to 2 kHz centered at 10 7 MHz lasting 5 to 60 ms respectively The purpose of these signals is to m Adjust gains log amps and video slopes and offsets Adjust 3 dB bandwidth and center frequencies of LC resolution BW filters 30 kHz through 1 MHz m Adjust 3 dB bandwidth symmetry and gain of the crystal resolution BW filters 300 Hz through 10 kHz m Adjust gain and gain vs frequency for digital resolution bandwidths 1 Hz through 100 Hz 7 46 General Troubleshooting A5 IF Assembly The A5 IF assembly has four crystal filter poles four LC filter poles and step gain amplifiers The crystal filters provide resolution bandwidths of 300 Hz to 10 kHz The LC filters provide resolution bandwidths of 30 kHz to 2 MHz All filter stages are in series PIN diode switches bypass unwanted stages An automatic IF adjustment in spectrum analyzer firmware sets center frequency and 3 dB bandwidth of all filter poles through varactor and PIN diodes The firmware also controls crystal pole symmetry and the step gain amplification ADC Interface Section The ADC nterface section is the link between the controller section and the rest of the
266. ange The source indicated was set for 5 dBm output but the spectrum analyzer measured the amplitude to be outside the 5 dB range Check test setup source model number gt signal not in 1 5 dBm range The source indicated was set for 5 dBm output and the source output is fed through a power splitter to the spectrum analyzer under test The spectrum analyzer should measure the amplitude to be within 5 dB of 1 dBm 6 dB loss through power splitter Check test setup source model number gt 10 dBm signal not in 10 8 dBm range The source indicated was set for a 4 10 dBm output and the source output is fed through a low pass filter s to the spectrum analyzer under test The spectrum analyzer should measure the amplitude to be within 8 dB of 10 dBm the filters have some insertion loss Check test setup source model numbers has cold oven The 10 MHz reference oven oscillator has not warmed up yet Allow the oven to warm up source model number is unlevelled The source indicated has been programmed for an amplitude which results in an unlevelled condition Check the test setup for loose connections Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 19 Assembly Replacement This chapter describes the removal and replacement of all major assemblies The following replacement procedures are provided Access to Internal Assemblies Cable Color Code Procedure 1 Spectrum Analyzer Cover Procedure 2 Al Front
267. as two feedback paths The first is the output of the buck regulator which provides coarse regulation The second is the feedback circuit which samples and compares the j 6 8 Vdc output of the output rectifier U202A and associated circuitry sense the output of the input rectifier and will turn off U203 if the voltage at TP108 goes below approximately 170 Vdc Also it will not allow U203 to start up until this voltage exceeds 215 Vdc A low on the output of U202A will also clear the overcurrent latch in the DC DC converter control circuitry Thermal shutdown occurs when RT201 mounted on a large heatsink reaches a temperature of 100 C When this occurs the voltage at U203 pin 13 exceeds 0 6 V and inhibits pulses to the buck regulator R203 R204 R226 and associated circuitry provide feedforward for U203 This makes the loop gain independent of input line voltage and cancels 120 Hz ripple by more than 10 dB U202D and its associated circuitry permit the power supply to start up at low line voltages at low temperatures At low line voltages U202D will draw charge away from C206 through R205 This allows the buck regulator to turn on and draw current through the thermistors in the input rectifier This warms up the thermistors thereby decreasing their resistance and increasing the voltage at TP108 When the voltage is sufficiently high at TP108 the output of U202D will open and C206 will be allowed to charge normally U202B converts the saw
268. at provide resolution bandwidths from 30 kHz to 2 MHz The automatic IF adjustment sets the bandwidths and center frequencies of each filter stage The crystal filters are variable bandwidth filters that provide resolution bandwidths from 300 Hz to 10 kHz The automatic IF adjustment sets the filter bandwidths and symmetry The step gain amplifiers consist of the first step gain stage second step gain stage and third step gain stage These amplifiers provide gain when the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer reference level is changed The amplifiers also provide gain range to compensate for variations in the IF filter gains which change with bandwidth and environmental conditions and band conversion loss in the front end Fixed gain amplifiers shift the signal levels to lower the noise of the IF chain The assembly has two variable attenuators The fine attenuator provides the 0 1 dB reference level steps The reference 15 dB attenuator provides a reference for automatic adjustment of the step gain amplifiers and the log amplifier The reference 15 dB attenuator also provides gain for changes in spectrum analyzer reference level Various buffer amplifiers provide a high input impedance to prevent loading of the previous filter pole and a low output impedance to drive the next filter pole Digital control signals from the W2 control cable the analog bus drive the control circuitry At the beginning of each sweep the analog bus sets each control li
269. ating Problems Refer to function block H of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The 1 MHz ADC clock provides synchronization in FREE RUN and SINGLE triggering LINE triggering synchronization originates on the A6 power supply Trigger MUX A3U613 selects between FREE RUN VIDEO LINE and EXTERNAL trigger sources The trigger signal sets the output of the HSCAN latch high HBADC CLKO provides the trigger signal for FREE RUN The VIDEO TRIG signal must be at least 25 mV 0 25 divisions peak to peak to trigger in video trigger mode The trigger for Gated Video has two modes of operation level mode and edge mode In the edge mode positive edge or negative edge triggering can be selected Output 0 from pin 10 of A3U617 generates the gate delay and output 1 from pin 13 of A3U617 generates the gate length The duration of these two time intervals is set using front panel softkeys under the key The trigger input for Gated Video is the rear panel EXT GATE TRIG INPUT TTL gt 10 1 Check that the trigger MUX is receiving the proper trigger source information by selecting each of the following trigger modes and checking the TRIG SOURCEO and TRIG SOURCE lines as indicated in Table 8 6 2 If a trigger mode does not work check that a trigger signal is present at the appropriate trigger MUX input as indicated in the table Table 8 8 Trigger MUX Truth Table Trigger
270. ax 9 from A4J8 Connect an SMB tee to A4J8 using a short coaxial cable with SMB connectors Connect one output of the tee to cable W52 coax 9 Connect an HP 85024A active probe to the other output of the tee Connect the output type N connector of the active probe to the input of the HP 8566A B spectrum analyzer Connect the probe power cable to the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer front panel PROBE POWER connector you may need to use a probe power extension cable HP 10131B Press INSTR preset on the HP 8566A B and set the controls as follows Center Trequency eed ocv 10 8 MHz SPAN oh tes satt oe pais tea erates eee 0 Hz Ite WIS MERC NOU PDC 43 dBm Resolution bandwidth 22220 ecide anes 100 kHz Videoband width Sisto iors he ees ea ecu ene hae Re ue 10 kHz SWEEP IMIG esed d deme ae dus actore doa de 50ms s dB division SWC did utes oie ap tion hw and edt dudes Single On the HP 8562E spectrum analyzer press PRESET and CAL 10 Press FULL IF ADJ When the display reads ADJUSTING IF 10 kHz RBW press SINGLE 11 the HP 8566A B The HP 8566A B screen illustrates frequency versus time of the cal oscillator output sweeps See Figure 9 16 The slope of the HP 8566A B 100 kHz resolution bandwidth is used to detect
271. b htt 731329999 BRRA RRRRAAM44 54b sli33e A6 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY W1 110 220 VOLIAGE 15 SELECTOR 5 ON REAR PANEL ys DE 19V 2 2 cQ SET 5499 a il SUPPLY 15V 15V 4110V HV SHUTDOWN 45V HV ON HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE 2 45KV 2 55 SKV j ABAIWS w7 CRT 110 VDC ON REAR PANEL ns AGA1W3 Figure 13 l Simplified Section Block Diagram 13 2 Display Power Supply Section Table 13 W1 Power Cable Connections Signal A231 A431 5 1 A671 41431 4151 pins pins pins pins pins pins NC NC A GND 3 3 48 3 3 55 y 4 4 1 5 V 46 j 46 A GND 6 6 45 6 6 NC NC A GND 9 9 1 9 SCAN RAMP 41 10 10 NC A GND 12 12 39 12 12 12 6 V 38 13 13 15 v 14 14 31 14 14 GND 1 15 36 15 15 15 v 10 16 35 16 16 415 v 17 1 34 17 17 A GND 18 18 33 18 18 t15 v 19 19 32 19 19 28 v 2 0 20 2 0 t28 v 21 21 21 PWR UP 29 22 15 v 23 2 28 287 23 15 v 24 24 21 24 24 15 v 25 25 2 6 25 25 15 v 2 6 2 6 2j 26 2 6 t5 v 21 21 24 27 21 t5 v 28 28 2j 28 2 8 t5 v 29 29 22 29 29 t5 V 30 30 2 30 30 DGND 2 0 31 3 20 31 D GND 19 32 a 19 32 A GND 18 33 33 18 397 33 GND 17 34 34 17 34 34 D GND 16 35 35 16 35 35 D GND 1
272. bed in Setting HP IB Addresses above making sure that each address properly identifies the bus select code to which it is connected Program operation is the same for dual bus and single bus configuration Sensor Utilities Menu The frequency response adjustment program needs to know the cal factors of each power sensor being used Create edit view and delete data files containing cal factors for each power sensor in the Sensor Utilities Menu Power sensor data filenames include the last five digits of the power sensor serial number For example for HP 8481A power sensors the filename is SENSINNNNN for HP 8485A power sensors the filename is SEN85NNNNN where NNNNN represents the last five digits of the power sensor serial number the serial number suffix Note that the first two digits in the filename correspond to the last two digits of the power sensor model number All power sensor data files available on the system mass storage location file are listed upon entering the Sensor Utilities Menu Note Power sensor data files created using the VERIFY_6XE operation verification software for HP 8560E 61E 62E 63E 64E 65E spectrum analyzers are compatible with the frequency response adjustment software Adding a Power Sensor Data File add a new power sensor data file press Add File and enter the power sensor model number as requested An error message is displayed if a disk at the current system mass storage file location 1
273. below the reference level Press PEAK search and MARKER DELTA on the spectrum analyzer Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 10 dBm Change the HP 3335A to 10 dBm Press on the spectrum analyzer 2 28 Adjustment Procedures 18 19 205 2 4 IF Amplitude Adjustments Note the AMKR amplitude Ideally it should read 50 00 dB dB If the AMKR amplitude is less than 49 9 dB rotate A5R343 15 dB ATTEN one half turn counterclockwise for each 0 1 dB below 50 00 dB If the AMKR amplitude is greater than 50 1 dB rotate A5R343 15 dB ATTEN one half turn clockwise for each 0 1 dB above 50 00 dB Do not adjust A5R343 more than five turns before continuing with the next step P ress I reading Repeat steps 11 through 20 until the AMKR amplitude reading is 50 00 dB dB CURR IF STATE on the spectrum analyzer Note the AMKR amplitude 5 Adjustment Verification 22 2 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 On the spectrum analyzer disconnect W29 from A5J3 Connect the test cable between A5J3 the 50 Q output of the HP 33354 Set the spectrum analyzer reference level to 10 dBm Set the HP 3335A to 5 dBm Press and MARKER The MARKER amplitude should read 10 dBm f0 13 dB If the reading is outside of this range repeat steps 4 through 21 On the spectrum analyzer reconnect W29 to A5J3 Press and set the controls as follows NORMAL on the spectrum analyzer Center
274. ble connects the 1 1 keyboard to the A3 interface assembly The keys are arranged in a row column matrix as shown in Table 8 4 If an entire row or column of keys does not respond and the RPG does respond there might be an open or shorted wire in AIAIWI Table 8 4 Keyboard Matrix L LENEO IKSNSL XKSNS LKSNES LK LKSNS4 LKSNST PRESET LKSCN2 P E A K TRACE SEARCH LKSCN3 FREQ AUTO MKR LEAREN HOLD COUNT eu LKSCN4 SWEEP LKSCN5 i COPY T1 SPAN oa CTRL QUENCY TUDE Check that all inputs to NAND gate A3U607 LKSNS lines are high when no key is pressed If any input is low continue with the following a Disconnect AIAIWI from A3J602 and again check all inputs to U607 b If any input is low with AIAIWI disconnected suspect A3U604 A3U607 or A3U602 c Reconnect AIAIWI to A3J602 Monitor A3U607 pin 8 with a logic probe A TTL high should be present when any key is held down Monitor this point while pressing each key in succession Check that the LKSCN lines outputs of A3J602 pins 1 through 6 read a TTL low with no key pressed Any TTL high indicates a faulty A3 Interface assembly Check that a pulse is present at each LKSCN output of U602 when a key is pressed Check that only one input to U607 LKSNS lines goes low when a key is pressed Check that U602 pin 9 LKBD RESET pulses low when a key is pressed ADC Interface Section 8 7 9 If LKBD RESET is incorrect and a
275. bove 08564 60008 08564 90004 A6A2 Regulator Board 3611A through 3743A 08564 60009 0856490006 3745A and above 08564 60026 08564 90006 Al4 Frequency Control 3611A through 3632A 08563 60090 0856390152 3711A and above 08563 60120 08563 90178 15 RF Board Option 103 3611 through 3632A 08563 60085 08563 90128 with SIG ID 3635A through 3720A 08563 60092 08563 90163 3704 aad above 08563 60106 08563 90173 Denotes the current version of board assembly T Denotes refurbished board assemblies available Refurbished board assembly part numbers have 9 as the second digit of the suffix For example 08563 69076 is the refurbished part number for board assembly 08563 60076 A 2 Component Level Information Packets Table A l HP 8582 Spectrum Analyzer Documented Assemblies continued Board Assembly Instrument Assembly CLIP Part Number serial Prefix Part Number 15 RF Board Option 103 3611A to 3632A 08563 60085 08563 90128 without SIG ID 3635A through 3720A 08563 60092 08563 90163 3724A and above 08563 6010611 08563 90173 AIS RF Board Standard 3611A to 3632A 08563 60086 08563 90129 with SIG ID 3635A through 3720A 08563 90093 08563 90164 3724A and above 08563 60107 08563 90174 Al5 RF Board Standard 3611A through 3632A 08563 60084 08563 90127 without SIG ID 3635A through 3720A 08563 60091 08563 90162 3724A and above 08563 60105 08563 90172 Al6 Fast ADC 3611A and above 08563 60030 08563 900
276. cable assembly connector 4 52 Assembly Replacement UA CO DW 13 14 15 Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable From the bottom side of the spectrum analyzer insert the contact end of W3 through the slotted opening in the main deck W3 should come through to the top side of the spectrum analyzer between the AI8 CRT assembly and the post accelerator cable LED AIWIDSI into the line switch assembly Attach the line switch assembly into the front frame using the captive panhead screw Ensure the connection of the line switch grounding lug to the screw Dress W3 between the main deck standoff and the side frame See Figure 4 25 On the top side of the spectrum analyzer redress W3 Insert the four contacts into the W3 connector Attach the cable to the connector housing using the supplied tie wrap Connect W3 to A6J2 Dress W3 into the slotted opening in the deck 11 12 Connect A1A1W1 to A3J602 Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three flathead screws One end of the cover fits into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove Redress W3 and the other cable assemblies down between the CRT assembly and the power supply cover such that the W9 wires are below the surface of the power supply cover Fold up the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as de
277. can still acquire lock Refer to Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section to troubleshoot the YTO PLL The ADC circuit on the A3 interface assembly may also cause this error General Troubleshooting 7 23 317 FREQ ACC 318 FREQ ACC 319 WARN COA 320 WARN FIN Main coil coarse DAC at limit The main coil coarse DAC is set to bring YTO ERR close enough to volts for the main coil fine DAC to bring YTO ERR to exactly 0 volts ERR 317 16 set if the main coil coarse DAC is set to one of its limits before bringing YTO ERR close enough to O volts Main coil fine DAC at limit The main coil fine DAC is set to bring YTO ERR to 0 volts after the main coil coarse DAC has brought YTO ERR close to 0 volts ERR 318 is set if the main coil fine DAC is set to one of its limits before bringing YTO ERR to 0 volts YTO coarse tune DAC near limit YTO fine tune DAC near limit Roller Oscillator Errors 321 to 329 32 FREQ ACC 322 FREQ ACC 324 FREQ ACC These errors indicate a faulty roller oscillator on the Al4 frequency control assembly The A3 interface ADC circuits may also be faulty If error codes 333 and 499 are also present suspect the 10 MHz reference the A21 OCXO or the 15 assembly Option 103 These errors do not apply to the hardware in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer If they occur in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Main rol
278. cedure 5 A2 A3 4 and A5 Assemblies Removal steps 3 through 5 Turn the HP 85623 LINE switch on Set the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly to the WR ENA position Press cAL MORE 1 DF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA COPY EEROM The spectrum analyzer will store the contents of the EEROM into the program RAM Using a nonmetallic tool carefully remove the defective EEROM Carefully install a new EEROM Press COPY TO EEROM The spectrum analyzer will store the contents of the program RAM into the new EEROM Turn the HP 85623 LINE switch off then on cycling the spectrum analyzer power Allow the power on sequence to finish If error message 701 702 or 703 is displayed press RECALL MORE and RECALL ERRORS Use the STEP keys to view any other errors If error message 701 or 703 is displayed perform Adjustment 9 Frequency Response Adjustment in chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If a TAM is available perform the module Low Band Flatness and High Band Flatness and YTF adjustments Press MODULE ADJUST to enter the adjust menu of the TAM If error message 704 is displayed press SAVE SAVE PRSEL PK and PRESET If there are no errors after cycling the spectrum analyzer power the EEROM is working properly but the frequency response correction data might be invalid Check the spectrum analyzer frequency response Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper in the WR PROT position
279. ch Pull the red and black battery wires through the rear frame battery assembly hole Solder the red wire to the positive lug of the battery assembly and the black wire to the negative lug Replace the battery Secure the battery assembly to the rear frame using two flathead screws 10 11 12 13 Connect the fan and line power cables to A6J3 A6J101 on the A6 power supply Snap the AGA1W3 post accelerator cable to the CRT assembly Snap the black grommet protecting A6A1W3 into the CRT shield Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the cover Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three flathead screws 1 One end of the cover fits into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove See Figure 4 23 Connect the HP IB cable to A2J5 Fold the A2 4 and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in procedure 5 4 46 Assembly Replacement Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel K Figure 4 23 A6 Power Supply Cover Assembly Replacement 4 47 Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable Removal 2 Fold out the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and A5 Assemblies Removal steps 3 through 5 3 Disconnect ATAIWI from A3J602 4 Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench with A
280. ch See function block H of Al4 frequency control schematic Check that there is a V to 10 V ramp at U325 pin 1 The spectrum analyzer ADC obtains information about the sweep from this node Check span attenuator steps 6 13 Continue with step 7 to check the span attenuator See function block L of Al4 frequency control schematic With the spectrum analyzer set to the settings in step 1 monitor A14U323 pin 6 with an oscilloscope A 0 V to 10 V ramp should be present Change the spectrum analyzer span to 1 MHz and check for a 0 V to 5 V ramp at U323 pin 6 Change the spectrum analyzer span to 400 kHz and check for a O V to 2 V ramp at U323 pin 6 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Pre Que H6 occ esc uve eI 10 MHz eed Durata 2 9 GHz SWECD TMC eb ce oa etse I e NU IUe Dadar dtes 80115 Monitor A14J15 pin 14 for a 0 V to 7 5 V ramp Switches U317A U317B 0317 should be open and U317C should be closed Change the spectrum analyzer SPAN to 365 MHz and check for a 0 mv to 1 0 V ramp at 14 15 pin 14 Switch U317C should be open and U317B closed Change the spectrum analyzer SPAN to 36 5 MHz and check for a 0 mV to 100 mV ramp at 1415 pin 14 Switch U317B should be open and U317A closed Check current source steps 14 21 Check the sweep generator current source with the following steps function block A of Al4 frequency control schematic
281. channel power ACP measurement 910 SPAN gt ACP The frequency span is too wide compared to the channel bandwidth to obtain a valid adjacent channel power ACP measurement General Troubleshooting 7 41 Block Diagram Description The spectrum analyzer is comprised of the six main sections listed below See Figure 7 4 The following descriptions apply to the simplified block diagram and overall block diagram located at the end of this chapter Assembly level block diagrams are located in Chapters 8 through 13 10 RYTHM 7 A9 INPUT ATTENUATOR INPUT SECTION 1 1 4 LOG pecca cl E RF SECTION MP 8561E N l A10 SYTF 8 DUAL jp MIXER I A9 INPUT ATTENUATOR 0 s e o eee i ee A11 YTO REFERENCE OCXO SWEEP GENERATOR REM RECEN V ADC INTERFACE CONTROLLER SECTION T DISPLAY POWER SECTION SUPPLY SECTION as A3 INTERFACE CRT DRIVER CRT H POWER SUPPLY 17 A18V1 I t i A2 CONTROLLER PEAK DETECTOR 27221 A19 HP 18 INTERFACE INTERFACE ad sp169e Figure 7 4 Functional Sections 7 42 General Troubleshooting RF Section The RF section includes the following assemblies 7 SLODA switched LO distribution amplifier
282. ck path to produce the logging affect U502D is used to adjust for nonlinearities in the linear mode R531 is used to adjust log fidelity at the top of the screen Use the following steps to verify proper operation of the log amplifier chain 1 Press and IF 0 2 OFF Set the digital multimeter to read dc volts and connect the negative lead to the chassis of the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer 2 Remove W27 from A4J3 and inject a 10 7 MHz signal of 10 dBm into A4J3 IF Section 9 13 OQ WN A Set the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer to log mode with a resolution bandwidth of 300 kHz and single sweep Using the DMM check the voltage at U503 pin 6 Merify that this level is about 700 mV Adjust the source amplitude to place the signal at the reference level Reduce the input signal level in 10 dB steps down to 60 dBm while noting the voltage displayed on the DMM The voltage should increase become less negative at a rate of 30 mV for each 10 dB decrease in input power Troubleshoot the A4 assembly if the signal does not decrease properly Set the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz to place the wide narrow filter in narrow mode Repeat steps 2 through 7 10 If log fidelity 1 poor near the bottom of the screen or the 1 MHz resolution bandwidth is narrow a fault might exist in the wide narrow filter switch Refer to function block G of A4 log amplifier schematic diagram in the HP 856
283. coated edge towards the inside of the spectrum analyzer 1 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame with the front end extending slightly over the front of the work bench 2 Gently place the 18 CRT assembly into the Al front frame assembly as illustrated in Figure 4 6 3 Place the front frame and CRT assemblies into the spectrum analyzer using caution to avoid pinching any cables 4 Dress the 18 1 trace align wires between the CRT assembly mounts and the power supply top shield 4 10 Assembly Replacement OO QN tA 11 12 13 14 Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT AlAIW1 SK127 Figure 4 8 Placing the CRT into the Front Frame Connect A18W to A17J5 snap CRT cable W9 onto the end of the CRT assembly Fully seat the front frame and CRT assemblies into the spectrum analyzer Secure the front frame to the side frames of the spectrum analyzer using three flathead screws per side See Figure 4 4 Retighten the four screws securing the CRT mounts to the deck 10 Place W9 between the CRT assembly and the A6 power supply assembly top shield so that the W9 wires are below the surface of the top shield Connect W42 to A7J5 and the front panel First LO OUTPUT connector Use 9 16 inch nut driver to reconnect CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel Connect the VOLUME potentiometer and knob to the front panel Connect W36 coax 86 to the front panel IF INPUT connector
284. connect the output of a signal source to 14J501 Remove the jumper from A14J23 Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A14J23 pin 1 and negative lead to A14J23 pin 3 See Figure 11 3 Set the signal source to the following settings dos testes pas peak weds v eee OdBm FICQUCHOY tases eee eh Oboe Frequency recorded in step 12 Tune the source 1 kHz below the fractional N frequency The voltage measured on the DVM should be approximately 12 Vdc 11 10 Synthesizer Section 17 Tune the source 1 kHz above the fractional N frequency The voltage measured on the DVM should be approximately 12 Vdc 18 If the DVM reading does not change the Al4 frequency control assembly is defective Reconnect W32 to A14J501 Replace the jumper on A14J23 to the NORM position SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER eas bdbdbd cx ooo 0000 cue obid SS 0000 ADAPTER SPECTRUM ANALYZER ADAPTER Tr DIGITAL VOLTMETER p Ce TEST CABLE a oooaoneaonangng Qoae a DVM TEST LEADS A14J23 A14J501 A14 FREQ PIN 3 CONTROL A14J23 PIN 1 Sp127e Figure 11 3 YTO Loop Test Setup Check 5 RF assembly steps 19 25 19 Disconnect W34 from A15U100J1 and disconnect W32 from A15J101 20 Connect a frequency counter to 15 101 Connect a high frequency test cable from an HP 8340A B synthesized sweeper to A15U100J1 See Figure 11 4 2 Co
285. connected to the case Electrical connection of the case to the collector might not be reliable making collector voltage measurements on the transistor case unreliable IF Signature 1 Disconnect W27 coax 3 from A55 2 Connect an SMB tee to A5J5 using a short coaxial cable with SMB connectors 3 Connect one output of the tee to cable W27 coax 3 4 Connect HP 85024A active probe with a 10 1 divider installed to the other output of the tee 5 Connect the output type N connector of the active probe to the input of the HP 8566A B spectrum analyzer 6 Connect the probe power cable to the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer front panel PROBE POWER connector you may need to use a probe power extension cable HP 10131B 7 Set the HP 8566A B controls as follows Reference level udo Sos Leite ut isses 10dBm Center Te QUE ly ace Sex eni tesa eee ey uc uota a ge Sees le uU eee 10 7 MHz ee eer 0 Hz Resolution bandwidth x exor E xa C RES EE a 300 kHz VideobanGwidthl 62 52 20 beatae o uicti 300kHz SGC Hine de aat latens 9 9 8 Single 8 On the HP 8566A B press trace A blank to set detector to SAMPLE mode 9 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press PRESET and set the controls as follows 9 22 IF Section Centerfrequency Span 10 the HP 8
286. converter down converts the 3 9107 GHz first IF to a 310 7 MHz 2nd IF In high band it passes the 310 7 MHz first IF from the AIO YIG tuned filter mixer to the Al5 RF assembly The converter generates a 3 6 GHz second LO by multiplying a 600 MHz reference Bandpass filters remove unwanted harmonics of the 600 MHz driving signal First IF and 2nd LO signals are filtered by cavity filters Second IF Amplifier part of A15 The second IF amplifier SIFA amplifies and filters the second IF Access to this pre filtered signal is available at the rear panel 2ND IF OUTPUT Option 001 only The external mixing input from the front panel IF INPUT connector is also directed through the SIFA A dc bias is placed onto the IF INPUT line for biasing external mixers 7 44 General Troubleshooting Third Converter part of A15 The third converter down converts the 310 7 MHz IF to 10 7 MHz A PIN diode switch selects the LO signal used For normal operation a 300 MHz LO signal is used The signal is derived from the 600 MHz reference PLL During signal identification SIG ID ON the 298 MHz SIG ID oscillator is fed to the double balanced mixer on alternate sweeps Signal identification 1 available as Option 008 Flatness Compensation Amplifiers part of A15 The flatness compensation amplifiers amplify the output of the double balanced mixer The amplifier variable gain 0 to 45 dB compensates for flatness variations within a band Band conversion lo
287. ctrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 Slope derivation failed during FADC log offset calibration This error applies only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 Slope derivation failed during FADC log expand offset calibration This error applies only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 ADC input is outside of ADC range Microprocessor not receiving interrupt from ADC LO and RF Hardware Firmware Failures 300 to 399 YTO Loop Errors 300 to 301 300 YTO UNLK 301 YTO UNLK These errors often require troubleshooting the Al4 frequency control assembly synthesizer section or the ADC circuits YTO first LO phase locked loop is unlocked The ADC measures YTO ERR voltage under phase lock condition YTO first LO phase locked loop is unlocked Same as ERR 300 except ERR 301 is set if the voltage is outside certain limits Roller PLL Errors 302 to 316 These errors indicate a faulty roller oscillator on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section The A3 interface ADC circuits may also be faulty If error codes 333 and 499 are present suspect the 10 MHz reference the A21 OCXO or on the 15 assembly Option 103 These errors do not apply to the hardware in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer If they occur in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware 7 20 Gener
288. cule area Measure the function generator peak to peak voltage and dc offset V 2 dB div V The ratio of voltage recorded in step 6 to the voltage recorded in step 9 should be 5 39 If the ratio is not 5 troubleshoot the A3 Interface assembly Reconnect W26 to A3J101 Video MUX Refer to function block U of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information l 2 4 Press and set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows faint aod deut qur wt dead dba M edem eti 300 MHz Spall aint 0 Hz Press SGL SwP CAL and IF ADJ OFF Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 502 connector Check for TTL high on A3U104 pin 2 and TTL low on U104 pin 10 Set the spectrum analyzer to 2 dB div and check for a TTL high on A3U104 pin 10 and a TTL low on A3U104 pin 2 If the logic levels on A3U104 are incorrect check the LLOG STB signal as follows a Monitor A3U104 pin 9 with an oscilloscope or logic probe Check that a 1 microsecond low going pulse is present when switching between 10 dB div and 2 dB div b Check the inputs to A3U104 pins 3 and 11 while switching between 10 dB div and 2 dB div 8 16 ADC Interface Section c If the logic signals are incorrect refer to Analog Bus Timing and Analog Bus Drivers in this chapter 5 Check comparators A3U109A C for proper outputs
289. d CRT ADJ PATTERN which is the top softkey If vector distortion described above occurs perform the Display Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures to test the function of the A2 controller assembly If there is distortion along with slight focus degradation but the graticule lines meet not necessarily squarely the AI7 CRT driver CRT DDD TRACE ALIGN adjustments or cable connections might be at fault Perform the 16 MHz PLL Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If the 16 MHz CPU clock is off frequency the display will be distorted Perform the Display Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures Isolate the problem to either the X or Y axis by noting the behavior of the adjustments If the line generator or fast zero span portion of the adjustment fails troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly If the adjustments do not remedy the problem set the spectrum analyzer switch to the off position and place the Al7 CRT driver in the service position Distortion confined to one axis vertical or horizontal only indicates a faulty assembly X or Y deflection amplifier Use the alternate good deflection amplifier for obtaining typical voltages There is enough symmetry in a typical display that the voltages should be similar between these circuits Monitor the waveforms at Al7TP11 and A17TTP14 or TP12 and TP13 The 50 to 100 Vp p ac component of the waveforms at the X an
290. d Sampling Oscillator 355 355 SMP CAL This error indicates an unlocked sampling oscillator during the local oscillator LO 4 amp ignment routine This error only applies to the hardware in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer sampler unlock condition during calibration routine This error remains until a successful recalibration is performed Span Accuracy Calibration Errors 356 to 361 356 SPAC CAL 357 SPAC CAL 358 SPAC CAL 359 SPAC CAL These errors are generated when the span accuracy calibration fails The span accuracy calibration is done during power up IF calibration every 5 minutes and LO IF realignment routines Span accuracy calibration sweeps occur during the retrace dead time of the main sweep ramp The firmware then detects any span accuracy calibration errors These errors only apply to firmware revisions 931216 and later Sweep data problem finding bucket 1 of the span accuracy calibration sweep This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator span attenuator or main FM coil sweep switches on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Cannot find the x intersection for bucket 1 of the span accuracy calibration sweep This error indicates a possible failure of the sweep generator span attenuator or main FM coil sweep switches on the Al4 frequency control assembly Refer to Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Sweep
291. d X or Y and Y outputs should be mirror images of each other The dc average should be 55 V The appropriate POSN adjustment A17R57 or A17R77 should change the dc component of both X and X or Y and Y outputs in opposite directions The appropriate GAIN adjustment A17R55 A17R75 should change the ac component in both outputs by the same amount If the display is a single dot check that the base of A17Q18 is at 10 3 V f0 3 V Verify the signals at TP11 TP14 TP12 and 13 8 Display Power Supply Section 12 If signals are correct and cables to CRT are good suspect the CRT Focus Problems Focus problems may be due to a defective A18V1 CRT the AI7 CRT driver especially the level shifter section or the A2 controller focus control circuitry Focus problems may also be due to improper adjustments improper connections or absence of high voltage The AI7 focus grid level shifter function block D is the leading cause of AI7 focus problems Function blocks C E F and H generally have less effect on focus but may cause poor focus that is a function of screen position length of line or intensity l 10 12 Connect the positive lead of DVM to A2J202 pin 2 Connect negative lead to A2J202 pin 6 Use the knob to change the focus DAC value from to 255 If the DVM reads near Vdc with the focus set to and near 10 Vdc with the focus set to 255 A2 focus control circ
292. d by the pointer returns to the Conditions Menu Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 13 Front End Cal YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM and Frequency Response Adjustment Assemblies Adjusted Al4 Frequency Control Assembly Al5 RF Assembly AIO RYTHM Related Performance Tests Displayed Average Noise Level Frequency Response Image Multiple and Out of Band Responses Second Harmonic Distortion Description Front End Cal is an automated adjustment that performs the equivalent of two manual adjustment procedures Frequency Response Adjustment and YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RY THM dys tment The RYTHM adjustment is performed first followed by the frequency response adjustment The RYTHM adjustment optimizes the settings of the offset and slope DACs on the Frequency Control assembly for maximum amplitude response The offset DAC value is optimized at a low frequency and the slope DAC value is optimized at a high frequency The frequency response adjustment consists of applying a signal of known amplitude at several different frequencies to the specturm analyzer At each frequency the RF GAIN DAC co amp rolling the flatness compensation amplifiers is adjusted to place the displayed signal at the same place on screen When tuned to a frequency in a preselected band the preselector is centered before adjusting the RF GAIN DAC After both adjustments are done the preselector slope and offset DAC values the RF GAIN DAC va
293. d loop will exhibit stable narrow approximately 20 ns wide and positive going TTL pulses occurring at a 10 MHz rate at U504 pin 5 and U503 pin 9 If the loop is unlocked but signals are present on both inputs of the phase frequency detector the output pulses will be superimposed on each other If the loop is unlocked and there is no signal at one of the phase frequency detector inputs one phase detector output will be at TTL low and the other will be at TTL high For example if there is no input signal at U504 pin 3 U504 pin 5 will be TTL low and U503 pin 9 will be TTL high If there is no input signal at U503 pin 11 U503 pin 9 will be TTL low and U504 pin 5 will be TTL high To remove the 10 MHz reference input to the phase frequency detector press AUX CTRL REAR PANEL and 10 MHz EXT with no signal applied to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN OUT connector Synthesizer Section 11 17 22 To remove the divided down 100 MHz signal from the phase frequency detector short R595 Refer to function block X of 15 RF schematic Check the 100 MHz lock loop integrator steps 23 27 23 Remove 10 MHz reference input to the phase frequency detector by pressing REAR PANEL and 10 MHz EXT No signal should be connected to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN OUT connector Note The outputs of phase frequency detector are low pass filtered to reduce the 10 MHz component of the signal The filtered signals are then integrated by U506 and the res
294. d the 2 4 and 5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5 A2 A3 A4 and A5 Assemblies Secure the spectrum analyzer cover assembly W20 w59 COAX 6 w7 COAX 839 5 sJ138e Figure 4 21 AI6 Cable Routing Assembly Replacement 4 41 Procedure 11 B1 Fan Removal Replacement Warning Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury 1 Remove the four screws securing the fan assembly to the rear frame 2 Remove the fan and disconnect the fan wire from the A6 power supply assembly 3 To reinstall the fan connect the fan wire to A6J3 and place the wire into the channel provided on the left side of the rear frame opening Secure the fan to the rear frame using four panhead screws Note The fan must be installed so that the air enters through the front and sides of the instrument and exits out the rear of the instrument 4 42 Assembly Replacement Procedure 12 BT1 Battery Procedure 12 BT1 Battery Warning Battery BT1 contains lithium polycarbon monofluoride Do not incinerate or puncture this battery Dispose of discharged battery in a safe manner Caution To avoid loss of the calibration constants stored on the A2 controller assembly connect the spectrum analyzer to the main power source and turn on before removing
295. d with the center vertical graticule line Adjustment Procedures 2 39 8 LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment Assembly Adjusted Al4 frequency control assembly Related Performance Test First LO OUTPUT Amplitude Description The gate bias and SENSE voltages for the A7 switched LO distribution amplifier is adjusted to the value specified on the label of A7 MEASURING RECEIVER SPECTRUM ANALYZER POWER SENSOR 2 220 000005 o 1ST LO omnopon OUTPUT eQeoodo DVM TEST LEADS fD o Eu 0 0 DIGITAL VOLTMETER A14 FREQ E A OCs A15 RF aco D Figure 2 15 First LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment Setup SK1 10 Equipment DNNE aed ice each HP 3456A PVM Vest leads uus coca hee SRSA eee Eee ear Ee ence ea hes HP 34118A 2 40 Adjustment Procedures 8 LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment Procedure 1 Set the HP 85623 LINE switch to off and disconnect the line cord Remove the cover and fold down the 15 RF and Al4 Frequency Control assemblies Move the jumper on A2J12 from the WR PROT to the WR ENA position The jumper is on the edge of the A2 board assembly and can be moved without folding the board down 3 Reconnect the line cord and turn on the spectrum analyzer 10 11 12 13 14 On the HP 85623 press CAL MORE 1 2 SERVICE CAL DATA On
296. djust A17R11 CUTOFF until the display is visible and A17R34 COARSE FOCUS for best possible focus Cutoff Adjustment 6 Press PRESET DISPLAY INTENSITY 255 ENTER STORE INTENSITY MORE 1 of 2 FOCUS 127 ENTER STORE FOCUS then GRAT OM OFF OFF Adjust A17R11 CUTOFF until the retrace line between the bottom of trace A and the annunciators at the bottom of the display just disappears Deflection Adjustments 7 Press GRAT ON OFF ON MORE 2 of 2 INTENSITY 80 ENTER STORE INTENSITY CAL MORE 1 of 2 and CRT ADJ PATTERN Fold up the A3 interface assembly to access the adjustments on iis A2 controller assembly 8 Refer to Figure 2 3 for locating the lines used for adjusting DGTL X GAIN and DGTL Y GAIN Each of these lines is actually two lines adjusted for coincidence The two lines will form an X if they are not adjusted properly 9 Adjust A2R206 DGTL X GAIN until the two vertical lines near the left edge of the display converge to one single line 10 Adjust A2R215 DGTL Y GAIN until the two horizontal lines near the top edge of the display converge to one single line 11 Adjust A2R262 STOP BLANK and A2R263 START BLANK for the sharpest corners of the outer box in the test pattern The intensity of the corners should be the same as the middle of the lines between the corners 2 16 Adjustment Procedures 12 13 14 15 2 Display Adjustment Adjust the rear panel TRACE ALIGN until
297. djust AST202 XTAL CTR 2 using the procedure in steps 15 through 17 20 Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP3 21 Adjust A5T500 XTAL CTR 3 using the procedure in steps 15 through 17 22 Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP4 23 Adjust AST502 XTAL CTR 4 using the procedure in steps 15 through 17 Table 2 8 Factory Selected XTAL Filter Capacitors XTAL CTR Adjustment Fixed Factory Select Capacitor A5T200 XTAL CTR 1 A5C204 A5T202 XTAL CTR 2 5C216 5 500 XTAL 3 5 505 5 502 XTAL 4 A5C516 Table 2 9 XTAL Factory Selected Capacitor Selection DVM Reading V Currently Loaded Capacitor Value pF 0 to 1 5 1 5 to 2 5 2 5 to 3 5 3 5 to 4 5 4 5 to 5 5 5 5 to 6 5 6 5 to 7 5 7 5 to 8 5 8 5 to 9 5 9 5 to 10 15 with 18 with 20 with 22 with 24 with 27 with ndicates a condition that should not exist suspect broken hardware 2 24 Adjustment Procedures Table 2 10 Capacitor Part Numbers Capacitor Value pF HP Part Number 6 8 8 2 10 12 0160 4793 0160 4792 0160 4791 0160 4790 0160 4789 0160 4788 0160 5699 0160 4787 0160 5903 0160 4786 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment Adjustment Procedures 2 25 4 IF Amplitude Adjustments The IF amplitude adjustments consist of the cal oscillator amplitude adjustment and the reference 15 dB attenuator adjustment Assembly Adjusted A4 log amp cal oscillator 5 IF assembly Related Performance Tests IF Gain Uncer
298. dulator troubleshooting 9 16 9 38 amplitude adjustments 2 26 analog bus drivers troubleshooting 8 28 analog bus timing 8 29 attenuator 7 44 attenuator removal and replacement See input attenuator removal and replacement audio amplifier troubleshooting 9 38 automated adjustment freq response and RYTHM 2 12 automated frequency response adjustment 3 8 dual bus operation 3 8 getting started 3 2 HP IB addressing 3 7 loading software 3 5 mass storage file 3 6 missing ETE 3 10 power meter 3 10 power sensor cal 3 1 power sensors 3 6 serial number query 3 8 verifying HP IB 3 8 automated frequency response adjustment menus test menu 3 8 automatic fault isolation 7 14 See also AFI automatic IF adjustment 9 9 automatic IF adjustment parameters 9 10 Index 2 Bl fan removal and replacement 4 42 battery caution 4 43 removal and replacement 4 43 warning 4 43 blank display 7 13 10 2 13 6 blank display using the TAM 13 5 blanking 10 5 blanking signal 13 7 block diagram description 7 42 BT 1 battery removal and replacement 4 43 buck regulator control 13 15 13 17 bus dual operation 3 8 C cable color code 4 3 cables 4 18 20 cables pin out 7 4 calibration data 3 6 power sensor 3 0 calibration menu 7 7 calibration oscillator troubleshooting 7 16 calibrator amplitude adjustment 2 47 cal oscillator 7 48 amplitude A4R826 range troubleshooting 9 33 low pass filter troublesh
299. e Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury 1 Disconnect the line power cord from the spectrum analyzer 2 Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame 3 Fold out the A2 A3 4 and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and A5 Assemblies Removal steps 3 through 5 Disconnect the HP IB cable at A2J5 5 Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench with A2 through A5 folded out to the right Warning The voltage potential at A6A1W3 is 9 kV Disconnect at the CRT with caution 10 11 12 13 14 Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument Connect the spectrum analyzer line power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line power switch is in the off position Connect a high voltage probe 1000 1 such as the HP 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input Connect the clip lead of the probe ground to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the rubber shroud of 1 post accelerator cable to obtain a reading on the voltmeter See Figure 4 2 Keep the high voltage probe on the post accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter readi
300. e 1s created but data is not stored the filename is listed but no data is viewed and it cannot be edited To change the cal factor at a particular frequency enter that frequency at the frequency prompt then enter the new cal factor To delete a frequency Cal factor pair enter the frequency of the pair to be deleted and a cal factor of zero Add a frequency Cal factor pair by entering the new frequency at the frequency prompt and the new cal factor Deleting a File Press Delete File to remove a listed file At the prompt enter the filename exactly as it appears on screen You are asked for confirmation to delete the file Changing the System Mass Storage File Location To add edit or view power sensor data on a disk other than the one currently specified by the system mass storage file location press System File Enter the msus of the new system mass storage file location All power sensor files residing on that disk are listed When returning to the Conditions Menu the system mass storage file location is the one determined in the Sensor Utilities Menu Listing Available Power Sensor Data Files Press List Files to list all power sensor data files on the currently specified system mass storage location file Returning to the Conditions Menu Menu to return to the Conditions Menu Adjust Menu The Adjust Menu displays the one adjustment that can be performed by the frequency response adjustment program If HP IB contr
301. e Off DOR Intensity Bad Characters or Long Lines Dimmer Than Short Lines Analog Zero Span Problems Non Option 007 Frequency Count Marker Problems Frequency Counter State and Trace Storage Probles Keyboard Problems 11 Synthesizer Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Troubleshooting Test Setup eg Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section General PLL Troubleshooting PLL Locked at Wrong LM Unlocked PLL Unlocked Reference PLL Operation Troubleshooting Third LO Driver Ampie Unlocked Offset Lock oan Sampling Operation Troubleshooting Check path to phaselfrequency d deiecit steps 14 19 Unlocked YTO PLL Operation Troubleshooting an YTO PLL Unlocked Fractional N PLL Operation Confirming an Unlocked Condition Fractional N PLL Frequency Span Accuracy Problems Determining the First LO Span Confirming Span Problems Contents 6 9 31 9 32 9 33 9 33 9 34 9 38 9 38 9 38 10 2 10 2 10 4 10 4 10 4 10 5 10 7 10 10 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 10 16 11 2 11 8 11 8 11 13 11 13 11 15 11 16 11 16 11 16 11 19 11 20 11 20 11 20 11 22 11 23 11 23 11 25 11 31 11 31 11 31 11 32 11 36 11 36 1 1 37 YTO Main Coil Span Problems LO Spans gt 20 MHz YTO FM Coil Span Problems LO Spans 2 01 MHz to 20 MHz Fractional N Span Problems LO Spans lt 2 MHz First LO Span Problems Spans First LO Span Problems Multiband Sweeney Phase No
302. e file location and the presence of the CONDITIONS file Unable to load data from sensor filename Program found power sensor data file but could not read the data from the file Use the Sensor Utilities to delete the file and enter new data Unable to obtain catalog from system mass storage file location The system could not verify that the system mass storage file location entered was available Check the msus of the system mass storage file location Unable to reach power level of value dBm Program was unable to set the source amplitude for a desired power meter reading Check the test setup WARNING CONDITIONS file from system file location is not compatible CONDITIONS files from Operation Verification programs for the HP 8560 A B Series or HP 8560 E Series analyzers are not compatible with the frequency response adjustment software Put the frequency response adjustment software in a different directory than the Operation Verification programs if possible Default CONDITIONS data will be used Change the mass storage file location to a different location than either of the operation verification programs Then modify the conditions data as necessary and press STORE CONDS Error Messages Beginning with Numeric Characters 6481A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not lt 50 MHz Program requires the HP 8481A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or below 50 MHz Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or below 50 MHz
303. e model number and option information stored in EEROM to include a recognized model number HP 85603 HP 85613 or HP 85633 The model number chosen depends upon which TAM function is desired Once the model number is changed to one of the recognized model numbers the selected TAM function can be run as it normally would on the recognized model number spectrum analyzer Some TAM functions have limitations when used on an HP 85623 These limitations are noted on the computer display The TAM measures voltages at key points in the circuitry and flags a failure whenever the voltage falls outside the limits The TAM locates the failure to a small functional area which can be examined manually Remember the following when using the TAM m sure the spectrum analyzer power is turned off when installing or removing the TAM m Use the HEL P softkey found in all menus for useful information m Press MODULE to return to the TAM main menu m The TAM acts as the active controller on the HP IB bus Press the PASS on the computer keyboard to remove the computer as the active controller CONTROL softkey Loading and Running the HP 8562E TAM Interface Software TAM I F SW The TAM I F SW requires an HP 9000 Series 200 or Series 300 controller and an HP BASIC opera ng system as described in the instructions for using the Frequency Response Adjustment Software in Chapter 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software The TAM I F SW req
304. e of 128 and press FOCUS Turn the LINE switch off then on cycling the 5 If errors are still present the EEROM A2U501 is defective Refer to the EEROM replacement procedure in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Checksum error of EEROM A2U501 Checksum error of frequency response correction data Checksum error of elapsed time data Checksum error of frequency response correction data Default values being used Checksum error of customer preselector peak data External preselector data recalled in internal mode or internal preselector data recalled in external mode To clear the error press RECALL MORE 1 OF 2 FACTORY PRSEL PK SAVE andSAVE PRSEL PK Program ROM Checksum Errors 705 to 710 705 ROM U306 706 ROM U307 707 ROM U308 708 ROM U309 709 ROM U310 710 ROM U311 The instrument power on diagnostics perform a checksum on each programmed ROM A2 controller assembly If an invalid checksum 1s found for a particular ROM an error code is generated If a defective programmed ROM is found replace it with another ROM with the same HP part number Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Although some of these errors might result in a blanked display it is possible to read these errors over HP IB Refer to Troubleshooting to a Functional Section in this chapter Checksum error of program ROM A2U306 Checksum error of program ROM A2U307 Checksum error of program ROM A2U308 Checksum error of pro
305. e oscilloscope check for activity at pins 10 and 13 of A3U617 h If either pin or both show no activity check for activity at pin 21 LTIMER of A3U617 If LTIMER is not active troubleshoot the Interface Strobe Select circuitry block K j If there was activity at pins 10 and 13 of A3U617 suspect A3U616 E ADC Interface Section 8 11 Preselector Peaking Control Real Time DAC Refer to function block H of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The spectrum analyzer uses a real time DAC R T DACI to peak the preselector 1 2 1 Press MKR Aux CTRL IN RE WAT Monitor the DVM reading while changing the PRESELECTOR TUNE value from to 255 Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the span to 0 Hz Connect a positive DVM lead to A3J400 pin 3 and the negative DVM lead to A3TP4 MIXER and PRESEL A The PRESELECTOR TUNE value is the R T DAC1 setting Check that the DVM reading increases from 0 to approximately 10 Vdc as R T DACI is set from O to 255 If the voltage does not change as described set the spectrum analyzer to single trigger mode and check the following a Check that A3U409B pin 18 is at 10 Vdc b Check for the presence of pulses at U409 pin 6 IAO c Check that pulses are present at U409 pin 15 LDAC2 d Check that pulses are present at U409 pin 16 LWRCLK If the LDAC2 or LWRCLK signals are i
306. e oscilloscope input ac coupled a triangle waveform approximately 20 mVp p should be present 22 Short C441 with a wire jumper Connect the jumper from the end of R462 nearest C441 to the end of R460 nearest C443 This changes the loop integrator into a voltage follower Refer to function block AB of AI5 RF schematic 23 Check the voltages at the following points 150408 pin 6 2 5 Vdc approximately 15X201 pin 1 42 5 Vdc approximately 24 If the voltages are not correct suspect A15U408 25 Remove the jumpers 11 22 Synthesizer Section Unlocked YTO PLL Operation The YTO 15 locked to two other oscillators the fractional N oscillator and the offset PLL sampling oscillator For LO spans of 2 01 MHz and above either the FM or main coil of the YTO is swept directly For LO spans of 2 MHz and below the fractional N oscillator is swept The sampling oscillator remains fixed tuned during all sweeps The output of All YTO feeds through the A7 switched LO distribution amplifier to the A15U100 sampler The offset PLL sampling oscillator which drives the sampler oscillates between 285 and 297 222 MHz The sampler generates harmonics of the sampling oscillator and one of these harmonics mixes with the YTO frequency to generate the sampler IF frequency As a result the frequency of the sampler IF is determined by the following equation Fir N Fsamp Where is the sampler IF is the
307. e performance usability or reliability Hewlett Packard service personnel have access to complete records of design changes to each type of equipment based on the equipment serial number Whenever you contact Hewlett Packard about a product have the complete serial number available to ensure obtaining the most complete and accurate information possible The serial number label is usually attached to the rear of the product The serial number has two parts the prefix two letters and the first four numbers and the suffix the last four numbers oan US 34250887 MADE IN USA PREFIX SUFF 1X SERIAL NUMBER Serial Number Label Example The two letters identify the country in which the unit was manufactured The four numbers of the prefix are a code identifying the date of the last major design change incorporated in your Hewlett Packard product The four digit suffix is a sequential number and coupled with the prefix provides a unique identification for each unit produced Whenever you list the serial number or refer to it in obtaining information about your Hewlett Packard product be sure to use the complete number including the full prefix and the suffix Units which were produced before the serial number format was changed may also be covered by this documentation On earlier serial number labels the prefix consists of the first four numbers and a single letter The suffix is a five digit sequential number General I
308. e pliers 8710 0030 Wire cutters 8710 0012 Assembly Replacement 4 3 Procedure 1 Spectrum Analyzer Cover Removal Replacement l Disconnect the line power cord remove any adapters from the front panel connectors and place the spectrum analyzer on its front panel If an HP 85620A Mass Memory Module or HP 85629B Test and Adjustment Module is mounted on the rear panel remove it Loosen but do not remove the four rear bumper screws using a 4 mm hex wrench Pull the cover assembly off towards the rear of the instrument Caution When replacing the spectrum analyzer cover use caution to avoid damaging any cables When installing the cover assembly be sure to locate the cover air vent holes on the bottom side of the spectrum analyzer Attach with the four screws loosened in step 2 and tighten the four screws gradually to ensure that the cover is seated in the front frame gasket groove Torque each screw to 40 to 50 inch pounds to ensure proper gasket compression to minimize EMI ca 55 0 e C E 0 MoO SK122 oaGuJocd is 15 Figure 4 1 Hinged Assemblies 4 4 Assembly Replacement Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT Removal Warning The voltage potential at AGA1W3 is 9 kV Disconnect at the CRT with caution Failure to properly discharge AGA1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage
309. e presence of externally supplied signals 3 Check A4U811 pin 9 for a 100 kHz TTL level square wave verifying operation of A4U811 A4Q802 and the 10 MHz input signal from A4J7 4 Check the 15 VF 5 VF and 15 V power supplies and 10 V reference on the A4 assembly 5 Check that A4U807 pin 5 CALOSC becomes TTL low 0 V at the start of a FULL IF ADJ press CAL and FULL IF 4 The phase modulation output at A4U804 pin 8 should also remain at O volts If these are correct troubleshoot blocks V W X and Y See Figure 9 21 4 log amplifier Cal oscillator Block Diagram Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range Refer to function block AC of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 1 If A4R826 CAL OSC AMPTD has inadequate range to perform the IF Amplitude Adjustment press CAL 2 Rotate A4R826 fully clockwise and disconnect W52 coax 9 from A5J4 3 Connect 5J4 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer 4 Set the other spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center ssc das oen M tate eee ose teen 10 7 MHz Reference level 30 dBm 5 Observe the spectrum analyzer display while pressing FULL IF ADJ The signal level should be above 34 55 dBm If the signal level is incorrect continue with step 7 6 Rotate A4R826 fully counterclockwise The signal should be below 36 25 dBm
310. e screen is about medium It should be fully illuminated but not so bright that it burns the screen 15 NITs on a photometer radiometer Press CAL MORE of 2 and CRT ADJ PATTERN Locate the dot just below the HP logo Adjust A17R93 ASTIG for the smallest round dot possible Adjust A17R34 COARSE FOCUS and A17R92 DDD for the best focus of the characters at the center of the screen Adjust A17R21 Z FOCUS for the best focus of the test pattern outside box Adjust A17R26 X FOCUS for best focus of the characters at the corners of the test pattern Repeat steps 17 through 20 to obtain the best overall focus quality 2 18 Adjustment Procedures 2 Display Adjustment A2R215 A2R263 262 A2R2 DGTLY GAIN START BLANK STOP BLANK VIDEO GAIN A2R271 pg SWEEP GAIN Ur ERUNT R262 A2R209 1 SWEEP OFFSET LIO muc 271 R215 He 218 2 EE A2R218 R206 VIDEO OFFSET 3 A2R206 DGTLY GAIN SK14 Figure 2 4 A2 Display Adjustment Locations Fast Zero Span Adjustments 22 23 24 Set A2R209 SWEEP OFFSET A2R218 VIDEO OFFSET and A2R268 SWEEP GAIN to midrange Adjustment locations are shown in Figure 2 4 for these A2 adjustments Set the HP 355D to 30 dB attenuation Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 2 Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Cemerneducihey 5 bettie tected dete fee Sam 300 MHz
311. e spectrum analyzer and set the following controls S catu ES namo Ote aderat fuo oe etat iod 0 Hz SWEEP UME eod diee Dice eR IN pora 60 s Detector Sep ARI ELA Se UU qas Re NU esatto qao ad SAMPLE Check for a TTL high at A3U509 pin 2 and a TTL low at A3U509 pin 14 set the detector mode to NORMAL Check that A3U509 pins 2 and 14 are both TTL low Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings sa mS ERI 1 MHz IJetector mode dubi Cx uie vide SAMPLE Check for a TTL high at A3U509 pin 2 and a TTL low at A3U509 pin 14 Press CAL and REA LIGN LO amp IF During the realignment A3U509 pin 2 should be TTL low and pin 14 should be TTL high until the 10 kHz and narrower resolution bandwidths are adjusted If correct the Start Stop Control circuitry is being selected properly by the processor and U508 in the ADC Register block is working properly Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows CT 0 Hz Detector mode bd p trie eS SAMPLE SWOOP ME 400ms Check that A3U509 pin 7 has positive 15 ys pulses with 667 ps period sweep time 600 Check that A3U509 pin 9 has positive 15 ps pulses with a 667 ps period sweep
312. eck to see that 8 is receiving the 5 V and 4 V supply voltages from via W12 Using another spectrum analyzer check for approximately 21 dBm 300 MHz at the input of 8 This level can easily be measured at the output of FL by disconnecting W45 from FL1 If the level at the input of A8 is less than 25 dBm suspect FL1 low pass filter A10 RYTHM or 9 input attenuator Refer to power levels shown on Figure 12 8 HP 85623 RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram Check for approximately 30 dBm 3 9107 GHz at the output of 8 This level can easily be measured at the output of FL2 by disconnecting 57 from If the level at the output of A8 is less than 35 dBm suspect A8 low band mixer or FL2 low pass filter RF Section 12 7 A9 Input Attenuator 1 On the spectrum analyzer press and Perform the Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty performance test in Chapter 2 Using Performance Tests of the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide If there is a step to step error of approximately 10 dB or more continue with step 3 AUTO MAN until MAN is highlighted Step the input attenuator from dB to 70 dB A click should be heard at each step The absence of a click indicates faulty attenuator drive circuitry It will be necessary to use the DATA keys to enter an input attenuator setting of 0 dB the step key will not allow sel
313. ecommended Test Equipment Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices Related Adjustments Adjustable Components Factory Selected Components TAM Adjustments Required Test Equipment for TAM Factory Selected LC Filter Capacitors LC Factory Selected Capacitor Selection Factory Selected XTAL Filter Capacitors XTAL Factory Selected DRE Selection Capacitor Part Numbers zm Sampling Adjustments Conversion Loss Data 2E Required Test Equipment Summary Required Tools Reference Designations Abbreviations and Multipliers Manufacturers Code List Replaceable Parts Location of Assembly Text W2 Control Cable Connections 42 Automatic Fault Isolation References TAM Tests versus A3 Test Connectors Keyboard Matrix Counter Frequencies Trigger MUX Truth Table A3U102 Latch Outputs HMUX_SELO 1 versus Detector Mode Logic Levels at A3U 108 Demultiplexer A3U410 Truth Table Demultiplexer A3U500 Truth Table LP Q Truth Table Control Word at Primary U3 amd Automatic Fault Isolation References TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Sweep Width Settings TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Gate Times a 822 Measured Signal Line Location Automatic Fault Isolation References 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 10 1 17 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 10 2 11 2 03 2 23 2 24 2 24 2 25 2 36 2 59 3 3 4 3 5 3 5 6 5 7 7 9 8 2 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 9 8 9 8 18 8 20 8 22 8 30 8 30 8 33 8 34 9 4 9 5 9 9 10 2 10 14 11 3 11 4
314. ecting 0 dB input attenuation Monitor the pins of A14U420 with a logic probe or DVM while setting the input attenuator to the values listed in Table 12 3 If one or more logic levels listed in the tables is incorrect disconnect W11 from A14J6 and repeat step 4 checking only pins 3 5 11 and 13 of A14U420 Pins 4 6 10 and 12 should all read low TTL levels If one or more logic levels listed in the tables is incorrect with W11 disconnected troubleshoot the Al4 frequency control assembly If all logic levels are correct the A9 input attenuator is probably defective 12 8 RF Section Note The logic levels listed in Table 12 3 show the default ac usage pin 5 low pin 6 high DC usage pin 5 high pin6 low is not shown Table 12 3 HP 8562E Attenuator Control Truth Table HP 85623 A14U420 Pin Number ATTEN Set amp atting 3 44 6 dB 20 20 dB DC AC 40 dB 40 10 dB 10 dB Second Converter Caution The Al3 assembly is extremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge ESD For further information regarding electrostatic cautions refer to Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 General Information 1 Connect the HP 85623 CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector 2 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center frequemby iau eee ey Se eee end 300 MHz er att Cae UU eas 0 Hz Oera RS RUE Beene tse 10 d
315. edures 3 If adjustment cannot be made disconnect W35 coax 92 from A15J801 4 On the HP 85623 press and set the controls to the following settings Center educi T NE Uh eee 300 MHz SUME RIETI LUTTE 0 Hz 5 Connect a signal generator to A15J801 6 Set the signal generator to the following settings acr 310 7 MHz CW Gesu ee eos edi mr stat ane hee at aaa 28dBm 7 If a flat line is displayed within 2 dB of the reference level and the performance test passed troubleshoot microcircuits A7 A8 A9 and A13 8 If a flat line is displayed within 2 dB of the reference level and the performance test failed troubleshoot the AI5 RF assembly 9 Disconnect the signal generator from A15J801 and reconnect 35 Confirming Third Converter Output 1 Connect the HP 85623 CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 502 connector 2 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center Srequeney oss auth ae bears ieee aetati tcs eta 300 MHz SD all s babere ed uus eee eee eS On 0 Hz Input AEM AN E 10 dB Press 561 swP CAL OFF Disconnect W29 coax 7 from A15J601 Connect a test cable from A15J601 to the input of another spectrum analyzer Nn A Tune the other spectrum analyzer to 10 7 MHz The signal displayed on the other spectrum analyzer should be approximately 15 dBm 7 Remove the test cable from A15
316. ee BLOCK 5 SHEET 2 OF 5 5 SHEET 4 FRAC N TUNE LO3 ERR 42 37 LODA_AGC FROM BLOCK Z ALC MON FROM BLOCK U SWPRAMP FROM BLOCK L uua cn e amd ade amm dam eum Mes dem uie aas ab deni umb ns J16 13 J16 2 416 1 J16 3 y gt 7 SWEEP TUNE YTF GAIN MULTIPLIER AND OFFSET YTF DRIVE HP 8561 62 83 ONLY C 9 OPTION DRIVE HP 8560 ONLY 08 10 1 09 93 ALC_MON TO BLOCK AH SWP FAV FREQUENCY ANALOG d LODA AGC TO FRAC N INTERFACE SHEET 5 OF 5 2 an FC MUX FRAC N TEST OUTPUT DRIVER FC MUX 2 40 TP504 TP505 gt C TP503 4 BUFFER 60 TO 96 MHz YTO LOOP FILTER YTO ERROR 10 J11 W15 TO LOW BAND MIXER J12 EDU RUM gt 13 TO A13 2ND CONVERTER J9 P O W16 TO A10 YIG TUNED FILTER M XER J304 FRAC N TEST J501 11 TO A9 ATTENUATOR r LO _SWP 0 5V GHz l W32 SAMPLER IF lt lt P O 15 RF 3 0 6 81 2 410 W38 J1 SWI SYNTHESIZER SECTION J5 W42 TCHED lt lt C 15710 110 DIST EI L W12 LODA 45V Sa LO SENSE gt
317. eed Se ee ee ee TIO OS level secede ede pete ech DR E ae ech as ale Eia ns aue ae ay oa OS GE es Be 6 On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET then set the controls as follows 100 MHz C nM 9 MHZ Referetice devel Sites eb EDEN 10 dBm Resolution bandwidth 100 kHz 7 On the spectrum analyzer press PEAK SEARCH MARKER CF SPAN ZERO SPAN AUX CTRL AM FM DE CAL IF ADJ ON OFF OFF TRIG and SWEEP CONT SGL SGL Set the volume control to midrange 2 54 Adjustment Procedures 13 Demodulator Adjustment 8 1 kHz sine wave should be observed on the oscilloscope Rotate the volume knob on the front panel of the spectrum analyzer until the amplitude of the 1 kHz signal is at about 150 mV 3 divisions on the oscilloscope 9 Adjust A4C707 FM DEMOD for a maximum peak to peak response on the oscilloscope 10 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Disconnect the test cable from A4C723 CONNECT HERE SP115E Figure 2 22 Demodulator Adjustment Locations Adjustment Procedures 2 55 14 External Mixer Bias Adjustment Non Option 327 Assembly Adjusted 15 RF assembly Related Performance Test There is no related performance test for this adjustment Description A voltmeter is connected to the spectrum analyzer IF INPUT with the external mixer bias set to off The bias is adjusted for a 0 Vdc output SPECTRUM
318. eeps having a width of equal to or greater than 2 0 MHz times N to control the timing of the ADC operations Some combination of MOD VIDEO NEG PEAK and POS PEAK is used for the video signal to be converted by the ADC The YTO ERR FCMUX CAL OSC TUNE and OFL ERR inputs are used only during diagnostic and auto adjust routines and during retrace ADC Interface Section 8 21 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings 300 MHz 0 Hz Reference Jewel e Ve EL M E E 10dBm SWCD an eat bat aha cant daca edes 50s DETECTORMODE 5 2 xq ep etter cea desde eee T SAMPLE 2 Refer to Table 8 9 and check for correct logic levels at A3U108 pins 1 15 and 16 Check for proper output signals at TP6 If the select lines are not changing suspect the ADC ASM or the VGA ADC MUX Control If the select lines are changing but the proper video inputs are not being switched to the output replace U108 In SAMPLE mode the input is MOD VIDEO 7 in POS PEAK mode the input is 5 pin 5 and in PEAK mode the input is NEG_PEAK pin 6 3 Check for the presence of the YTO ERR signal at A3J2 pin 42 with an oscilloscope probe 4 If ERR 300 YTO UNLK or 301 YTO UNLK occurs and the voltage is near zero during a sweep and positive during retrace YTO is being locked the fault is on the A3 assembly If a constant dc voltage is present refer to
319. eferred sensor The HP 8485A may be substituted if it has calibration factor data from 10 MHz to at least 18 GHz the HP 8485A comes standard with data down to only 50 MHz Refer to Sensor Utilities for more information regarding storing viewing editing and purging cal factor data for power sensors 3 6 Frequency Response Adjustment Software To select a particular sensor of a certain model number move the pointer to the desired model number and press Change Entry Enter the last five digits of the power sensor serial number that is the serial number suffix The program checks to see that a data file containing the cal factor data for that particular sensor exists To create edit view or purge power sensor cal factor data files press Sensor Utils to bring up the Sensor Utilities Menu Refer to Sensor Utilities Menu in this chapter for more information A WARNING message appears if the program does not find a data file for the sensor If this occurs check that the system mass storage file location specifies the disk where the power sensor data resides If the system mass storage file location is correct the cal factor data for that particular sensor has not been stored Note Power sensor data files created using the VERIFY_6XE operation verification software for HP 8560E 61E 62E 63E 64E 65E spectrum analyzers are compatible with the frequency response adjustment software Refer to Sensor Utilities Menu in
320. ement 1 Ensure that the bottom shield wall is in place before replacing the power supply assembly 2 Attach the A6 power supply assembly to the spectrum analyzer chassis and top shield wall using the four screws 3 Connect W1 to A6J1 W3 to A6J2 fan power wires to A6J3 W8 to A6J4 and the line power jack to A6J101 See Figure 4 11 4 Secure the A6Al high voltage assembly to the power supply assembly using three TORX screws Connect ribbon cable 1 1 to A6J5 5 Snap post accelerator cable A6A1W3 to the CRT assembly 4 22 Assembly Replacement Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly 1 AGAI N POWER CABLE TIE TORX SCREW LINE POWER WI TORX SCREWS Figure 4 11 A6 Power Supply Connections Assembly Replacement 4 23 Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly 6 Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the A6 cover 7 Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three flathead screws 1 See Figure 4 12 One end of the cover fits into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove 8 Fold the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and 5 Assemblies Replacement steps 6 through 12 SP14E Figure 4 12 Power Supply Cover 4 24 Assembly Replacement Procedure 7 A6A1 High
321. ement 4 20 Assembly Replacement Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly Removal Warning The A6 power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before beginning this replacement procedure Failure to follow this precaution will present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury 1 Disconnect the power cord from the spectrum analyzer Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly Refer to Procedure 1 Spectrum Analyzer Cover Fold out the A2 A3 4 and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and 5 Assemblies Removal steps 2 through 6 Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench with A2 4 and 5 folded out to the right Warning The voltage potential at AGA1W3 is 9 kV Disconnect at the CRT with caution 10 11 T2 I5 14 Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument Connect the spectrum analyzer line power cord to provide proper grounding while discharging the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line power switch is in the off position Connect a high voltage probe 1000 1 such as the HP 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input
322. ement value center the LC CTR adjustment and press ADJ CURR IF STATE After the TF ADJUST STATUS message disappears read the DVM display Choose a capacitor value from Table 2 7 based on the DVM reading and the presently loaded capacitor value Table 2 10 lists a few capacitor part numbers Caution Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing to the off position before removing or replacing any shield 7 Move the positive DVM lead to ASTP6 8 Adjust A5L301 LC CTR 2 by repeating steps 4 through 6 9 Move the positive DVM test lead to 5 2 this is a resistor lead type of test point 10 Adjust A5L700 LC CTR 3 by repeating steps 4 through 6 2 22 Adjustment Procedures 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment 11 Move the positive DVM test lead to A5TP1 this is a resistor lead type of test point 12 Adjust A5L702 LC CTR 4 using the procedure in steps 4 through 6 Table 2 6 Factory Selected LC Filter Capacitors LC CTR Adjustment Fixed Factory Select Capacitor A5L300 LC CTR 1 A5C326 A5L301 LC CTR 2 5 327 A5L700 LC CTR 3 5 17 A5L702 LC CTR 4 A5C718 Table 2 7 LC Factory Selected Capacitor Selection DVM Reading V Currently Loaded Capacitor Value pF Replace Replace Replace Replace 6 8 with 8 2 with 10 with 12 with 15 with 18 with 20 with 0 to 1 5 1 5 to 2 5 i 2 5 to 3 5 3 5 to 4 5 i 4 5 to 5 5 5 5 to 6 5 No change No change No change No change No change change
323. en using the high voltage probe connect the ground lead securely to the spectrum analyzer chassis Carefully measure the grid voltage at A17J7 pin 6 and the cathode voltage at A17J7 pin 4 The display will work with a cathode voltage of 2450 V 250 V provided the grid voltage A17J7 pin 6 is 30 to 100 V more negative than the cathode A17R11 CUTOFF should be able to adjust the voltage difference over a 60 V range to account for tube variations and achieve proper intensity If the grid and cathode voltages are correct turn off the spectrum analyzer and check CRIO with an ohmmeter If CRIO is good suspect the A18V1 CRT If the grid and cathode voltages are too low turn off the power and disconnect W8 from the base of A18V1 CRT and recheck the grid and cathode voltages If the grid and cathode voltages are still too low refer to CRT Supply in this chapter and the High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment procedure in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If voltages are correct when the tube is disconnected the CRT is probably defective Caution The pins on the A18V1 CRT bend easily Be careful not to bend pins when connecting W8 to A18VI Display Power Supply Section 13 1 A6 Power Supply Assembly Troubleshooting The spectrum analyzer uses a switching power supply operating at 40 kHz to supply the low voltages for most of the analyzer hardware and a 30 kHz switching supply CRT supply to provide the high
324. end of the sweep is aligned with the right most vertical graticule line Press STATE 2 and STATE 3 The two traces should be aligned within 0 1 divisions Press STATE 0 and STATE 1 The two traces should be aligned within fO l divisions 2 20 Adjustment Procedures 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment Assembly Adjusted 5 IF assembly Related Performance Test Resolution bandwidth accuracy and selectivity Description The center frequency of each IF bandpass filter pole is adjusted by DAC controlled varactor diodes and an inductor for the LC poles or a transformer for the crystal poles The inductors and transformers are for coarse tuning and the varactors are for fine tuning by the microprocessor The inductors and transformers are adjusted such that the varactor diodes are biased near the middle of their capacitance range The varactor diode bias is measured with the DVM Note This procedure is not a routine adjustment It should be performed only if repairs to the A5 IF assembly are made If the entire A5 IF assembly is replaced the assembly arrives pre adjusted from the factory and requires no further adjustment SPECTRUM ANALYZER DVM TEST LEADS DIGITAL VOLTMETER BOARD 4 SK15 Figure 2 5 IF Bandpass Adjustment Setup Equipment Digital voltmeter HP 3456A DV test leads iei o ide ieu HP 34118A Special tuning tool for slottype tu
325. enfell detector troubleshooting 8 21 RPG problems 8 7 removal and replacement 4 14 RYTHM 7 44 removal and replacement 4 34 RYTHM adjustment 2 60 safety considerations general v safety notes iv sales and service offices 1 16 sales offices 1 16 sampler 1 1 45 sampler IF 11 27 11 45 sampler troubleshooting 11 11 sampling loop See offset lock loop sampling oscillator 11 20 11 23 sampling oscillator adjustment 2 34 scale fidelity performance test failures 9 12 scan ramps 11 42 screen See display second converter 7 44 12 9 removal and replacement 4 36 second IF amplifier 7 44 sensor utilities menu 3 9 sensor utilities menu softkeys 3 12 Sensor Utils softkey 3 12 serial number 3 8 serial numbers l l service functions 7 7 service kit 1 4 service kit contents 1 4 Service menu 7 7 service offices 1 16 service tools 1 4 setups software adjustment 3 4 shipping shipping container 1 6 8 Single Test softkey 3 13 SLODA 7 43 11 23 adjustment 2 40 removal and replacement 4 30 span 2 02 MHz to 20 MHz 11 38 gt 20 MHz 11 38 lt 2 MHz 11 39 span accuracy problems 11 36 span problems 11 37 11 40 multiband sweeps 11 41 speaker troubleshooting 9 38 state storage problems 10 15 step gains troubleshooting 9 31 Store Conds softkey 3 12 sweep generator 1 1 46 sweep generator troubleshooting 9 38 sweeping 7 46 span accuracy 11 36 YTO 11 24 sweep ramp 11 42 switching LO distributi
326. ent Table 1 4 lists the recommended test equipment required for operation verification performance tests adjustments troubleshooting and the Test and Adjustment Module Any equipment that meets the critical specifications given in the table can be substituted for the recommended model s Operation verification and the performance tests are located in the Calibration Guide General Information 1 9 Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Substitution Model jources synthesized sweeper Frequency range HP 8340A B two required 10 MHz to 13 2 GHz HP 83630A opt 001 008 Frequency accuracy CW x 10 day Leveling modes Internal amp External Modulation modes AM amp Pulse Power level range 80 to 16 dBm ynthesizer level generator Frequency range 200 Hz to 80 MHz HP 3335A Frequency accuracy 1 x 10 month Flatness 0 15 dB Attenuator accuracy 00 09 dB External 10 MHz reference input Frequency resolution 1 Hz ynthesized signal generator Frequency range 100 kHz to 2 5 GHz HP 8663A Residual SSB phase noise at 1 GHz 73 dBc Hz at 10 Hz offset 107 dBc Hz at 1 kHz offset 124 dBc Hz at 10 kHz offset 124 dBc Hz at 100 kHz offset amp e function generator Frequency range 10 kHz to 50 MHz HP 8116A Pulse width 200 ns Output amplitude 5 V peak to peak Functions pulse amp triangle Pulse rise time 100 ns PTL sync output M FM signal
327. eps 1 6 1 Press AUX CTRL INTERNAL MIXER Press SIG 2 Use an active probe spectrum analyzer combination to confirm the power level of the 300 MHz signal at the following test points ID OFF if Option 008 15 installed A15X602 pin 5 gt 7 dBm 15 504 24 15 dBm 3 If the signal at A15X602 5 is low but the signal at A15TP504 is correct press Aux CTRL INTERNAL MIXER Press SIG ID OFF if present 4 Check that PIN diode switches CR603 and CR605 are reverse biased by approximately 10 Vdc Refer to function block of 15 RF schematic 5 Measure 300 MHz signal at A15TP503 using an active probe spectrum analyzer combination If the signal is not approximately 10 dBm refer to Unlocked Reference PLL in this chapter 6 If the level at the TP503 is correct but signal at TP504 is too low the fault is probably in the amplifier Synthesizer Section 11 19 Unlocked Offset Lock Loop Sampling Oscillator Operation The offset lock loop drives the A15U100 sampler The offset lock loop sampling oscillator tunes to one of sixteen discrete frequencies between 285 MHz and 297 222 MHz Refer to 15 schematic Mixer A15U400 mixes the oscillator output with 300 MHz from the reference PLL producing a 3 MHz to 15 MHz IF signal The 3 MHz to 15 MHz signal is compared in the phase frequency detector with the divided down 300 MHz from the reference PLL The phase frequency detector drives a voltage to current diode
328. er LED is lit but the output frequency is wrong by more than 1 MHz check the postscaler function block AV 7 Check that the postscaler is dividing properly The frequency at A14J304 should be equal to the frequency at A14TP4 divided by either 5 6 or 7 Refer to Table 11 10 To keep the divide number at a constant value set the spectrum analyzer to SI TP ID 0 Hz Single EXT with no external trigger connected Synthesizer Section 11 31 Table 1 1 10 Postscaler Divide Numbers Input output Range Range MHz A14J304 14 4 840 973 60 0 to 69 5 834 to 987 96 69 5 to 82 33 823 2 to 960 82 33 to 96 0 If the output frequency is wrong by less than 1 MHz the phase locked loop is not unlocked but still requires repair Continue with the Fractional N Oscillator PLL section Fractional N PLL The fractional N PLL provides a synthesized frequency in the range of 60 MHz to 96 MHz The 800 MHz to 1020 MHz voltage controlled oscillator VCO in the loop is divided down to lock with the 2 5 MHz reference Simultaneously the VCO is divided by two and then by either 5 6 or 7 to generate the 60 MHz to 96 MHz output The prescaler function block AR supplies the clock signal for the fractional divider and is required for the fractional divider to operate At the start of a fractional N sweep the fractional divider is set to a value for the start frequency and a sweep rate It then sweeps for as lon
329. ery assembly 6 2 MNT X splay cable etre eub oo eas EE RS DAES REPL eee 6 2 Ws display power bene Seaweed IRR ERE eS DSi 6 4 WY CRT yoke Cable ou code ot ne URS ERATUM 6 4 W10 A11 YTO drive cable 6 6 6 8 W11 A9 attenuator drive cable 6 6 AT LODA drive cable gies tes Sec equa e See er quta ee Reload leo ulta e Ron 6 6 6 8 W13 AI3 second conv drive cable 6 6 W14 NOT ASSIGNED W15 NOT ASSIGNED WHO ALO drivecable oerte d 6 8 W17 NOT ASSIGNED Wis EOS Weep cuve unte et 6 6 W19 Second IF out coax 83 6 5 W20 Zerosspan video COaX B 6 2 W21 NOT ASSIGNED W22 10 MHz frequency count coax 0 6 2 6 5 1 29 exte 93 pm E i d 6 2 W24 video out coax 5 Deleted in Option 327 6 2 W25 blanking out coax 4 6 2 W26 NOT ASSIGNED W27 tiered 10 7 MHZ tic shen haa the edes sibila 6 3 6 4 W28 NOT ASSIGNED OE 32 35 85 ies te neca om itd 6 4 6 5 W30 NOT ASSIGNED W31 ref in out coax 8
330. es W52 w29 WH I TE VIOLET W27 ORANGE Figure 3 8 Assembly Cables 2 of 2 5118 4 18 Assembly Replacement Procedure 5 A2 A3 A4 and AS Assemblies W22 W23 W25 w29 W52 W27 wo4 w55 6 0 92 4 7 9 COAX 3 COAX 2 a 22 22220 3 CABLE CLIP 5119 Figure 4 9 Coaxial Cable Clip 7 Check to ensure that no cables will become pinched under the hinges when folding up the 4 and 5 assemblies 8 Fold the A4 and A5 assemblies together as a unit into the spectrum analyzer Use caution to avoid damaging any cable assemblies The standoffs on the A5 assembly must fit into the cups on the A6 power supply top shield 9 Fold the A2 and A3 assemblies together as a unit into the spectrum analyzer Be sure to fold HP IB cable A19W1 between the and A4 assemblies using the two sets of hook and loop Velcro fasteners 10 Fold ribbon cable AlA1W1 between and A4 assemblies Take care to dress the protective tubing as close to A3J602 connector as possible so that the tubing does not fold with the cable See Figure 4 10 11 Attach ribbon cable W4 to A2J6 while folding up the assemblies Assembly Replacement 4 19 Procedure 5 2 4 and 5 Assemblies 12 Secure the assemblies using the eight screws removed in Removal step 3 See Figure 4 7 1 1 J602 SK133 Figure 4 10 HP IB and A1A1W1 Cable Plac
331. ese three NAND gates and the output of U304B is held high Check the 10 MHz reference by performing the following steps Set the HP 85623 10 MHz reference to internal by pressing REAR PANEL 10 MHz INT and Use a spectrum analyzer to confirm the presence of a 10 MHz signal at the following test points D ERE Tee AN MUI SENE deed eR 2 10dBm aUi lent vertu a ee gt 10 dBm DuC EOE E E T EE E E E TETE gt 2 dBm Check for a 1 3 Vp p waveform at A15J302 using an oscilloscope see Figure 12 6 Check that the signal at A15J301 is 10 MHz 40 Hz with Option 103 TCXO reference using a frequency counter If necessary perform the appropriate 10 MHz reference adjustment If there is no problem with INTernal 10 MHz reference operation check EXTernal 10 MHz reference operation as follows Set the HP 85623 10 MHz reference to external by pressing 10 MHz EXT Connect a 10 MHz 2 dBm signal to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN OUT connector Check the signals at A15J301 A15J302 A15J303 A15J304 according to the procedure in steps 2 through 4 If the signals are correct in EXTernal operation but not in IN Ternal operation the problem lies in A21 OCXO or Option 103 its voltage reference or the TTL level generator Check these areas as follows a On the spectrum analyzer press 10 MHz INT 12 20 RF Section 10
332. eshooting 9 16 frequency count marker problems 10 13 frequency response adjustment 10 MHz reference 3 4 alphabetic error messages 3 16 18 BASIC binaries 3 5 BASIC programs 3 5 changing mass storage file 3 10 compatible controllers 3 2 conditions menu 3 6 controller setup 3 4 error messages 3 16 19 Index 4 HP IB cables 3 4 loading the program 3 5 mass storage file 3 7 3 9 numeric error messages 3 18 operating system software 3 2 required test equipment 3 3 sensor data file 3 9 sensor file deletion 3 10 sensor file edits 3 10 sensor serial number 3 9 sensor utilities menu 3 9 10 test descriptions 3 14 15 test record header 3 6 variable error messages 3 19 warmup times 3 3 Frequency Response Adjustment memory required 3 2 frequency response adjustment menus adjust menu 3 13 all tests 3 6 conditions menu 3 12 sensor utilities menu 3 12 frequency response adjustment softkeys 3 12 13 frequency response adjustment test descriptions 3 14 15 front end cal adjustment 3 14 front frame removal 4 5 replacement 4 10 front frame parts 5 18 5 29 fuse blowing 13 14 G general information serial number label description 1 1 general safety considerations v graticule problem 10 10 H harmonic number versus center frequency 11 36 high and low band problems 12 5 high band problems 12 5 high voltage power supply adjustment 2 13 high voltage supplies 13 15 HP 85629B See TAM HP 85629B
333. eshooting the linear amplifiers 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN ZERO SPAN CAL ADJ OFF FREQUENCY 1 GHz AMPLITUDE 50 dBm LINEAR MORE AMFTD UNITS dBm and AMPLITUDE 2 Disconnect W27 coax 3 from A4J3 and connect the output of a signal generator to A4J3 3 Set the signal generator controls as follows Wenn dM e ccc Hc LT 6 dBm 10 7 MHz 4 Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and HP 85623 spectrum analyzer REF LVL in 10 dB steps to 90 dBm At each step the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer should be within one division of the previous position 5 If a problem exists isolate it by comparing the actual gain of A4U201C and A4U201E with those listed in the above gain guidelines 6 Reconnect W27 coax 3 to A4J3 Video Off set Refer to function block P of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The circuit provides a programmable video offset with a step size of 5 mV from 300 mV to 900 mV 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY 1 GHz AMPLITUDE 50 dBm CAL IF AD3 OFF Disconnect 27 coax 3 from A4J3 and connect a signal generator to A4J3 Set the signal generator controls as follows ee eee 10 dBm gt heats be 10 7 MHz
334. est the circuit 6 In Figure 10 11 there is no synchronization between DEF1 and the video patterns X POS and Y POS when DEF1 is TTL high The Y POS level when DEFI is low is the Video In level 10 12 Controller Section DEF 1 ATA c aff in lid ult il ill a ul SK1 100 Figure 10 1 DEF1 Synchronization Frequency Count Marker Problems The FREQ COUNT function works by dividing the 10 7 MHz IF signal by two prescaling and counting the divided down signal using the frequency counter on the A2 controller assembly block Z of the A2 schematic diagram The prescaler is on the A4 Log amplifier Cal oscillator assembly block Q of the A4 schematic diagram Perform the following steps to determine whether the problem is on the A4 log amplifier Cal oscillator or A2 controller assembly 1 Disconnect W53 from A2J7 2 Connect the output of a synthesized source such as an HP 3335A to A2J7 3 Set the synthesized source to the following settings wea eee es teg uh Dr aaa E M ETE 10dBm IIIS 2 05 a a Be ea es 5 35 MHz 4 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center Ifequency 32 ivan qs edi a oes ee eee ener RS 300 MHz ur ae 1 MHz 5 On the spectrum analyzer press couwr The frequency counter actually reads half the frequency of the 10 7 MHz IF If the
335. ests A adjustments M test amp adjustment module T troubleshooting V operation verification General Information l 1 3 Instrument Termination ILow pass filter Low pass filter two required Low pass filter two required Power splitter Service accessory kit Tuning tool Cables Test cable Cable RG 214 U Cable Cable 50 coaxial jive required Cable two required Part of microwave workstation Critical Specifications for Equipment Substitution Frequency range de to 13 2 GHz Impedance 50 Maximum SWR 1 10 Connector Type N m Cutoff frequency 50 MHz Rejection at 65 MHz gt 40 dB Rejection at 75 MHz gt 60 dB Cutoff frequency 1 8 GHz Rejection at gt 3 GHz gt 45 dB 0 1 dB ripple Cutoff frequency 4 4 GHz Rejection at 5 5 GHz gt 40 dB Frequency range de to 13 2 GHz Output tracking lt 0 25 dB insertion loss 6 dB nominal Equivalent output SWR lt 1 22 No substitute No substitute Connectors BNC m to SMB f Length gt 61 cm 24 in Connectors Type N m Length gt 91 cm 36 in vonnectors SMA m Length 24 to 36 inches connectors BNC m Length gt 122 cm 48 in requency range 30 Hz to 26 5 GHz Maximum SWR 1 4 at 26 5 GHz Maximum insertion loss 3 dB connectors 3 5 m both ends gt 61 cm 24 in Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment continued Recommende Model HP 909A 0955 0306
336. et the HP 85623 center frequency to 4 60 GHz Adjustment Procedures 2 41 8 LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment to 16 17 18 20 21 22 295 24 On the HP 85623 press caL 1 OF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA LO LEVELS and INT LO LEVEL The message DRIVE FOR BAND 1 will be displayed Note the B1 INT Sense voltage printed on the A7 LO distribution amp label Use the knob or keypad and press enter to change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading is 6 mV more negative than the label voltage For example if the B1 INT Sense voltage is 170 mV change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading is 176 mV Record the DAC value DAC value for 4 60 GHz To set the band 2 sense voltage set the HP 85623 center frequency to 9 46 GHz On the HP 85623 press CAL MORE 1 OF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA LO LEVELS and INT LO LEVEL The message DRIVE FOR BAND 2 will be displayed Note the B2 INT Sense voltage printed on the A7 LO distribution amp label Use the knob or keypad and press enter to change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading 15 6 mV more negative than the label voltage For example if the B2 INT Sense voltage is 170 mV change the displayed DAC value so the DVM reading is 176 mV L0 LEVEL Set the Sense EXT value by pressing EXT Use the knob or keypad to enter the DAC value for 1 45 GHz from the band sense voltage adjustment above Save the adjustment values by
337. f the spectrum analyzer The filename is in the form HP62Exxxxx where xxxxx is the last five digits of the spectrum analyzer serial number These data files are stored in the location listed as the system mass storage file location The default location is the location from where the program was loaded If the system mass storage file location is more than 37 characters the first 17 characters will be displayed followed by three periods and then followed by the last 17 characters m If you wish to change the system mass storage file location use the up down arrow keys to point to System mass storage file locaton and press CHANGE ENTRY You will then be prompted to enter a new mass storage file location m If the polling address or the mass storage file location were changed press QUERY DUT Executing a test m To execute a particular test adjustment or diagnostic function press the appropriate menu MENU to access a TAM test function softkey for example press T The Test Menu Adjustments Menu and Diagnostics Menu all function similarly A listing of all available TAM functions are given followed by the model number to which the ID string will be changed to execute that function and any limitations which apply to using that function For example selection 3 in the Diagnostics Menu reads 3 RF Path Fault Isolation HP8561E Checks upto 5 GHz If RF Path Fault Isolation is selected the ID string wi
338. ference Clock ee Mt ee 8 36 Clock and Sample Rate Generator o dock 8 37 Trigger 4 4 8 37 16 Bit Post Tu i o exp Bot a Ee ARM 6 38 15 Bit 32 K Circular Address Counts UN Re Er 8 38 Video Trigger Comparator 8 39 9 IF Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Be Be MOVE MER 9 3 Troubleshooting the Log Amplifier with TAM 9 4 Troubleshooting A5 with the LU PET 9 4 Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator with the TAM gt 5 4 ah a d 9 8 Automatic IF Adjustment 2 9 9 Parameters Adjusted um hb be Ee 9 10 Regue menis xu cues xbox Xu ee Bh we 9 11 Performance Test Failures 9 12 IF Gain Uncertainty Performance Test eee 9 12 Scale Fidelity Performance Test a 9 12 Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests 9 13 Log Amplifier P O A4 dh SS E 9 13 Log Amplifier Tx 9 13 Amplis s 245 Ee Eom cubo XR XL 9 14 Video Offset Ge ox 9 15 Video Output 9 16 Frequency Counter intus ut ke 9 16 AM FM Demodulator 2 sl s ee s s 9 16 AS KHz IE Fillets 13 9 BA Bee ee oe Bi 5 we SS 3 9 17 10 7 MHz IF
339. follows Center ITEQUCICY 300 M T 500 kHz Resolution bandwidth 100 kHz 1 dB Reference level adjust to place signal peak at top of the screen 3 Press PEAK search and MARKER DELTA and turn the knob clockwise to position the marker until the delta MKR reads 3 dB fO 1 dB 4 Press MARKER DELTA and move the marker to the other side of the peak until the delta reads 0 dB fO 1 dB 5 If the delta MKR frequency is between 90 kHz and 110 kHz the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth is working properly If the frequency is outside these limits read the following information on the A4 Cal Oscillator sweep generator If the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth works properly the cal oscillator sweep generator is failing to sweep its oscillator frequency at the correct rate The error is detected in sweeping on the skirts of the 100 kHz resolution bandwidth A properly operating sweep generator generates a series of negative going parabolas These parabolas generate the sweeps used to adjust resolution bandwidths of 10 kHz and below Check the sweep generator with the following steps Refer also to 300 Hz to 3 kHz resolution bandwidth Out of Specification in the A4 Cal Oscillator troubleshooting text in Chapter 9 IF Section 1 Remove the shields 2 Connect an oscilloscope probe to A4U804C pin 8 3 On the spectrum analyzer pres
340. frequency changes Sweeps that vary greater than 30 percent from the normal levels trigger error code ERR 581 or ERR 582 12 Press FULL IF ADJ When the display reads ADJUSTING IF 3 kHz press SINGLE on the HP 8566A B 9 34 IF Section 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Figure 9 17 illustrates normal operation Severe failures slope error greater than 30 percent and subtle 3 kHz resolution bandwidth errors less than 30 percent indicate a problem with A4U802 A4U803 A4U804 or A4U106 Severe failure of the bandwidth accompanied by subtle errors in the output signal indicate an A5 failure Set the HP 8566 B controls as follows Center requete te GRR Gee eek GER rne aL ep 0 a 10 710 MHz Resolution bandwidth 10 kHz Videobandwidth bake ee 1 kHz DWEOGD lic wat vos o ara d Qe de etus Ron ad eda qi edis 200ms On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press FULL ADJ When the message IF ADJUST STATUS 1 kHz RBW appears press SINGLE on the HP 8566 Figure 9 18 illustrates normal operation Severe failures slope error greater than 30 percent and subtle 3 kHz resolution bandwidth errors less than 30 percent indicate a problem with A4U802 U803 U804 or U106 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press FULL IF RDJ When the message IF ADJUST STATUS 300 Hz appears press SINGLE on the HP 8566
341. g as HSCAN is high Use the following procedure to troubleshoot unlocked loop problems or problems of locking to the wrong frequency by less than 1 MHZ 1 Check the two LEDs on frequency control assembly If either LED is lit the fractional N phase locked loop is not locked 2 The 10 MHz reference is required for fractional N operation It is divided by four to 2 5 MHz in the reference divider circuitry block AN It is used to lock the divided voltage controlled oscillator VCO frequency Check that the 10 MHz reference is present at A14J301 The 10 MHz reference is derived from the 600 MHz reference on the 15 RF assembly 3 Change the spectrum analyzer from the fractional N span to O0 Hz 4 Check the at 14 1 It should equal the value found by pressing CAL ORE REQ DIAGNOSE and RAW OSC FREQ 5 Check the tune voltage at R240 in function block AQ 6 Look up the expected problem area in Table 11 11 with the information from steps 4 and 5 Go to the appropriate troubleshooting steps 1 1 32 Synthesizer Section Table 1 1 1 1 Unlocked Fractional N Troubleshooting Areas Measured VCO Frequency Relative to Expected Value Measured expected Measured expected Measured not oscillating Tune Voltage About 3 3 Between 2 V About 11 V Above 12 5 V V Below 4 V VCO clamp VCO Divider or Divider or VCO clamp integrator integrator VCO clamp Divider or Divider or
342. g cables to avoid damage For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Place the Al6 FADC assembly into the center deck mounting slot nearest the left side frame Ensure that the Al FADC assembly is properly seated in the right end of the slot Secure the AI7 assembly and 16 assembly in Option 007 with the two flathead screws removed in step 18 under Removal See Figure 4 13 2 For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Connect the two mounting posts to the left side frame using the two screws removed in step 17 under Removal See Figure 4 13 1 Fold the 2 A3 4 and 5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer and secure the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 5 A2 4 and A5 Assemblies Assembly Replacement 4 27 Procedure 8 A7 through Assemblies A separate replacement procedure is supplied for each assembly listed below Before beginning a procedure do the following Fold out the and AI5 assemblies as described in Procedure 9 and 15 Assemblies m If the All YTO or AIO assembly SYTF or RYTHM is being removed also fold down the A2 4 and A5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5 2 4 and A5 Assemblies A7 First LO Distribution Amplifier Low Band Mixer A9 Input Attenuator 10 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM All YTO A 3 Second Converter Figure 4 14 illustrates the location of assemblies and major cable locations Note Use a to
343. g the Conditions File The information in the Conditions Menu may be stored for future use by pressing Store Conds A file named CONDITIONS is created on the disk specified by the system mass storage file location Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 7 Note CONDITIONS files used with the operation verification software for either the HP 8560 A B Series spectrum analyzers or the HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers are not compatible with the frequency response adjustment software If the software is stored on an HFS formatted hard drive the frequency response adjustment software and operation verification software should be in separate directories When running the frequency response adjustment program in the future set the system mass storage file location to read the disk where the CONDITIONS file is located and press Load If the CONDITIONS file resides on the default system mass storage file location the CONDITIONS file is loaded automatically the next time the program is run The default system mass storage file location is 700 1 For the HP 9000 Model 236 HP 9836 it is necessary to use an external disk drive The disk drive must support double sided format Getting to the Adjust Menu Once all necessary items in the Conditions Menu are selected you can run an adjustment by Appropriate power sensor data files are loaded m is checked for a response at each address m Serial and model number of
344. generator Frequency range 1 MHz to 200 MHz HP 8640B Frequency modulation mode HP 8642A Modulation oscillator frequency 1 kHz FM peak deviation 5 kHz Part of microwave workstation performance tests A adjustments M test amp adjustment module T troubleshooting operation verification 1 10 General Information Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment continued Instrument Counters Frequency standard Microwave frequency counter Universal counter Receivers spectrum analyzer Measuring receiver iensors ower sensor ower sensor Dower sensor Part of microwave workstation Output frequency 10 MHz Accuracy 1 X 10719 Frequency range 9 MHz to 7 GHz External frequency reference input Timebase accuracy aging 5 X 10 10 Modes frequency count Time interval measurement range 100 ns to 120 s Frequency count range 400 Hz to 11 MHz Frequency resolution 1 mHz Timebase accuracy aging lt 3 X 1077 month External 10 MHz reference input Frequency range 300 kHz to 7 GHz Amplitude range 70 dBm to 20 dBm Compatible w power sensors dB relative mode Resolution 0 01 dB Reference accuracy lt 1 2 Frequency range 10 MHz to 13 2 GHz Maximum SWR 1 40 10 to 30 MHz 1 18 30 to 50 MHz 1 10 50 MHz to 2 GHz 1 18 2 to 13 2 GHz Frequency range 250 MHz to 350 MHz Power range 100 nW to 10 W Maximum SWR 1 15 250 to 350
345. gnose Select Cal Troubleshooting Nude 2 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer disconnect W27 coax 3 from A5J5 and monitor the output of A5J5 with a second spectrum analyzer IF Section 9 7 Set the other spectrum analyzer controls as follows PAM Seu dre Lu cM LE 5 MHz Reference 2 2 E sd UE vibe Ala uu ated 20 dBm Center IfeqUenCy suvceuoediwesudeass seed tenn st 10 7 MHz On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer set the cal oscillator to 10 7 MHz by selecting A 25 dBm signal from A5J5 should be displayed If the signal is missing disconnect W52 coax 9 from A5J4 This is the cal oscillator signal input from the cal oscillator on the 4 assembly Connect the end of cable W52 to the input of the second spectrum analyzer The signal coming from cable W52 should be 35 dBm at 10 7 MHz If the cal oscillator signal from cable W52 is correct the A5 IF assembly is probably at fault Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator with the TAM 2 Enter the TAM Cal Osc Troubleshooting Mode On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer disconnect cable W52 coax 9 from A5J4 and connect this end of cable W52 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer connected to cable W52 to the following Sally AU Se D SA 5 MHz Refrence le
346. gram ROM A2U309 Checksum error of program ROM A2U310 Checksum error of program ROM A2U311 7 36 General Troubleshooting RAM Check Errors 711 to 716 711 RAM 0303 712 RAM U302 713 RAM U301 714 RAM U300 715 RAM U305 716 RAM U304 The instrument power on diagnostics check the program RAM This includes the two RAMs used for STATE storage If any STATE information is found to be invalid all data in that RAM is destroyed A separate error code is generated for each defective program RAM RAM is battery backed See State and Trace Storage Problems in Chapter 10 Controller Section Checksum error of system RAM A2U303 Checksum error of system RAM A2U302 Checksum error of system RAM A2U301 Checksum error of system RAM A2U300 Checksum error of system RAM A2U305 Checksum error of system RAM A2U304 Microprocessor Error 7 17 717 BAD uP Microprocessor not fully operational Refer to Chapter 10 Controller Section Battery Problem 718 118 BATTERY If STATE or TRACE data is found to be corrupt the processor tests the display RAMs and the program RAMs containing the STATE information If the RAMs are working properly this error message is generated To check the BT1 Battery and the battery backup circuitry refer to STATE and TRACE Storage Problems in Chapter 10 Controller Section Nonvolatile RAM not working check battery BT1 This error can also be generated if the battery has been disco
347. he A2 Controller assembly to the WR ENA position Set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center Jd6equelioy e aevo weed eue d sS vete cid MM E E On the HP 85623 press CAL MORE 1 OF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA PRESEE ADJ PRESEL OFFSET Connect a DVM to 1416 pin 13 Set the DAC to values from to 255 to yield DVM readings from 0 V to 10 V respectively Move the jumper on A14J14 from the NORM to the OPT position Connect the DVM to A14J16 pin 1 Press PRESEL SLOPE Set the DAC to values from to 255 to yield DVM readings from 0 V to 10 V respectively Move the jumper 1414 from the OPT to the NORM position On the HP 85623 press CAL and REALIGN LO amp IF Connect DVM to 1416 pin 3 Change the center frequency in 1 GHz steps and confirm that the voltage changes by 266 mV GHz Move the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 Controller assembly to the WR PROT position RF Section 12 15 5 RF Assembly Note The block diagrams for the and 15 assemblies are located in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section Confirming a Faulty Third Converter 1 Perform the IF Input Amplitude Accuracy performance test in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide This exercises most of the third converter 2 If the performance test fails perform the External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Proc
348. he RANGE MAO and MAI values for the sweep widths If a failure is indicated in the IF LOG CHECK press More Info to provide more detailed information about the detected failure If an HP IB printer 15 available connect it to the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer HP IB connector then press Print Page for a hard copy output 9 8 IF Section Table 9 3 Sweep Width Settings Sweep Width Sweep Time Res BW RANG MA1 MAO Adjusted A4U105 40105 40105 Pin 6 Pin2 Pill5 20 kHz 5 v OV OV 10 kHz 5 vy OV 5 v 4 kHz 5 v 5 V OV 2 kHz 5 V 5 v 5 v Automatic IF Adjustment The spectrum analyzer performs an automatic adjustment of the IF Section whenever needed The cal oscillator on the A4 assembly provides a stimulus signal which is routed through the IF during the retrace period The A3 Interface assembly measures the response using its analog to digital converter ADC The spectrum analyzer turns the cal oscillator off during a sweep When IF ADJ is ON the spectrum analyzer readjusts part of the IF circuitry during each retrace period to readjust the IF completely every 5 minutes Automatic IF adjustment is performed upon the following conditions m Power on unless STOP ALIGN is pressed The IF parameter variables are initialized to values loaded in program ROM and all possible IF adjustments are made If STOP ALIGN is pressed the adjustment is halted If REALIGN IF is selected possible IF adjustmen
349. he following settings and repeat step 30 PA OUDS 56 MHz sni ee 15dBm If the voltage monitored in step 30 is correct with a 0 dBm output but not with 15 dBm output suspect the limiting amplifier function block AE Place jumper A14J23 in the NORMAL position and reconnect W32 to 14 501 Check YTO FM coil driver and main loop error voltage driver steps 35 40 To troubleshoot the YTO FM coil driver refer to step 6 of first LO Span Problems 2 01 MHz to 20 MH2 Steps 36 through 40 verify that the YTO loop error voltage is reaching the FM coil The main loop error voltage driver has a gain of either 1 5 or 15 the analyzer firmware controls the gain during the locking process The error voltage is read by the ADC on the A3 interface assembly U324D calibrates out any offsets from true ground A14U326A inverts the sense of the YTO loop to lock the YTO on lower sampler sidebands YTO frequency sampler frequency X sampler harmonic The fractional N frequency indicated in the FREQ DIAGNOSE menu will be negative when locking to lower sidebands Refer to function blocks E M and of 14 frequency control schematic in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzers Component Level Information binder Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center nse di s 300 MHz Spd du sd ewer Lane 0 Hz
350. he left side frame and remove the posts See Figure 4 20 Remove two screws 2 securing the AI7 assembly and Al6 assembly in Option 007 to the left side frame Remove the two spacers non Option 007 Pull the AI7 assembly out of the spectrum analyzer For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Pull the Al6 assembly out of the spectrum analyzer Disconnect W7 W8 W9 AGA1W2 and A18W1 from the AI7 CRT driver assembly For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Disconnect all cables from the Al6 Fast ADC assembly L E a 51115 Figure 4 20 Al6 and AI7 Mounting Screws 4 40 Assembly Replacement Procedure 10 Al6 Fast ADC and 7 CRT Driver Replacement 1 Connect W7 W8 W9 A6A1W2 and A18W1 to the AI7 CRT driver assembly Place the assembly into the center deck mounting slot next to the CRT assembly 2 For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Connect all Al6 assembly cables as illustrated in Figure 4 21 which shows the left side frame removed so that proper Al6 assembly cable routing may be viewed Place the Al6 assembly into the center deck mounting slot nearest the left side frame 3 Secure the AI7 assembly and Al6 assembly in Option 007 to the left side frame using two flathead screws and two spacers in non Option 007 For Option 007 Attach the board mounts to the left side frame using two flathead screws 1 See Figure 4 20 4 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame 5 Fol
351. he model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware 7 24 General Troubleshooting 325 FREQ ACC 326 FREQ ACC 327 OFF UNLK 328 FREQ ACC 329 FREQ ACC YTO Loop Error 331 331 FREQ ACC Unable to adjust MAINSENSE to volts using the fine adjust DAC The coarse adjust and fine adjust DAC are used together to set MAINSENSE to 0 volts with the loop opened ERR 32 5 15 set if the fine adjust DAC cannot bring MAINSENSE to O volts This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Fine adjust DAC near end of range The fine adjust DAC is set to bring MAINSENSE to 0 volts ERR 326 is set if the fine adjust DAC value is set to less than 5 or greater than 250 This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Offset roller oscillator PLL is unlocked May indicate loss of 10 MHz reference The 10 MHz reference should measure greater than 7 dBm at A15J303 The ADC measures OF FSENSE at the beginning of each sweep and if the voltage is outside certain limits the offset oscillator pretune DAC is adjusted to bring OFFSENSE within the proper range ERR 327 is set if this cannot be accomplished This error i
352. he rear frame assembly replacement procedure described in Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel Removal Assembly Replacement 4 57 Replaceable Parts This chapter contains information on ordering all replaceable parts and assemblies Locate the instrument parts in the following figures and tables Table 5 l Reference Designations Abbreviations and Multipliers Table 5 2 Manufacturers Code List Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts Figure 5 1 Parts Identification Assembly Mounting Figure 5 2 Parts Identification Cover Assembly Figure 5 3 Parts Identification Main Chassis Figure 5 4 Parts Identification RF Section Figure 5 5 Parts Identification Front Frame Figure 5 6 Parts Identification Rear Frame Ordering Information To order a part or assembly quote the Hewlett Packard part number with check digit indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Hewlett Packard office The check digit will ensure accurate and timely processing of your order To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts table include the instrument model number the description and function of the part and the number of parts required Address the order to the nearest Hewlett Packard office Direct Mail Order System Within the USA Hewlett Packard can supply parts through a direct mail order system Advantages of using the system are as follows m Direct ordering and shipment from the HP Support Materials
353. his procedure does not adjust the short term stability or long term stability of the A21 10 MHz ovenized crystal oscillator OCXO Stability is determined by the characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed The spectrum analyzer must be on continuously for at least 24 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize 2 48 Adjustment Procedures 11 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO Non Option 103 SPECTRUM ANALYZER y Oo QO E 10 MHz IN OUT FREQUENCY STANDARD ELECTRONIC vor 909 0 55 Doo 200 00 00 90 n a QOO INPUT A 10 MHz OUTPUT BNC CABLE BNC CABLE BOTTOM SIDE VIEW ies OF MAIN DECK ADJ SK120 Figure 2 19 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup and Adjustment Location Equipment pd d LII LLLI HP 5334A B Frequency standard buxo ente HP 5061B Cesium Beam Standard or any 10 MHz frequency standard with accuracy lt 1 X 10719 Cable BNC 122 em 2 Te quired so es Ee du PRU S HP 10503A Procedure Note Failure to allow a 24 hour minimum warmup time for OCXO frequency and temperature stabilization may result in oscillator misadjustment 1 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 19 as follows a Press LINE to
354. hould change state two or more times within a 5 ms window If one or more DAC bits are not working correctly this will effect the entire display especially the diagonal lines that go from lower left to upper right When these lines are drawn both the X and Y DACs are stepped one count at a time A stuck bit will distort the diagonal in a repetitive manner The quicker the repetition the less significant the stuck bit Horizontal distortions apply to the X LINE GENERATOR DAC while vertical distortions apply to the Y LINE GENERATOR DAC The DACS have current outputs so they are not readily observable with an oscilloscope Continue with step 8 to observe the DAC outputs To break the effect of feedback in the line generators and to observe the output of the DACs short J201 pin 13 J201 pin 1 to TP3 GND to observe U201 pin 1 and TP2 U203 pin 1 and TP1 Continue with step 9 set an oscilloscope to the following settings Pompe scena RES AS E 5V div T ua wee EE RES RAUS des a E GU mi UI Ims div CODIO AC ducc xD A rpm External Trigger the oscilloscope on the signal at U207 pin 8 LBRIGHT The following waveforms should look like Figure 10 6 on the oscilloscope The top two traces are for the X line generator and the bottom two traces for the Y line generator X line generator U201 pin 1 TP2 Y line generator U203 pin 1 10 8 Controller Section 12
355. hould resemble Figure 12 5 6 If the ramp is not correct confirm the operation of the Main Coil Tune DAC and Sweep Generator Refer to Unlocked YTO PLL steps 36 through 40 and Sweep Generator Circuit in Chapter 11 Synthesizer Section 7 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings 5 GHz EL E UM M Et M E 0 Hz 8 Monitor 14 15 pin 3 with a DVM For a center frequency of 5 GHz the voltage should measure 1 33 Vdc f0 2 Vdc Use the following formula to calculate the voltage 0 25 V 315 pin 3 freq in GHz 0 078 V RF Section 12 13 1 00 300 1002 4E RU 9 9 9 e 42 44 4 DON 9 v o gt v v v eet ee ee ee WERF TCU IMEEM WEM sr ee 4 ee oe ee 9 9 9 99 93829228 9 s ef 9 P y te mmuagqeueccecsgsnsaasoexAm ptesce toevtssoavveviaadectcit c lsscctictitt neseoes 9 9 9 9 amp a 4 e 9 gt b P 4 5 b 9 Omm gt tes ttt 2 BON 5 X 9 o 9 W X 3 vs ew 99 wl
356. hrough 10 Peak Detector Reset Positive Negative Peak Detectors steps 3 through 10 Preselector Peaking Control Real Time DAC Ramp Counter Band Flatness Control RF Gain DACs Rosenfell Detector Keyboard RPG Problems Track and Hold Triggering Problems Variable Gain Amplifier VGA Video Filter Video Filter Buffer Amplifier Video MUX ADC Interface Section 8 5 Table 8 3 TAM Tests versus A3 Test Connectors Connector Manual Probe Measured Signal Lines Troubleshooting Test A3J 105 Video Input to Interface MSI Video to Rear Panel MS1 MS2 Video MUX MS1 MS3 LOG Offset LOG Expand MS1 MS3 Video Filter Buffer Amp MS3 55 OSI Video Peak Detectors MS5 MS6 ADC MUX MS6 Variable Gain Amplifier MS6 MS7 Track and Hold MS7 MSS A3J400 Revision Trigger ADC Start Stop Control Video Trigger DAC Real Time DAC 1 RF Gain DACs 8 8 ADC Interface Section Keyboard RPG Problems Keyboard Interface Refer to function block G of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information A pressed key results in a low on a keyboard sense line LKSNSO through LKSNS7 This sets the output of NAND gate 0607 high generating KBD RPG IRQ The CPU determines the key pressed by setting only one keyboard scan line LKSCNO through LKSCN5 low through U602 and reading the keyboard sense lines l If none of the keys or RPG responds check ribbon cable ALA1W1 This ca
357. hut down by a fault condition The kick start and its bias circuits provide power for the control circuitry during power up The kick start circuitry is an RC oscillator which emits a 200 ms pulse every 1 5 seconds These pulses switch current from the input rectifier through Q201 to charge C201 When the power supply is up a winding on T103 provides power to the control circuitry This voltage is high enough to keep Q201 turned Off l 2 Monitor the waveforms at TP206 and TP208 simultaneously on an oscilloscope If the signal at TP208 goes high before the signal at TP206 goes low an overcurrent condition has been detected Suspect a short in the secondary output rectifier voltage regulators or another assembly Do the first three steps of the Buck Regulator procedure of the Dead Power Supply section to check the primary 13 14 Display Power Supply Section Low Voltage Supplies I Connect the negative lead of the DVM to A6TP301 and verify the power supply voltages a Check A6TP302 for 15 Vdc b Check A6TP303 for 15 Vdc c Check A6TP304 for 28 Vdc d Check A6TP305 for 12 6 Vdc e Check A6TP308 for i 5 Vdc f Check A6TP307 for 5 Vdc If the voltages measured above are correct but the power supply LEDs on the A2 controller assembly are not lit check 1 If the voltages are low disconnect W1 from A6J1 and measure the test point voltages again Unless a dummy load is connected to the power su
358. ifferences between analog and digital display modes The displayed sweep time accuracy is adjusted in the fast zero span sweep adjustments SPECTRUM ANALYZER BNC CABLE VHF ATTENUATOR BNC CABLE SK12 A2 Figure 2 2 Display Adjustment Setup Equipment Step attentlalOf s En WR or a e e HP 355D Adapters Type IN OI OBNC f sets 1250 1476 Cables BNC 129 0 2 required e eR PEU elites Ceres sees tases HP 10503A Adjustment Procedures 2 15 2 Display Adjustment Procedure Note Perform the 16 MHz PLL Adjustment in this chapter before proceeding with this adjustment 1 Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold out the A2 controller and A3 interface assemblies as illustrated in Figure 2 2 Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT Adjustment locations are shown on the CRT neck for AI7 adjustments and in Figure 2 4 for the A2 adjustments Preliminary Adjustments 2 Set 17 55 X GAIN A17R75 Y GAIN A17R92 DDD A17R93 ASTIG A2R206 DGTL X GAIN A2R215 DGTL Y GAIN A2R262 STOP BLANK and A2R263 START BLANK to midrange Also set the rear panel X POSN Y POSN and TRACE ALIGN to midrange 3 Set A17R21 Z FOCUS A17R26 X FOCUS and A17R11 CUTOFF to midrange 4 Set 17 4 Z GAIN fully clockwise 5 Turn the spectrum analyzer on and allow it to warm up for at least 3 minutes A
359. igger circuitry is enabled by the ARM signal bit 1 of the fast ADC control word Once a trigger occurs the fast ADC cannot be triggered again until the ARM line goes low disarmed then high again armed The fast ADC is triggered by the HSWP line in FREE RUN LINE and EXE modes When VIDEO trigger is being used a synchronous digital video trigger signal VCLK is generated by PAL U1 block A and U17A block D ANAT tri gger ADC Interface Section 8 37 16 Bit Post Trigger Counter Refer to function block E of the Al fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The 16 bit post trigger counter controls the number of static RAM memory locations that will be written after the trigger occurs This counter consists of U19 U20 U21 U22 and U47 The counter is loaded from the CPU on the A2 controller assembly when the Al6 fast ADC assembly is in read mode The CPU loads the counter by first setting the LLOADPOST bit 7 of the fast ADC contro word and the LREADCLK bit 9 of the fast ADC control word to their low state The CPU then writes the 16 bit word to the fast ADC secondary address The rising edge of PCLK then latches the 16 bit data into the post trigger counter The post trigger counter begins counting upward in write mode on the first rising edge of PCLK after the LCOUNT signal from the trigger circuit goes low The frequency of PCLK is the programmed
360. in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed How to Use This Guide Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting can be used to identify the location of a problem to a board or functional area in the spectrum analyzer Chapters 8 through 13 which cover the functional areas can then be used to help you localize the problem further Once the faulty area is identified the adjustments and parts information located in chapters 1 through 6 is available to help you fix the problem This guide uses the following conventions Front Panel Key This represents a key physically located on the instrument This indicates a softkey a key whose label is determined by the instrument firmware Screen Text This indicates text displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen Documentation Outline HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide Tells you how to run verification software m els you the specifications of your spectrum analyzer m Tells you how to test your spec
361. ination Conductive floor mat and heel strap combination These methods may be used together or separately l 4 General Information Building Ground 1 MegOhm Resistor Building rist Strap Cord a J 1 MegOhm Resistor Strap FORMAT46 Figure Example of a Static Safe Workstation Reducing Potential for ESD Damage The suggestions that follow may help reduce ESD damage that occurs during instrument testing and servicing m Before connecting any coaxial cable to an spectrum analyzer connector for the first time each day momentarily ground the center and outer connectors of the cable g Personnel should be grounded with a resistor isolated wrist strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before removing any assembly from the unit m Be sure all instruments are properly earth grounded to prevent build up of static discharge General Information 1 5 Static Safe Accessories Table 1 3 Static Safe Accessories HP Part Description Number 9300 0797 Set includes 3M static control mat 0 6 m x 1 2 m 2 ft x 4 ft and 4 6 cm 15 ft ground wire The wrist strap and wrist strap cord are not included They must be ordered separately 9300 0980 Wrist strap cord 1 5 m 5 ft 9300 1383 Wrist strap color black stainless steel without cord four adjustable links and 7 mm post type connection 9300 1 169 ESD heel strap reusable 6 to 12 months Returning Instrument
362. incorrect troubleshoot the analog bus Correct inputs with bad outputs indicate a faulty U102 8 Check that the outputs of A3U111A A3U111B and A3U107A B C D are correct for their inputs The outputs should be high with noninverting inputs higher than the 1 4 V threshold voltage If a voltage drop is noticed across these components suspect A3CR109 3Q317B Since no dc current flows through any of the series resistances or FETS drain to source no voltage drops should occur 9 To return the spectrum analyzer to automatic sweep press SWEEP CONT SGL or PRESET Table 8 7 A3U102 Latch Outputs Video BW Pns Pint W RW XN 58 300 Hz L L L L 1 kHz L L L L H 3 kHz H L L L L 10 kHz L L L H L 30 kHz L H L L L 100 kHz L H L L H 300 kHz H H L L L 1 MHz L H L H L 3 MHz L L H L L Video Filter Buffer Amplifier Refer to function block W of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The video filter buffer amplifier provides outputs for video trigger positive and negative peak detectors and the analog zero span sweeps 30 ms The zero span video output is terminated in 500 ohms on the A2 Controller assembly The amplifier is a high input impedance buffer amplifier with a gain of one when properly terminated Current source U307C provides twice the current of Q316 Resistor R145 and current source U307D shift the dc level Resistor R260 terminates the peak de
363. ing this procedure The Sweep Tune Multiplier takes tune information YTO start frequency and sweep based on LO span and multiplies it so that it is correct for the appropriate YTF band C31 of the FAV Generator holds the YTF steady during retraces between multiband sweeps Switch U415C and R94 provide the YTF de hysteresis pulse A de hysteresis pulse is activated at the end of spans greater than 1 MHz In high band amplifier U402A provides an offset voltage to account for the 310 7 MHz offset U415A open between the desired harmonic of the YTO frequency and the center frequency In low band switch U415A is closed to account for the 3 9107 GHz first IF offset between the YTO frequency and the center frequency This signal is 0 5 V GHz of tuned frequency and is available at the rear panel 1 On the HP 85623 press PRESET and set the controls to the following settings Stabe MEJU Ney unused mud aD dite acad Macs dab bli os m lets SOP MGU Ny aod uua Goa ear eth o s 2 On the HP 85623 press AUX CTRL PEAR PANEL 3 Monitor the signal from the rear panel LO SWP FAV OUTPUT connector with an oscilloscope The waveform should resemble Figure 12 4 4 Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Stab dd 8 GHz SIO Pat COUCH CY Dad arr HEP 10 GHz 5 Monitor 1415 pin 1 with an oscilloscope The waveform s
364. inputs and cannot tolerate dc voltages on their inputs 9 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT rear panel of the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer through a 20 dB attenuator and dc block to the input of the HP 8566A B Set the sweep time of the HP 8566A B to 10 seconds 6 Set the HP 8566A B to single trigger and press TRACE A CLEAR WRITE Trigger a sweep of the HP 8566A B and the signal generator simultaneously The HP 8566A B shows the passband of the 4 8 kHz IF filters The 3 dB bandwidth of the filters should be 1 2 kHz The passband of the filters should be flat within 2 dB over 800 Hz 7 Reconnect W27 coax 3 to A4J3 10 7 MHz IF Filters l Press PRESET FREQUENCY 300 MHz SPAN 600 Hz CAL and IF amp 2 Disconnect W29 coax 7 from A5J3 Set the signal generator for a 10 7 MHz signal at 50 dBm and connect it A5J3 H OFF 3 Fine tune the frequency of the signal generator to center the signal on the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer display Set the signal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span about this center frequency 4 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press SGL SWP 5 Disconnect W27 coax 3 from A5J5 Connect a test cable from A5J5 to the input of an HP 8566A B IF Section 9 17 Set the HP 8566A B as follows Conter 10 7 MHz Pal eek a LEE ee 2kHz Rieletence eat el
365. inverting amplifier Digital control line ERRSGN from A14U313 pin 19 controls the polarity of this amplifier When ERRSGN is high positive sampler IF the amplifier has a positive polarity Synthesizer Section 11 23 In fractional N spans LO Spans lt 2 MHz the YTO remains locked to the sweeping fractional N PLL Thus the sampler IF must always equal the fractional N oscillator frequency conditions for lock Since the YTO must always sweep up in frequency for negative sampler IFs the fractional N oscillator must sweep from a higher frequency to a lower frequency This is necessary since an increasing YTO frequency decreases the sampler IF for negative sampler IFs The opposite is true for positive sampler IFs so in these cases the fractional N oscillator sweeps more conventionally from a lower frequency to a higher frequency Table 11 7 summarizes the amplifier polarities for the various combinations of sampler IF polarities and LO spans The YTO main coil filter is used to improve residual FM in FM spans See function block I of frequency control schematic in the Component Level Information binder Transistors Q304 and Q305 switch the filter capacitor C36 and resistor R48 into the circuit Transistor Q303 and U333 keep C36 charged during main spans so the frequency does not jump when C36 is switch in Table 1 1 7 Amplifier Polarities YTO Error ERRSGN Sign Amplifier A14U313 pin 19 Fractional N Positive Posi
366. ion The temperature compensated crystal oscillator TCXO is adjusted for a frequency counter reading of 300 MHz FREQUENCY STANDARD 10 MHz OUTPUT SPECTRUM 5 ANALYZER 5 2 BNC CABLE A15 RF Figure 2 20 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setup TCXO Equipment Microwave frequency counter HP 5343A Option 001 FREQUENCY Standard 2 aux cur eds HP 5061B Cesium Beam Standard or any 10 MHz frequency standard with accuracy X1 X 10719 Cables BNC 122 cm 2 required de AC ca dea HP 10503A Adjustment Procedures 2 51 12 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO Option 103 Procedure Note Allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes before performing this adjustment 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 20 Prop up the frequency control assembly 2 Set the frequency counter controls as follows S able Tte MUMMERS EIU UI ERU See oe ee oe pA e tran Midrange DE MUERTE 502 10 Hz 500 MHz 500 MHz 26 5 GHz switch 10 Hz 500 MHz PANEL 3 Press AUX CTRL REAR Note When the 10 MHz reference is set to 10 MHz EXT the TCXO is not operating and warmed up If the reference is set to 10 MHz amp 10 MHz INT and allow 30 minutes for the TCXO to warm up 4 Remove dust cap from A15U302 TCXO The dust cap is toward the rear of the spectrum analyzer 5 Adju
367. is responding over HP IB Press any key and follow the instructions in the next three prompts Data not accepted check entry format The data just entered was not valid Press any key and try again checking for the proper entry format DUT doesn t respond at address listed Program attempted to address the spectrum analyzer under test at the address listed but the spectrum analyzer did not respond Check the HP IB connections and the address listed 3 16 Frequency Response Adjustment Software File filename not found The filename of the power sensor data file entered could not be found on the currently specified system mass storage file location Check the filename and the system mass storage file location Insufficient equip to do test test number test name gt The required HP IB controlled test equipment for the test indicated is not available Press any key and choose another test No HP IB address listed for DUT Program attempted to address the spectrum analyzer DUT but no HP IB address was listed for it Press any key and enter an address for the spectrum analyzer Non numeric entry other than S entered or frequency lt 0 When entering a frequency of a frequency Cal Factor pair to be added edited or deleted the entry must either be a number greater than or S to store the current data No sensor file found for sensor model S N sensor serial gt A power sensor data file for the indicated powe
368. ise Problems Phase Noise in Locked versus rans Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Nene Fractional N PLL Phase Noise Sampler and Sampler IF Sweep Generator Circuit A2 OCXO 12 RF Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Low Band Problems High Band Problems Low and High Band Problems 7 LO Distribution Amplifier 8 Low Band Mixer A9 Input Attenuator Al3 Second Converter Al4 Frequency Control Assembly LODA Drive Control Latch for Band Switch Driver YTF Driver Circuit Al5 RF Assembly Confirming a Faulty Third Converter Confirming Third Converter Output Third Converter Nr Flatness Compensation Control Control Latches SIG ID Oscillator Option 008 10 MHz Reference 13 Display Power Supply Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Blank Display Using the TAM Blank Display Blanking Signal Display Distortion Focus Problems Intensity Problems A6 Power Supply Dead Power Supply Check the Supply Voltages Kick start Bias Buck Regulator Line Fuse Blowing Supply Restarting Every 15 Seconds Kick Start 11 38 11 38 1 39 11 40 11 41 11 43 1 1 43 11 43 1 1 44 11 44 1 1 45 11 46 11 50 12 2 12 4 12 5 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 11 12 11 12 12 12 13 12 16 12 16 12 16 12 17 12 18 12 18 12 19 12 20 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 13 13 13 13 14 13
369. it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware 7 22 General Troubleshooting 313 FREQ ACC Error in LO synthesis algorithm ERR 313 is set if a combination of sampler oscillator and roller oscillator frequencies could not be found to correspond to the required YTO start frequency Contact the factory This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware 314 FREQ ACC Indicates problems in the span calibration Troubleshoot any unlocks before attempting to troubleshoot span calibration problems because the loops must all lock in order to perform the calibration If LO spans greater than 1 MHz are correct check A14U114B 140115 A14U116 or A14Q101 This error message appears when the main roller oscillator sweep sensitivity is 0 A sweep ramp is injected into the locked main roller loop which should generate a negative going ramp on MAINSENSE ERR 314 is set if the slope of this ramp is Q This is an indication of an unlocked main roller loop or lack of a sweep ramp This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware 315 FREQ ACC
370. iver Refer to function block M of Al4 frequency control schematic 5 Check the state of the Main FM sweep switches as indicated in Table 11 15 6 The rest of the procedure troubleshoots the YTO FM coil driver Refer to function block M of Al4 frequency control schematic Table 11 15 Settings of Sweep Switches Switch Closed Open Closed Open 1 1 38 Synthesizer Section 7 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center edo xc errare ac ed icc dtd dora dead rus dif eh sati f etes aat hock sh jungs RT a On the spectrum analyzer press SAVE SAVE STATE STATE b Remove jumper A14J23 and connect a dc voltage source to A14J23 pin 2 Connect the voltage source ground to 14J23 pin 3 c Connect a microwave frequency counter or another spectrum analyzer to the spectrum analyzer first LO OUTPUT front panel output d Set the dc voltage source output for 0 Vdc and note the Ist LO frequency e Set the dc voltage source output for 10 Vdc The first LO frequency should momentarily increase approximately 4 15 6 MHz f The voltage at A14U332 2 should be approximately 19 of the voltage at A14J23 pin 2 g If the first LO frequency did not change in step e press to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect W10 from A14J3 h Place a jumper between A14J3 pins 9 and 10 Place a 50 3 watt resistor across A14J3 pins 5 and 6 resistor
371. ivider and the postscaler are preset at power on The PLL operates to produce an output frequency in the range of 60 MHz to 96 MHz selectable in 1 Hz increments The output frequency can be swept increasing or decreasing over a selectable 100 Hz to 2 MHz range To determine the fractional N frequency for any given center frequency press MORE 1 OF 2 FREQ DIAGNOSE and FRAC N FREQ The FRAC N FREQ frequency displayed is the frequency that will be measured at A14J 304 with the HP 85633 in zero span Confirming an Unlocked Condition 1 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center queat 300 MHz Sal vob mde dass bot obo pudet card i ti Ec d 0 Hz 2 Connect 14 304 FRAC TEST to the input of a synthesized spectrum analyzer and view the fractional N PLL output at 66 7 MHz Note If a synthesized spectrum analyzer is not available connect A145304 to the input of a 20 dB gain amplifier such as an HP 84473 Connect the output of the amplifier to the input of a frequency counter 3 If the fractional N oscillator measures a stable 66 7 MHz the fractional N PLL is probably locked 4 Check the two LEDs that are visible through the shield on 14 If either LED is lit the fractional N PLL is not locked 5 If either LED on is lit and no error message is displayed check FC MUX U305 Refer to function block AH of Al4 frequency control schematic 6 If neith
372. justment Corresponding Manual Adjustment Adjustment Number 1 IF bandpass LC poles IF bandpass adjustment 3 2 IF bandpass crystal poles IF bandpass adjustment 3 3 IF amplitude IF amplitude adjustment 4 4 Limiter phase DC log amplifier adjustments A4 limiter phase 5 5 Linear fidelity DC log amplifier adjustments A4 linear fidelity 5 6 Log fidelity DC log amplifier adjustments A4 log fidelity 5 7 Sampling oscillator Sampling oscillator adjustment 6 8 YTO YTO adjustment 7 9 LO distribution amplifier First LO distribution amplifier adjustment 8 10 Low band flatness Frequency response adjustment 9 11 High band flatness and YTF Frequency response adjustment 9 YIG tuned filter mixer adjustment 16 12 Calibrator amplitude Calibrator amplitude adjustment 10 13 10 MHz reference oscillator 10 MHz reference adjustment TCXO 12 Option 103 14 External mixer bias External mixer bias adjustment 15 External mixer amplitude External mixer amplitude adjustment These TAM adjustments are not compatible with the HP 85623 Either perform the manual adjustment or use the frequency response adjustment software described in Chapter 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software 2 10 Adjustment Procedures Table 2 5 Required Test Equipment for TAM Adjustment Equipment Used Requir Recommended Ew Model 1 IF bandpass LC poles 2 IF Bandpass crystal poles m Mm 3 IF amplitude Synthesizer level generator HP 3335A Test cable S
373. justment cannot be completed perform the steps located in Third Converter in this chapter 3 Perform the First LO OUTPUT Amplitude performance test Refer to the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide or use TAM functional test 4 If the performance test fails perform the LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment located in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If the adjustment fails set the HP 85623 to the following settings Center WIequeli6 y 300 MHz Sn Heats aha eee ers 0 Hz 5 Place the jumper A14J23 in the TEST position Remove W38 from the input of 7 6 Use a power meter or another spectrum analyzer to measure the output of All YTO The power should be between 2 dBm and 13 dBm 7 Reconnect W38 to 7 Place the jumper on 14J23 in the NORM position 8 If ERR 334 unlevelled output is present and the All YTO power output is correct the A7 drive circuit may be defective Refer to 7 LO Distribution Amplifier this chapter 9 Troubleshoot the signal path Refer to the power levels listed on Figure 12 8 HP 85623 RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram RF Section 12 5 10 Check Third Converter as follows a On the HP 85623 press and set the controls as follows Center a ae 300 MHz ear aa 0 Hz b Inject a 28 dBm 310 7 M
374. k and tip Connect the other end of the clip lead to the CRT shield assembly as shown in Figure 4 2 Hold the insulated screwdriver handle and slip the tip of the screwdriver under the rubber shroud of the AGA1WS post accelerator cable shorting the cable to ground through the CRT shield assembly See Figure 4 2 Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly slip the tip of the screwdriver under the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable rubber shroud and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly Pry out the black grommet protecting post accelerator cable A6A1W3 from the CRT shield assembly Carefully unsnap the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable from the CRT and discharge it by shorting the cable to chassis ground on the CRT shield assembly Assembly Replacement 4 5 Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT 15 Place the spectrum analyzer on its right side frame with the front frame assembly hanging over the front edge of the workbench 16 Fold out and 15 assemblies as described in steps 3 and 4 under Procedure 9 14 and 15 Assemblies Removal 4 8 Assembly Replacement Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT Warning The voltage potential at AGA1W3 is 9 kV Failure to discharge A6A1W3 correctly may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument SLIP PROBE UNDER RUBBER SHEATH GROMMET A6A1W3 1000 1 HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE CONDUCTIVE
375. k B of Al4 schematic Also the sum of the individual ramps is 10 V Figure 11 9 illustrates both sweep and the scan ramp for a 0 GHz to 13 2 GHz span with instrument preset conditions Synthesizer Section 11 41 rauaaejearererenrnejerearnaeedjearreaeredberrernr bebe bed 11 42 Synthesizer Section p ya Phase Noise Problems System phase noise can be a result of noise generated in many different areas of the spectrum analyzer When the spectrum analyzer is functioning correctly the noise can be observed as a function of the distance away the offset from the carrier frequency The major contributor to system noise can be characterized as coming from specific circuit areas depending upon the offset frequency Some very general recommendations can be made for identifying which circuitry is the cause of the noise at certain offsets The recommendations below apply with a center frequency of 1 GHz Carrier Frequency Major Contributor Offset when working correctly Reference OCXO or TCXO 600 MHz reference PLL Fractional N PLL 10 kHz to 150 kHz Offset lock loop or YTO loop 2150 kHz Phase Noise in Locked versus Unlocked Spans Input a signal to the spectrum analyzer Set the center frequency to the input signal frequency set the span to 2 MHz and plot the display This plots the system noise for a locked sweep Plot the display again with a span of 2 01 MHz lock and rol
376. l sweep The crossover point of the noise floor of the two plots is typically at an offset of about 50 kHz for a functioning instrument If the crossover point is shifted out to a higher offset frequency suspect the YTO loop circuitry If the crossover point is shifted in to a lower offset frequency suspect the offset or fractional N loop circuitry Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise If the problem seems to be in the frequency reference or reference PLL circuitry measure the noise with internal and external references If there is no difference suspect the circuitry associated with the SAWR A15U701 Synthesizer Section 11 43 Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noise If the spectrum analyzer has excessive noise at gt 1 kHz offset measure the noise with center frequencies of 100 MHz and 2 5 GHz If the measurements are equal suspect the fractional N circuitry and the YTO loop circuitry on the Al4 frequency control assembly If the measurements differ by 2 dB to 5 dB with the 2 5 GHz measurement at a higher noise level suspect the offset lock loop circuitry Fractional N PLL Phase Noise Check the noise on the 5 V regulators on 14 particularly the regulator in the reference divider circuitry A14U121 Refer to function block AN on the frequency control assembly schematic The noise level of the voltage regulator should be 1 mV The typical noise level is 40 RMS between 10 Hz and 100 kHz
377. laceable Parts Number D 0515 1622 5041 8906 1000 0897 0370 3069 4 N m 3030 0022 2950 0043 2190 0016 08561 00016 08563 00009 08563 00010 5060 0467 0590 1251 6960 0171 1250 1666 0515 2145 5062 4806 0905 1018 5021 5483 0515 0366 5022 0199 8160 0520 0535 0082 2190 0016 NA NON 0 99 CO BN OO KF o Parts List Front Frame Description SCREW SKT HD CAP M4 X 0 7 8MM LG CRT BEZEL RFI CRT FACEPLATE KNOB BASE 1 1 8 JGK 252 IN IO INCLUDES ITEM 5 SCREW SET 6 32 125 IN LG SMALL CUP PT NUT HEX DBL CHAM 3 8 32 THD 094 IN THK WASHER LK INTL T 3 8 IN 377 IN ID FRONT PANEL DRESS HP 85613 FRONT PANEL DRESS Standard HP 85633 FRONT PANEL DRESS Option 006 HP 85633 PROBE POWER JACK NUT SPCLY 15 32 32 THD 1 562 WD PLUG HOLE Opt 327 not shown ADAPTOR COAX STR F SMA F SMA SCREW MACH M3 X 0 5 8MM LG PAN HD TX BUMPER KIT Includes 4 bumpers O RING 126TD CATCHLATCH SCREW MACH M2 5 X 0 45 6MM LG PAN HD TX FRONT FRAME RFI ROUND STRIP STL MSH SIL RBR CU SN NVTM W LKWR M4 WASHER LK INTL T 3 8 IN 377 IN ID Mfr Code 28480 28480 28480 28480 00000 00000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 00000 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 28480 Mfr Part Number 0515 1622 5041 8906 1000 0897 0370 3069 DESCRIBE DESCRIBE 2190 0016 08561 00016 08563 00009 08563 00010 5060 0467 DESCRIBE 6960 0171 1250
378. lash ADC peak pit detection of the digitized video signal a 32 K byte RAM and the fast ADC control circuitry Video Input Scaling Amplifiers and Limiter Refer to function block L of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The video input scaling amplifiers help provide scaling 10 dB div 5 dB div 2 dB div or 1 dB div and buffer the flash video output When the GAINX2 control line is low switch U44D is open and switch U44C is closed Thus the scaled video at TP26 virtually follows the video input 0 1 V When the GAINX2 control line is high switch U44C is open and switch U44D is closed Amplifier U43 then provides a gain of 2 Vin 1 V Voltage clamp CR4 prevents the scaled video input to amplifier U45 from going more negative than 0 35 V or more positive than 1 25 V Note When measuring voltages or waveforms on the Al6 fast ADC assembly connect the ground or common lead to the ground plane trace on the 16 assembly This digital ground plane is totally isolated from the chassis 1 Press on the Option 007 spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows Centeri regun ades quss tube te o d Roco oia i Del e 300 MHz v MT 0 Hz level noises miim der PP VE dpi Robb 10 dBm Ree OS Sale bee Re 10 dB DIV aa eae we et AR reed 20 ms 2 Connect the CAL OUTPUT t
379. layed trace Record the slope DAC value below Slope at 12 16 GHz Set the HP 85623 center frequency and the HP 8340A to 4 0 GHz On the HP 85623 press CAL MORE 1 OF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA PRESEL ADJ then PRESEL SLOPE Key in the slope value noted in step 9 Repeat steps 6 through 11 until both SLOPE and OFFSET are peaked Adjust the OFFSET only at 4 0 GHz and the SLOPE only at 12 16 GHz a OFFSET Press to display OFFSET FOR BAND 2 Key in the offset value recorded in step 6 Adjustment Procedures 2 61 16 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Adjustment 14 Press PREV MENU STORE DATA and YES 15 Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR PROT position 16 On the HP 85623 press RECALL MORE 1 OF 2 FACTORY PRSEL PK SAVE then SAVE PRESEL PK 2 62 Adjustment Procedures 17 16 MHz PLL Adjustment 17 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Assembly Adjusted A2 controller assembly Related Performance Tests Sweep Time Accuracy Gate Delay Accuracy and Gate Length Accuracy Delayed Sweep Accuracy Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Option 007 Description The 16 MHz CPU clock is phase locked to the 10 MHz reference The output of the 16 MHz PLL loop integrator is adjusted for a clock frequency of approximately 14 4 MHz with the loop unlocked This ensures that the CPU will still function and the display annotation will be distorted but readable even if the 10 MHz reference to A2 1
380. ld look like those illustrated in Figure 10 10 If the waveform at J201 pin 14 is bad troubleshoot the Y line generator function block I of A2 controller schematic sheet 1 of 4 10 If the waveform at U210D pin 14 is bad troubleshoot the Z output circuit function block M of A2 controller schematic sheet 1 of 4 11 Remove the jumpers J201 14 02100 14 5 199 Figure 10 10 Delta Y Waveform Analog Zero Span Problems Non Option 007 1 On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN ZERO SPAN SWEEP 3 ms CAL MORE and CRT ADJ PATTERN 2 Set an oscilloscope to the following settings Amplitude Scale et beer beb esa eae 10 V div SWeep a Ims div dE dub ic ERR D m dpi do aT dt External 3 Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 LBRIGHT 4 The display should be similar to Figure 10 11 except that the untriggered trace should show at the left edge of the screen In these settings DEF1 causes switching between the line generators and the analog inputs sweep and video DEF1 remains high when the CRT adjust pattern is on Refer to function block M of the A2 controller schematic 1 of 4 5 The sweep input from Jl 41 should go from 0 V to 10 V the video In signal should go from about V to 1 V from the bottom to the top of the screen Apply a dc voltage to A2J4 Video In to t
381. le Correct shape but noisy If the signature resembles Figure 9 10 suspect the second crystal pole output amplifier Amplitude of Region B of Figure 9 11 varies more than 12 dB Suspect the third step gain stage output amplifier Region B of Figure 9 12 is kinked Suspect the fourth LC pole output amplifier 9 26 IF Section REF 10 0 dBm ATTEN2 0 dB CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SWP 5 0 0 VBW 300 kHz RES BW 300 kHz Figure 9 9 Noisy Signature REF 10 0 dBm ATTEN2 O dB CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SWP 500 sec VBW 300 kHz RES BW 300 kHz Figure 9 10 Noise with Correct Shape IF Section 9 27 REF 10 0 dBm ATTEN2 dB 5 dB SAMPLE CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN O H7 RES BW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 500 sec SK180 Figure 9 11 Region B Amplitude Variation REF 10 0 dBm ATTEN2 dB 5 dB SAMPLE CENTER 10 700 000 MHz SPAN RES BW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 500 sec SK181 Figure 9 12 Region B Amplitude Offset 9 28 IF Section 1 MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems Check the crystal shorting switches as follows 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press and set the controls as follows Resolution bandwidth 020452000055 20255062 1 MHz sey carta eee Ltd S00kHz Center TOUA iscing Este Sata 300 MHz 2 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer connect the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 5022 3 If the trace flatness is not within
382. le the reference frequency could be faulty If the integrator output voltage appears incorrect confirm that the pulses out of the phase detector 2 are attempting to tune the oscillator in the correct direction 3 If the phase detector output is bad check the inputs to the detector 3 One input should be higher in frequency than the other this should match the phase detector outputs Synthesizer Section 1 1 15 4 Confirm proper power levels for the signals at the input to the N dividers 4 the reference inputs 5 and 7 and the loop feedback path 6 Unlocked Reference PLL Operation The 600 MHz reference is generated by tripling then doubling the output of the 100 MHz phase locked loop If the 600 MHz reference is off frequency the 100 MHz phase lock circuitry is probably at fault If there is no signal present at A15J701 or if the level is less than 3 dBm the 100 MHz VCXO the tripler or the doubler circuitry has probably failed Refer to function blocks Q R and S of the AI5 RF schematic 08563 90071 08563 90072 or 08563 90073 sheet 2 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information binder Troubleshooting Check 100 MHz VCXO tripler and doubler steps 1 7 1 Using an active probe spectrum analyzer combination such as the HP 85024A HP 8566B measure the tripler output at A15TP700 The tripler output should be 3 dBm 2 dB 2 If the tripler output is within tolerance suspec
383. le in a 2 01 MHz LO span the narrowest FM coil span This drift is not noticeable in either free run or line trigger modes The sweep is generated by different oscillators in the synthesizer section depending on the desired span of the first LO this is not necessarily the same as the span setting of the analyzer due to harmonic mixing Refer to Table 11 13 for a listing of sweep signal destinations versus first LO spans Sweeping the fractional N oscillator results in sweeping the YTO FM coil There is a one to one relationship between the fractional N oscillator frequency span and the span of the first LO The fractional N oscillator sweep is generated digitally The oscillator is always synthesized rather than employing lock and roll tuning Table 11 13 Sweep Signal Destination versus Span First LO Span Sweep Signal Destination gt 20 MHz All YTO main coil 2 01 MHz to 20 MHz All YTO FM coil 2 MHz None Fractional N oscillator sweeps without a sweep ramp signal Determining the First LO Span The span of the first LO depends on the spectrum analyzer harmonic mixing number Use the following steps to determine the first LO span 1 Read the span setting displayed on the spectrum analyzer 2 Determine the harmonic mixing number from the information in Table 11 14 Table 11 14 Harmonic Mixing Number versus Center Frequency Center Frequency Harmonic Mixing Number 9 kHz to 2 9 GHz 2 75 GHz to 6 46 GHz 5 86 GHz
384. ler tuning sensitivity is not greater than 0 The MAINSENSE voltage is noted in a locked condition and the main roller is programmed to a frequency 400 kHz higher ERR 321 is set if the new MAINSENSE voltage is not greater than the previous MAINSENSE voltage This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Main roller pretune DAC value set greater than 255 During the LO adjust sequence the main roller is locked and then programmed to a frequency 1 6 MHz higher A new pretune DAC value is calculated based upon the main roller tuning sensitivity ERR 322 is set if this calculated value is greater than 255 This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Unable to adjust MAINSENSE close to volts using the coarse adjust DAC The coarse adjust and fine adjust DAC are used together to set MAINSENSE to 0 volts with the loop opened ERR 324 is set if the coarse adjust DAC cannot bring MAINSENSE close enough to 0 volts for the fine adjust DACs to bring MAINSENSE to exactly 0 volts This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with t
385. let it sweep Operation of the 50 ms to 2 000 second range will be described using a 50 ms sweep time as the example For a 50 ms sweep time Q1 shorts out C16 The D to A converter U307 has zero output current U334A is a buffer with zero offset because there is no current coming out of U307 The buffering of U334 makes the base emitter voltages on and Q3B the same These two transistors are matched so their collector currents should be identical when their base emitter voltages are identical The emitter current of Q3B is 200 therefore the emitter current of is 200 yA and the sweep ramp is generated by C14 The sweep time is given by the formula AV sweeptime capacitance C 14 current The DAC setting is increased for longer sweep times This increases the current sunk by the DAC output U307 pin 4 which increases the emitter voltage on Q3A decreasing the base emitter voltage drop Q3A acts as an exponentiator and reduces its collector current creating a slower sweep ramp For the shorter sweep times 50 to 30 ms Q1 is opened putting Cl6 in series with C14 This changes the effective capacitance from 1 pF to 1 000 pF or a reduction of 1 000 to 1 11 46 Synthesizer Section The HSCAN signal uses Q2 to reset the ramp Q2 shorts the integrator and sets its output nominally to ground e gt ED A a a ER 14 FREQUENCY CONTROL ASSEMBLY
386. ll be changed to HP8561E When the diagnostic is run it will only check the RF path up to 5 GHz a frequency approximately in the middle of the highest band of the HP 85613 Move the pointer to the desired function and press SELECT The display will indicate the spectrum analyzer serial number the function selected and the new ID string to be sent to the analyzer Press WRITE NEW ID spectrum analyzer power the new ID string is only read from EEROM at power up General Troubleshooting 7 11 After the power on self realignments are complete press PASS CONTROL This removes the computer as being the active controller on HP IB permitting the TAM to be the active controller The TAM functions are now available and are listed along with any limitations For example if Automatic Fault Isolation were selected from the Diagnostics Menu the ID string would be changed to HP8561E For an HP 85613 all TAM diagnostics can be used on an HP 85623 except for Manual Probe Troubleshooting You can now execute any of the TAM functions listed without further computer interaction Press RESUME CONTROL to execute an unlisted TAM function This changes the ID string in EEROM back to HP8562E and shows the complete menu of available TAM functions Note The analyzer will always behave like the model number emulated from the last TAM function even though the ID string in the EEROM was changed back to HP8562E The analyzer will not rever
387. locks Entries for Operator Test Conditions and Other Comments are optional To make or to change an entry move the pointer to the line where the entry is to be made or changed Press Change Entry and type in your new entry Entries for Operator Test Conditions and Other Comments can be up to 37 characters long but only the first 25 characters of the Operator entry are printed on the test record System Mass Storage File Location Calibration factor data for different power sensors and a customized set of conditions may be stored on disk The mass storage unit specifier msus for the disk containing this information should be entered as the system mass storage file location Refer to the BASIC Operating Techniques Manual for information on the syntax of the msus The software allows a system mass storage file location with more than 37 characters though only the first and last 17 characters will be displayed The frequency response adjustment program disk comes write protected from the factory If you want to use this disk for storing your power sensor and conditions data files it is necessary to disable the write protect mechanism Note A double sided disk drive must be used The frequency response adjustment software will not fit on a single sided formatted disk Power Sensors The frequency response adjustment program supports two models of power sensors but only one model is necessary to run all the tests The HP 8481A is the pr
388. loops PLLs in the synthesizer section lock Some oscillators are checked to ensure that they will lock outside their normal operating frequency range The TAM also performs an operational check on several DACs in the synthesizer section RF Low Band Check The TAM tests the operation of the A8 low band mixer the A9 input attenuator the 10 YIG tuned filter mixer RYTHM the second IF distribution the third converter A15 and most of the AI3 second converter AFI also checks the flatness compensation amplifiers part of the 15 RF assembly ensuring that their gain can be adjusted over a certain range If no signal is detected through the RF section AFI will substitute the 298 MHz SIG ID oscillator if present for the third LO while simultaneously decreasing the first LO frequency by 2 MHz If a signal can now be detected troubleshoot the third LO driver amplifier on the 15 RF assembly Manual Probe Troubleshooting Manual probe troubleshooting probes the instrument test connectors to perform the following types of measurements m Amplifier and oscillator dc current draw by monitoring the voltage across a resistor of known value m Oscillator tune voltages ensuring proper operation of phase frequency detectors and loop integrators g Static bias voltages g DAC output voltages If probing a connector for a check yields a FAIL indication select the desired check using either the knob or step keys and press M re Info
389. lses are 6 apart The remaining divisions shows character mode VECTOR pulses 3 us apart The BLANK pulses are synchronized to the VECTOR pulses by U214B The fourth trace shows the double pulses which delay the leading and trailing edges of the blanking pulses 6 Set the oscilloscope to the following settings to expand the first and fourth traces This displays how the rising edges of U213 13 determine the transitions of the blanking pulses See Figure 10 4 P OHNE OI PCM 4 V div OSEI eo RC b S dto pai diede 2 5 V SWEEP TMG ur etapa x a ees ence 2 ps div Delay MOM EH DOT uro Sois dose e ee ee au VE d doe ebd b d d e ee es 96 us ds ered bend External 4 00 V div 2 50 V 20 0 us div 0 000 s RR PARA wen un PLAS Ju AYCA BS rmmmmmmoo mer VECTOR SUL 0213 13 SK192 Figure 10 3 Blanking Waveforms 1 O 6 Controller Section 4 00 D us div 96 00 us U213 13 BLANKING SK193 Figure 10 4 Expanded Blanking Waveforms Display Jumbled or Trace Off Screen Refer to function blocks D and I of A2 controller schematic diagram sheet 1 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The two line generators are identical circuits so the following steps apply to both The X generator is referenced below
390. lter troubleshooting 8 17 video functions 7 49 video gating problems 8 9 video MUX troubleshooting 8 16 9 21 video offset troubleshooting 9 15 View Edit softkey 3 12 voltage tuned oscillator 1 1 33 Index 6 W W1 power cable connections 13 2 W3 line switch cable removal 4 48 replacement 4 52 warmup time frequency response adjustment software 3 3 wire assembly cables 5 7 write protect enable jumper 7 6 Y YIG tuned filter mixer 7 44 removal and replacement 4 34 YIG tuned filter mixer adjustment 2 60 YIG tuned oscillator adjustment 2 37 YTO 7 44 adjustment 2 37 FM coil span problems 11 38 main coil span problems 11 38 phase noise 11 44 removal and replacement 4 35 sweeping 1 24 troubleshooting 1 1 1 1 YTO PLL 7 46 unlocked 1 1 23 Z zero span problems 10 12
391. lues and the preselector peak DAC values are stored in EEROM Note Front End Cal refers to the HP 8481A or 8485A power sensor as the Channel B Power Sensor even if a single channel power meter such as an HP 436A or 8902A is being used If an HP 8485A Power Sensor is used it must have a calibration factor at 10 MHz Standard HP 8485As have calibration factors down to only 50 MHz 3 14 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Front End Cal YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM and Frequency Response Adjustment BNC CABLE SYNTHES I ZED 10 MHz SPECTRUM SWEEPER REF OUTPUT ANALYZER 10 MHz REF IN OUT 4 u 299 2566 00 CABLE POWER SPLITTER MEASURING RECEIVER POWER SENSOR noanon 090000 Q SENSOR ooo 7000 maoamoogo 000 sli32e Figure 3 1 Front End Cal Adjustment Setup Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 15 Frequency Response Adjustment Error Messages The frequency response adjustment software displays prompts and error messages on the computer display Error messages are preceded with ERROR For more information on prompts refer to Program Operation in this chapter The following error messages are listed in three groups messages beginning with alphabetic characters those beginning with numeric characters and others beginning with variables such as filenames or instrument model numbers If
392. mand GRT DSP are not valid arguments for this command Argument can only be used with PLOT command PWRON is not a valid argument for this command Argument can only be used with FDIAG command Query expected for FDIAG command No preselector hardware to use command with Invalid COUPLING argument expected AC or DC ADC Errors 200 to 299 200 201 OYSTEM SYSTEM These errors are directly related to the ADC interface section Suspect a faulty A2 controller interface assembly or 16 fast ADC FADC assembly Option 007 Errors 202 through 207 apply only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 ADC driver ADC hardware firmware interaction check for other errors ADC controller ADC hardware firmware interaction check for other errors General Troubleshooting 7 19 202 FADC 203 FADC 204 FADC 205 FADC 206 FADC 207 FADC CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL 250 OUTOF RG 29l NOTRO Binary search failed during FADC linear offset calibration This error applies only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 Binary search failed during FADC log offset calibration This error applies only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 Binary search failed during FADC log expand offset calibration This error applies only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC Option 007 Slope derivation failed during FADC linear offset calibration This error applies only to spe
393. mation on removing the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and accessing all internal assemblies Adjustment Procedures 2 3 Table 2 1 Related Adjustments Assembly Changed Perform the following related adjustments in the order listed or Repaired Number 1 1 keyboard No related adjustment A1A2 RPG No related adjustment A2 controller 16 MHz PLL adjustment Display adjustment f EEROM from old A2 controller could not be used in new A2 or if EEROM must be replaced also perform the following adjustments LO distribution amplifier adjustment External mixer amplitude adjustment YIG tuned filter mixer adjustment Frequency response adjustment A3 interface Display adjustment fast zero span Frequency response adjustment A4 log amp cal osc Display adjustment Fast Zero Span Demodulator adjustment F amplitude adjustment DC log amplifier adjustment A5 IF F bandpass adjustment F amplitude adjustment A6 power supply High voltage power supply adjustment Display adjustment 1 HV module High voltage power supply adjustment Display adjustment 7 switched LO LO distribution amplifier adjustment distribution amplifier Frequency response adjustment or perform the frequency response performance test in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Calibration Guide The adjustment must be performed if the performance test fails 2 4 Adjustment Procedures Table 2 1 Related Adjustments continued Assembly Changed
394. mbly down converts the 310 7 MHz IF to 10 7 MHz A third conversion on the A4 log amplifier assembly down converts the second IF to the 4 8 kHz third IF used only in the digital resolution bandwidths X100 Hz A7 SLODA The A7 SLODA switched LO distribution amplifier levels the output of the All YTO and distributes the power to the front panel First LO OUTPUT 8 low band mixer AIO YIG tuned filter mixer and A15U100 sampler The leveling circuitry is on the Al4 frequency control assembly A8 Low Band Mixer 8 low band mixer is ac coupled and contains a limiter The high band mixing is done in the AIO YIG tuned filter mixer A PIN diode switch in AIO directs the RF input to the appropriate mixer A PIN diode switch in A7 SLODA directs the first LO to the appropriate mixer Low band mixer power is provided by the frequency control assembly General Troubleshooting 7 43 A9 Input Attenuator The attenuator is a 50 precision coaxial step attenuator Attenuation in 10 dB steps from O dB to 70 dB is accomplished by switching the signal path through one or more of the three resistive pads The attenuator automatically sets to 70 dB when the spectrum analyzer turns off providing ESD protection Note that the input attenuator is not field repairable A fourth attenuator section switches a blocking capacitor in and out A10 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer The YIG tuned filter mixer RYTHM is a combination of an RF switch a high band mi
395. milliseconds b Using an oscilloscope check for activity at pins 1 and 3 of A3U615A c If there is activity at pin 1 but not at pin 3 of A3U6154A suspect A3U616 or 30617 d If there is activity at pin 1 and pin 3 of A3U615A suspect A3U615 Check pin 5 for activity 11 If there is a problem with Video Gating proceed as follows a Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer as follows GF Vue 300 MHz este ee cork hee 0 Hz SWeep UMC PP OS tee totes 150ms OFF until ON is underlined b Press TRIG R TERRI C Press GATE DLY E 1 10 milliseconds then press GATE LEN E 4 30 milliseconds d Connect a pulse function generator such as an HP 8116 to provide a 5 V peak to peak square wave TTL level to the spectrum analyzer rear panel EXT GATE TRIG INPUT and also using a BNC tee to the channel 4 input of the oscilloscope HP 54501A e Set the pulse function generator to NORMAL mode with a duty cycle of 50 and a frequency of 10 Hz 8 10 ADC Interface Section f Press the following keys on the oscilloscope CLEAR DISPLAY 12 3 4 offon highlight CHANNEL 1 on set V div to 0 2 V and offset to 0 6 V 10 1 probe used highlight CHANNEL 4 on set V div to 2 V and offset to 0 V EEE M E TEE highlight norm g Using a 10 1 probe connected to channel 1 of th
396. monic of the sampling oscillator The mixing product the sampler IF is between 60 and 96 MHz same frequency range as the fractional N PLL 7 46 General Troubleshooting Offset Lock Loop part of A15 The 285 MHz to 297 2 MHz sampling oscillator is used to sample the YTO The frequency can be changed by changing the programmable dividers of the offset lock loop FRACTIONAL N isrLO OUTPUT 15 6 77 bel 2 3 0 6 81 cuz e 24 eio ies OFFSET LOCK LOOP 285 297 MHz 10 MHz ocxo spite Figure 7 5 Phase Lock Loops Fractional N PLL part of A14 The fractional N PLL produces an output of 60 MHz to 96 MHz This PLL output serves as the reference frequency for the YTO PLL one to one relationship in frequency tracking exists between the fractional N PLL and the YTO A change of 1 MHz in the fractional N PLL will produce a 1 MHz change in the YTO frequency General Troubleshooting 7 47 IF Section The IF section processes the 10 7 MHz output of the RF section and sends the detected video to the ADC interface section The following major assemblies are included in this section A3 interface assembly A4 log amplifier calibration oscillator assembly 5 IF assembly The spectrum analyzer uses trace data manipulation to generate the 5 dB DIV scale from the 10 dB DIV scale The A3 interface assembly amplifies and offsets the 10 dB DIV video to generate the
397. mplifier on the A4 assembly and LOG dB DIV To check the Address and Data Lines place a jumper from A3TP1 and A3TP2 to A3U406 pin 20 5 V Check that address lines 0 through A7 and data lines DO through D7 are all TTL high If any address or data line is low press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off and disconnect the W2 control cable from A3J2 Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer on Ignore any error messages 8 28 ADC Interface Section 13 14 15 16 17 Check that address lines 0 through A7 and data lines DO through D7 are all high If all address and data lines are high suspect a fault either in W2 or one of the other four assemblies which connect to W2 If any address or data line is low check the appropriate input of either U405 data lines or U406 address lines If a data line input is stuck low check the data bus buffer If an address line input is stuck low check A3W1 and the A2 controller assembly If the appropriate input is high or toggling between high and low suspect a failure in either U405 data lines or U406 address lines Remove jumpers Analog Bus Timing Refer to function block P of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Analog bus timing ABT generates the strobes for the A4 A5 14 and 15 assemblies The Al4 frequency control assembly also requires a qualifier for its strobe LVFC E
398. n perform the Frequency Span Accuracy performance test and if necessary the YTO Adjustments procedure 9 16 IF Section 2 If an FM signal cannot be demodulated perform the Demodulator Adjustment procedure If the output of A4C707 cannot be adjusted as described in the Demodulator Adjustment procedure troubleshoot the FM Demodulator or Audio MUX circuits on A4 4 8 kHz IF Filters Refer to function block N of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Problems with the 4 8 kHz filters can result in spurious signals appearing 2 88 kHz to 3 52 kHz above the frequency of the desired response Also ERR 536 RBW 300 may occur when problems exist with the 4 8 kHz IF filters Measure the passband of the 4 8 kHz IF filters as described in the following procedure 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press CAL IF ADJ OFF SPAN and 600 Hz 2 Disconnect W27 from A4J3 and inject a 10 7 MHz signal of 20 dBm into A4J3 3 Fine tune the frequency of the signal generator to center the signal on the screen Set the signal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span about this center frequency Press on the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer 4 Set another spectrum analyzer such as the HP 8566A B to 4 8 kHz center frequency and 2 kHz span Caution If a dc block is not used damage to the HP 8566A B results The HP 8566A B and many other spectrum analyzers have dc coupled
399. n Fractional N PLL Frequency Span Accuracy Problems Determining the First LO Span Confirming Span Problems YTO Main Coil Span Problems LO Spans gt 20 MHz YTO FM Coil Span Problems LO Spans 2 01 MHz to 20 MHz Fractional N Span Problems LO Spans lt 2 MHz First LO Span Problems Spans First LO Span Problems Multiband Sweeps Synthesizer Section 1 1 1 Phase Noise Problems Phase Noise in Locked versus Unlocked Spans Reference versus Reference PLL Phase Noise Fractional N versus Offset PLL or YTO PLL Phase Noise Fractional N PLL Phase Noise Sampler and Sampler IF Sweep Generator Circuit A2 OCXO Caution Caution All of the assemblies are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge ESD For further information regarding electrostatic cautions refer to Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 General Information Using an active probe such as an HP 850248 with a spectrum analyzer is recommended for troubleshooting the RF circuitry If an HP 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer such as the HP 8566A B or HP 8569A B having dc coupled inputs either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor HP 11240B between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input Some spectrum analyzers can be set to ac coupled Failure to do this can result in damage to the analyzer or the probe Troubleshooting Using the TAM Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting f
400. n TTL high and low levels 7 Connect an oscilloscope probe to A15U902 pin 7 LRDIR and the probe ground lead to A15J901 pin 6 The signal measured controls the flatness compensation circuit 8 On the HP 85623 press PRESET and set the SPAN to 1 MHz 9 Set the oscilloscope for the following settings 2 V div 5520 ated aei ata quicquid ataca aad dus 20 ms div 10 The waveform should be at a TTL high during part of the retrace period and a TTL low during the sweep about 50 ms SIG ID Oscillator Option 008 Refer to function block F on 15 RF Section Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information SIG ID 1 available only with Option 008 The SIG ID Oscillator provides a shifted third LO approximately 298 MHz to distinguish true signals from false signals such as image or multiple responses When the HP 85623 is set to SIC ID ON the SIG ID Oscillator turns on during alternate sweeps 1 Set the HP 85623 to the following settings qq Vv EE EE Vs LIORUM single sweep SICE bacs sd ae eee ie on 2 Use an active probe with another spectrum analyzer to measure the signal level at A15X602 3 On the HP 85623 press 561 swP With each press of SGL SWP the analyzer alternates between the following two states State 1 A15J901 pin 13 LSID TTL low
401. n on the label of the 1 HV module If necessary perform the High Voltage Power Supply adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures 5 If the DVM does not read approximately 110 Vdc measure the voltage on A6U401 pin 10 This is the LHVSHUT DOWN signal and should be near 5 Vdc 6 If LHVSHUT DOWN is low suspect a bad connection along W8 between the power supply and the Al7 CRT driver 7 If LHVSHUT DOWN is correct connect an oscilloscope to A6TP402 Connect the scope probe negative lead to TP401 Set the oscilloscope to the following settings 10 us div Von RECS 10 V div 8 A nearly sinusoidal waveform greater than 30 Vp p with an approximately 4 18 Vdc offset should be observed 9 If the waveform is a dc voltage near 0 Vdc with narrow positive and negative going pulses the A6A1 HV module is faulty If the waveform is a dc voltage near 18 Vdc with narrow positive and negative going pulses connect the probe to TP403 10 If the waveform at TP403 is a sawtooth waveform with a 1 8 V amplitude the AGA1 HV module is faulty 11 If TP403 waveform has pulses similar to those on TP402 the power supply is probably faulty CRT Supply Dropping Out See function block K of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component level information binder The CRT supply is a separate switching supply which provides the 110 Vdc for the Al7 CRT driver from a winding on the AGA1
402. nce MS1 MS2 LODA drive MS5 MS6 MS7 MS8 Main coil tune DAC MS3 Second converter PIN switch A14J18 14 19 Second converter mixer bias Second converter drain bias Second converter doubler bias Second converter driver bias First mixer drive switch First mixer drive DAC A143302 Revision MS7 Fractional N out MSI Divided reference MS4 Feedback buffer bias MS5 Outamp bias MS6 1 6 Synthesizer Section Table 11 3 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors continued Connector A15J200 A15J400 A155502 A15J602 15 901 Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Positive 15 volt supply Sampler drive buffer bias Sampling oscillator bias Offset lock drive buffer OFL error voltage Negative 10 volt supply Offset lock loop BW DAC Positive 15 volt supply Offset lock RF buffer IF AMP limiter bias Offset lock loop buffer D Offset lock loop buffer C Sampler bias test Positive 15 volt supply Third LO tune voltage Offset lock loop buffer 600 MHz oscillator bias Calibrator AGC amp bias Calibrator ampl adj 3rd LO driver amp Positive 15 volt supply Flatness compensation 3 Flatness compensation 2 Flatness compensation 1 SIG ID collector bias RF eain control test Revision External mixer switch signal ID switch Ten volt reference External mixer bias Measured Signal Liner MSI MS2 MS3 MS4 MS6 MS8 MS5 MS7 MS8 MS2 MS3 MS4 MSS MS6 MS7 MS1 58 58 MS2 MS5 MS6 MS7 MS1 MS3 MS3 MS1
403. ncorrect refer to Interface Strobe Select in this chapter 8 12 ADC Interface Section Flatness Control RF Gain DACs Refer to function block M of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information RF Gain DACs control the 15 assembly flatness compensation amplifiers The RF Gain DACSs are arranged so that the output of one DAC is the voltage reference for the other DAC This results in an RF GAIN voltage which is exponentially proportional to the DAC settings Each DAC is set to the same value The 15 RF assembly converts the RF GAIN signal to a current for driving the PIN diode attenuators in the Flatness Compensation Amplifiers The exponentially varying voltage compensates for the nonlinear resistance versus current characteristic of the PIN diodes 1 Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR ENA position 2 Press CAL MORET OF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA FLATNESS andFLATNESS DATA Press NEXT BAND until FLATNESS BAND 0 is displayed 3 Press the A key until DATA 300 MHz is displayed Note the number directly below DATA 300 MHz this is the RF Gain DAC value 4 Connect a positive DVM lead to A3J400 pin 13 and the negative DVM lead to A3TP4 5 Check that the DVM reading increases from near 0 Vdc to between 1 3 and 1 9 Vdc as the RF Gain DAC setting is increased from to 4095 6 If the DVM re
404. nd 2 MHz The routine restarts from the beginning if a fault is detected Parameters adjusted after the routine begins but before the fault is detected are correct parameters adjusted later in the sequence are suspect Refer to Automatic IF Adjustment in Chapter 9 IF Section The IF Section relies on the ADC and video circuitry to perform its continuous IF adjustments IF related errors occur if the ADC video circuitry or A4 assembly linear path is faulty Unable to adjust amplitude of resolution bandwidths less than 300 Hz Unable to adjust amplitude of 300 Hz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 1 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of 3 kHz resolution bandwidth 7 26 General Troubleshooting 404 AMPL 10K Unable to adjust amplitude of 10 kHz resolution bandwidth Errors 405 to 416 When these 10K resolution bandwidth RBW error messages appear use the following steps to check for errors 581 or 582 1 Press LINE to turn spectrum analyzer off 2 Press to turn spectrum analyzer on and observe the lower right hand corner of the display for 10 seconds 3 If ERR 581 or ERR 582 appears the fault is most likely caused by the cal oscillator Refer to errors 581 and 582 4 If ERR 581 or ERR 582 does not appear troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly Multiple IF errors during IF adjust If a FULL IF ADJ sequence pressing CAL and FUEL IF ADJ results in IF errors while displaying IF AD
405. nd D to Attenuate Position Active High Section D of the input attenuator is a dc blocking capacitor which is switched in or bypassed by the LDC D and LAC D control lines RF Section 12 23 HP 9562E HP 8562E RF SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM Freq ist IF Freq Band GHz Harmonic MHz O Low 2 9 3910 1 2 9 6 46 310 2 6 46 13 2 310 1 2 A10 YIG TUNED FILTER MIXER 1 A9 INPUT ATTENUATOR u 13 2 GHz 310 7 MHZ Fe 20dB 40dB 10dB W43 O AA O O AA O J2 J3 we ii gt lt E cr J E J L zm el 28V LDC LAC L20dB 20dB L40dB 40dB L10dB 10dB W16 D D C C B B A A 2 7 6 BIAS CONTROL FROM 1 9 HIGH BAND PATH 3 0 6 8 GHz 13 to 16 dBm HIGH BAND i 2 i 50 Hz 2 9 GHz 21 dBm W11 SIGNAL LEVEL RANGE dBm NOTE 1 LOW BAND LOW BAND PATH ATTENUATOR DRIVE poc jz 57 FROM 1446 L1 FL2 3 0 6 816 2 42 Wis J4 14 5 to 18 5 dBm Oxy 22 411 i le Os lt 2 gt gt Mis 25 i ONO 3 9107 GHz 1 1 4 4 7 SLODA KEY NTE 600 MHz DRIVE E 2 LO IN BW H BAND FROM A15J701 NC 3 m W38 1 13 to 16 dBm 5VF i gt lt LO BAND LOW BAND YTO DRIVE MAIN COIL 3 0 6 81GHz
406. nd does not have enough arguments Unrecognized command Command cannot have frequency units Command cannot have time units Command cannot have amplitude units Unrecognizable units Command cannot have numeric units Enable parameter cannot be used UP DN are not valid arguments for this command 7 16 General Troubleshooting 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 20 122 130 1 31 122 1393 134 135 130 057 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 NOP ONOF NOP ARG NOP TRC NOP ABLK NOP IBLK NOP STRNG NO BAD DTMD PK WHAT PRE TERM BAD TDF 22 AM FM FAV RMP INT EXT 222 ZERO 222 CURR 27 FULL coe LAST GRT DSP PLOTONLY PWRON BAD ARG BAD ARG NO PRESL COUPL ON OFF are not valid arguments for this command AUTO MAN are not valid arguments for this command Trace registers are not valid for this command A block format not valid here I block format not valid here Strings are not valid for this command This command cannot be queried Not a valid peak detector mode Not a valid peak search parameter Premature A block termination Arguments are only for TDF command AM FM are not valid arguments for this command FAV RAMP are not valid arguments for this command INT EXT are not valid arguments for this command ZERO is not a valid argument for this command CURR is not a valid argument for this command FULL is not a valid argument for this command LAST is not a valid argument for this com
407. ne for instrument operation At the end of each sweep the analog bus sets each control line for the next portion of the automatic IF adjustment routine IF adjustments continuously remove the effects of component drift as the spectrum analyzer temperature changes IF Section 9 21 The assembly contains a reference limiting amplifier This amplifier provides a known amount of limiting for the automatic IF adjustment routines Limiting occurs only during the automatic IF adjustment routines The LC34 Short switches are open during sweeps The current in the reference limiter is increased during sweeps to prevent limiting Caution For troubleshooting it is recommended that you use an active probe such as an HP 85024A and another spectrum analyzer If an HP 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer having dc coupled inputs such as the HP 8566A B HP 8569A B and the HP 8562A B either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input Caution m not short control voltages to ground These voltages are not short circuit protected DACs damaged by shorting these voltages might not fail until several weeks after the shorting takes place m Do not short power supply voltages to ground The HP 85623 spectrum analyzer power supply current limiting cannot protect the resistors in series with the power supply Note Some transistors have collectors
408. nformation 1 1 ar156e HEWLETT PACKARD O 5425A00564 PREF i X SUFF IX SERIAL NUMBER Earlier Serial Number Label Example The new serial number format USOOOOO0000 is always considered above the earlier format you encounter change information such serial number 3425A00564 and above above or Instrument Variations serial prefix 3425A and There are options available to the HP 85623 The following table lists these options and identifies the assemblies which are unique to them Table 1 1 Instrument Variations Option HP 8562E Option 001 2nd IF Output HP 8562E Option 005 Add Alternate Sweep Output HP 85623 Option 007 Fast ADC HP 85623 Option 008 SIG ID HP 85623 Option 103 Delete OCXO HP 85623 Option 104 Delete HP 85620A HP 8560E Option 327 Delete IF Input and Video Output 2 General Information A3 Interface Assembly Std W20 Cable Assembly Std Added W19 Cable Assembly Rear Panel J 10 W58 Cable Assembly 16 Fast ADC Assembly A3 Interface Assembly Opt 007 W20 Cable Assembly Opt 007 W59 Cable Assembly 15 RF Assembly Opt 103 15 RF Assembly Std W49 Cable Assembly W50 Cable Assembly A21 OCXO HP 85620A Mass Memory Module W24 Cable Assembly W36 Cable Assembly Front panel J3 Rear panel J4 HP 85629B Test and Adjustment Module When attached to the rear
409. ng of less than 5 mV less than 5 V at the connector This normally takes about 30 seconds Disconnect the line power cord from the spectrum analyzer Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly slip the tip of the screwdriver under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly See Figure 4 2 Remove the three screws 1 securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield See Figure 4 23 Disconnect the fan and line power cables from A6J3 and A6J101 on the A6 power supply assembly 4 44 Assembly Replacement 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel Remove the two flathead screws securing the rear panel battery assembly and remove the assembly Remove the battery and unsolder the two wires attached to the battery assembly Use a 9 16 inch nut driver to remove the dress nuts holding the BNC connectors to the rear frame If necessary drill out the nut driver to fit over the BNC connectors and cover it with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the dress panel Remove four screws 1 securing the rear frame to the main deck See Figure 4 22 Remove the six screws securing the rear frame to the left and right side frames Remove the knurled nut securing the earphone jack Carefully remove the jack using caution to avoid losing the lock washer located on the i
410. nge 100 mV per 10 dB step refer to Video Filter Buffer Amplifier in this chapter 18 If the voltage at A3TP17 is correct move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP6 Set the following controls to keep the ADC MUX set to the MOD VIDEO input during the sweep SWP IME abd dudes ie e gans We eee kit oe 50 Detector ModE 4459 Bane Sample 19 Step the reference level from 10 dBm to i 30 dBm while monitoring the voltage change on the oscilloscope If the voltage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step refer to ADC MUX in this chapter 20 If the voltage at A3TP6 is correct move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP8 and step the reference level between 10 dBm 1 30 dBm If the voltage at A3TP8 is not the same as that at A3TP6 replace A3U110 21 If the voltage at 8 and A3TP6 are equal move the oscilloscope probe to 22 Change the reference level from 10 dBm to 0 dBm The voltage change on A3TP7 should be between 630 mV and 770 mV If the voltage change is outside of these limits refer to Variable Gain Amplifier VGA in this chapter The gain of the VGA should be 7 109 Log Offset Log Expand Refer to function block X of Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The log scales are modified using a combination of amplification and digital trace manipulation The video input to the A3 assembly is either 10 dB div or
411. ning slugs 5710 1010 Special tuning tool for fork type tuning slugs 8710 0772 Adjustment Procedures 2 21 3 IF Bandpass Adjustment Procedure l Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE Disconnect the power cord Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold down the A2 controller A3 interface A4 log amp and A5 IF assemblies Reconnect the power cord Turn the spectrum analyzer on and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes 2 Connect the negative DVM lead to pin 6 of A5J6 See Figure 2 5 and Figure 2 6 Set the HP 3456A controls as follows ON OFF so 3 On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN 2 MHz CAL and IF AD OFF 15 underlined PIN2 D D e PIN 16 PN 1 M TE e O SP114E Figure 2 8 TAM Connector Pin Locations LC Bandpass Adjustments 4 On the spectrum analyzer press ADJ CURR IF STATE Wait forthe IF ADJUST STATUS message to disappear before continuing with the next step 5 Read the voltage on ASTPS this is an empty hole type of test point If the voltage is less than 6 06 Vdc turn A5L300 LC CTR 1 clockwise If the voltage is greater than 6 26 Vdc turn LC CTR 1 counterclockwise 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the voltage reads 1 6 16 Vdc 100 mV Note If the range for the LC CTR adjustment is insufficient replace the appropriate factory selected capacitor as listed in Table 2 6 To determine the correct replac
412. nnect a BNC cable from the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz REF IN OUT to the HP 8340A B FREQUENCY STANDARD EXT input 22 Set the HP 8340A B to the following settings Prequency Standard a0 ee qp d aoo d eas EXT Powelevel OER ED OG ESS 5dBm 23 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Sal Be NEM C da x oed So p ert a ea ia 0 Hz clic E Ee EE ER Eciam udo dri EOS single 24 Set the spectrum analyzer and HP 8340A B frequencies to the combinations listed in Table 11 5 and press SGL SWP on the spectrum analyzer Synthesizer Section 11 1 1 29 26 2f 28 29 30 3T 32 39 CABLE FREQUENCY COUNTER SYNTHESIZED 559055 SWEEP EXT Con goog aa area goog C ooo cc ead 00 0000 TEST CABLE Q ooon e A14 FREQ i CONTROL D A15 RF 10 MHz REF ADAPTER H 0 IN OUT aJ SMA CABLE 15 101 A15U100 J1 sm624e Figure 1 1 4 Sampler and Sampling Oscillator Test Setup At each combination the frequency counter should measure a sampler IF as shown in Table 11 5 The sampling oscillator of the offset PLL tunes to the frequencies listed in the table If the frequency counter does not read the indicated sampler IF 10 kHz suspect the Al5 RF assembly Reconnect
413. nnected then reconnected If this is the cause cycling power clears the error Model Number Error 719 719 MODEL If this error occurs return the instrument to a service center for repair Could not read ID string from EEROM A2U501 General Troubleshooting 7 39 System Errors 750 to 759 These errors often require troubleshooting the A2 controller and A3 interface assemblies interaction interaction interaction interaction interaction interaction interaction interaction zero divide Check for other errors floating point overflow Check for floating point underflow Check for log error Check for other errors integer overflow Check for other square root error Check for other triple overflow Check for other errors BCD overflow Check for other errors Hardware firmware interaction Code invoked for wrong instrument This error applies only to spectrum analyzers with fast ADC 190 SYSTEM Hardware firmware 151 SYSTEM Hardware firmware other errors T32 SYSTEM Hardware firmware other errors ios Hardware firmware 154 SYSTEM Hardware firmware errors 755 SYSTEM Hardware firmware errors 156 SYSTEM Hardware firmware 191 Yoel EM Hardware firmware Unknown system error TOS SYSTEM Fast ADC Error 760 Option 007 760 NO FADC The FADC board did not respond properly to initialization commands Option Module Errors 800
414. nside of the rear frame assembly Replace the washer and nut onto the jack for safekeeping Remove the rear frame assembly To remove the rear dress panel remove the two nuts located on the inside of the rear frame near the display adjustment holes SK147 Figure 4 22 Main Deck Screws Replacement l If the rear dress panel is removed secure it to the rear frame using two nuts Ensure that the dress panel is aligned with the frame Place the spectrum analyzer on its front panel allowing easy access to the rear frame area Place the rear frame on the spectrum analyzer and secure the knurled nut on the earphone jack A lock washer should be used on the inside of the rear frame and a flat washer on the outside Assembly Replacement 4 45 Procedure 13 Rear Frame Rear Dress Panel 4 14 15 16 Place the coax cable BNC connectors into the appropriate rear frame holes as described below Use a 9 16 inch nut driver to attach the dress nuts holding the BNC connectors to the rear frame Rear Panel Jack RF Cable W24 coax 5 W23 coax 93 W25 coax 4 W18 coax 97 W31 coax 8 W58 coax 8 Secure the rear frame to the spectrum analyzer main deck using four panhead screws 1 See Figure 4 22 Secure the rear frame to the spectrum analyzer side frames using three flathead screws per side Use caution to avoid damaging any coaxial cables Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work ben
415. nter frequency of LC tank that loads the crystal 2 Symmetry adjustment to cancel crystal case capacitance 3 Bandwidth 3 kHz resolution bandwidth center frequency of LC tank and bandwidth of resolution bandwidth 1 kHz resolution bandwidth bandwidth 300 Hz resolution bandwidth bandwidth Gain of all resolution bandwidth relative to the 300 kHz RES BW 4 Digital Bandwidths 1 Hz through 100 Hz 10 Hz through 100 Hz if Option 103 A VCXO final LO tuned to align digital bandwidths with crystal bandwidth center B frequency Overall gain Gain variation with input frequency Requirements For the Automatic IF Adjustment routine to work the spectrum analyzer must provide the following basic functions Power supplies Control signals 10 MHz frequency reference to the A4 log amp cal oscillator 15 RF assembly isolation from the RF signal during IF adjustment gm ADC m 15 RF assembly isolation is a function of signal in 15 Flatness Compensation Control block The references against which the Automatic IF Adjustment routine aligns are 10 MHz reference A15 Linear scale fidelity especially the 10 dB gain stage in A4 linear amplifier block 15 dB reference attenuator A5 Cal Oscillator output power A4 IF Section 9 11 Performance Test Failures Failures in IF Section related performance tests may be investigated using the following information IF Gain Uncertainty Pe
416. ny apparent faults in the rest of the IF Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for information on enabling the TAM for use with the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer When using Automatic Fault Isolation the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked Use Table 9 1 to locate the manual procedure Table 9 2 lists assembly test connectors associated with each Manual Probe Troubleshooting test Figure 9 1 illustrates the location of A4 and A5 test connectors Figure 9 2 illustrates the levels and paths through the IF Section A5 IF A4 LOG AMP CAL OSC J9 J9 J7 JS 18 J8 10 9 J5 REVISION REVISION CONNE C TOR CONNECTOR J7 a J11 J4 J6 E 6 4 D J 3 ds sp168e Figure 9 1 A4 and A5 Test Connectors IF Section 9 3 Table 9 1 Automatic Fault Isolation References Suspected Circuit Indicated Manual Procedure to Perform by Automatic Fault Isolation Check Cal Oscillator on A4 Assembly Troubleshooting the Cal Osc with the TAM Check Input Switch on A5 IF Assembly Troubleshooting A5 with the Check Linear Amplifiers on A4 Assembly Linear Amplifiers Check Log Expand on A3 Interface Assembly Refer to Log Expand in this chapter Check Step Gains on A5 IF Assembly Step Gains Check Video Offsets on A4 Assembly Video Offset steps 1 through 4 Check VIDEO OUT on A4 Assembly Video Output Troubleshooting the Log Amplifier with the TAM
417. ny bad waveforms 3 00 V div 0 00 v 1 00 ms div 0 000 s x POS Y IPOS SK191 Figure 10 2 Line Generator Output Waveforms Blanking Refer to function block J of A2 Controller Schematic Diagram sheet 1 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series 5pectrum Analyzer Component Level Information l Using an oscilloscope check for blanking pulses at A2J202 pin 15 A2U206 pin 6 should be at a TTL high Blanking pulses turn the CRT beam off during the sample time of the line generators and when moving the CRT beam to a new position for drawing the next vector Set an oscilloscope to the following settings Scale bdo ebur hse bes 4 V div ZATID Ite On eet ER tette to ade 42 5 V Veh OHIO aang canon Ou a meer aren ors Drs dures 20 ps div ipd qd sus IE oe ede dido External Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 LBRIGHT Controller Section 10 5 Compare the blanking circuit input signals at the following test points with those illustrated in Figure 10 3 BLANKING J202 pin 15 BLANK U214 pin 12 VECTOR U214 pin 11 U213 pin 13 5 The waveforms in Figure 10 3 must match the timing of the vectors being drawn To do this U215B is used to adjust the leading edge and U215A is used to adjust the trailing edge The first six horizontal divisions show the line drawing mode where the VECTOR pu
418. o the INPUT 5022 connector 3 Adjust the Option 007 spectrum analyzer reference level to place the signal at the top graticule line on the CRT display 4 Measure the dc level at TP25 If the voltage measured is not 1 0 f0 15 V troubleshoot the A3 interface assembly 5 Measure the dc level at TP26 The level should be approximately the same as the level measured at TP25 If not suspect switch U44 6 Set the Option 007 spectrum analyzer scale to 5dB per division 7 Adjust the Option 007 spectrum analyzer reference level to place the signal at the top graticule line on the CRT display 8 Measure the dc level at TP25 and TP26 The level should be i 1 0 f0 25 V If the level measured at TP26 differs from the level measured at TP25 by more than 0 25 volts troubleshoot U43 and associated circuitry 9 Disconnect the CAL OUTPUT signal from the INPUT 500 connector 10 The level at TP26 should drop to 0 35 Vdc If the level is less more negative than 0 35 Vdc replace voltage clamp CR4 ADC Interface Section 8 31 11 Measure the dc level of the flash video at TP27 The level should be near 0 Vdc with the signal at the bottom graticule line no input to the spectrum analyzer 12 Connect the CAL OUTPUT to the INPUT 50 connector 13 Measure the dc level of the flash video at TP27 The level should be near 1 7 Vdc 8 Bit Flash ADC Refer to function block I of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E
419. o the left 2 Use 5 16 inch wrench to remove W45 from FL1 and 8 3 Loosen 56 and W39 at A8J2 and A8J3 4 5 6 Remove the two screws securing to the center deck Remove W56 and W39 from the 8 assembly Disconnect W12 from AS Replacement l 2 3 Place A8 on the center deck and attach W56 and W39 using caution to avoid damaging any of the cables center conductor pins Use two panhead screws to secure 8 to the center deck Reconnect W45 to FLI and 8 Tighten all semirigid coax connections on A8 and FL1 torque them to 113 Nem 10 in lb Assembly Replacement 4 3 1 A9 Input Attenuator Removal 1 Place the spectrum analyzer upside down on the work bench 2 Remove W41 and W43 3 4 Disconnect W34 from A7 and move this cable out of the way Remove screw 1 securing the attenuator to the front frame center support See Figure 4 14 5 Remove screw 1 securing the 9 input attenuator to the right side frame See Figure 4 15 6 Remove the attenuator and disconnect the attenuator ribbon cable Replacement Ensure that the bracket that secures the attenuator to the front frame center support is attached to the attenuator The bracket should be on the same end as the ribbon cable connector 2 Connect the attenuator control ribbon cable to the A9 input attenuator 3 Place the A9 input attenuator into the spectrum analyzer with the A9 mounting brackets resting against the
420. obe under the rubber shroud of the AGA1W3 post accelerator cable to obtain a reading on the voltmeter See Figure 4 2 Keep the high voltage probe on the post accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV less than 5 V at the connector This normally takes about 30 seconds Disconnect the line power cord from the spectrum analyzer Using a small screwdriver with the shank in contact with the CRT shield assembly slip the tip of the screwdriver under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable and short the cable to ground on the CRT shield assembly See Figure 4 2 Pry out the black grommet protecting post accelerator cable A6A1W3 from the CRT shield assembly Carefully unsnap the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable from the CRT and discharge it by shorting the cable to chassis ground on the CRT shield assembly Remove the three screws securing the power supply shield to the power supply and remove the shield Assembly Replacement 4 25 Procedure 7 A6A1 High Voltage Assembly 15 16 17 18 19 20 Remove the three screws securing the 1 high voltage assembly to the power supply assembly Disconnect ribbon cable AGA1W from A6J5 See Figure 4 11 For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Remove the two screws 1 securing two board mounting posts to the left side frame and remove the posts See Figure 4 13 Remove the two left side frame screws 2 secu
421. ock diagram 13 19 cover 4 47 Index 6 CRT 13 16 dead 13 12 high voltage 13 15 low voltage 13 15 removal 4 21 replacement 4 22 restarting 13 14 section 7 51 troubleshooting 7 14 turn on 13 18 power supply adjustment high voltage 2 13 power supply warning 13 1 prescaler 11 21 preselector peaking 8 12 probe power socket 13 7 probe troubleshooting 7 15 problems frequency response adjustment software 3 10 processor See controller programming errors 7 18 Q Query DUT S N Menu softkey 3 12 R rack slide kit 5 7 real time DAC 8 12 rear dress panel removal 4 44 replacement 4 45 rear frame 5 31 removal 4 44 replacement 4 45 rear frame parts 5 21 recommended test equipment 1 9 15 reference adjustment OCXO 2 48 TCXO 2 51 reference attenuator adjustment 2 29 reference designations 5 2 reference divide chain 11 21 reference PLL 7 46 phase noise 11 43 unlocked 11 16 required tools 4 3 resolution bandwidth 1 MHz problems 9 29 300 Hz to 3 kHz problems 9 34 30 kHz problems 9 30 3 kHz and 10 kHz problems 9 30 resolution bandwidth performance test failures 9 13 returning instruments for service 1 6 revision connectors 7 13 RF 15 assembly removal 4 37 RF 15 assembly replacement 4 38 RF assembly troubleshooting 12 16 RF block diagram 11 49 RF check 7 15 RF gain DACs 8 13 RF parts 5 18 RF path fault isolation 7 16 RF section 7 43 RF section parts 5 27 ros
422. odels Substitute sources must operate over the frequency ranges indicated Recommended substitutes are listed in the configuration menu If you must substitute the source with a user defined model the adjustments run faster using a synthesized source rather than an unsynthesized source Note When connecting signals from the HP 8340A B or any microwave source to the adjustment setup use a high frequency test cable with minimum attenuation to 26 5 GHz HP part number 8120 4921 is recommended for its ruggedness repeatability and low insertion loss Adjustment Indicator To aid in making adjustments the TAM displays an Analog Voltmeter Display Box along the left hand side of the display A horizontal line moves inside the box to represent the needle of an analog voltmeter A digital readout appears below the box Tick marks are often displayed on the inside edges of the box indicating the desired needle position The tick marks and needle are intensified when the needle is within this acceptable region During some adjustments an arrow appears along the right edge of the box This arrow always indicates the highest position the needle has reached The arrow is useful when a component must be adjusted for a peak response if the peak is overshot the arrow indicates where the peak was The component can be readjusted until the needle is at the same position as the arrow Adjustment Procedures 2 9 Table 2 4 TAM Adjustments TAM Ad
423. olled equipment for a given adjustment does not respond over HP IB that adjustment is flagged MISSINGETE missing electronic test equipment These adjustments cannot be run Equipment connection prompts are displayed on the computer screen Most adjustments check equipment connections and only prompt the operator if a misconnection is detected Note The Front End Cal adjustment refers to the HP 8481A or 8485A power sensor as the Channel B Power Sensor even if a single channel power meter such as an HP 436A or 8902A is being used If more than one power meter or the measuring receiver and one of the power meters is present the program asks which model to use as the power meter Enter the model number without the alphabetic character for example enter 8902 for HP 8902A 3 10 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Single Test Press Single Test to run the adjustment indicated by the pointer Once the adjustment is running press Restart to abort and restart the test Calibrate Power Sensor The frequency response adjustment program keeps track of which power sensor is being used and the elapsed time since it was last calibrated The program prompts the user to recalibrate the power sensor if more than 2 hours elapses since the last calibration Also if the power sensor is changed the new power sensor must be calibrated If there is a significant change in ambient temperature or improved power meter accuracy is desired
424. on amplifier 11 23 adjustment 2 40 synthesizer section 7 46 11 8 simplified block diagram 1 1 47 troubleshooting 1 1 8 System File softkey 3 12 T TAM 7 10 automatic fault isolation 11 4 controller troubleshooting 10 2 power supply 13 5 power supply connectors 13 5 printing 7 12 RF section connectors 11 5 synthesizer section 11 2 7 troubleshooting A4 section 9 4 troubleshooting A5 section 9 4 troubleshooting the cal oscillator assembly 9 8 troubleshooting the IF section 9 3 TAM adjustments 2 9 11 adjustment indicators 2 9 corresponding manual adjustments 2 10 test equipment information 2 9 test equipment list 2 1 TCXO adjustment 2 51 test and adjustment module 2 9 See also TAM controller 10 2 test and adjustment module HP 85629B 1 3 test descriptions 3 14 15 test equipment 1 9 frequency response adjustment software 3 3 test equipment list for TAM adjustments 2 11 test menu frequency response adjustment software 3 8 test points 7 2 test record header 3 6 third converter 7 45 third LO driver amplifier 11 19 Index 7 tools adjustment 2 3 tools required 4 3 trace storage problems 10 15 triggering 7 50 triggering problems 8 9 troubleshooting instrument 7 8 U unlocked PLL 11 15 user generated error messages 7 41 V vco 11 33 VCO bias voltages 11 34 VCXO troubleshooting 10 6925 MHz 9 18 Verify Bus softkey 3 12 video circuits troubleshooting 8 14 video fi
425. on the A6A1 HV module The A6A1 HV module is characterized in the factory to ensure that the display filament voltage is set to 6 0 V rms when the 110 Vdc nominal supply is set to the voltage marked on the HV module Warning To minimize shock hazard use a nonmetallic adjustment tool when adjusting the A6 power supply The following procedure probes voltages that if contacted could cause personal injury or death Note Adjustment of the high voltage power supply should not be a routine maintenance procedure Any adjustments should be done only if the A6 power supply A6A1 HV module or A18V1 CRT display is repaired or replaced You must perform the display adjustments after this adjustment if either the display or HV module has been replaced POS A6TP405 NEG 401 DIGITAL VOLTMETER ao d 000000 ga SPECTRUM ANALYZER DVM TEST LEADS SK1 1 Figure 2 1 High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Setup Adjustment Procedures 2 13 1 High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Equipment RACE ERE Ee RSS HP 3456A DVM test 6548 uet uta eee eA WR eod nd HP 34118A Procedure Warning After disconnecting the ac power cord allow capacitors in the high voltage supply to discharge for at least 30 seconds before removing the protective cover from the A6 power supply Turn the spectrum analyzer off by pressing LINE
426. onnect 1 1 to A3J602 10 Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three flathead screws One end of the cover fits into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove See Figure 4 12 Place W3 and the other cable assemblies between the CRT assembly and the power supply cover so the W9 wires are below the surface of the power supply cover Fold up the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as described in Procedure 5 A2 A3 4 and 5 Assemblies Replacement steps 5 through 10 Fold up and AI5 assemblies as described in Procedure 9 and 15 Assemblies Replacement steps 3 through 5 Replace the spectrum analyzer cover assembly Connect the line power cord and switch the spectrum analyzer power on If the spectrum analyzer does not operate properly turn off the spectrum analyzer power disconnect the line cord and recheck the spectrum analyzer 4 54 Assembly Replacement Procedure 15 EEROM A2U500 Procedure 15 EEROM A2U500 Removal Replacement 10 11 12 13 14 Caution The EEROM is replaced with the power on Use a nonmetallic tool to remove the defective EEROM and install the new EEROM Turn the HP 85623 switch off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and fold out the 2 A3 4 and A5 assemblies as described in Pro
427. ontinuing onto the next step Fold both board assemblies into the spectrum analyzer as a unit Use caution to avoid damaging any cable assemblies Secure the assemblies using the eight screws removed in Removal step 3 See Figure 4 18 Secure the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 1 Spectrum Analyzer Cover 4 38 Assembly Replacement Procedure 9 Al4 and Al5 Assemblies 2 A1A1 D pear WI p w2 9 re W13 W58 OPTION 005 WIO W32 W16 WI2 WI 1 A 1 4 15 3 7 W32 CP de EM EMEN WI Ee ji TES H ij W19 OPTION 0 0 1 9 Ns QT L a w2 D A w49 Pr w35 W50 i r T W36 40 euis y i W34 w22 gt W29 w37 15 W51 le NOT USED W33 W32 s 114e Figure 4 19 Al4 and Al5 Assembly Cables Assembly Replacement 4 39 Procedure 10 Fast ADC and CRT Driver Removal 1 BD tA Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly and fold out the A2 A3 A4 and A5 assemblies as described in steps 3 through 6 under Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and 5 Assemblies Removal Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench with A2 A3 A4 and A5 folded out to the right For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Remove two screws 1 securing the two board mounting posts to t
428. onversion of the 10 7 MHz IF to 4 8 kHz for use by the digital IF The log amp results are realized by using a wide dynamic range linear detector followed by a video log amp The detector is used for both linear and log paths and contains a mixer that acts as the down converter mixer for the digital IF Caution For troubleshooting it 1s recommended that you use an active probe such as an HP 85024A and another spectrum analyzer If an HP 1120A active probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer having dc coupled inputs such as the HP 8566A B HP 8569A B and the HP 8562A B either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input Failure to do this can result in damage to the spectrum analyzer or the probe Log Amplifier Refer to function blocks K L and AE of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheets 3 of 4 and 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The log amplifier receives the detected video signal from the detector mixer and outputs a voltage proportional to the log of the input voltage The linear output is tapped off at the emitter of U501D 507 provides input offset adjustment capability and adjusts the offset of the op amp formed by U501A B C and D Q502 is a buffer Q501 switches in additional offset for digital RBWs The logarithmic characteristic of the base emitter junction of U502B is used in the feedba
429. ooting 9 38 troubleshooting 9 32 unlock at start of IF adjust 9 33 unlock conditions troubleshooting 9 33 CAL OUTPUT 11 18 Cal Sensor softkey 3 13 center frequency harmonic number 1 1 36 Change Entry softkey 3 12 character problem 10 10 chassis parts 5 17 5 25 components adjustable components table 2 5 computer frequency response adjustment software 3 2 conditions file op ver software 3 7 conditions menu softkeys 3 12 change entry 3 12 exit program 3 12 load conditions 3 12 query DUT s n 3 12 sensor utilities softkey 3 12 store conditions 3 12 test menu 3 12 verify HP IB 3 12 controller block diagram 10 17 check 7 14 frequency response adjustment software 3 2 section 7 50 converter second 7 44 12 9 third 7 45 cover assembly parts 5 16 5 23 cover removal replacement 44 CRT driver 7 51 13 10 driver block diagram 13 21 driver removal and replacement 4 40 power supply 13 16 removal 4 5 replacement 4 10 crystal filter adjustments 2 23 D DC DC converter control 13 17 DC log amplifier adjustments 2 30 defaults op ver software 3 7 Delete File softkey 3 12 demodulator adjustment 2 53 demodulator troubleshooting AM FM 9 16 detector mixer troubleshooting 9 20 diagnostic functions 7 7 digital signature analysis microprocessor 10 4 display adjustment 2 15 ASM 7 51 blank 10 2 distortion 13 8 focus problems 13 9 jumbled 10 7 line variations 10 11 problems
430. ope probe from the oscilloscope channel 1 input to probe A4C723 the end closest to A4U707 as in Figure 2 22 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Connect the HP 8640B RF OUTPUT to the spectrum analyzer INPUT 500 3 Set the HP 8640B controls as follows pino 61 to 128 ie LE MOIS ME Moti DK 100 000 MHz DOM 10 dBm It EM EE POE FIVE bs eat on Eds ana IN T Modulation ATCQUGNCY i ia dr m utro did wed e bete dq 1000 Hz Peak de vadtloll 5 CAO K MHz 4 Adjust the HP 8640B FM deviation vernier for a full scale reading on the meter Set the FM to off 5 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Channeli asse ete toad pene UR Res Coo Ende ene os ede esc DC efe on Chiniel asc ade bs RE debui dudar E off Chanock d QR Sed bui mx uide i ss bud eie 50 mV division Channel diese UNS OR IPS BW lim indie DASE Situs ite p Reti d ard 1 0 ms division PSCC ane duct ass aus teas auto jb eas Haein ae p
431. or data files Refer to Sensor Utilities Menu permits changing a Conditions Menu entry indicated by the pointer along the left edge of the computer display Press the RETURN or ENTER keys to terminate an entry checks each listed HP IB address for response Verify Bus does not verify that a particular piece of equipment is at a specified address queries the HP IB for the serial number and model number of the spectrum analyzer under test stores the current conditions in the CONDITIONS file on the specified system mass storage file location exits the frequency response adjustment program Sensor Utilities Menu View Edit Add File Delete File List Files System File Cond Menu allows user to view and edit power sensor data files creates a new power sensor data file deletes a power sensor data file User is asked for confirmation before deletion takes place lists all power sensor data files on the disk currently specified by the system mass storage file location allows user to change the currently specified system mass storage file location returns you to the Conditions Menu 3 12 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Adjust Menu Single Test Cal Sensor List Equip Cond Menu runs the adjustment indicated by the pointer once allows you to recalibrate the current power sensor and resets the internal time since last calibration timer lists the required equipment for the test indicate
432. or information on enabling the TAM for use with the HP 85623 Spectrum Analyzer When using automatic fault isolation the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked Use Table 11 2 to locate the manual procedure Table 11 3 lists assembly test connectors associated with each manual probe troubleshooting test Figure 11 1 illustrates the location of and AI5 test connectors The pin locations of a 16 pin TAM connector are indicated in Figure 11 2 Table 11 l indicates the correspondence between a measured signal line and the TAM connector pin 11 2 Synthesizer Section 14 15 FREQUENCY RF CONTROL 502 4901 REVISION CONNECTOR J16 REVISION CONNECTOR J101 A15A2J1 J400 sp128e Figure 11 and Al5 Test Connectors rie 2 D D D D D PIN 1 SP114E Figure 11 2 TAM Connector Pin Locations Table 1 1 1 Measured Signal Line Location Measured Signal Connector Pin Line MSLI1 pin 1 MSL2 pin 2 MSL3 pin 3 MSL4 pin 4 MSL5 pin 5 GND pin 6 MSL6 pin 13 MSL7 pin 14 MSL8 pin 15 Synthesizer Section 1 1 3 Table 11 2 Automatic Fault Isolation References Suspected Circuit Indicated by Automatic Fault Isolation Check the YTO loop Check first LO Check first LO pretune frequency and amplitude Check the fractional N oscillator Check 3rd LO drive Check 10 MHz reference to phase frequency detector Check for 10 MHz signal at other inp
433. ord to their low state Since the LREADCLK control bit is low a negative going pulse on the ACLK line will occur on every static RAM read by the CPU This causes the address counter to increment at the end of each static RAM read so that the address counter automatically post increments to the next address of RAM U32 In order for this address post increment to occur the LSTOP count enable signal from the post trigger counter must be high LSTOP goes low when the post trigger counter reaches its terminal count in the write mode to stop the address counter from counting When the fast ADC assembly is changed from write mode to read mode LSTOP will be low So the CPU on the A2 controller board must always first program the post trigger counter to a value other than the terminal count 65535 to force LSTOP high 8 38 ADC Interface Section Video Trigger Comparator Refer to function block M of the fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information This 8 bit digital magnitude comparator U34 compares the digitized samples from the flash ADC latch U29 output to the programmed video trigger level The video trigger level value on IOB2 through IOB7 is latched into the P input top portion of U34 by the firmware on the A2 controller assembly when the fast ADC is in read mode When the sample on the Q input is higher than the video trigger level on the P input V HI out
434. ors Refer to function blocks D and I of A2 controller schematic diagram sheet 1 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The line generators convert the digital display information to an analog output suitable to drive the AI7 CRT driver assembly These circuits change the digital words into vectors or lines which move the beam of the CRT The vectors are each 6 ps long width of the INTEGRATE pulse followed by a 1 us SAMPLE pulse When characters of text are being drawn the vectors are 3 ps long 1 On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET 2 On the spectrum analyzer press MORE CRT ADJ press the bottom softkey and then the top softkey If the display is blank 3 Set an oscilloscope to the following settings eu yr pese edd alld yen Most 3 V div DO 1 ms div 4599 Ops ed bd Redes spider ipd did vrbis External 4 Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 LBRIGHT 10 4 Controller Section 5 Compare the signals at the following test points with those illustrated in Figure 10 2 x POS A2J202 pin 14 Y POS A2J202 pin 3 Z OUT A2J201 pin 3 BLANKING A2J202 pin 15 Note Waveforms displayed on an analog scope may show considerably more spikes This is normal and is due to the wider displayed bandwidth 6 Troubleshoot the circuits associated with a
435. ors 600 to 651 600 SYSTEM 601 SYSTEM 650 OUTOF RG 651 NO IRQ ADC timeout errors occur if the A2 controller assembly frequency counter is faulty Refer to Chapter 8 ADC Interface Section Hardware firmware interaction check other errors Hardware firmware interaction check other errors ADC input is outside of the ADC range Microprocessor is not receiving interrupt from ADC Digital and Checksum Errors 700 to 799 EEROM Checksum Errors 700 to 704 Faults on the A2 controller assembly can cause these errors Refer to Chapter 10 Controller Section Although some of these errors might result in a blanked display it is possible to read these errors over HP IB Refer to Troubleshooting to a Functional Section in this chapter The EEROM on A2 is used to store data for frequency response correction elapsed time focus and intensity levels Error codes from 700 to 703 indicate that some part of the data in EEROM 1s invalid An EEROM error could result from either a defective EEROM or an General Troubleshooting 7 37 700 EEROM 701 AMPL CAL 702 ELAP TIM 703 AMPL CAL 704 PRESELCT improper sequence of storing data in EEROM Check the EEROM with the following steps 1 Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR ENA position 2 On the spectrum analyzer press MORE i QF 2 SERVICE CAL DATA FLATNESS and FLATNESS DATA Enter E 1 OF 2 FOCUS enter a focus valu
436. ould be between 6 and 30 dBm Note The marker will not PEAK SEARCH on the LO Feedthrough when in a non zero span To measure the LO Feedthrough amplitude with the markers set the SPAN to 0 Hz and CENTER FREQ to 0 Hz Press ON 4 If the LO feedthrough amplitude is within limits but signals are low the RF path following the 8 mixer is probably operating properly 12 4 RF Section 5 If the LO feedthrough amplitude is higher than 5 dBm signal will be clipped at top of screen and signals are low in amplitude suspect a defective mixer assembly 6 Perform the steps located in Control Latch for Band Switch Driver in this chapter 7 Check AI3 second converter mixer diode bias at 14 19 pin 1 The bias voltage should be between 150 and 800 mVdc 8 Troubleshoot the signal path Refer to the power levels listed on Figure 12 8 HP 85623 RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram High Band Problems 1 Perform the steps located in Control Latch for Band Switch Driver in this chapter 2 Troubleshoot the signal path Refer to the power levels listed in Figure 12 8 HP 85623 RF Section Troubleshooting Block Diagram Low and High Band Problems l On the HP 85623 press and REALIGN LO amp IF If any error messages are displayed refer to Error Messages in Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting 2 Perform the External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment procedure in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures If this ad
437. ov ha fecta tcov POP amp P 9 o 9 LLL LLL e 24 ttt gt eti gt 5 Li ViCi 0 000 V 2 12 6 687 V 6 687 V Figure 12 4 8582 Rear Panel LO SWP Output 1 2009 0 005 30 08 E RU OT Pecan ne edam caa ca er me ra i oun ep er e cad caa can ni a a farre dra EN reae rer Aer 121 z0 HAGE 1C122 1 456 V 2 12 2 656 V 125 1 200 v Figure 12 5 HP 8582E Signal at A14J15 Pin 1 9 Check the voltage at A14J15 pin 3 with the spectrum analyzer center frequency set to the frequencies listed in Table 12 4 The following table lists the voltage that should be measured at 14 15 pin 3 the settings for the three switches U416 in function block and the gain through the Sweep Tune Multiplier 12 14 RF Section 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Zl 22 23 Table 12 4 Sweep Tune Multiplier Values 14215 Pin 3 U416A U416B U416C Gain Frequency V dc 2 Open Closed 10 GHz 2 58 Open Closed 0 417 Measured from A14J15 pin 1 to A14J15 3 N is the harmonic mixing mode Move the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on t
438. owing settings nae me kan ee 4 2107 GHz AMPIO Tem ech ts ker iam ak acre 5dBm 11 Connect the microwave source to A15U100J1 12 Measure the signal at U103 pin 1 using an active probe spectrum analyzer combination 13 If a 94 7 MHz signal approximately 14 dBm is present but the signal at A15J101 is low suspect U103 14 When U104 pin 3 is at TTL low U104 pin 6 should near 15 Vdc and PIN diodes CR101 CR102 and CR103 should be reverse biased 15 Set HP 85633 to the following settings ouais quid stitit BLE 89 3 MHz Sit METTRE ones 0 Hz 16 Check that U104 pin 3 is at a TTL high and U104 pin 6 is greater than 7 V PIN diodes CR101 CR102 and CR103 should all be turned on with about 7 mA of forward current 17 Disconnect the power splitter and reconnect W32 to A15J101 Sweep Generator Circuit The sweep generator circuitry generates a ramp from 0 to 10 volts during the sweep time The available sweep times range from 50 us to 2 000 seconds The sweep times are generated in two different ranges a 50 ws to 30 ms range and a 50 ms to 2 000 second range The 50 ps to 30 msec range is only needed for analog zero span sweeps The sweep generator is controlled with an 8 bit latch and the control signal HSCAN The latch U308 controls the sweep rate HSCAN determines when to reset the scan ramp and when to
439. pply the voltages should return to their nominal voltages but be unregulated If the voltages do not return to near their nominal range the A6 power supply is probably at fault Buck Regulator Control Loop Part of the buck regulator control circuitry is on the power supply assembly and part of it is on the A6A2 regulator board that is part of the A6 power supply assembly The control circuitry can be checked as follows l 2 The voltage at E302 should be 6 8 V If not check for a triangle wave on the regulator board at TP31 or a 35 V peak to peak square wave at CR305 pin 3 If these signals are not present check the VBUCK signal for a voltage of about 110 V and check Q103 and Q104 for proper switching If the 6 8 V control loop is functioning properly TP33 on the regulator board should be about 0 V The feedback signal is pulse width modulated to drive the opto isolator U206 Check for a rectangular waveform at U206 pin 3 to verify its operation High Voltage Supplies 1 Set the switch off disconnect the power cord and remove the power supply shield 2 Connect the negative lead of the DVM to A6TP401 and positive lead to A6TP405 3 Set the LINE switch on 4 If the voltage displayed on the DVM is approximately i 110 Vdc and the rear panel CRT 110 VDC ON indicator is lit AGA1 HV module is probably at fault Display Power Supply Section 13 15 Note Ideally the DVM should read the voltage writte
440. ptimize optimize optimize optimize optimize optimize gt optimize optimize center frequency of LC tank that loads center frequency of LC tank that loads LC pole center frequency LC pole center frequency center frequency of LC tank that loads center frequency of LC tank that loads LC pole center frequency LC pole center frequency the the Using the TAM The HP 85629B TAM in conjunction with the HP 8562E TAM Interface Software TAM I F SW can be used to perform approximately half of the spectrum analyzer adjustment procedures Table 2 4 lists the TAM adjustments and their corresponding manual adjustments Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for information on loading and running the TAM I F SW The TAM adjustments do not include procedures for choosing factory selected components If an adjustment cannot be made and a factory selected component must be changed refer to the corresponding manual adjustment To select an adjustment press MODULE to display the TAM main menu then press ADJUST Position the pointer next to the desired adjustment using either the knob or step keys Press EXECUTE then follow the instructions displayed on screen Test Equipment During the TAM adjustments instructions for setting test equipment controls are displayed Table 2 5 lists the test equipment needed to perform each TAM adjustment Required models must be used Substitutions may be made for recommended m
441. put is high and V LO output is low When the Q input is lower than the P input V HI output is low and V LO output is high And when P is equal to Q both V HI and V LO are low These two signals V HI and V LO go to PAL 01 block A and are used to clock the video trigger generator block D ADC Interface Section 8 39 8560E Series si1356e gt CA m 2 2 C my gt 2 m 00 TP15 BUFFER e FILTER OUT e X1 i TM vipgo Nu Qj 1 GATE cr M REAR PANEL 4105 MSS f VIDEO ENABLE OM SHEET 3 9 Y PENIS fy TP14 FR pod 2 wx e ds Y MS5 ANALOG BUS TO ME es CONTROLLER I vi veo FILTER 1793 BUFFER AMP we p PEAK cea eas aces p V VIDEO i DETECTOR 18 LOG EXPAND 2 i VIDEO gt L L a TRIG 1 y _ L 222241 LNEG RESET AUX VIDEO J400 ANALOG BUS ANALOG BUS TIM DRIVERS nius HBADC_ 77 REAL TIME Bion CLK 0 TIMING ANALOG 00 7 0 7 16 i STATE 1A 0 7 BUS i MACHINE LATCHES 8 RT DAC 1 _7 4 i ae seo 400 MS6 CONTROL BUS dl Sanne LS MUX BD 0 7 4X8 8 REGISTER BD 0 7 RE GAIN J2 36 0 7 ITIVE PEAK D
442. quare wave signal should remain unchanged It is normal for the phase of the signal to jitter at the lowest signal levels The signals at the gates of A4Q404 and A4Q405 should be 180 degrees out of phase from each other If they are not 180 degrees out of phase or one of the signals are not present troubleshoot the LO Amplifier or the FETs in the mixer If the signal is not a symmetrical square wave troubleshoot the LO amplifier If the signal drops out prematurely or is not present at all troubleshoot the limiter or LO amplifier Repeat the procedure for an RBW lt 100 kHz If the log amplifier works in the 300 kHz RBW but not in the narrower RBWs troubleshoot the log narrow filter in the limiter or isolation IF Section 9 19 amplifier A4CR302 and A4CR303 are varactor diodes in the limiter filter and are used to tune the filter Limiter Refer to function block G of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The limiter consists of 7 identical 20 dB gain stages A log narrow filter is switched in for RBWs 100 kHz This filter is switched in using the control lines NARROW between the 4th and 5th stages During normal operation the limiter serves to amplify even the smallest 10 7 MHz signals up to a level sufficient to drive the LO Amplifier and subsequent detector mixer This signal serves as the LO for the mixer circuitry Isolation Amplifier Refe
443. quency control assemblies On the spectrum analyzer press the following keys EXT MXR PRE UNPR UNPR AUX CTRL EXTERNAL MIXER LOCK HARMONIC 6 Hz SPAN ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY CENTER FREQ 18 8893GHz sct_ swp SAVEJAVE STATE STATE FREQUENCY 35 7493GHz SAVERAVE STATE STATE 1 RECALL RECALL STATE STATE 0 On the HP 53434 press 7 and set the controls as follows Sample v ac woe acie You erue eae Pau M Fully counterclockwise 10 Hz 500 MHz 500 MHz 26 5 GHz switch 500 MHz 26 5 GHz Adjust A14R93 3 2 GHz for the appropriate frequency counter reading of 3 200 GHz 1 MHz On the spectrum analyzer press STATE 1 Adjust A14R42 6 01 GHz for a frequency counter reading of 6 010 GHz 1 MHz On the spectrum analyzer press STATE 0 Repeat steps 6 through 9 until both of these interacting adjustments meet their tolerances 2 36 Adjustment Procedures 7 YTO Adjustment SP116E Figure 2 14 YTO Adjustment Locations 11 Place the jumper A14J23 in the NORM position pins 1 and 2 jumpered 12 Disconnect the SMA cable from the first LO OUTPUT jack and reconnect the 502 termination on the first LO OUTPUT YTO FM Coil Adjustments 13 On the spectrum analyzer press and set the controls as follows an suns m 300 MHz Spall teint hate epus ipai etat au dd date modd edet Re 20 MHz 14 Adjust Al4R76 FM SPAN until the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT SIGNAL is aligne
444. quipment The equipment required for the manual adjustment procedures is listed in Table 1 4 Recommended Test Equipment Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications given in the table may be substituted for the preferred test equipment Adjustable and Factory Selected Components Table 2 2 lists the adjustable components by reference designation and name For each component the table provides a description and lists the adjustment number Refer to Table 2 3 for a complete list of factory selected components used in the instrument along with their functions Factory selected components are identified with an asterisk on the schematic diagrams 2 2 Adjustment Procedures Adjustment Tools For adjustments requiring a nonmetallic tuning tool use fiber tuning tool HP part number 8110 0033 Two different tuning tools may be necessary for IF bandpass adjustments depending upon the type of tuning slug used in the slug tuned inductors If the tuning slug requires a slotted tuning tool use HP part number 8710 1010 If the tuning slug requires a forked tuning tool use HP part number 8710 0772 Never try to force an adjustment control This is especially critical when tuning variable capacitors or slug tuned inductors Required service accessories with part numbers are listed under Service Kit in Chapter 1 General Information Instrument Service Position Refer to Chapter 4 Assembly Replacement for infor
445. r See Figure 4 26 2 Completely remove the cable from the instrument Note If steps 20 and 21 have been performed stop the procedure here do not perform steps 22 23 and 24 22 Remove the AI front frame assembly and AI8 CRT assembly as described in Procedure 2 Al Front Frame AI8 CRT Removal steps 16 through 29 23 Remove the left side frame from the spectrum analyzer using the hardware listed below The side frame will still be attached by the speaker wires Do not let it hang freely Screw Q uantity 1 SCREW MACH M4 X 0 7 8 mm LG FLAT HD 3 2 SCREW MACH X 0 5 35 mm LG FLAT HD 2 3 SCREW MACH X 0 5 6 mm LG FLAT HD 6 24 Remove the line switch cable assembly 4 50 Assembly Replacement Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable Assembly Replacement 4 5 1 Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable CONNECTOR POSITION OF TIE WRAP KNUCKLE WIRE 98 WIRE 928 WIRE 8 WIRE 918 PLUNGER PUSHES CONTACT OUT CONNECTOR BODY CONTACT REMOVAL TOOL WIRE SK151 Figure 4 26 W3 Cable Connector Replacement Using Contact Removal Tool HP part number 8710 1791 Ensure that the action of the switch 1s working properly With a pair of wire cutters clip the tie wrap holding the cable to the contact housing of the replacement W3 assembly 2 Using the contact removal tool remove the four wires from the replacement
446. r sensor could not be found on the currently specified system mass storage file location specifier Check the sensor model and serial numbers and the system mass storage file location Power meter reads value dBm The power meter has read a value far exceeding the specification of the CAL OUTPUT amplitude check that power sensor is connected to CAL OUTPUT and press any key The power will be read once more and assumed to be valid Select code value does not currently support HP IB operations The address just entered specified a select code which is not an HP IB interface Check the address entered and the select code of the appropriate interface Sensor serial number must be from 1 to 99999 The power sensor serial number entered was not in the range indicated Enter the serial number correctly System mass storage file location catalog cannot be read Program attempted to read the catalog of the system mass storage file location Check the msus of the system mass storage file location This program does not support the current DUT The frequency response adjustment software supports only the HP 85623 Refer to the Spectrum Analyzers section in Getting Started earlier in this adjustment Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 17 Unable to load CONDITIONS file from listed system file location Program attempted to load the CONDITIONS file from the listed system mass storage file location Check the msus of the System mass storag
447. r to function block H of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The isolation amplifier prevents LO port to RF port feedthrough in the mixer from feeding back to the input of the limiter and causing loop oscillations In addition the isolation amplifier matches the phase of the non limited signal path to the phase of the limited signal path The isolation amplifier should have a gain of about 4 dB and also has a log narrow filter that is switched with the control line NARROWB Detector Mixer Refer to function block J of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Sum and difference frequencies are produced in the detector mixer The difference frequency produces video dc to approximately 3 MHz since the two signals are at the same frequency During digital resolution bandwidths the two signals are separated by about 4 8 kHz Log Off set Gain Compensation Refer to function blocks L and M of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 3 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Log Offset Compensation The gain of A4U503 is set to unity with A4R539 and A4R540 combining for a gain of 0 5 Therefore the gain from A4U503 pin 3 to A4U508 pin 3 should be 0 5 Log Gain Compensation The gain of A4U508 is nominally 6 8 measuring from pin 3 to pin
448. r use Multiple error messages may exist simultaneously Refer to Viewing Multiple Messages below The following information can be found in this section Viewing Multiple Messages Error Message Elimination System Analyzer Programming Errors 100 to 150 ADC Errors 200 to 299 LO and RF Hardware Firmware Failures 300 to 399 YTO Loop Errors 300 to 301 Roller PLL Errors 302 to 316 YTO Loop Errors 317 to 320 Roller Oscillator Errors 321 to 329 YTO Loop Error 331 600 MHz Reference Loop 333 YTO Leveling Loop 334 Sampling Oscillator 335 10 MHz Reference 336 Fractional N PLL 337 YTO Loop Settling Errors 351 to 354 Sampling Oscillator 355 Span Accuracy Calibration Errors 356 to 361 Automatic IF Errors 400 to 599 System Errors 600 to 651 Digital and Checksum Errors 700 to 799 EEROM Checksum Errors 700 to 704 Program ROM Checksum Errors 705 to 710 RAM Check Errors 711 to 716 Microprocessor Error 717 Battery Problem 718 Model Number Error 719 System Errors 750 to 759 Fast ADC Error 760 Option Module Errors 800 to 899 User Generated Errors 900 to 999 Viewing Multiple Messages Although multiple errors may exist the spectrum analyzer displays only one error message at a time To view any additional messages do the following 1 Press and MORE f OF 2 2 Press RECALL ERRORS An error message is displayed in the active function block General Troubleshoo
449. rd Singapore Pte Ltd 38 Bei San Huan XI Road 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji 150 Beach Road huang Yu Shu Tokyo 192 Japan 29 00 Gateway West lai Dian District 81 426 60 2111 Singapore 0718 Jeijing China 65 291 9088 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Hewlett Packard Taiwan ith Floor H P Building 137 Fu Hsing North Road laipeli Taiwan 886 2 712 0404 General Information 1 17 Adjustment Procedures Introduction This chapter contains information on automated and manual adjustment procedures Perform the automated procedures using the HP 85629B test and adjustment module TAM Never perform adjustments as routine maintenance Adjustments should be performed after a repair or performance test failure Refer to Table 2 1 to for which adjustments to perform Automated Procedures Using the TAM Front End Cal adjustment M anual Procedures High Voltage Power Supply Adjustment Display Adjustment IF Bandpass Adjustment IF Amplitude Adjustments DC Log Amplifier Adjustments sampling Oscillator Adjustment YTO Adjustment LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment Frequency Response Adjustment Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO 10 MHz Reference Adjustment TCXO Option 103 Demodulator Adjustment External Mixer Bias Adjustment External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Adjustment 16 MHz PLL Adjustment 600 MHz Reference Adjustment
450. rd part number 2 The part number check digit CD 3 The total quantity Qty in the assembly This quantity is given only once at the first appearance of the part in the list 4 The description of the part 5 A five digit code indicating a typical manufacturer of the part 6 The manufacturer part number Firmware Dependent Part Numbers Refer to the firmware note entitled HP 8560 Series HP 85620A and HP 85629B Firmware Note included with each HP 8560E Series spectrum analyzer 5 2 Replaceable Parts Table 5 1 Reference Designations Abbreviations and Multipliers REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS A Assembly AT Attenuator Isolator Limiter Termination B Fan Motor BT Battery C Capacitor CP Coupler CR Diode Diode Thyristor Step Recovery Diode Varactor DC Directional Coupler DL Delay Line DS Annunciator Lamp Light Emitting Diode LED Signaling Device Visible E Miscellaneous Electrical Part A BSC BTN Across Flats Acrylic Air Dry Method Ampere ADJ Adjust Adjustment 4NSI American National Standards Institute formerly USASI ASA ASSY Assembly AWG American Wire Gage CD B Fuse Filter Circulator Electrical Connector Stationary Portion Jack Relay Coil Inductor Meter Miscellaneous Mechanical Part Electrical Connector Movable Portion Plug Silicon Controlled Y Rectifier SCR Transistor Triode Thyristor Z Resistor Thermistor Switch Transfo
451. re adjusted to bring these points within the capture range of the main loop The YTO FM coil is adjusted to place the 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal at the center vertical graticule in a 20 MHz span FREQUENCY COUNTER SPECTRUM TN ANALYZER ADAPTER SMA Al4 FREQ CONTROL SK19 AI5 RF Figure 2 13 YTO Adjustment Setup Equipment Microwave frequency counter 0 cece eee eee HP 5343A Option 001 Adapters Type Ny mi o BNC Stee Cen eae nods 1250 1476 N f to APC 3 5 f Option 026 1250 1745 APC 3 5 X1 fo APC 35 een qs 5061 5311 Cables 122 cm ASI bises du Sed d HP 10503A UP NOE Su MC 8120 1578 Adjustment Procedures 2 37 7 YTO Adjustment Procedure Note This adjustment cannot be performed if preselected external mixer mode is selected SAVELOCK ON OFF function must be OFF YTO Main Coil Adjustments L 10 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold down the 15 RF and Al4 frequency control assemblies Disconnect the 50 Q termination from the first LO OUTPUT Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 13 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Move the jumper on A14J23 from the NORM position pins 1 and 2 jumpered to the TEST position pins 2 and 3 jumpered See Figure 2 14 for the location on the Al4 fre
452. refer to Log Offset Log Expand in this chapter Continue with step 13 if the problem involves on screen amplitude errors which appear to originate in the video chain Press and IF ON OFF until OFF is underlined Monitor A3TP9 with an oscilloscope If the voltage is not approximately 1 Vdc troubleshoot the Log Amplifier on 4 Refer to the IF troubleshooting procedure in Chapter 9 IF Section To confirm proper video input to the video circuit set the spectrum analyzer to Log 10 dB per division and change the reference level in 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to j 30 dBm At each 10 dB step the input voltage should change 100 mV The input level should be 0 6 Vdc for a j 30 dBm reference level 8 14 ADC Interface Section Note The on screen amplitude level will probably not change as expected since the video circuitry is assumed to be faulty 15 Monitor A3TP14 while stepping the reference level from 10 dBm to j 30 dBm If the voltage does not step approximately 100 mV per 10 dB step refer to Video in this chapter 16 If the Video MUX is working properly monitor 15 with the oscilloscope and step the reference level from 10 dBm to 30 dBm If the voltage does not change 100 mV per 10 dB step refer to Video Filter in this chapter 17 If the voltage at A3TP15 is correct move the oscilloscope probe to A3TP17 and step the reference level between 10 dBm and 1 30 dBm If the voltage does not cha
453. responding to the X length AX is converted to current by R274 If the voltage is negative it is amplified by 2 in A2U210C converted to current by A2R246 and added to the current from A2R274 This effectively turns both negative and positive voltages into positive currents hence absolute value 1 Short A2J201 pin 13 to ground A2TP3 2 Connect channel A of an oscilloscope to A2J201 pin 2 Connect channel B to A2U210D 14 3 Set an oscilloscope to the following settings Amplitude Sedlo ees eR eU RARE AE de mrt mu ess 10 V div SWeep TUIS ae cuiii d Eod S A P SEU RN Ims div Bruson MT om Ge a Alem Gee External m Externally trigger the oscilloscope off the signal at A2U207 pin 8 LBRIGHT 5 The waveforms should look like those illustrated in Figure 10 9 If the waveform at J201 pin 2 is bad troubleshoot the X line generator function block D of the A2 controller schematic sheet 1 of 4 6 If the waveform at U210D pin 14 is bad troubleshoot the Z output circuit function block M of A2 controller schematic sheet 1 of 4 7 Remove the short from J201 pin 13 to ground Short A2J201 pin 1 to ground 10 0 V div 0 00 v 1 00 ms div 0 000 s ad abd L pL LLLI IL LL F LII ILL U210D 14 SK198 Figure 10 9 Delta X Waveform 8 Move the oscilloscope channel A probe to 5201 pin 14 Controller Section 10 1 1 9 The waveforms shou
454. rformance Test Failure of this performance test indicates a possible problem with the spectrum analyzer IF gain circuits Assuming no major IF problems causing IF adjustment errors IF gain problems in the first 50 dB of IF gain REF LVLs of 0 dBm to 50 dBm with 10 dB ATTEN are a result of faults on the A5 IF Assembly IF gain problems in the next 60 dB of IF gain REF LVLs of 60 dBm to 110 dBm 10 dB ATTEN result from log amplifier faults on the A4 assembly A signal level of 5 dBm is required at input A5J3 for displaying a signal at top screen with 10 dB input attenuation and a dBm reference level Isolate IF gain problems on the log amplifier assembly 4 with the following steps I On the spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY 1 Ghz AMPLITUDE 50 dBm 2 Press and IF AD3 OFF 3 Disconnect cable W27 coax 3 from A5J5 and connect cable W27 to the output of a signal generator 4 Set the signal generator controls as follows Gey Str rustico BOS 10dBm Fredueney EA HE ele es cae a racc hable es 10 7 MHz 5 Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and the spectrum analyzer REF LVL in 10 dB steps The signal displayed by the spectrum analyzer should remain at the reference level for each step If the signal deviates from the reference level troubleshoot the video offset circuitry on the A4 assembly 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 with
455. ring the assembly and 16 assembly in Option 007 For Option 007 spectrum analyzers Lift up the Al FADC assembly and swing it out of the spectrum analyzer Do not remove any cables Lift up the CRT driver assembly and disconnect A6A1W2 from 1746 Do not remove any other cables from the assembly Disconnect the tie wraps from the A6A1 assembly cables and remove the A6A1 high voltage assembly from the spectrum analyzer TE e lt TE co s 115e Figure 4 13 Fast ADC and Al7 CRT Driver Mounting Screws Replacement l Secure the A6A1 high voltage assembly to the A6 power supply using three panhead screws Connect ribbon cable A6A1W1 to A6J5 Snap post accelerator cable A6A1W3 to the CRT assembly Place the black grommet protecting the post accelerator cable into the CRT shield Ensure that all cables are safely routed and will not be damaged when securing the A6 cover Secure the power supply cover shield to the power supply using three flathead screws 1 See Figure 4 23 One end of the cover fits into a slot provided in the rear frame assembly Ensure that the extended portion of the cover shield is seated in the shield wall groove Connect AGA1W2 to A17J6 4 26 Assembly Replacement 10 11 Procedure 7 A6A1 High Voltage Assembly Place the AI7 CRT Driver assembly into the center deck mounting slot nearest the CRT Use caution when routin
456. rmer Terminal Board Thermocouple Test Point Integrated Circuit Microcircuit Electron Tube Breakdown Diode Zener Voltage Regulator Cable Wire Jumper Socket Crystal Unit Piezoelectric Quartz Tuned Cavity Tuned Circuit Basic CNDCT Conducting Button Conductive Conductivity Conductor CONT Contact Capacitance Capacitor Center Tapped Cermet Cold Compression Continuous Control Controller CONV Converter CPRSN Compression Carbon Composition CUP PT Cup Point Plastic C W Cadmium Card Cord CER Ceramic 3CD Binary Coded Decimal 3D Board Bundle JE CU Beryllium Copper of Connector Bearing Boring 3RS Brass CHAM Chamfer CHAR Character Characteristic Charcoal CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Clockwise Continuous Wave D Deep Depletion Depth Diameter Direct Current Darlington Replaceable Parts 5 3 Table 5 1 Reference Designations Abbreviations and Multipliers 2 of 4 DAP GL Diallyl Phthalate Glass DBL Double DCDR Decoder DEG Degree D HOLE D Shaped Hole DIA Diameter DIP Dual In Line Package DIP SLDR Dip Solder D MODE Depletion Mode DO Package Type Designation DP Deep Depth Dia metric Pitch Dip DP3T Double Pole Three Throw DPDT Double Pole Double Throw DWL Dowell E E R E Ring EXT Extended Extension External Extinguish F Fahrenheit Farad Female
457. roubleshooting the Log Amplifier with the TAM Troubleshooting A5 with the TAM Troubleshooting the Cal Oscillator with the TAM Automatic IF Adjustment Parameters Adjusted Requirements Performance Test Failures IF Gain Uncertainty Performance Test Scale Fidelity Performance Test Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests Log Amplifier P O A4 Assembly Log Amplifier Linear Amplifiers Video Offset Video Output Frequency Counter Prescaler Conditioner AM FM Demodulator 4 8 kHz IF Filters 10 7 MHz IF Filters 4 8 kHz and 10 7 MHz IF Filters 10 6952 MHz VCXO Input Switch LO Switch Synchronous Detector Limiter Isolation Amplifier Detector Mixer Log Offset Gain Compensation Log Offset Compensation Log Gain Compensation Video MUX A5 IF Assembly IF Signature Common IF Signature Problems MHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems 30 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems 3 kHz and 10 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Problems Step Gains Cal Oscillator P O A4 Assembly Cal Oscillator Unlock at Beginning of IF Adjust IF Section 9 1 Inadequate CAL OSC AMPTD Range 300 Hz to 3 kHz Resolution Bandwidth Out of Specification Low Pass Filter Sweep Generator AM FM Demodulation Audio Amplifier and Speaker 9 2 IF Section Note Because the cal oscillator circuitry on the A4 assembly is such an integral part of the IF adjustment always check this assembly first before checking the rest of the IF Section A faulty cal oscillator can cause ma
458. rque wrench to tighten all SMA connectors to 113 Ncm 10 in Ib HP part number 8710 1655 can be used for this purpose The style of torque wrench may vary but in all cases do not tighten the connectors beyond the point at which the torque wrench clicks or breaks away 4 26 Assembly Replacement gt XD 2 Procedure 6 A7 through Assemblies Figure 4 14 HP 6562E Assembly Locations Assembly Replacement 4 29 AT First LO Distribution Amplifier Removal 1 Remove the two screws securing the assembly to the spectrum analyzer center deck 2 Use a 5 16 inch wrench to disconnect W38 and W39 at A7J1 and A7J2 3 Disconnect W46 at A7J3 4 Disconnect W42 at the front panel First LO OUTPUT connector Loosen W42 at A7J5 5 Remove W12 from the A7 assembly 6 Remove the assembly and disconnect W34 Replacement 1 Use a 5 16 inch wrench to attach W34 to A7J4 and W42 to A7J5 2 Connect W38 to A7J1 and connect W39 to A7J2 3 Connect 46 to A7J3 4 Connect W42 to the front panel First LO OUTPUT connector 5 Connect cable W12 to the A7 assembly 6 Use two panhead screws to secure A7 to the center deck Be sure to attach the ground lug on the screw near the LO IN connector of A7 Torque all RF cable connections to 113 Ncm 10 1n Ib 4 30 Assembly Replacement A8 Low Band Mixer A8 Low Band Mixer Removal l Place the spectrum analyzer upside down on the work bench with Al4 and 15 folded out t
459. s Bit 9 Read clock disabled Read clock enabled ADC Interface Section 8 35 Table 8 13 Control Word at Primary Address U3 and U4 continued State LREADMEM mH 0 LREADADDR 0 Bit 12 LRATELATCH NN 0 Writes to the sample rate latch are enabled Bit 13 LRLSHSWP Releases HSWP strobe Release HSWP strobe disabled 0 Release HSWP strobe enabled 0 0 Description Enables read FADC memory Read FADC memory disabled Read FADC memory enabled Enables read trigger address latch Reads from trigger address latch disabled Reads from trigger address latch enabled Enables load sample rate latch Writes to the sample rate latch are disabled Load digital video trigger level disabled Load digital video trigger level enabled LLOADTRIG Enables load video trigger level Reference Clock Peak pit detection mode control Enables pit negative peak detection mode if LSAMPLE Bit 4 is also high Enables peak detection mode if LSAMPLE Bit 4 is high Refer to function block B of the fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The reference clock circuitry takes the 8 MHz CMOS square wave clock from the A2 controller assembly via W59 coax 839 and triples the frequency to 24 MHz Inverters U5A and USB provide the proper match for the 8 MHz clock input and also the desired drive level
460. s FULL 4 Approximately 8 seconds after starting the FULL IF ADJ check for negative going parabolas similar to half sine waves 5 ms wide and approximately 4 V at their peak Refer to Chapter 9 IF Section for more information on the A4 Log Amp Cal Oscillator Assembly 7 36 General Troubleshooting 583 585 586 994 290 589 590 991 292 229 224 595 596 o9 598 227 RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW RBW LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG LOG 30K 100K 300K 1M 30K 100K 300K 1M AMPL AMPL TUNE OF DL ATTN PLE OFST GAIN Unable to adjust 30 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 300 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 1 MHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 30 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 100 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 300 kHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust 1 MHz resolution bandwidth Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Unable to adjust amplitude of log scale Limiter calibration tune error from DC logger calibration Attenuator calibration offset error from DC logger calibration Attenuator calibration absolute error from DC logger calibration Fidelity error from DC logger calibration Fidelity offset error from DC logger calibration Fidelity offset unstable from DC logger calibration Fidelity gain error from DC logger calibration System Err
461. s SCREW MACH M3 5 x 0 6 6MM LG 28480 0515 088 SCREW MACH M5 x 0 8 12MM LG PAN HD 28480 0515 124 SCREW METRIC SPECIALTY M4 x 0 7 THD 7MM 28480 0515 133 FRONT HANDLE ASS Y 28480 5061 950 MOUNT FLANGE 28480 5061 968 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 16MM LG PAN HD 2848 0515 1101 WRENCH HEX KEY 557160 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 2848071 5958 657 RACK SLIDE KIT SLIDE CHAS 25 IN LG 21 84 IN TRVL 01561 C858 2 Includes Parts Listed Below Slides Cannot be Ordered Separately SCREW MACH 5 x 0 8 14MM LG PAN HD 2848 01 0515 094 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 12MM LG 28480 0515 101 SCREW MACH M4 x 0 7 12MM LG PAN HD 284801 0515 0908 NUT CHANNEL 4 x 0 7 3 5MM THK 10 3MM WD 28480 0535 0084 MAJOR ASSEMBLIES FRONT FRAME ASSEMBLY not available as a field replacement The Al assembly includes the front frame front faceplate front panel keys and other hardware Refer to Figure 5 5 for individual part numbers Table 5 3 Replaceable Parts continued Reference HP Part C Qty Designation Number D Description Mfr Part Code Number 1 1 08562 60140 6 BD AY KEYBOARD 28480 08562 6014 1 1 5062 8259 CABLE ASSEMBLY RIBBON 5062 8259 KEYBOARD A1A1J1 to A3J602 1 2 0960 0745 RPG ASSEMBLY Includes Cable 0960 0745 1 1 8120 8153 CABLE ASSEMBLY PROBE POWER LED 8120 8153 A2 08564 60010 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 08564 60010 A3 08563 60098 INTERFACE ASSEMBLY 08563 60098 A4 08563 60
462. s 10dBm SWEEP Single Press TRACE A on the HP 8566A B Trigger a sweep on the signal generator and on the HP 8566A B simultaneously The HP 8566A B should display a 3 dB bandwidth of approximately 500 Hz Reconnect W27 coax 3 to A5J5 and W29 coax 7 to A5J3 4 8 kHz and 10 7 MHz IF Filters 1 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press PRESET FREQUENCY 300 MHz SPAN 600 Hz CAL and IF ADJ OFF 2 Disconnect W29 coax 7 from A5J3 Set the signal generator for a 10 7 MHz signal at 60 dBm and connect it to A5J3 3 Fine tune the frequency of the signal generator to center the signal on the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer display Set the signal generator to sweep one 2 kHz span about this center frequency 4 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press SGL swP 5 Set the HP 8566A B to 4 8 kHz center frequency and 2 kHz span Caution Damage to the HP 8566A B results if a dc block is not used The HP 8566A B and many other spectrum analyzers have dc coupled inputs and cannot tolerate dc voltages on their inputs 6 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT rear panel of the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer through a 20 dB attenuator and dc block to the input of the HP 8566A B Set the sweep time of the HP 8566A B to 10 seconds 7 Set the HP 8566A B to single trigger and press TRACE A CLEAR WRITE Trigger a sweep on the HP 8566A B and on the signal generator simultaneously The
463. s not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Roller fine adjust DAC sensitivity less than or equal to 0 During the LO adjust routine the fine adjust DAC is set to two different values and the MAINSENSE voltage is measured at each setting ERR 328 is set if the difference between these voltages is or negative This is typically the result of the main roller loop being unlocked This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Roller coarse adjust DAC sensitivity less than or equal to 0 During the LO adjust routine the coarse adjust DAC is set to two different values and the MAINSENSE voltage is measured at each setting ERR 329 is set if the difference between these voltages is or negative This is typically the result of the main roller loop being unlocked This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware This error rarely occurs but is usually indicative of a digital hardware failure Invalid YTO frequency Firmware attempted to set the YTO to a frequenc
464. s absent Note If necessary perform the display adjustments after performing the following adjustment BNc CABLE PC BOARD PROP 59 10 MHZ REF IN OUT A3 INTERFACE 1 SPECTRUM dm FREQUENCY ANALYZER 000 COUNTER ag A2 CONTROLLER sj140e Figure 2 26 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Setup Equipment Mictowave frequency counter HP 5343A E MEE a EAS HP 10432A Adjustment Procedures 2 63 17 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Procedure 1 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and fold out the A2 controller and A3 interface assemblies Use a pc board prop to hold up the A3 interface assembly as shown in Figure 2 26 2 Connect the equipment as shown if Figure 2 26 The ground lead of the 10 1 probe connects to A2TP10 and the probe tip connects to A2TP101 3 The 16 MHz PLL adjustment location is shown in Figure 2 27 A2 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY TP10 R152 16 MHz PLL ADJ TP101 sj141e Figure 2 27 16 MHz PLL Adjustment Location 4 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Wait until the spectrum analyzer power on adjustments have completed 5 Set the microwave frequency counter as follows SAM PIC TAC os Ae Ad E oe e P RO E Fully counterclockwise 10 Hz 500 MHz 500 MHz 26 5 GHz 10 Hz 500 MHz IORA IVINS I
465. s bad suspect either 0102 or 0132 The waveform should have sharp edges Display Power Supply Section 13 13 Line Fuse Blowing l If the line fuse blows with the LINE switch off suspect either the input filter or the power switch cable assembly If the line fuse blows when the spectrum analyzer is turned on disconnect the power cord and lift the drain of A6Q102 from TP108 If the line fuse still blows suspect CR102 through CR105 If the fuse does not burn out immediately check A6TP108 for a voltage of between 215 V and 350 V If the voltage at TP108 is correct disconnect the power cord Wait 60 seconds for the high voltage to discharge Remove and check A6Q102 If Q102 is shorted 0103 0104 108 0132 and 0207 may also be shorted The Buck Regulator procedure in the Dead Power Supply section can be used to check the above components If 0102 is working properly measure the resistance between TP102 and 101 positive ohmmeter lead to TP102 If the resistance is less than 1 suspect either Q103 or Q104 in the DC DC Converter Supply Restarting Every 1 5 Seconds Kick Start See function blocks G D I and L of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component level information binder If there is a short on the power supply or on one of the other assemblies the power supply will attempt to kick start Every 1 5 seconds the supply will attempt to start but will be s
466. s for Service Service Tag If you are returning the instrument to Hewlett Packard for servicing fill in and attach a blue service tag Service tags are supplied in the back of this chapter Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem If you have recorded any error messages that appeared on the screen or have completed a performance test record or have any other specific data on the performance of the spectrum analyzer please send a copy of this information with the unit Original Packaging Before shipping pack the unit in the original factory packaging materials if they are available If the original materials are unavailable identical packaging materials may be acquired through any Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Descriptions of the packaging materials are listed in Figure 1 2 1 6 General Information Other Packaging Caution Spectrum analyzer damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials They do not adequately cushion the equipment or prevent it from shifting in the carton They cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the spectrum analyzer fan Repackage the spectrum analyzer in the original packaging materials or with commercially available materials described in steps 4 and 5 below 1 Attach a completed service tag to the instrument 2 Install the front panel cover
467. s mM GROMMET V AG6A1W3 CL P LEAD INSULATED HANDLE s 130e Figure 4 2 Discharging High Voltage on the CRT Assembly Replacement 4 7 Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT 17 18 19 20 21 22 4 PILACES Wu2 WH 1 2 ENEATH CABLES 112 Figure 4 3 9 A18 Line Switch Assembly Mounting Screws Remove screw 2 securing the A9 input attenuator assembly to the center support on the front frame See Figure 4 3 Use a 5 16 inch open end wrench to disconnect W41 from the front panel INPUT 502 connector Loosen the opposite end of W41 Disconnect W42 from A7 and the front panel First LO OUTPUT connector Disconnect W36 coax 86 from the front panel IF INPUT connector Remove the VOLUME knob and potentiometer from the front panel If necessary drill out the nut driver used to remove the VOLUME potentiometer and cover the tip with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the enameled front panel Use a 9 16 inch nut driver to remove the dress nut holding the front panel CAL OUTPUT connector to the front panel If necessary drill out the nut driver to fit over the BNC 4 8 Assembly Replacement 22 24 29 26 27 28 29 30 3 32 Procedure 2 Al Front Frame Al8 CRT connectors and cover the tip with heatshrink tubing or tape to avoid scratching the enameled front panel Loosen screw 3 securing the line switch assembly to the front frame
468. s not found When prompted for the power sensor serial number enter only the last five digits the serial number suffix You are then prompted for a cal factor frequency and for the cal factor These frequency Cal factor pairs need not be entered in order of increasing frequency the program inserts the pairs in their proper place All frequencies should be entered in MHz Note To use the HP 8485A it must have a calibration factor at 10 MHz Standard HP 8485As have calibration factors down to only 50 MHz A 50 MHz Cal Factor must be entered in order to calibrate the power sensor Some power sensors do not include a 50 MHz Cal Factor on their chart or calibration record it is listed as part of the Calibration Procedure on the case of the power sensor If a mistake is made entering a cal factor enter the frequency of the erroneous cal factor at the next frequency prompt Enter the correct cal factor at the next prompt If an error was made entering the frequency value enter the erroneous frequency at the next frequency prompt and a zero for the cal factor to delete that frequency point Once all cal factor data for a power sensor is entered enter an S at the next frequency prompt The power sensor data is then stored on disk Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 9 Viewing and Editing a Power Sensor Data File View Edit to view or edit a power sensor data file Only data files listed on the screen can be viewed or edited If a fil
469. sample rate When the post trigger counter reaches its terminal count the LSTOP signal goes low and disables the static RAM address counter from further counting LSTOP also forces LCOUNT high in NAND gate U11D which disables the post trigger counter 15 Bit 32 K Circular Address Counter Refer to function block G of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information This 15 bit programmable circular counter provides the address lines of the static RAM U32 The counter consists of 1723 U24 U25 and U26 It counts upward from to 32767 and then back to O in a circular fashion When a trigger occurs latches U27 and U28 latch the current static RAM address so that the CPU on the A2 controller assembly can later read the latches and determine the static RAM address of the sample that was taken when the trigger occurred The CPU loads the address counter during read mode by first setting LLOADADDR bit 6 of the fast ADC control word and LREADCLK bit 9 of the fast ADC control word to their low state The CPU then writes the 16 bit load value to the CPU secondary address The rising edge of ACLK then latches the 16 bit data into the address counter After the address counter is loaded by the CPU during read mode the static RAM is read by the CPU The RAM is read by first setting LREADMEM bit 10 of the fast ADC control word and LREADCLK bit 9 of the fast ADC control w
470. scribed in Procedure 5 A2 A3 4 and 5 Assemblies Replacement steps 5 through 10 Fold up and 15 assemblies as described in Procedure 9 and 15 Assemblies Replacement steps 9 through 11 Replacement without Contact Removal Tool l Lay the replacement line switch cable assembly between the side frame and main deck Ensure that the action of the switch is working properly Attach the left side frame to the deck and rear frame See Figure 4 27 Screw Q uantity 1 SCREW MACH M4 X 0 7 8 mm LG FLAT HD SEE Went oid 3 2 SCREW MACH X 0 5 35 mm LG FLAT HD 2 3 SCREW MACH X 0 5 6 mm LG FLAT HD 6 Dress W3 between the main deck standoff and the side frame See Figure 4 25 Attach the Al Front Frame assembly and the 18 CRT assembly as described in Procedure 2 Al Front Frame AI8 CRT Replacement steps 1 through 15 Place LED A1WIDSI into the line switch assembly Attach the line switch assembly into the front frame using the captive panhead screw Be sure to connect the line switch grounding lug with the screw Assembly Replacement 4 53 Procedure 14 W3 Line Switch Cable 11 12 13 14 15 1 6 PLACES 6 PLACES 6 PLACES sm113e Figure 4 27 Side Frame Mounting Screws On the top side of the spectrum analyzer redress W3 Connect W3 to A6J2 Dress W3 into the slotted opening in the deck C
471. signal level at the INPUT in the band being Mi nel a a frequency must be tuned to the frequenc e of the signal a input of the 8562E Press SPAN OHz then CAL IF ADJ ON OFF so OFF is underlined Press SGL SWP Measured using an active probe and an additional spectrum analyzer Note 1 also applies to these levels FIGURE 12 8 HP 8562E RF SECTION SIGNAL LEVEL RANGE dBm NOTE 2 gt 4 22 J601 RF SECTION lt 10 7 MHz IF OUT TO A5J3 15dBm Note 1 J803 lt OND IF OUT OPT 001 TO REAR PANEL J10 SIGNAL LEVEL RANGE dBm NOTE 1 TROUBLESHOOT ING 18 20 25 30 30 BLOCK DIAGRAM 13 Display Power Supply Section The display power supply section contains the power supply 6 1 HV module 17 val driver and 18 CRT Figure 13 1 illustrates the section block diagram Table 13 1 lists SIQ na versus pin numbers for power cable W1 Troubleshooting Using the TAM Blank Display Using the TAM Blank Display Blanking Signal Display Distortion Focus Problems Intensity Problems A6 Power Supply Assembly Dead Power Supply Line Fuse Blowing Supply Restarting Every 1 5 Seconds Kick Start Low Voltage Supplies High Voltage Supplies CRT Supply Dropping Out Buck Regulator Control DC DC Converter Control Power Up Warning m power supply and A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal curren
472. soa 4 eae wwe eee 4 7 39 Model Number Error 719 7 39 System Errors 750 10759 5 6 23 X xw Xx Re Ye 1 40 Fast ADC Error 760 BE gl uw dr e MR EE EUR d ie 7 40 Option Module Errors 800 to 399 a 7 40 User Generated Errors 900 to 999 2 7 41 Block Diagram Description a 7 42 RE SCHON 6 as how 4X 444 9 25 7 43 Ad 5 6 Se E NO eb 7 43 8 Low Band 7 43 A9 Input Attenuator 322 cedo we Ow Lecce 7 44 A10 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer 7 44 AU NTO ue v ee 5 Se ende ES Se 7 44 Al3 Second Converter 7 44 Second IF Amplifier part of 15 UR ar E RE eI AS 7 44 Third Converter part of A15 Pe 7 45 Flatness Compensation Amplifiers part of 15 7 45 Synthesizer SectlOl e se amp ee dom eh E OR Ee eo 7 46 Sweepme the Bist uou eo 4 7 46 Reference PLL part of 15 gh ets dh 7 46 YTO PLL A7 All part of A14 part af 15 6 4 7 46 Contents 5 Offset Lock Loop part of AIS 7 47 Fractional PLL part of Al 7 47 IF Section EE 7 48 A4 Log Amplifier Cal Oscillator Ascembl
473. spectrum analyzer It controls the RF synthesizer and IF sections through address and data lines on the W2 control cable analog bus Analog signals from these sections are monitored by the ADC interface section ADC analog to digital converter circuit The ADC interface section includes the interface assembly 1 1 keyboard and A1A2 RPG front panel knob The A3 assembly includes log expand video filter peak detector track and hold real time DACs RF gain DACs 10 V reference and ADC circuitry The digital section of the assembly includes ADC ASM sweep trigger keyboard interface RPG interface and analog bus interface circuitry ADC The spectrum analyzer can digitize signals with either the main ADC on the A3 interface assembly or the optional Al6 fast ADC Option 007 The main ADC is used for digitizing video signals when the sweep time is gt 30 ms and various other signals such as PLL error voltages The fast ADC is used only to digitize video signals for sweep times lt 30 ms Main ADC part of A3 interface assembly For slower sweep times lt 30 ms the spectrum analyzer uses a successive approximation type of ADC The main ADC has a 10 bit resolution but it is realized with 12 bit hardware The ADC algorithmic state machine ADC ASM controls the interface between the start stop control and the ADC itself switching between positive and negative peak detectors when the NORMAL detector mode is selected and switching
474. ss is compensated by step gain amplifiers in the IF section Control for the amplifiers originates from two DACs on the A3 Interface assembly DAC values are interpolated approximately every 17 MHz based on data obtained during the frequency response adjustment The 15 flatness compensation control circuitry converts the RF GAIN voltage from into two currents RF GAINI and GAIN2 These currents drive PIN diodes in the flatness compensation amplifiers General Troubleshooting 7 45 Synthesizer Section The first LO uses four PLLs to phase lock to the internal 10 MHz standard in the instrument See Figure 7 5 The reference PLL supplies reference frequencies for the instrument The three remaining PLLs tune and phase lock the LO through its frequency range To tune the LO to a particular frequency the instrument microprocessor must set the programmable feedback dividers N and reference dividers R contained in each PLL Sweeping the First LO The spectrum analyzer uses a method called lock and roll to sweep the first LO All YTO for LO spans gt 2 MHz This involves phase locking the spectrum analyzer at the start frequency during the retrace of the sweep then sweeping through the desired frequency range in an unlocked condition The sweep ramp which sweeps the LO during the roll part of the lock and roll process is generated on the Al4 frequency control assembly It is applied to either the All YTO main coil or the All YTO
475. st 10 MHz ADJ on A15U302 for a frequency counter reading of 300 000000 MHz 30 Hz 6 Replace the dustcap on A15U302 2 52 Adjustment Procedures 13 Demodulator Adjustment 13 Demodulator Adjustment Assembly Adjusted 4 log amplifier Cal oscillator assembly Related Performance Test There is no related performance test for this adjustment Description A 5 kHz peak deviation FM signal is applied to the INPUT 50 The detected audio is monitored by an oscilloscope FM DEMOD is adjusted to peak the response displayed on the oscilloscope DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER SIGNAL GENERATOR 99999 ADAPTER RF OUTPUT ADAPTER sjl50e Figure 2 2 1 Demodulator Adjustment Setup Equipment AM FM signal HP 8640B OSCIIIOSCOPE E qi dd aea EROR A HP 54501A Adapters m to BNC f 2 required 1250 1476 Type f to APC 3 5 f Option 026 only 1250 1745 Adjustment Procedures 2 53 13 Demodulator Adjustment Cables BNC TAI OI as adstare dado HP 10503A OSCINOSEODE PLOW sere ate i o o cem P ooo pe Dd een aes 10432 Procedure Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 2 21 2 Connect the oscillosc
476. storage location 3 6 mechanical parts 5 17 5 25 memory for frequency response adjustment software 3 2 3 6 microprocessor See controller MISSING ETE software message 3 10 3 11 mixer amplitude adjustment 2 57 mixer bias adjustment 2 56 Index 5 mixer detector log amplifier troubleshooting 9 20 N noise See phase noise 0 ocxo 1 1 50 OCXO adjustment 2 48 OCXO removal and replacement 4 56 offset lock loop 7 47 11 20 See also sampler offset PLL phase noise 11 44 operation verification mass storage file 3 8 option 908 5 7 option 909 5 7 options See instrument variations ordering information 5 1 P packaging 1 6 8 packaging part numbers 1 7 part ordering 5 1 peak detectors troubleshooting 8 19 performance test failures troubleshooting 9 12 performance tests recommended test equipment 1 9 15 phase locked loops 11 13 See also PLL phase noise fractional N 11 44 int ext reference 11 43 locked spans 11 43 offset PLL 11 44 problems 1 1 43 unlocked spans 1 1 43 YTO 11 44 PLL locked at wrong frequency 11 13 postscaler 11 21 1 1 32 power cable connections 13 2 power meter frequency response adjustment software 3 10 power sensor frequency response adjustment 3 9 power sensors frequency response adjustment 3 6 power sensor utilities menu softkeys 3 12 add file 3 12 delete file 3 12 list files 3 12 system file 3 12 view edit 3 12 power supply 13 12 bl
477. sures MAINSENSE at the beginning of each sweep and if the voltage is outside certain limits the main roller pretune DAC is adjusted to bring OFFSENSE within the proper range ERR 304 is set if this cannot be accomplished This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Unable to adjust MAINSENSE close to 0 volts using the coarse adjust DAC The coarse adjust and fine adjust DAC are used together to set MAINSENSE to 0 volts with the loop opened ERR 305 is set if the coarse adjust DAC cannot bring MAINSENSE close enough to O volts for the fine adjust DAC to bring MAINSENSE to exactly 0 volts This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware Unable to adjust MAINSENSE to 0 volts using the fine adjust DAC The coarse adjust and fine adjust DAC are used together to set MAINSENSE to 0 volts with the loop opened ERR 306 is set if the fine adjust DAC cannot bring MAINSENSE to 0 volts This error is not applicable to HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzers If it occurs in an HP 8560 E Series spectrum analyzer suspect a problem with the model number identification in the spectrum analyzer firmware General Troubleshooting 7 21
478. switch which drives the loop integrator Loop bandwidth switches vary the loop bandwidth to minimize noise sidebands The sampling oscillator must produce low noise because the A15U100 sampler multiplies noise by a factor of approximately 24 Table 11 6 lists the prescaler and postscaler divide numbers in the offset loop reference divide chain for each of the 16 discrete frequencies to which the offset lock loop may be set It also indicates what the reference frequency into the phase frequency divide chain is Refer to function block AN on the RF schematic Troubleshooting Check loop references steps 1 and 2 1 Use an active probe and spectrum analyzer to confirm the presence of the following reference to the offset lock loop input A15TP404 300 MHz at 5 dBm 2 If this signal is not correct refer to Unlocked Reference PLL in this chapter Check levels into mixer steps 3 13 3 Set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings CODICE MeQuenNCY db RAM e FEE Ades oe ie Geese 300 MHz Salis dete truco ied eeu ure ole 0 Hz lex Rd le single 4 Force the PLL to unlock by shorting A15X201 pin 1 to A15X201 pin 5 with a short length of wire Then connect a dc power supply to 15 200 pin 16 5 Monitor A15TP201 with an active probe spectrum analyzer combination Vary the dc supply until the frequency of the sampling oscillator 15 296 MHz 6 The voltage required to tune
479. t 18 600 MHz Reference Adjustment 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Getting Started Spectrum Analyzers Controller Computer Test Equipment Warmup Time Test Equipment Wami Spectrum Analyzer Warmup Equipment Connections Computer Controller Setup HP IB Cables 10 MHz Reference Adjustment Setups Using Frequency Response Software Loading the Program Program Operation Conditions Menu Test Record Header infomation System Mass Storage File Location Power Sensors Ps Setting HP IB Storing and Loading the File Getting to the Adjust Menu Verifying the HP IB Querying the Spectrum dius zer Gud Number Exiting Frequency Response Adjustment Dual Bus Operation Sensor Utilities Menu Adding a Power Sensor Data File Viewing and Editing a Power Sensor Data File Deleting a File Changing the System Mass Storage File Location Listing Available Power Sensor Data Files Returning to the Conditions Menu Adjust Menu Single Test Calibrate Power ere List Equipment Frequency Response vraiment Tent Softkeys Conditions Menu Sensor Utilities Menu Adjust Menu Front End Cal YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM add Response Adjustment Frequency Response Adjustment Error Error Messages Beginning with Alphabetic Characters Address must be from to 30 inclusive Contents 2 2 60 2 63 2 66 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 5 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 9 3 9 3 10 3 10 3 10 3 10
480. t Jacks used throughout the spectrum analyzer The HP 85629B test and adjustment module uses the spectrum analyzer test jacks during diagnostic and adjustment procedures The pins on the test jack may be manually probed provided caution is used to prevent accidental shorting between adjacent pins Figure 7 1 illustrates the pin configuration for the test jack Line names are the same for all test jacks The following mnemonics are used MS measured signal TA test and adjustment module address line and OS output signal Test jack test points are identified on block diagrams by both the jack pin number and line name Ribbon Cables Ribbon cables are used extensively in the spectrum analyzer The following five cables use different pin numbering methods on the jacks signal names remain the same but the pin numbers vary WI power cable W2 control cable W4 option cable A3W1 interface cable A19W1 HP IB cable Figure 7 2 illustrates the pin configurations of these five cables Cables W1 and W2 use two pin numbering methods on their many jacks These methods are identified in the interconnect and block diagrams by the letters A and B next to the jack designator for example J1 A Board assembly jacks connected to W1 will always be labeled J1 Board assembly Jacks connected to W2 will always be labeled J2 7 2 General Troubleshooting TEST POINTS ON BLOCK DIAGRAM TEST POINTS ON CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY TP1 POST
481. t back to an HP 85623 until power is cycled but that is not yet necessary Before exiting the TAM I F SW program press RESTORE DUT ID Note The amount of free disk space for the system mass storage file location will decrease over time since a data file is created for each HP 85623 used with this program Once a repair is completed for a given HP 85623 its associated data file can be purged A good rule of thumb is to purge any data file which is more than 1 month old TAM Requirements For the TAM to function properly certain parts of the spectrum analyzer must be operating properly These include the CPU parts of the program ROM and program RAM the keyboard and keyboard interface and the display Even though the TAM communicates to the operator via the display some display problems can be troubleshot using the TAM This is possible by using the Print Page softkey Even if the display is dead Print Page is still active Refer to Chapter 13 Display Power Supply Section for instructions on using the TAM when the display is not functioning 7 12 General Troubleshooting Test Connectors The TAM uses a built in dc voltmeter and DAC to measure voltages on any one of the test connectors or test jacks located throughout the spectrum analyzer Revision Connectors One test connector on each assembly is reserved as a revision connector The TAM uses the revision connector to identify the assembly design revision A re
482. t found keyboard entry is a non numeric entry 5 number of instruments instruments have HP IB of HP IB address power meter model pus acad sional to be in 1 H 5 dBm range i lt source model Tbe sionals not in E 5 dBm range source model number signal not in 1 5 dBm range lt source model number gt 10 dBm signal not in 10 8 dBm range lt source model number gt has a cold oven lt source model number gt is unlevelled 4 Assembly Replacement Access to Internal Assemblies Cable Color Code Procedure 1 Spectrum Om Procedure 2 Al Front 18 CRT Procedure 3 1 1 Keyboard Front Panel Keys Procedure 4 1 2 RPG Procedure 5 A2 4 and 5 Assemblies Procedure 6 A6 Power Supply Assembly Procedure 7 A6A1 High Voltage Assembly Procedure 8 A7 through AI3 Assemblies A7 First LO Distribution Amplifier 8 Low Band Mixer eee 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 16 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 18 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 01 4 25 4 28 4 30 4 31 Contents 3 A9 Input Attenuator zd te seid do e Ne 4 32 10 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Rede We vine Ge ek Ev 4 34 uum 310 MEE 4 35 Al3 Second Converter IP 4 36 Procedure 9 14 and 15 Assembies i te
483. t the doubler circuitry Refer to function block S of the 15 RF schematic 3 If the tripler output is too low probe the output of A15U700 RF amplifier The level should be i 16 5 dBm 2 dB The level at the input of A15U700 should be i 8 5 dBm 2 dB 4 If the level at the input of A15U700 is too low suspect a faulty 100 MHz VCXO Refer to function block of the 15 RF schematic 5 On the spectrum analyzer press AUX CTRL 6 Measuring the tune voltage indicates if the 100 MHz PLL is locked Connect the ground lead the voltmeter to A15J1 pin 3 and measure the voltage at A15J700 pin 3 7 The tune voltage should be between 1 and 24 Volts If the tune voltage is incorrect place the P700 jumper on A15J700 in the TEST position pin 1 to pin 2 This sets the tune voltage for varactor A15CR700 to the nominal 13 Volts making it easier to troubleshoot the 100 MHz VCXO tripler and doubler Remember to return P700 jumper to the NORMAL position when you have finished troubleshooting the oscillator circuitry 8 If the 100 MHz oscillator is working the reason for the unlocked condition is either a problem in the 10 MHz reference or a fault in the signal path around the loop 11 16 Synthesizer Section Check 10 MHz reference to phase frequency detector steps 9 14 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 the spectrum analyzer press AUX CTRL RE Check the 10 MHz reference frequency accuracy by
484. t the signal at A15J701 to the input of the HP 8566A B spectrum analyzer Reconnect the power cord and press to turn the spectrum analyzer on A N Set the center frequency of the HP 8566A B to 600 MHz and set the frequency span and resolution bandwidth of the HP 8566A B for the best display of the 600 MHz signal 6 Set the peak of the 600 MHz signal near the top graticule line on the HP 8566A B display and set to 1 dB per division 7 Adjust 15 C750 VCXO Adjust for maximum amplitude 8 Adjust Al5 C751 Tripler Adjust for maximum amplitude The level after proper adjustment should be between 3 and 4 8 dBm typically 0 to 1 dBm 9 Reconnect W33 to A15J701 2 66 Adjustment Procedures Frequency Response Adjustment Software This chapter describes how to load and run the frequency response adjustment software included with every HP 85623 Option 915 add Service Documentation This software actually automates two manual adjustments Frequency Response Adjustment and YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Adjustment The automated test software is designed to adjust the flatness and preselector of the spectrum analyzer in a minimum amount of time The frequency response adjustment software automates the most tedious spectrum analyzer adjustment the adjustment would take over two hours if done manually The software can allow the adjustment to be performed in less than 20 minutes The frequency response adjustment requires
485. t to the printer If no failure is indicated in the printout refer to High Voltage Supplies in Chapter 13 Display Power Supply Section Controller Section 10 3 Digital Signature Analysis DSA Digital signature analysis DSA places microprocessor A2U1 in a simplified known state This simplified state consists of placing a one word instruction MOVE QUICK 0111 10 xxxx XXX0 on the data bus The microprocessor cycles through its address range continually reading the instruction Perform the following DSA procedure to test the operation of microprocessor A2U 1 1 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off 2 Move the DSA jumper on J3 located in the middle of the A2 assembly from the DISable position to the ENAble position 3 Remove jumper 2 1 A2E1 is a 16 pin dual in line package located in the middle of the A2 Assembly Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer on 4 Use an oscilloscope to confirm that address lines address strobe and chip selects are toggling at proper levels 5 Use an oscilloscope to check the address line sequencing The signal on each line starting with Al and ending with A23 should be one half the frequency of the previous line 6 If step 4 reveals problems microprocessor A2U1 is probably faulty 7 Press LINE to turn the spectrum analyzer off Replace jumper A2E1 Move the DSA jumper from connecting E5 and E6 back to connecting E6 and E7 Display Problems Line Generat
486. tainty Scale Fidelity Description This adjustment sets the output amplitude of the A4 log amp cal oscillator and the absolute amplitude of the reference 15 dB attenuator The output of the A4 log amp cal oscillator is adjusted so that a 55 dBm signal applied to the 10 7 MHz IF input on the A5 IF assembly A5J3 causes a displayed signal of 60 dBm The effect of this adjustment is visible only after the ADJ CURR IF STATE sequence is complete ADJ CURR IF STATE causes the IF gain adjustment to use the new output amplitude from the A4 log amp cal oscillator This procedure also sets the attenuator of the reference 15 dB attenuator so that a source amplitude change of 50 dB combined with a spectrum analyzer reference level change of 50 dB displays an amplitude difference of 50 dB TEST CABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZER 40 N MHz REF INPUT SYNTHESIZER FREQUENCY A5 IF BOARD 298 8 2 ggg 9 5 Goo Ge B o 222 500 P A CORREA SE CAL OSCILLATOR ee me r A5J3 ta BNC CABLE 10 MHz REF IN OUT FIL A2 SK16 Figure 2 7 IF Amplitude Adjustment Setup 2 26 Adjustment Procedures 4 IF Amplitude Adjustments Equipment Frequency Synthesizer S E E RP Ses ew eke HP 3335A Adapters Type JN On tor BNC dc cade seas 1250 1476 Cables BNC 122 HP 10503A Schuss oti
487. tector inputs in 500 ohms The unterminated gain is 1 1 Diode 114 prevents latchup during positive overdrive conditions while CR113 protects Q318 during overdrive Diode CRI17 is a 12 7 V zener that limits the peak detector output to 1 5 V Typically limiting occurs at 1 1 V 8 18 ADC Interface Section Positive Negative Peak Detectors Refer to function blocks Y and Z of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The following information pertains to the positive peak detector and is applicable to troubleshooting the negative peak detector The positive peak detector consists of an input amplifier A3U204 and A3Q210 followed by detector diodes A3CR203 and A3CR204 and hold capacitor A3C217 Output amplifier A3Q206 Q211 and Q212 buffers the hold capacitor Both the input and output amplifiers have a gain of one Each amplifier has local feedback On the output amplifier the emitter of Q212 connects to the gate of Q206 On the input amplifier the feedback goes through Q209 and Q208 back to the base of U204D Global feedback occurs from the output amplifier through R223 back to the input amplifier U204D The peak detector resets through Q207 1 Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center frequency weeny ss eta VIDES ces a 300 MHz SPIN see bo eee ae ea 500 MHz Resolition
488. tele twos Soler wee eed ite Dac a dS 85680 60093 A5 IF A4 LOG AMP CAL OSC 707 J9 s j R826 R445 J J5 J8 J8 J10 J5 REVIS ION REVISION CONNEC CONNECTOR is J7 J11 4 R544 J4 JS J3 555 sille Figure 2 8 IF Amplitude Adjustment Locations Note The 15 dB reference attenuator adjustment is preset at the factory and need not be done if the entire A5 IF assembly is replaced Procedure 1 Press to turn the spectrum analyzer off Remove the spectrum analyzer cover and place the spectrum analyzer in the service position as illustrated in Figure 2 7 2 Disconnect W29 violet coax cable from A5J3 Connect the test cable between A5J3 and the 50 Q output of the HP 3335A Press to turn the spectrum analyzer on Adjustment Procedures 2 27 4 IF Amplitude Adjustments 3 Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center 2 RA eR 10 7 MHz Spal anna Md dra tq ent 200kHz 60 dBm PAU CMU QUOTE Ro 0 dB iau s ues perdete hi RE Pru dB DIV Resolution D andwIdll dae 300 kHz VdeoDandwldil 22502064200 uve a tee tata dA baa arbe 100 Hz On the spectrum analyzer press MKR CAL and IF ADJ ON OFF so OFF is
489. tely ten times If the LED fails to blink correctly troubleshoot the digital section of the A2 controller assembly and wait 5 seconds Press SOFT KEY 4 The results should be sent to the printer Move the probe cable to A2J201 press SQFT KEY 1 and wait 5 seconds Press SQFT KEY 4 The results will be sent to the printer If a failure is indicated in any of these tests the fault lies on the A2 controller assembly To obtain more information a Press the down arrow key one less time than the test number For example press it twice for the third test on the list b Press SOFT KEY 3 then SOFT KEY 4 and when the printout is complete SOFT KEY 6 If no failures were indicated in testing the A2 controller move the probe cable to A17J4 Press SOFT KEY 1 and wait 5 seconds Press SOFT KEY 4 The results will be sent to the printer If no failure is indicated in the printout check the high voltage supplies as described in High Voltage Supplies in this chapter Blank Display 1 If the LED above the front panel LINE switch is lit most of the A6 power supply is functioning properly Carefully check the voltages on the front panel PROBE POWER jack Be careful to avoid shorting the pins together See Figure 13 3 Check that the fan is operating If the PROBE POWER voltages are correct and the fan is turning the A6 power supply is probably working properly If the rear panel CRT 110
490. test and adjustment module 1 3 HP 85629B Test and Adjustment Module 2 9 HP 85623 options information 1 2 HP IB dual bus operation 3 8 HP IB address frequency response adjustment software 3 7 HP IB verification frequency response adjustment software 3 8 HP sales and service offices 1 16 IF adjustment automatic 9 10 IF amplifier 7 44 IF amplitude adjustments 2 26 IF assembly 7 49 IF assembly troubleshooting 9 9 9 21 IF bandpass adjustment 2 21 IF filter 4 8 kHz and 10 7 MHz problems 9 18 IF filter troubleshooting 10 7 MHz 9 17 IF filter troubleshooting 4 8 kHz 9 17 IF filter troubleshooting 4 8 kHz and 10 7 MHz 9 18 IF gain uncertainty performance test failures 9 12 IF LOG check 7 14 IF parameters adjusted 9 10 IF section 7 48 IF section general troubleshooting 9 l IF signature problems 9 26 IF signature troubleshooting 9 22 input attenuator 7 44 12 8 removal and replacement 4 32 input switch problems 9 19 instrument variations 1 2 intensity adjustments 2 18 intensity problems 10 10 13 10 interface check 7 14 interface section 7 49 interface strobe troubleshooting 8 30 internal assemblies access to 4 2 isolation amplifier problems 9 20 J jumper write protect enable 7 6 K keyboard problems 8 7 10 16 kick start 13 14 L LC filter adjustments 2 22 limiter problems 9 20 linear amplifier troubleshooting 9 14 linear fidelity adjustment 2 32 line fuse blowing 13 1
491. the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press PRESET SPAN ZERO SPAN FREQUENCY and 1 2 Press and IF AD OFF Disconnect W29 coax 7 from A5J3 and 27 coax 3 from 5 5 Inject 5 dBm 10 7 MHz signal into ASJ3 Monitor the output of A5J5 with another spectrum analyzer QN A WW Simultaneously decrease the signal generator output and HP 85623 spectrum analyzer reference level in 10 dB steps down to a 50 dBm reference level 7 At each step the signal displayed on the other spectrum analyzer should be close to 10 dBm More subtle IF gain problems might require smaller signal generator and reference level steps 8 Reconnect W29 to A5J3 and W27 coax 3 5 5 IF Section 9 31 Cal Oscillator P O A4 Assembly The cal oscillator on the A4 assembly supplies the stimulus signal for automatic IF adjustments Normally the oscillator operates only during retrace for a few milliseconds to adjust part of the IF All IF parameters are to be readjusted about every 5 minutes With continuous IF adjust ON a group of IF parameters are adjusted during each retrace period non disruptive If continuous IF adjust is OFF the most recent IF calibration data is used The IF parameters adjusted include step gains log amplifier gain and offset bandwidth centering 3 dB bandwidth bandwidth amplitude and crystal filter symmetry The cal oscillator provides three types of output signals all 35 dBm
492. the current through A4R801 The output of A4U804B is a straight negative going ramp Capacitor A4C802 and resistor A4R802 integrate the output of A4U804A which starts a negative ramp A4U804C at the beginning of the sweep The ramp from A4U804B is added to the current in A4R802 via AAU803B Integrating this ramp results in the parabolic output waveform AM FM Demodulation Audio Amplifier and Speaker Refer to function blocks 5 and of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic sheet 4 of 4 Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information If the audio circuits are not functioning use the following procedure to isolate the problem 1 Set an AM signal generator controls as follows 100 MHz M PTT 6 dBm DV DOF aen odore MRR Ate hh at abo 80 AM Modulatiomirequency Pee eee ee 400 Hz 2 Set the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer controls as follows Center TeQuUCHCY iod su Ego aug axi egeo pert o oie IOO MHz SPAM d 5 bie En Ext Ur d ues 0 Hz Si ccv 50ms Reletenee level d iode stu eei wad ore hU Ue dei tanus tedio REA 0dBm Resolution bandwidth med ook ret prm der ens 10 kHz Scale opi bb es LINEAR 9 38 IF Section Adjust the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer reference level and center frequency to display the 400
493. the oscillator should measure between 15 Vdc and 19 Vdc If the voltage is out of this range perform the sampling oscillator adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures 7 Vary the voltage to tune the sampling oscillator to 296 MHz 8 Use an active probe spectrum analyzer combination to measure the 300 MHz LO signal at the following test point 15 402 7 dBm 1 1 20 Synthesizer Section 9 If the signal is not measured near the indicated power troubleshoot the offset lock loop buffer function block AM of AI5 RF schematic sheet 3 of 4 Table 11 6 Sampling Oscillator PLL Divide Numbers sampling Oscillator Frequency Frequendy MHz MHz 285 000 286 364 287 500 288 462 288 888 290 000 290 909 291 666 292 500 293 478 294 444 295 000 296 000 296 471 297 000 297 222 Center Reference Reference Divide Frequency Chain MHz Presaler Postscaler 10 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 4 5 2 6 6 5 5 5 ON To set the sampling oscillator to a desired frequency set span FREQ to the value listed in the table 10 Measure the 296 MHz loop feedback signal at the following test point 15 400 2 dBm 11 If the feedback signal is not near the indicated power measure the signals at the following test points on the feedback path Refer to function blocks AD AG and AH of 15 RF schematic 15 200 15 201 15 202 4 dBm 9 dBm 5 5 dBm 12 Measure the 4 MHz
494. the spectrum analyzer front panel keys to enter the conversion loss values recorded for the frequency Adjustment Procedures 2 59 15 External Mixer Amplitude Adjustment Non Option 327 16 YIG Tuned Filter Mixer RYTHM Adjustment Assembly Adjusted Al4 frequency control assembly Related Performance Tests Image Multiple and Out of Band Responses Second Harmonic Distortion Frequency Response Description The slope and offset of the AIO RYTHM tuning voltage are set by DACs on the frequency control assembly The offset DAC value is optimized at a low frequency and the slope DAC value is optimized at a high frequency Automated Procedure Available The YIG Tuned Filter Mixer adjustment is included in the automated HP 85623 Front End Cal adjustment which is described in Chapter 3 Frequency Response Adjustment Software BNC CABLE WR ZED FREQUENC SPECTRUM ner Pa SWEEPER STANDARD EX ANALYZER ADAPTER ADAPTER B rp E APC 3 5 CABLE cL Al4 FREP CONTROL 15 RF sk121 Figure 2 25 RYTHM Adjustment Setup Equipment Synthesized Sweeper 4 EU 8340 Adapters Type iN nb tOodADC 9 D s tee dones uo Geen Me 1250 1744 Type APC 3 5 4D TOCADO gt Doe S e Hee e bor ht CUP SA 5061 5311 Cables APCoSS 9I nb 96 HD Spp bei 8120 4921 2 60 Adjustment Procedures 16 YIG
495. the spectrum analyzer set to linear Scale Fidelity Performance Test Failure of this performance test indicates a possible problem with the A4 assembly m If the Linear 5 dB div or 10 dB div scales are out of specification the fault is most likely on the log amplifier assembly P O AA If only the 1 dB div or 2 dB div scales are out of specification the fault is most likely on the A3 interface assembly 9 12 IF Section Resolution Bandwidths Performance Tests Most resolution bandwidth problems are a result of A5 IF assembly failures The resolution bandwidths are adjusted in the following sequence using 300 kHz as the reference 1 MHz 2 MHz 100 kHz 30 kHz 10 kHz 3 kHz 1 kHz 300 Hz 100 Hz 30 Hz 10 Hz 3 Hz and 1 Hz The 3 Hz and 1 Hz bandwidths are not available with Option 103 If the IF adjustment routine encountered an error the previously adjusted resolution bandwidths should be working properly and default DAC values are used for the remaining resolution bandwidth settings If the IF bandpass adjustments and the automatic IF adjustments fail to bring the resolution bandwidths within specification troubleshoot the A5 IF assembly Log Amplifier P O A4 Assembly The log amplifier on the A4 assembly performs several functions It provides log and linear paths converting the 10 7 MHz IF signal to video In addition it also provides offset circuitry AM FM demodulator circuitry a frequency counter output and down c
496. the spectrum analyzer under test are queried Refer to Adjust Menu in this chapter for more details on running the adjustments Verifying the HP IB To see which test equipment responds on HP IB press Verify Bus This check only verifies that there 1s a response at the address listed it cannot tell that a particular piece of equipment is at a particular address This is useful for verifying HP IB connections without entering the Adjust Menu Querying the Spectrum Analyzer Serial Number The frequency response adjustment program automatically queries the spectrum analyzer serial and model number on three occasions at program initiation when loading the CONDITIONS file and when entering the Adjust Menu To query the analyzer serial and model numbers at any other time press Query DUT 5 multiple spectrum analyzers you do not have to reload the CONDITIONS file or restart the program Exiting Frequency Response Adjustment Press Exit Program to exit the frequency response adjustment program Dual Bus Operation The frequency response adjustment program may be used on dual HP IB systems such as the microwave test set In these systems all the test equipment is connected to HP IB at select code 7 and the device under test for example the spectrum analyzer is connected to HP IB at select code 8 3 8 Frequency Response Adjustment Software To run this program in a dual bus configuration enter equipment addresses as descri
497. this chapter Trigger Refer to function block D of the Al6 fast ADC assembly schematic diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information When the Al fast ADC is triggered the current static RAM address is latched into trigger address latches U27 and U28 block G and the post trigger counter U19 U20 U21 U22 and U47 begins counting Samples continue to be written to consecutive addresses in RAM U32 until the post trigger counter reaches its terminal count The CPU on the A2 controller assembly monitors the HSWP line and starts a software timer when HSWP goes high after being triggered The software timer is set to slightly longer than the post trigger counter will be counting so at the end of the time out the post trigger counter has already reached its terminal count At the end of this time out the CPU on the A2 controller assembly takes the fast ADC out of write mode and reads latches U27 and 028 to determine the static RAM address of the sample that was taken when the trigger occurred The CPU then writes the trigger address read at U27 U28 to the fast ADC static RAM address counter 15 bit circular address counter If pre trigger or post trigger delay is being used the CPU adds or subtracts appropriately and writes the adjusted trigger address to the static RAM counter The CPU then begins reading the fast ADC data starting from the trigger or offset trigger address The tr
498. this chapter for additional information Setting HP IB Addresses The last seven lines of the Conditions Menu are for selecting the HP IB addresses of test equipment used for the Operation Verification program It is not necessary to use all the test equipment listed Some model numbers listed are alternates Table 3 1 lists the test equipment required and alternates Entering zero as the test equipment address results in that model number being unavailable in the program NA is displayed in the address field To minimize possible confusion later enter a zero for the address of each piece of test equipment that is not available Enter the address for each piece of test equipment that is available including the spectrum analyzer under test Addresses must contain the select code of the bus to which the equipment is connected followed by the equipment address on that bus For example if the HP 8902 is at address 14 on a bus with a select code of 7 enter an address of 714 If the HP 8902A were on a bus with a select code of 12 you should enter an address of 1214 A question mark next to an HP IB address indicates the address has not been checked to verify a response An asterisk next to an HP IB address indicates the address was checked and that an instrument responds at that address If there is neither an asterisk nor a question mark next to an address the address has been checked and no response was detected Storing and Loadin
499. tic Diagram sheet 1 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The Flatness Compensation Control consists of a buffer amp U909C and two identical voltage to current converters U909B and U909D The thermistor RT901 in the buffer amp provides temperature compensation for the PIN diodes in the gain stages and the SAW filters The gain of the Flatness Compensation Amplifiers is driven to a minimum by the REDIR line going low during Automatic IF Adjustment Control Latches Refer to function block on 15 RF Section Schematic Diagram sheet 1 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The control latches control the PIN Switch Drivers illustrated in Function Block I 1 Connect the positive lead of a DVM to A15J901 pin 15 HEXTMIX Connect the negative lead to A15J901 pin 6 The measured signal controls the switching between internal and external IF signals 12 18 RF Section 2 On the HP 85623 press and EXTERNAL MIXER The voltage on the DVM should measure approximately 5 Vdc TTL high 3 On the HP 85623 press and INTERNAL MIXER The voltage on the DVM should measure approximately 0 Vdc TTL low 4 Connect the positive lead of a DVM to 15 901 pin 13 LSID The signal measured turns on the SIG ID oscillator 5 On the HP 85623 press SIG ID ON if present SGL_SWP 6 Subsequent pushes of should cause the signal measured on the DVM to toggle betwee
500. time 600 The pul ses should be present during the sweep but absent during retrace Set the detector mode to NORMAL Check that A3U509 pin 9 has pulses every 130 us and U509 pin 7 has pulses every 667 ps although pulse widths may be changing ADC Interface Section 8 25 ADC ASM Refer to function block F of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information 1 Press PRESET on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows SDa in Boo alee oe te 0 Hz 60 Detector Mode ep f SAMPLE 2 Check that HSTART SRC U504 pin 4 goes TTL high causing HHOLD U506 pin 16 to go high 15 ps later 3 Check that HSTART ADC 0506 pin 15 goes TTL high 19 ps after HSTART SRC goes high 4 HHOLD should stay TTL high for approximately 18 us and HSTART ADC should stay high for approximately 31 ps 5 Check that LCMPLT U504 pin 15 goes TTL low 12 after HSTART ADC goes high 12 bits at 1 ps per bit LCMPLT indicates that the successive approximation state machine SASM has completed the ADC conversion 6 Check that LDONE 10506 19 goes TTL low approximately 2 after LCMPLT goes low ADC Refer to function block A of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The successive approximation state machine
501. ting 7 17 3 Use the up and down step keys to scroll through any other error messages which might exist making note of each error code Error Message Elimination When an error message is displayed always perform the following procedure 1 Press and SAVE STATE 2 Store the current state in a convenient STATE register It may be necessary to set SAVELOCK to OFF 3 Press CAL and REA 4 j Pr ess and REC SIGN LO amp IF Wait for the sequence to finish 2 L 6 5 Recall the previously stored STATE 6 If an error message is still displayed refer to the list of error messages below for an explanation of the error messages System Analyzer Programming Errors 100 to 150 Refer to the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer User s Guide for information on programming the spectrum analyzer 100 101 106 107 108 109 110 112 1 2 114 115 LEG 117 118 NO PWRON NO STATE ABORTED HELLO TIME OUT CtrlFail NOT CTRL ARGMTS FREQ NO TIME NO AMPL NO UNITS NOP NUM NOP EP NOP UPDN Power on state is invalid default state is loaded Press SAVE PWR ON STATE to clear error message State to be RECALLed not valid or not SAVEd Current operation is aborted HP IB parser reset No HP IB listener is present Analyzer timed out when acting as controller Analyzer unable to take control of the bus Analyzer is not system controller Comma
502. tion The input switch switches between log and linear modes In addition it contains a 20 dB attenuator which is used only in digital resolution bandwidth settings CR207 CR208 and CR209 form the input switch CR205 and CR206 switch in R234 when in linear mode to maintain a constant impedance at J3 CR210 CR211 CR212 and CR221 switch the 20 dB attenuator in and out LO Switch Refer to function block F of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 2 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The LO switch switches the limiter input between the 10 7 MHz path or the 10 6952 MHz VCXO path Synchronous Detector A wide dynamic range linear detector is realized by the limiter block G the isolation amplifier block H the LO amplifier block D and the detector mixer block J The combination of these circuits form what is commonly known as a synchronous detector The input signal is split between two paths One path flows through the isolation amplifier and the other path flows through the limiter and LO amplifier The path flowing through the limiter generates the LO for the detector mixer block The path through the isolation amplifier drives the RF port To troubleshoot this group of circuits set the RBW to 300 kHz Inject 10 7 MHz at 6 dbm into J3 Probe the gate of A4Q404 or A4Q405 with a scope Look for a 0 to 3 V square wave Decrease the input power from i 6 dBm to 84 dBm in 10 dB steps The s
503. tion is shown in block V of the block diagram as a series switch that allows the video signal to pass only when it is closed The actual switch U109B CR118 shunts the video to ground video signal is passed only when the switch is open The control circuitry for this switch is described under Triggering or Video Gating Problems in this chapter The rear panel EXT GATE TRIG INPUT provides the connection for triggering in the Gated Video mode The gate output signal is available at the rear panel BLKG GATE OUTPUT connector Positive or negative edge mode or level mode can be selected from the front panel 1 Press PRESET and set the spectrum analyzer controls to the following settings Center dudes ed Eds 225 MHz DD taeda ideae devis eer iuba ace 550 MHz dude e IN SERERE E eee Uncoupled MAN 2 Press CAL and IF ADJ 0 3 Step the Video BW from 3 MHz to 10 kHz At each step the peak to peak deviation of the noise should decrease 4 Step the Video BW down to 1 Hz At each step the amplitude of the LO feedthrough should decrease ADC Interface Section 8 17 5 Refer to Table 8 7 and check for correct latched levels for the selected video bandwidth setting 6 If the output of latch A3U102 is not correct trigger an oscilloscope on LLOG STB U102 pin 9 and monitor U102 pin 1 and other latch inputs while changing the video bandwidth 7 If the inputs are
504. tive TTL High Oficillator Swept Sampler IF Negative Negative TTL Low Sampler IF F M Main YTO Positive Positive TTL High Coils Swept Sampler IF Negative Negative TTL Low Sampler IF 11 24 Synthesizer Section Troubleshooting an Unlocked YTO PLL l On the spectrum analyzer press CAL MORE i 0 If the YTO PLL is unlocked error code 301 should be displayed Place the spectrum analyzer in ZERO SPAN Figure 11 7 illustrates the simplified YTO PLL Move the jumper 14J23 to connect pins 2 and 3 TEST position Refer to Figure 11 1 for the location of 414 23 Error code 301 should no longer be displayed The YTO PLL feedback path is now open and the YTO error voltage is forced to zero F 2 FREQ DIAGNOSE and LO FREQ The displayed LO FREQ is the desired YTO frequency calculated Record the calculated frequency of the YTO below YTO Frequency calculated MHz Measure the YTO frequency at the front panel First LO OUTPUT jack and record below YTO Frequency measured MAIN COIL TUNING A11 YTO 9 TO 17 dBm HP NV v A7 LO MAIN COIL TUNING DAC T J17 2 MAIN COIL COARSE DAC a 7 t MAIN COIL V FINE DAC U207 i i I ee a 0 AT MEUS DIST AMP 3 E BLE AT5A2J1 5 neces es 15 ASSEMBLY SAMPLER 4101 LO DRIVE di J501
505. to 899 These error codes are reserved for option modules such as the HP 85629 test and adjustment module and the HP 85620A mass memory module Refer to the option module manual for a listing of error Messages 7 40 General Troubleshooting User Generated Errors 900 to 999 These error codes indicate user generated errors 900 TG UNLVL Tracking generator output is unleveled 90 TGFrqLmt Tracking generator output unleveled because START FREQ is set below tracking generator frequency limit 300 kHz 902 BAD NORM The state of the stored trace does not match the current state of the spectrum analyzer 903 A DLMT Unnormalized trace A is off screen with trace math or normalization on 904 B gt DLMT Calibration trace trace B is off screen with trace math or normalization on 905 EXT REF Unable to lock cal oscillator when set to external frequency reference Check that the external 10 MHz reference is within tolerance 906 OVENCOLD The oven controlled crystal oscillator OCXO oven is cold 907 DO IF CAL Unit is still performing IF calibrations or is in need of IF calibrations which were not yet done due to an OVENCOLD condition since an OVENCOLD error is indicative of a bandwidth 1 kHz not getting calibrated 908 BW gt gt SPCG Channel bandwidth is too wide compared to the channel spacing for a meaningful adjacent channel power computation 909 SPAN lt ACP The frequency span is too small to obtain a valid adjacent
506. to the instrument Remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly as described in Procedure 1 Spectrum Analyzer Cover Fold out the 2 A3 4 and 5 assemblies as described in Procedure 5 2 A3 4 and A5 Assemblies Removal steps 2 through 6 Disconnect ATA1W1 from A3J602 Place the spectrum analyzer top side up on the work bench 5 Connect the spectrum analyzer line power cord to provide proper grounding while 10 discharging the AGAIWS post accelerator cable Make sure that the spectrum analyzer line power switch is in the off position Connect a high voltage probe 1000 1 such as the HP 34111A to a voltmeter with a 10 megohm input Connect the clip lead of the probe ground to the chassis of the spectrum analyzer Slip the tip of the high voltage probe under the rubber shroud of the A6A1W3 post accelerator cable to obtain a reading on the voltmeter See Figure 4 2 Keep the high voltage probe on the post accelerator connector until the voltage has dropped to a voltmeter reading of less than 5 mV less than 5 V at the connector This normally takes about 30 seconds Disconnect the line power cord from the spectrum analyzer Warning To avoid possible electrical shock in the next step use a screwdriver having a 11 12 13 14 conductive metal shank and tip with an insulated handle Connect one end of a wire clip lead to a small screwdriver having a conductive shan
507. tooth at TP204 to a squarewave to drive the DC DC converter control circuitry The frequency of the sawtooth is determined by the resistance at pin 7 of U203 and the capacitance at pin 8 of U203 DC DC Converter Control See function block I of A6 power supply schematic diagram in the component level information binder The DC DC converter control circuitry divides the 80 kHz squarewave from U202B and generates two complementary 40 kHz squarewaves to drive the FETs in the DC DC converter Also U202C and its associated circuitry monitor the voltage across resistors R112 through R117 in the DC DC converter When the current through the FETs in the DC DC converter exceeds 1 8 A the voltage across the resistors will cause the output of U202C to go high This sets a latch in U204 which turns off U203 Display Power Supply Section 13 17 Power Up See function block D of the A6A2 regulator schematic diagram in the component level information The power up circuitry generates the PWR UP signal which tells the microprocessor that the supplies are up and stable PWR UP will go high when the 5 Vdc supply exceeds 4 99 Vdc PWR UP will go low when this voltage drops below i 4 895 Vdc Once PWR UP is set low it will stay low for at least 50 ms before going high even if the 5 Vdc supply exceeds 4 99 Vdc before 50 ms have elapsed 13 18 Display Power Supply Section HP 8560 E Series POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY BLOCK DIAGRAM LINE CORD
508. trol cable W2 Troubleshooting Using the TAM Automatic Fault Isolation Keyboard RPG Problems Keyboard Interface RPG Interface Triggering or Video Gating Problems Preselector Peaking Control Real Time DAC Flatness Control RF Gain DACs A3 Assembly Video Circuits Log Offset Log Expand Video MUX Video Filter Video Filter Buffer Amplifier Positive Negative Peak Detectors Peak Detector Reset Rosenfell Detector ADC MUX Variable Gain Amplifier VGA Track and Hold A3 Assembly ADC Circuits ADC Control Signals ADC Start Stop Control ADC ASM ADC Ramp Counter A3 Assembly Control Circuits Analog Bus Drivers Analog Bus Timing Interface Strobe Select Al6 Assembly Fast ADC Circuits Option 007 Video Input Scaling Amplifiers and Limiter 8 Bit Flash ADC Peak Pit Detection 32 K Byte Static RAM 16 Assembly Fast ADC Control Circuits Option 007 CPU Interface and Control Registers Reference Clock Clock and Sample Rate Generator ADC Interface Section 8 1 Trigger 16 Bit Post Trigger Counter 15 Bit 32 K Circular Address Counter Video Trigger Comparator Table 6 1 W2 Control Cable Connections Signal A3J2 pins 472 pins A5J2 pins A14J2 pins 41522 pins DO 15 1 50 D GND D1 D2 D3 D4 D GND D5 D6 D7 A0 D GND A A2 A3 4 D GND 5 6 7 D GND LRF STB LFC STB LIF_STB CAL OSC TUNE LLOG STB VCMON D GND RT PULSE HSCAN D GND RESERVED OFL ERR R T DAC3 Indicates sign
509. trum analyzer 8560 F Series Spectrum Analyzer User s Guide Tells you how to make measurements with your spectrum analyzer Tels you how to install the spectrum analyzer Tells you how to program your spectrum analyzer HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Quick Reference Guide m 5 an abbreviated version of the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer User s Guide m Provides you with a listing of all remote programming commands HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Provides schematics and parts lists for the instrument vi Contents 1 General Information Serial Numbers and Repair Information 2 2 1 1 Instrument Variations pie d SL ru wx ue Me Ee 1 2 HP 85629B Test and Module ee ie Ge es 1 3 Service Kit ue ph ounce a a ee SEE 1 4 Electrostatic Discharge Code Ae BB 1 4 Reducing Potential for ESD panis 1 5 Static Safe 1 6 Returning Instruments for Service 2 0 848 1 6 Services Tae clue MOeg ce Se 1 6 Oreinak 2 24 6 24684040 deme 1 6 Od der Packaome 1 7 Recommended Test Equipment 1 9 Sales and Service Offices 2 6 SSS EEE 2 9 1 16 2 Adjustment Procedures Introduction C 2 Safety jue
510. trument should therefore be performed only by a skilled person who knows the hazards involved Where maintenance can be performed without power applied the power should be removed When any repair is completed be sure that all safety features are intact and functioning and that all necessary parts are connected to their grounds Assembly Level Text To locate troubleshooting information for an individual assembly refer to Table 7 Block Diagrams Instrument level block diagrams are located at the end of this chapter Power levels and voltages shown on block diagrams are provided as a troubleshooting aid only They should not be used for making instrument adjustments General Troubleshooting 7 1 Assembly Test Points The spectrum analyzer board assemblies contain four types of test points post pad extended component lead and test jack Figure 7 l illustrates each type of test point as seen on both block diagrams and circuit boards The name of the test point will be etched into the circuit board next to the test point for example TP2 In some instances the test point will be identified on the board by its number only Pad Each pad test point uses a square pad and a round pad etched into the board assembly The square pad is the point being measured The round pad supplies a grounding point for the test probe Test Jack The test jack is a collection of test points located on a 16 pin jack There are approximately 20 tes
511. ts and LO adjustments are iade with the most recent IF parameter variables used as the starting point B If FULL IF is selected possible IF adjustments are made with the most recent IF parameter variables used as the starting point FULL IF ADJ is located in the CAL menu If ADJ CURR IF STATE is selected All amplitude data and some resolution bandwidths are adjusted The bandwidths adjusted are a function of the currently selected resolution bandwidth setting m Between sweeps IF ADJ must be set to ON When IF ADJ is OFF an A is displayed along the left side of the graticule If a FULL IF ADJ sequence cannot proceed beyond the amplitude portion check the output of the cal oscillator on the A4 assembly as follows 1 Disconnect cable W52 coax 9 from A5J4 Connect cable W52 to the input of a second spectrum analyzer 2 Set the second spectrum analyzer center frequency to 10 7 MHz the reference level to 30 dBm 3 On the spectrum analyzer under test press FULL IF ADJ and observe the display of the second spectrum analyzer IF Section 9 9 4 If a 35 dBm signal does not appear the cal oscillator is probably at fault Parameters Adjusted The following IF parameters are adjusted in the sequence listed 1 Amplitude A D E Video Offsets analog using log amplifier video offset DAC and digital applying stored constant to all readings 1 Linear Scale Offset 2 Log Scale Offset
512. ts in all areas Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing these assemblies Failure to follow this precaution can represent a shock hazard which may result in personal injury The voltage potential at AGA1W3 is 9 kV If the cable must be disconnected always disconnect it at the CRT with caution Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument See procedure 2 A1 Front Frame Al6 CRT in Chapter 4 Assembly Replacement m Do not discharge the CRT second anode directly to ground with the A6A1 high voltage cable connected This can damage the Al7 CRT driver assembly Always discharge through a high resistance such as a high voltage probe Always use an isolation transformer when troubleshooting either the A6 power supply or the A6A1 HV module When using an isolation transformer connect a jumper between A6TP101 and A6TP301 This connects the circuit common to earth ground Remove this jumper when the isolation transformer is not used Display Power Supply Section 13 1 FRONT PANEL LED 5V 1 A1W1DS1 Na 5 FLA LINE LINE SW TCH MODULE WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING THE POWER SUPPLY USE AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER AND CONNECT 572 5 AGTP101T A6TP30 15V am 2 GND ME PROBE POWER POWER SUPPLY INDICATOR LEDS 42 wi ICONTROLLER 25 9942494429944 Ph V
513. ttenuator Al3 Second Converter Al4 Frequency Control Assembly LODA Drive Control Latch for Band Switch Driver YTF Driver Circuit Al5 RF Assembly Confirming a Faulty Third Converter Confirming Third Converter Output Third Converter Flatness Compensation Control Control Latches SIG ID Oscillator Option 008 10 MHz Reference Caution All of the RF assemblies are extremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge ESD Forfurther information regarding electrostatic cautions refer to Electrostatic Discharge in Chapter 1 General Information RF Section 12 1 Caution Use of an active probe such as an HP 850244 with another spectrum analyzer is recommended for troubleshooting the RF circuitry If an HP 1120A Actve Probe is being used with a spectrum analyzer such as the HP 8566A B HP 8569A B and the HP 8562A B having dc coupled inputs either set the active probe for an ac coupled output or use a dc blocking capacitor HP 11240B between the active probe and the spectrum analyzer input Failure to do this can result in damage to the analyzer or to the probe Troubleshooting Using the TAM Refer to Chapter 7 General Troubleshooting for information on enabling the TAM for use with the HP 85623 Spectrum Analyzer When using Automatic Fault Isolation the TAM indicates suspected circuits that need to be manually checked Use Table 12 1 to locate the manual procedure Table 12 2 lists assembly test connectors associated with e
514. tu pee eee ee eae aes 0 Hz SWEEP WING ha 5s Detector ModS NORMAL 2 Check LPOS RST and LNEG_RST as described in Peak Detector Reset 3 Check A3U423 pin 4 for two low going 3 3 ps pulses 40 ps apart occurring every 130 ps 4 Check that HROSENFELL A3U610 pin 6 has two pulses spaced approximately 40 ps apart and then a third pulse 60 ps from the second pulse Each pulse should be approximately 10 ps wide and low going 5 Monitor HROSENFELL with an oscilloscope while reducing the video bandwidth from 1 MHz to 1 kHz 6 As the video bandwidth is decreased to 1 kHz the HROSENFELL line should increasingly show a low logic level With a video bandwidth of 1 kHz a nearly flat line should be displayed on the CRT 7 Set the sweep time to 50 ms Externally trigger the oscilloscope using the spectrum analyzer rear panel BLKG GATE OUTPUT 8 Check that HPOS HLDNG A3U416 pin 4 is mostly high with a 1 MHz video bandwidth and mostly low with a 1 kHz video bandwidth 9 Check that LNEG HLDNG U408A pin 13 is mostly high with a 1 MHz video bandwidth and mostly low with a 1 kHz video bandwidth ADC MUX Refer to function block AA of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information The ADC MUX switches various inputs into the video path for conversion by the ADC The SCAN RAMP input is used during sw
515. turn the spectrum analyzer on After the automatic power on adjustment sequence is complete press to ensure that the frequency reference is set to internal Adjustment Procedures 2 49 11 10 MHz Reference Adjustment OCXO Non Option 103 b Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered on continuously for at least 24 hours to ensure that the A21 OCXO temperature and frequency stabilize T Allow the 24 hour warmup for the OCXO before continuing When the 10 MHz reference is set to 10 MHz EXT the OCXO 15 not operating or warmed up Note c Connect the frequency standard to the frequency counter rear panel TIMEBASE IN OUT connector d Connect a BNC cable between the spectrum analyzer rear panel 10 MHz REF IN OUT connector and INPUT A on the frequency counter 2 Set the frequency counter controls as follows L6 HOB OOE o uae Vito olo eo aoo anis ol hak oso d d Dui Do FREQ A Input A X JU oie RSE A OOS E OFF OFF DC coupled SUEDE PER OFF 1 input impedance EA ON 100 kHz filter A Pc ees Biase a es TSG OFF INTEX T switch tear panel eo tcu ead GIS nt Sa eed EXT 3 Select a 1 second gate time on the HP 5334A B frequency counter by pressing GATE 1 TIME 4 To offset the displayed frequency by 10 0 MHz press
516. ue with medium and high resolution displays The Frequency Response Adjustment program requires at least 1 MB of free memory The computer can have either single or dual HP IB ports Refer to Dual Bus Operation under Frequency Response Adjustment Software for information on using the program with dual HP IB ports 3 2 Frequency Response Adjustment Software Test Equipment Table 3 1 summarizes the equipment required to run the Frequency Response Adjustment procedure The adjustment can use various model numbers of a particular equipment type Information about selecting the equipment model number you want to use is provided in Setting HP IB Addresses in this chapter under Frequency Response Adjustment Software Note The validity of the Frequency Response Adjustment depends in part on required test equipment measurement accuracy Verify proper calibration of test equipment before adjusting the analyzer with the software Warmup Time Test Equipment Warmup Allow sufficient warmup time for test equipment Refer to their individual operating and service manuals for warmup specifications Spectrum Analyzer Warmup Warm the spectrum analyzer up for at least fifteen minutes before performing the first adjustment Table 3 1 Required Test Equipment Summary Type of Equipment HP Model Number Controller HP 9000 model 216 HP 9816 or HP 9000 model 236 HP 9836 or HP 9000 model 310 Synthesized sweeper 10 MHz to 13 2 G
517. uires 500 kilobytes of free memory after the operating system is loaded Loading the software m Connect an HP IB cable from the controller HP IB port to the HP IB port on the HP 85623 Turn the HP 85623 power on Note The WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 Controller board should be set to the WR ENA position Moving this jumper requires removal of the instrument cover m Insert the disk into a convenient flexible disk drive 7 10 General Troubleshooting m Use the MSI Mass Storage Is command to make the flexible disk drive the mass storage device For example you would type MSI 700 1 if the flexible disk was located at 700 1 m Type LOAD TAM IFSW 1 and press or EXECUTE The program will run immediately after it 1 loaded HP IB addresses The program queries the spectrum analyzer for its ID string and serial number The program assumes the spectrum analyzer HP IB address is 718 If it 1s something other than 718 use the up down arrow keys on the computer to place the pointer next to Spectrum Analyzer polling address and press CHANGE ENTRY When entering an HP IB address also include the select code For example if the analyzer were at address 23 on an HP IB interface at select code 14 you would enter 1423 as the polling address Data files and system mass storage files The TAM I F SW program creates a data file for each HP 85623 it is used with This data file contains the original ID string and serial number o
518. uitry is working properly Perform the Display Adjustment in Chapter 2 Adjustment Procedures Note that A17R34 COARSE FOCUS has the greatest effect on focus Adjustment A17R93 ASTIG and A17R92 DDD have a lesser effect and A17R21 Z FOCUS A17R26 X FOCUS and front panel adjustment press DISPLAY MORE 1 OF 2 FOCUS and turn knob have very little effect on focus If the focus of some areas of the screen are worse than normal continue with step 11 If no part of the screen can be brought to sharp focus continue with step 6 CRTs have some normal focus variation across their face Turn off the analyzer and place in the service position Connect the ground lead of a high voltage probe HP 34111A to the chassis and use it with a DVM to measure A17J7 10 The nominal A17J7 10 voltage is 1600 Vdc but the CRT will function if this voltage is within 200 V of 1600 Vdc Adjusting A17R34 COARSE FOCUS should vary A17J7 10 voltage by 150 V If these voltages are correct suspect the CRT Check the A6A1 high voltage module cathode supply output at 17 16 using a high voltage probe If the cathode voltage is 2450 V 1250 V check the focus grid level shifter If the cathode voltage is not correct check the 1 high voltage module and its connections Connect an oscilloscope probe to 17 9 This signal corrects the focus for the X position of the CRT beam and for intensity level
519. ult is fed to the tune line of the 100 MHz VCXO 24 Check that the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 is less than 0 Vdc Refer to function block P of 15 schematic 25 Press EAR PANEL and 10 MHz INT and remove the divided down 100 MHz input to the detector by shorting R572 26 Check that the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 is greater than 13 Vdc 27 If the loop is locked the voltage on A15J502 pin 3 should be between and 6 Vdc 28 If the front panel CAL OUTPUT amplitude is out of specification and cannot be brought within specification by adjusting A15R561 CAL AMPTD check the calibrator AGC amplifier with the following steps Refer to function block W of 15 RF schematic Note The 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal comes from the tripled 100 MHz which is passed through a leveling loop The 300 MHz signal passes through a low pass filter for reducing higher harmonics These harmonics can fool the detector The 300 MHz signal passes through a variable attenuator controlled by PIN diode CR503 which is controlled by the feedback loop Diode CR504 is the detector diode the same type as CR505 Diode CR504 provides temperature compensation between the reference voltage and the detected RF voltage a Measure the level of 300 MHz at 15 TP505 with an active probe spectrum analyzer combination If the signal is less than 2 dBm repeat the first 27 steps of this procedure b If the signal at this point is correct place a short across the PIN
520. um analyzer All six assemblies are attached to the right side frame of the spectrum analyzer with hinges and fold out of the spectrum analyzer allowing access to all major assemblies See Figure 4 1 remove the spectrum analyzer cover assembly refer to procedure 1 m To access the A2 A3 4 and 5 assemblies refer to procedure 5 To access the 14 and 15 assemblies refer to procedure 9 m To remove the Al AI7 assembly refer to procedure 10 4 2 Assembly Replacement Cable Color Code Coaxial cables and wires will be identified in the procedures by reference designation or name followed by a color code The code is identical to the resistor color code The first number indicates the base color with second and third numbers indicating any colored stripes For example 23 coax 93 indicates a white cable with an orange stripe Table 4 1 Required Tools Description HP Part Number 5 16 inch open end wrench 8720 0015 3 mm hex Allen wrench 8710 1366 4 mm hex Allen wrench 8710 1164 No 4 hex Allen wrench 5020 0288 No 6 hex Allen wrench 5020 0289 7 mm nut driver 8710 1217 3 8 inch nut driver 8720 0005 7 16 inch nut driver 8720 0006 9 16 inch nut driver drilled out end covered 8720 0008 with heatshrink tubing small No 1 pozidrive screwdriver 8710 0899 Large No 2 pozidrive screwdriver 8710 0900 T 8 TORX screwdriver 8710 1614 T 10 TORX screwdriver 8710 1623 15 TORX screwdriver 8710 1622 Long nos
521. ure Note The YIG tuned filter mixer slope and offset adjustment must be correct before the high band part of the frequency response adjustment can be done 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 17 Do not connect the HP 8482A power sensor to the HP 11667B power splitter Zero and calibrate the HP 8902A HP 8482A combination in log mode power levels read out in dBm and connect the power sensor through an adapter to the power splitter Place the WR PROT WR ENA jumper on the A2 controller assembly in the WR ENA position The jumper is on the edge of the A2 board assembly and can be moved without folding the board down Press on the HP 85623 and set the controls as follows IEOU 5556 aturesit eee aoa iut Exe I0 MHz nC P 0 Hz Resolution bandwidth 424 244 4435 OR Eb EC MERE 300 kHz sd bito ue IHE adt p dpa d 2 dB Press INSTR preset the HP 8340A B and set the controls as follows CCW TIeQUency MHz uses VEN ves v ada eda EE Radon AdBm LVL ADJ and use the knob to set the value to 0 Press STORE CE CAL DATA then FLATNESS The current value of the RF Gain DAC should be displayed in the active function area Enter the appropriate power sensor calibration factor into the HP 8902A
522. use the following procedure This procedure tests the analyzer response over HP IB and the keyboard RPG interrupt request signal Enter and run the following BASIC program 10 OUTPUT718 IP SP 1 MHz 20 WAIT 2 Wait2 seconds 30 OUTPUT 718 AT 70 DB 40 WAIT 2 Wait2 seconds 50 OUTPUT 718 AT 30 DB 60 WAIT 2 Wait2 seconds 70 OUTPUT 718 AT 10 DB 80 END 2 When the program runs three or four clicks should be heard This is the A9 input attenuator changing attenuation value 3 If the display shows the analyzer to be in RMT and the ATTEN value displayed on the CRT changed according to the program the A2 controller assembly is working properly Refer to Chapter 8 ADC Interface Section 4 If there was no response over HP IB the A2 controller is probably defective Be sure to also check the A19 HP IB assembly and A19W1 5 If there was an improper response for example the displayed ATTEN value changed but no clicks were heard the A2 controller is probably working properly 6 Attach a logic probe to A2U2 pin 2 Look for pulses while pressing a key and rotating the knob RPG This is the interrupt request signal for the keyboard and RPG If the interrupt request signal is always low troubleshoot the A2 controller assembly 8 If the interrupt request signal is always high the fault is on either the A3 interface or 1 1 keyboard assembly 10 16 Controller Section HP 8560 E Series 20 O
523. ut to phase frequency detector Check A3 ADC MUX function block Check Al4 frequency control assembly Check A14J301 10 MHz REF input Check 15 RF assembly Check current source U307 Check FM loop sense Check YTF gain and offset DACs Check level at amplifier Input Check levels into mixer U400 Check loop references Check main coil tune DAC Check main coil coarse and fine DACs 1 1 4 Synthesizer Section Manual Procedure to Perform Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section steps 12 33 Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section steps 9 11 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 9 12 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 13 17 Third LO Driver Amplifier steps 1 6 Unlocked Reference PLL steps d 13 Unlocked Reference PLL steps 12 and 13 Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section steps 1 2 Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section steps 12 18 Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section steps 5 8 Confirming a Faulty Synthesizer Section steps 18 25 First LO Span Problems All Spans steps 14 21 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 27 34 YTF Driver Circuit steps 10 23 Third LO Driver Amplifier steps 1 6 Unlocked Offset PLL steps 3 13 Unlocked Offset PLL steps 1 and 2 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 45 49 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 41 44 Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Table 11 2 Automatic Fault Isolation References continued Suspected Circuit Indicated Manual Procedure to Perform b
524. vel amanda vadit ceed oa B Rau dog dct n og eS 30 dBm Center Bequeficy usine GPS SINN EE EE BRUT E med PI em its 10 7 MHz select each of the fixed tuned frequencies Verify at each frequency that the signal amplitude measures 35 dBm If the frequency is incorrect do the following a Verify that the reference divider output A4U811 pin 9 is 100 kHz If it is not verify that the 10 MHz reference is present at A4U811 pin 1 b Verify that the frequency found on the output of the divider A4U808 pin 15 matches the output of the reference divider Matching frequencies indicate the oscillator loop is locked If the loop is not locked troubleshoot the divider oscillator or phase detector c Verify that the frequency found at the divider input A4U808 pin 3 matches the CW frequency chosen in step a Matching frequencies indicate a properly working oscillator If the frequency is different troubleshoot the divider d Repeat step c for all the CW frequencies provided by the test select each of the sweep widths these sweeps are centered about 10 7 MHZ Reduce the span of the other spectrum analyzer to check that the cal oscillator is actually sweeping If the oscillator is not sweeping perform the following steps a The output of the sweep generator circuit A4U804 pin 8 of function block Z should be a series of negative going parabolas frequency and amplitude vary depending on the sweep width chosen Table 9 3 lists t
525. vision voltage placed onto one measured signal line MSL pin indicates design changes The TAM must be plugged into the revision connector first to determine which tests to use for the assembly If the revision connector has not been probed a message will appear instructing you to connect the probe to the revision connector and press TEST You can then probe the rest of the assembly connectors Note If the revision of the PC board is newer than the TAM a message will be displayed stating that the revision code for this board is not known by this module The choices presented are to use the test for the latest known revision board measure only voltages or exit In general most points will not change from one board revision to another so using the most current tests is still very useful However any failure should be verified using the manual troubleshooting procedures before doing a repair Inconsistent Results Many of the signals measured by the TAM are digitally controlled If inconsistent results are obtained or if failures appear in unrelated areas the digital control may be at fault Refer to the manual troubleshooting procedures for those assemblies to isolate those failures Erroneous Results If the TAM manual probe troubleshooting seems to be giving erroneous results its performance can be checked by placing the probe on the TAM test connector A2J11 located on the A2 controller assembly and executing the manual probe di
526. voltages for the CRT display The CRT supply will be treated as a separate supply since the remainder of A6 must be operating for the CRT supply to operate Kick starting occurs when there is a fault either on the power supply or on one of the other assemblies The power supply will try to start by generating 200 ms pulse kick every 1 5 seconds A kick starting power supply often appears to be dead but the fan will make one or two revolutions and stop every 1 5 seconds Warning power supply A6A1 high voltage assemblies contain lethal voltages with lethal currents in all areas Use extreme care when servicing these assemblies Always disconnect the power cord from the instrument before servicing these assemblies Failure to follow this precaution can present a shock hazard which may result in personal injury The voltage potential at AGA1W3 is 9 kV If the cable must be disconnected always disconnect it at the CRT with caution Failure to properly discharge A6A1W3 may result in severe electrical shock to personnel and damage to the instrument See procedure 2 A1 Front Frame Al6 CRT in Chapter 3 Assembly Replacement m Always use an isolation transformer when troubleshooting either the power supply or the A6A1 HV module When using an isolation transformer connect a jumper between A6TP 101 and A6TP301 This connects the circuit common to earth ground Remove this jumper when the isolation transformer is not
527. w CA 94041 Fullerton CA 92631 800 752 0900 415 694 2000 714 999 6700 Colorado Atlanta Annex Illinois Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 24 Inverness Place East 2124 Barrett Park Drive 545 E Algonquin Rd Englewood CO 80112 Kennesaw GA 30144 Arlington Heights IL 60005 303 649 5512 404 648 0000 847 342 2000 New Jersey Texas Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 150 Green Pond Rd 930 E Campbell Rd Rockaway NJ 07866 Richardson TX 75081 201 586 5400 214 231 6101 Headquarters France Germany Hewlett Packard S A Hewlett Packard France Hewlett Packard GmbH 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1 Avenue Du Canada Hewlett Packard Strasse 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Switzerland F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex Germany 41 22 780 8111 France 49 6172 16 O 33 1 69 82 60 60 Great Britain Hewlett Packard Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 44 734 696622 INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Australia Canada Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 3495 Deer Creek Road 31 41 Joseph Street 17500 South Service Road 2alo Alto California USA Blackburn Victoria 3130 Tram Canada Highway 34304 1316 61 3 895 2895 Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 415 857 5027 Canada 514 697 4232 China Japan Singapore china Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Japan Ltd Hewlett Packa
528. ws a prompt pressing any key on the keyboard continues the program If the message any key Q to quit follows a prompt pressing any key except Q continues the program Pressing Q terminates the current procedure at the next most logical point in the program Frequency Response Adjustment Software 3 5 Conditions Menu The first menu screen displayed is the Conditions Menu The pointer displayed along the left edge of the screen may be moved with the knob if one is present or the up f and down J arrow keys Notice that the menu has two pages Moving the pointer below the last entry on the page brings up the next page Similarly moving the pointer above the first entry on a subsequent page brings up the preceding page Test Record Header Information The information in the first six entries of this menu is for the user s information only it is not printed or saved with any data The spectrum analyzer model number and serial number are stored in the analyzer memory The program queries these numbers via HP IB and displays them If the spectrum analyzer under test does not respond at the address listed under HP IB Addresses or no address is listed a message appears where the model and serial numbers are normally displayed The program also queries the time and date in the computer If an HP 9000 Series 200 computer is used it might be necessary to reset the time and date HP 9000 Series 300 computers have built in real time c
529. xer and a tracking preselector The PIN diode switch directs the RF input to the appropriate mixer in the AIO RYTHM assembly or A8 low band mixer The tracking preselector is a YIG tuned filter It functions as a tunable bandpass filter for high band signals Coarse frequency control originates from slope and offset DACs located on the frequency control assembly Slope and offset DAC values are loaded into EEROM Fine frequency control originates from a preselector peak DAC located on the A3 interface assembly Values for the preselector peak DAC are interpolated approximately every 17 MHz based upon data taken during the frequency response flatness adjustment The preselector bandwidth varies from greater than 30 MHz at 2 75 GHz to greater than 40 MHz at 13 2 GHz The high band mixer is ac coupled It uses the first and second harmonics of the first local oscillator to cover the frequency range A PIN diode switch in A7 SLODA directs the first LO to the appropriate mixer The Al4 frequency control assembly provides PIN diode bias All YTO All is a YTO YIG tuned oscillator YIG yttrium iron garnet is a ferro magnetic material which is polished into a small sphere and precisely oriented in a magnetic field Changes in this magnetic field alter the frequency generated by the YTO Current control of the magnetic field surrounding the YIG sphere tunes the oscillator to the desired frequency AI3 Second Converter The 13 second
530. y Automatic Fault Isolation offset span accuracy phase frequency detector path to phase frequency detector sampler drive output of A7 sampler IF sampler sampler IF operation span attenuator sweep generator sweep tune multiplier the 600 MHz reference loop amplifier the YTO loop YTO FM coil driver YTO FM coil driver and main loop error voltage driver First LO Span Problems lt 2 MHz step 8 Unlocked Reference PLL steps 17 22 Unlocked Offset PLL steps 3 7 14 19 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 18 21 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 22 26 Sampler and Sampler IF steps 1 15 First LO Span Problems All Spans steps 6 13 Sweep Generator Circuit YTF Driver Circuit steps 4 9 Unlocked Reference PLL steps 23 26 Unlocked YTO PLL First LO Span Problems 2 01 MHz to 20 MHz step 6 Unlocked YTO PLL steps 35 40 Synthesizer Section 11 5 Table 11 3 TAM Tests versus Test Connectors Connector Manual Probe Troubleshooting Test Measured Signal Line 14 15 Sweep generator MS8 Span attenuator DAC 57 Span attenuator switches MS7 Sweep tune mult input amp 51 OSI Sweep tune mult input switches MS1 MS3 14 16 FAV generator FAV generator 0 5 V GHz output YTF offset DAC YTF gain and offset input YTF gain DAC YTF drive Band switch driver 14 17 Main coil coarse DAC Main coil fine DAC Main coil DACs output Main loop error volt DVR Option drive Option drive switch Option drive DAC 10 V refere
531. y outside the range of the YTO 2 95 to 6 8107 GHz Suspect a digital hardware problem such as a bad RAM on the A2 controller assembly Contact the factory General Troubleshooting 7 25 600 MHz Reference Loop 333 333 600 UNLK This error requires troubleshooting the Al5 RF board assembly synthesizer section or the ADC circuits The 600 MHz reference oscillator PLL is unlocked If error codes 302 303 304 327 or 499 are also present suspect the 10 MHz reference the 21 OCXO or the TCXO Option 103 or the 15 RF assembly ERR 333 is set if LO3ERR is outside of its prescribed limits YTO Leveling Loop 334 334 LO AMPL This error often requires troubleshooting the Al4 frequency control assembly synthesizer section the A7 LO distribution amplifier or the ADC circuits First LO distribution amplifier is unleveled Error 334 may be displayed if the front panel LO OUTPUT is not terminated in 50 0 This error is usually accompanied by error codes 300 or 301 ERR 301 UNLK is cleared once ERR 334 has been cleared Check the output of the YTO with the jumper A14J23 in the TEST position The YTO power output should be between 9 and 413 dBm If the YTO is working properly refer to LODA Drive under Al4 Frequency Control Assembly in Chapter 12 RF Section The LODA AGC voltage is monitored by the ADC ERR 334 is set if LODA AGC is outside of its prescribed limits Refer to LODA Drive under
532. ye PEL 7 48 AS Ib Assembly 2 amp pde ck amp a CS 7 49 ADC Interiace Section we 4 4 Bee SS 7 49 ADC uu 7 49 Main ADC Dati E A3 dein CEU E 7 49 Fast ADC b ke Gis e BS Rein He ai Rs 7 49 Log Expand Video 2 6 7 49 cu xb A 4 de dA a ALES ee 2 2 7 50 Controller 7 50 EERONLE 7 50 4 e d X we 7 50 Display ASM Jae 5 7 51 Display Power Supply Section D eke ee 7 51 Power Supply gt 7 51 AT SORT Display Dive we we Wd 7 51 8 ADC Interface Section Troubleshooting Using the TAM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 4 Automatic Fault Isolation 8 4 Keyboard RPG Problems s g a 24 amp 8 7 Keyboard Interface ce 2 4 45 8 7 RPG Interface node E wie uy 8 8 Triggering or Video Problems CIE ee oie Robo 2 2 E Oa gy 8 9 Preselector Peaking Control Real Time DAC ae ee ee ee ee 8 12 Flatness Control RF Gain DACs 8 13 AJ Assembly Video Circuits 455 ee E 8 14 Log Offset Log Expand 22250222255 2555
533. ystem Analyzer Programming Errors 100 to 150 ha tet rr Ge 7 18 ADC Errors 200 to 299 7 19 LO and RF Hardware Firmware Failures 300 to 399 qoum 05 7 20 YTO Loop Errors 300 to 301 7 20 Roller PLL Errors 302 to 316 7 20 XTO Loop Errors 317 10 920 Be Wow xS aos 7 23 Roller Oscillator Errors 321 to 329 7 24 VEO Loop Enot GoL ge he 7 25 600 MHz Reference Loop 333 7 26 XIO Levehns Loop GAV Se a 7 26 Sampling Oscillator 335 7 26 lO MHz Reference 3930 are amp 7 26 Fractional N PLL 337 Oo a e 7 26 YTO Loop Settling Errors 351 to 354 7 27 Sampling Oscillator 355 50 5 E aedi Sid qoo 2 4 7 27 Span Accuracy Calibration Errors 356 to 36D 2 06 7 27 Automatic IF Errors 400 10599 7 28 System Errors 600 to 651 C xum ue Zouk urn 7 37 Digital and Checksum Errors 700 to 799 bo oe uma 4 8 1 4 02 5 41 2 7 37 EEROM Checksum Errors 700 to 704 2 7 31 Program ROM Checksum Errors 705 to 710 7 38 RAM Check Errors 711 to 77600 7 39 Microprocessor Error GIT e amp uu hog de 4 we fm 7 39 battery Problem 718 4 s ao
534. yzer press AMPLITUDE ATTEN MAN 7 0 and A click should be heard after pressing dB in step 1 unless ATTEN was previously set to 70 dB Press 1 O and Another click should be heard If no clicks were heard but the ATTEN value displayed on the CRT changed the digital control signals are not operating properly Analog Bus Drivers Refer to function block N of A3 Interface Assembly Schematic Diagram in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information l 10 11 12 Press AMPLITUDE and check that pulses occur when toggling between ATTE Press and check that pulses occur when toggling between LINEAR Press on the spectrum analyzer and set the controls as follows SDan dane 0 Hz IOC 54 single Monitor A3U401 pin 3 LRF STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the AIS RF Assembly 10 MHz NC Monitor 0401 pin 5 LFC_STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the Al4 frequency control assembly settings of 10 and 20 dB Monitor U401 pin 7 LIF STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the A5 IF assembly Press and check that pulses occur when toggling between REF LVL settings of 10 dBm and 20 dBm Monitor U401 pin 9 LLOG STB with an oscilloscope or logic probe This is the strobe for the log a
535. yzer Component Level Information Peak detection or pit negative peak detection can be enabled whenever the sample rate is less than 12 MHz sweep times greater than 50 ws Peak detection uses the maximum value of all the samples taken within each bucket between adjacent display points Pit detection uses the minimum value of all the samples taken within each bucket And sample detection uses the last sample of all the samples taken within each bucket The different detection modes are implemented by selectively clocking latch U30 depending on the state of LP Q which is generated in PAL U1 block A When LP Q is low U30 is clocked by WCLK When LP Q is high U30 is not clocked LP Q is a function of the 12M SEL SCLK 1 LSAMPLE LPEAK P LO and P HI signals See Table 8 12 If the sample rate is 12 MHz 12M SEL is high which forces LP Q low so that every sample is clocked into latch U30 and latched into RAM U32 block K If the sample rate is less than 12 MHz and the detection mode is peak pit SCLK 1 LPEAK P LO and signals control the LP Q signal In these detection modes latch U30 stores the peak or pit value of the samples taken for each bucket The 8 bit digital magnitude comparator U31 compares the input byte P with the output byte Q from latch U30 When P is greater than Q P LO is low 0 and P HI is high 1 When P is less than Q P LO is high 1 and P HI is low 0 When P is equal to Q P LO and P H
536. yzer to the following settings Center irequeleV i Soie bes dde qid 300 MHz SA inu Seite dade cepe qe Mas 0 Hz Monitor the fractional N PLL output at A145304 FRAC N TEST with a synthesized spectrum analyzer such as an HP 8568A B or HP 8566A B Refer to function block AI of Al4 frequency control schematic The signal at A14J304 FRAC N TEST should measure approximately 10 dBm at 66 7 MHz If the loop is unlocked the sampler IF frequency can also be seen A14J304 about 30 dB below the fractional N signal If a problem exists only at particular CENTER FREQ and SPAN settings determine the desired fractional N oscillator frequency by pressing CAL MORE 1 OF 2 FREQ DIAGNOSE FRAC N FREQ and setting the HP 85633 to SINGLE trigger mode If the fractional N oscillator frequency is not correct refer to Unlocked Fractional N PLL in this chapter Check sampler drive output of A7 SLODA steps 18 21 Set jumper A14J23 to the TEST position and set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings Center serere Gor ow ee e ees Ud aed 2 9 GHz Date p Led LE cee P Ed 0 Hz Disconnect cable W34 from A15U100J1 Use a power meter to measure the A7 SLODA sampler drive output at the end of W34 The power should measure greater than 9 dBm Place jumper A14J23 in the NORMAL position and reconnect W34 to A15U100J1
537. z SPAN 0 Hz RES BW 10 kHz VBW 1 kHz SWP 200 msec SK189 Figure 9 20 Failed Crystal Set Symptoms IF Section 9 37 Low Pass Filter Refer to function block AB of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level Information Connect DVM positive probe A4J9 pin 4 2 On the HP 85623 spectrum analyzer press CAL 9 Press FULL IF ADJUST Observe the DVM reading between the displayed messages IF ADJUSTSTATUS 300 kHz and IF ADJUST STATUS 3 kHz Duringthistime period the voltage should be within a 2 to 10 Vdc range 4 Observe the DVM reading while ADJUST STATUS AMPLITUDE is displayed The reading should be within the 2 to 10 Vdc range 5 If the DVM reading is outside the range in step 3 but inside the range in step 4 suspect one of the reactive components of the filter Sweep Generator Refer to function block Z of A4 Log Amplifier Schematic Diagram sheet 4 of 4 in the HP 8560 E Series Spectrum Analyzer Component Level information A properly operating sweep generator generates a series of negative going parabolas Before the sweep switches A4U802C and A4U802D turn on shorting A4C802 and A4C801 the output is at O volts These switches open to start the sweep The output of A4U804A pin 1 is 0 35 V to 10 V depending on the sweep width selected by A4U802A and A4U803A This voltage appears across A4R801 Capacitor A4C801 integrates
538. z and 3 kHz resolution bandwidth problems 9 30 10 MHz reference frequency response adjustment software 3 4 10 MHz reference adjustment OCXO 2 48 TCXO 2 51 1 MHz resolution bandwidth problems 9 29 3 300 Hz to 3 kHz resolution bandwidth problems 9 34 30 kHz resolution bandwidth problems 9 30 3 kHz and 10 kHz resolution bandwidth problems 9 30 4 4 8 kHz and 10 7 MHz IF filter troubleshooting 9 18 4 8 kHz IF filter troubleshooting 9 17 A 10 YIG tuned filter mixer RYTHM removal and replacement 4 34 All YTO removal and replacement 4 35 Al3 second converter removal and replacement 4 36 14 and 15 RF assembly removal 4 37 14 and 15 RF assembly replacement 4 38 16 fast ADC driver removal and replacement 4 40 Al7 CRT driver removal and replacement 4 40 1 2 RPG removal and replacement 4 14 A2 OCXO removal and replacement 4 56 A2 A3 A4 and A5 removal 4 15 replacement 4 16 4 cal oscillator See cal oscillator 4 linear amplifier failures 9 14 4 log amplifier troubleshooting 9 13 A5 IF assembly problems 9 21 5 IF section See IF section A6 power supply removal 4 21 replacement 4 22 7 first LO distribution amplifier removal and replacement 4 30 8 low band mixer removal and replacement 4 31 A9 input attenuator removal and replacement 4 32 abbreviations 5 2 accessories 5 7 access to internal assemblies 4 2 ADC interface check 7 14 ADC interface section 7

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Lire l`article d`Anne-Sophie Novel    Eco Style EVEN-BK10-MINI  Ciò che è TUO, proteggilo ! Defibrillatori DAE semiautomatici per  CX-2310 Manual  Paulmann Mac RD  mit uns Oldies „knattern“ durch Lückendorf  IC Software User Manual  Téléchargez l`article complet (format pdf)  取扱説明書 レンジフード  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file